Just to let you know that I found out about your book/blog from the leicarumors.com website. I will get a copy of your book soon, however just wanted to comment and tell you to keep at it and also to wish you the best of luck with it all!
Thanks for your comment — the posting on the leicarumors website was incredible, and has created a good deal of interest. I appreciate your good wishes!
Thanks for the suggestion. I will try to post some sample images when I get some time; things have been hectic lately trying to produce books and fill orders, etc. But that is a good idea, and I will work on it.
This is Brian Hsieh from Los Angeles. While I was searching for reviews and accessories of D-Lux 4, I read one of the articles introducing your book, http://leicarumors.com/2009/11/04/the-first-leica-d-lux-4-book.aspx/ and immediately decided to place an order from the Amazon, which I believe is as powerful (evil:p) a distributor/reseller as Google Ad. If you prefer, I can cancel the order and get it directly from you. This is the least I can do to show you the support of your dedication for such an amazing guidebook.
Hi, Brian — Thanks for your comment! I have mixed feelings about Amazon. They are powerful and can seem overbearing, but at the same time they are giving my book terrific exposure to potential buyers around the world, so I'm happy to sell through Amazon as well as directly. I hope you enjoy the book! — Alex
It's a shame about the switch from colour to black and white photos. If possible, a book explaining the use of something ought to exemplify its capacities. To do otherwise is like McDonalds advertising their burgers using pictures that look worse than a Big Mac.
Also, regarding your faulty toner, is it possible you've fallen victim to a counterfeiter? I've just put together a story on the subject, and they're pretty pervasive. Good luck with the refilling anyway!
Hi, Inks — Thanks for the comments. I understand your point about the black and white photos, and I would prefer to stay with color myself, but it's not economically possible unless I can get a bigger publisher interested, who can print the books in large volume. Your point about the toner is interesting; I will look for your story and try to learn more; the experience certainly has been frustrating! –Alex
Fantastic news! I thought the colour photographs would pay off. I wish you all the best. : )
A blog like this is really interesting – I mean, as an account of such a specific experience. You might easily turn it into a book in itself, to help others.
By the way – I was wondering if you'd be interested in exchanging links? I've added a link to your site on my page, and it'd be nice if you could do the same. Increased exposure and all!
Hello, Inks — I couldn't find a way to link to your blog — can you send me a message through whiteknightpress.com — then hopefully I can figure out how to set up the link. Thanks.
Well, the problem now is that we have possibly one or more foot of snow coming tonight and tomorrow, so I probably shouldn't make any promises about shipping, unfortunately. It might have been worthwhile otherwise.
I love the Photographer's Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX3 book. I had the LX3 for a while and I liked it so much and your book is incredible. I am now waiting for the LX5 to be delivered (and probably the LX5 will become the Leica D-Lux 5). I am eagerly waiting for the Photographer's Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX5 and/or D-Lux 5. Please keep up the good work. Thanks
Thanks very much for your comment! I do have an LX5 now, and it's a great camera, too. I hope to have a new book out by the end of October, if I can manage it.
Dear Alexander, I'm just about to by an LX5, should I wait for your new book to come out, or should I start using your book on LX3. I suppose the menus, etc are going to be pretty much the same.
Hello, Ivan — You should wait for the new book. Although the LX5 is very similar to the LX3 in some ways, there are fairly substantial differences in the controls, menus, and features, and the LX3 book would not really provide a satisfactory explanation of the new camera.
Thanks Alex, I might buy the PDF version for the moment which is cheaper, until the LX5 comes out. As everyone knows the original manual is pretty hard to understand.
Hey Alexander, just bought your pdf for the LX3 and so far loving it. I threw away my paper manual for the LX3 it was so incomprehensible. The only thing I am missing is I can't see you have said much about the ultra wide-angle lens for the LX3, the DMW-LW46. Its a shame because I use one with my LX3.
Anyway, if I ever did upgrade to the LX5 later, I will buy your LX5 book as soon as it was released since the lX5 manual is just as woeful as the LX3's manual and isn't even printed, just a pdf.
Hi, Damian — I'm glad you enjoyed the book. I did make a brief mention of a wide-angle lens, but I see that I didn't say much about it. I'll take your comment into account as I work on the new book; thanks for the feedback. I hope you continue to enjoy the camera!
As a new LX3 user I really enjoyed reading your new book. Would you know of any forums where a neophyte could go to in order to ask specific LX3 operational questions? Even after reading your excellent book, I'm having some difficulty understanding how to do some advanced operations.
Sure — The best place that I know of is the "Panasonic Talk" forum at dpreview.com. There are many very knowledgeable and helpful people there who can probably handle your question quite well. Go to http://forums.dpreview.com/forums/forum.asp?forum=1033.
Alex, This is good news. With quick glance at the table of contents I see all my Lumix LX5 owner's manual angst vaporize. The process of book publishing that you describe, from PDF files to print is fascinating… and fast!
Yes, the current print-on-demand technology is really amazing, and it has opened up opportunities for authors and small publishers to get their books produced and available to readers much sooner than it would happen using the traditional system. Thanks for your comments! I'll post more updates as things progress.
Can you elaborate on some of the issues you named with your files at Lightning Source, in particular image resolution and CMYK space. Very interesting blog.
A shame that you are not making the PDF available immediately (I rarely buy printed books these days). Credit card in hand, I was hoping that I would be able to buy the book in PDF format next week.
I can only assume that you don't need the cash flow – lucky fellow!
Well, I do have plans to make the PDF version available eventually. You're the first person to ask about it, and I will consider doing it in the near future. But I'm getting some work done on my web site, which needs to be set up for the ordering process. In the past, the print version has come out first, followed by the Kindle, then the PDF. I'll give this some thought and, especially, if other people express interest, I'll see if I can get the PDF version out earlier than usual. By the way, I have plenty of expenses, and I could use the money!
Thanks Alex. I thought you would have issues at too high a resolution (as opposed to low resolution). As to the image, I didn't understand what problem you faced (I took it you had not converted to CMYK in the first place). Glad you got past these issues.
Hi Alex. The following question crossed my mind: do you have to seek permission from Panasonic prior to publishing a book about their product? Or any company in general.
And a second related question. I assume your book is either neutral (descriptive) or is generally favorable to the product. What if one were to write rather unfavorably about a product?
Just received my pdf of the book and put it on my phone, plenty of reading to be done.
Just read the tips at the end some very good points which should no doubt become obvious naturally over time but glad I've learnt them now rather than "naturally" in a year.
Will be handing out links to your website when I now sell any LX5's I may call a couple of my previous customer's too.
Any recommendations of somewhere I can post my musings about the book? I wouldn't say it will be a review as such but I feel already I can speak very highly about the book as a great asset to any LX5 user.
p.s. a note to anyone reading here in doubt of purchasing. This book reads extremely well, and is far superior to the supplied manuals which seem to be cross referenced from every page which in contrast is extremely dissatisfying to read compared to this excellent guide.
The option to have the book on my phone is ideal in PDF format but I am even considering buying a paperback copy as well : )
Glad to see that your work on the D-Lux 5 books is coming along — great pics! — as I am keeping regular watch on your blog for news of its release. My D-Lux 5 has been my new best friend for exactly a month now, and I look forward to getting to know it even better in the near future with your help.
Since you have studied both cameras in depth, maybe you can settle the raging online debate going on between the LX5 & D-Lux 5 – is the output from these cameras the same? Or does the D-Lux 5 have superior output because of the "Leica Firmware"?
Alex, I bought the LX5 book as soon as I saw its availability and have been happy so far. I have a question about the LX5 camera itself. We all know the benefits of a UV, ND, or Polarizing filter. Do you know what Panasonic's thinking was regarding the necessary conversion adapter? If an adapter ring can be skrewed onto the camera…why can't a filter be put on directly? The conversion ring defeats the whole purpose of a compact camera. I just don't get it. Thanks for your thoughts.
Slow and steady (on the Leica D-Lux 5 book, that is) wins the race! I, for one, am patiently waiting and look forward to re-discovering my new camera once I finally have your book in hand, Alex.
On a side note, I am a technical writer/editor with over 18 years of experience, and as an newly-avid D-Lux 5 owner/user it would be my pleasure to help proofread the book (would still lay down my dosh for it, of course).
Hi, K2 — Thanks for offering to proofread the D-Lux 5 book. It's not quite to that stage yet, but if you'll send me an e-mail at contact@whiteknightpress.com, I can let you know the progress and make some arrangements.
Very glad to hear that the D-Lux 5 book is done, and now I anxiously await word of the print version (which hopefully I can order and have delivered direct to me in Paris). Enjoy the rest of the holiday season!
Mr. Alex White,
Having just purchased a new Leica D-lux 5 camera, as well as your copy of “The Photographer’s guide to the Leica D-lux 5” to go with it, I was excited to read, in your guide, about the Panasonic adapter (DMW-LA6) for filters, etc. that I could use with the “5”. The Leica “specialist” who took my camera order over the phone had said that it was possible to do with the D-lux 4 but not the D-lux 5. Assuming you are right, that you can, would you please send me a “how-to” via my e-mail address, (roberthaggart@mac.com).
I have replied by e-mail, as you asked. To summarize, there is no problem using this adapter with the D-Lux 5, though Leica may not officially approve it.
Hi I recently purchased your book on the LX5 to go with my camera. But I’m exchanging the camera for the DLux5 so I was wondering if I can just use the same book since they’re more or less the same camera with the same functions? What’s the difference between that and the DLux 5 book version? Thanks!
Hi — The books are very similar because the cameras are almost identical in operation, but the menus appear different and some features have different names or are otherwise different. I’m sending you an e-mail message with further information.
Hi,
Can you please tell me if your LX5 book has instructions on how to utilize RAW for somebody who has never done so. I would like to make the most out of the image quality by using RAW and I do not know the best way to start learning it. Thank you
Hi, the book discusses RAW files a good deal, but mostly in the context of explaining how the camera operates, such as what functions are or are not available when shooting in the RAW format. The book explains somewhat the advantages of using RAW, but it does not provide any details about how to edit RAW files using post-processing software. There are some good books available for that, such as Camera RAW 101 by Jon Canfield, or any current book about Photoshop or Photoshop Elements. You could go to Amazon.com and use the Search Inside the Book feature to check a few places in the LX5 book for RAW discussions, and see if they are what you are looking for.
Hi — Copy the PDF file to the iTunes library on your computer. Then, after you sync the computer with the iPad, the PDF file should show up on the virtual “shelf” in your iBooks library. Look for it in the PDF category, not the Books category.
Hi — I wish it would be available sooner, but it’s scheduled to be converted in early March. That was the soonest I could get the Kindle conversion company that I use to schedule the conversion. I don’t want to convert it myself, because it can be tricky to get the formatting correct. Of course, you can get the PDF version and read it on a Kindle, though it won’t be quite the same as getting the actual Kindle version.
I am trying to find a local copy of the Photographer’s Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX5 book (without ordering it online). I am about to leave on a trip today (Monday 1/10/11), so if you know of anyone in the Los Angeles area that sells the book, please write me back quick! or call me (818)353-8650. Thanks!
Hi — As of now the White Knight Press books are available only online. There are some stores that may order one for a customer, but that would take a while, so I’m afraid there are no options for getting a copy quickly from a store.
I have not heard of an extension cable or anything similar for the electronic viewfinder, though maybe someone else knows of one. I’ll try to dig around a little and see if I can find out anything.
I found a thread at dpreview.com that discussed this issue, though no one apparently knew of a cable; the persons discussing it said the connector is not HDMI. Here is a link to that thread.
Hi — No, I have been doing books on cameras that don’t already have a book written about them, or at least no book of the same general type. There already is a popular book out about the GF1, so I’m not planning a book on that camera.
Yes, I have the D-Lux 5 book scheduled to be converted to that format, though it will take a while because the people who do the conversions for me have a backlog. As of now, I’m hoping that book will be available for the iPad sometime in March.
Just received the downloaded PDF for the Leica D-Lux 5, turned off the sound to the football games and focused on the manual all day , only occasionally looking up at the screen for special plays. Must say that your book is vastly superior to the official manual and the accompanying CD. It’s thorough, clearly written, and has excellent illustrations. I really feel ready now to use my camera to it’s fullest capabilities. Thanks for an excellent product.
I am looking at purchasing this book for my new LX5, and have a kindle.Ggiven the black and white format of the kindle would your guide be better in the book form? I have viewed a preview of the guide and most of its contents seem to be text, so I was thinking that the kindle format would be useful.
Hi – Actually, the book has more than 150 photographs, though many of them are photos of the camera and its controls, which don’t really need to be in color. There are enough color photos that I, personally, much prefer the book in color. You can purchase the PDF version in color, which I believe you can load on your Kindle, though of course you could only see the photos in black and white, but you could use the PDF on your computer or any other device that can read PDFs, such as some phones, etc. I haven’t heard any complaints about the Kindle version, though, so people seem to be relatively satisfied with it.
Hi — I have to confess that I have never used a DMC-G1K, so I can’t be sure, but I don’t think my book would be all that helpful — it might be of use to some extent in describing the menus or some features, but probably not of great use. Looking on amazon.com, I saw some books on cameras like the GF-1 and GH-1 and the G-2, that might possibly be of more use to you.
Hello — If you want a printed copy, the best way to buy the book probably is from Amazon.co.uk. If you want to buy a downloaded version in PDF format, you can purchase that from this web site; please see the main page of this site, and click on the copy of the book’s cover for further information.
Hello — If you want a printed copy, the best way to buy the book probably is from Amazon.co.uk. If you want to buy a downloaded version in PDF format, you can purchase that from this web site; please see the main page of this site, and click on the copy of the book’s cover for further information.
One of our bookstores here in the Philippines can order the book directly from your publisher or distributor but I would need the ISBN. Thanks and looking forward to reading your book. I have a new Lumix LX5 and I’m very eager to learn and use all of the camera’s features. The user’s manual that comes with it is quite complicated to understand.
Hello — The ISBN is 978-0-9649875-9-3. I should point out that bookstores ordinarily won’t order the book, because it is mostly aimed at online sales, and is not able to be sold to bookstores at the wholesale discount they expect. It may work out, but if not, the book can be ordered from Amazon.com, or from any of the other Amazon sites around the world; another good source is an online seller called camerabooks.com, which handles a lot of international orders.
I ordered your book thru Amazon.com and looking forward to receiving it by mid-April. Our local bookstore can also source it but it will take them a month and price is higher 🙂
I wanted you to know that I just bought your book on the Panasonic LX5 and it’s really well written. I must have read the manual that came with the camera 5 times and still couldn’t figure out some of the settings.
Thanks again for a wonderful, well written, easy to understand book with lots of ideas, plus examples and WHY… you set the settings certain ways. Perfect… I’m so excited that I’m taking AWESOME pictures now with some manual settings.
Thanks again
Hi Alex
I purchased your book for the D-LUX 4 last year and was very glad I did; it thoroughly explained everything in a nice clear way that was easy to understand, and it got me shooting the pictures I wanted in no time, so thank you very much for that.
Now I also have a Lumix GF1, and can you imagine my disappointment when I find you haven’t written a book on that one.
I know there are books out there on it, and I am not benefitting from the one I have, so if I say I think you could really help an amateur out by sharing your wisdom and excellent writing skills would you reconsider and write a book on it? I would gladly pre order it 🙂
Hi, Gina — That’s one of the nicest compliments I can imagine — thanks very much! I would like to write about the GF1, which I understand is a terrific camera, but it takes a lot of work over a period of months to do one of these books, and there’s only one of me, so I have to make some tough choices. Right now I’m just finishing up a book about the Canon PowerShot S95, and then I have to turn my attention to other projects. I’m sorry I couldn’t be more help to you; hopefully in the future I’ll do another book that will be of use to you. Good luck!
I think my husband would be happy if you wrote a book somewhere along the lines of stop buying cameras and just shoot already, but thats another story.
I am wondering if perhaps the book on the LX5 may be a help; its not the camera itself that I struggle with – its the menus and submenus and quick menus. I’m thinking that being Panasonic there may be some carry over from camera to camera that may provide some useful insight. Am I even in the ballpark?
Hi, Gina — I have to confess that I have never used a GF1, so I can’t be sure. My wife has a different Panasonic model, though, and she has found that my Panasonic books have some useful information about the menus of her camera. You could take a look at the book excerpt on this site, on the info page for the LX5, or you could go to the Amazon.com site and use the “Search Inside the Book” feature to try a few searches and see if the information looks useful. I would hesitate to recommend the book for a different model, because there certainly will be a lot about your camera that is not covered in the LX5 book.
Hello — That is one of the cameras I have considered for another book, but it won’t be very soon, because I have to catch up on some other projects first. I’ll make a note of your interest, though, as I consider what camera to work on next. Thanks.
I just purchased Alexander White’s “Photographer’s Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX5”. This is the first time in memory that I have read a camera guide that is written in such plain, straightforward (read: understandable) English. I will keep this book as a constant guide to enhance my use of this wonderful camera. This book greatly exceeds the users manual (on CD) that comes with the camera as a tutorial for the use of the LX5. Gary Falk, Louisville, KY
I ordered and paid for your copy of instruction on operating Lumix DMC-LX5 but up till today did not received it.
Tony Fiala
17-33925 Araki Ct.
Mission,BC, V2V 7R5 Canada
Thanks so much for this fantastic guide. I am glad that I made my decision to buy this book. And many thanks for keeping the price low for the pdf version. It helped me to make my mind setup for the purchase. Thanks again,
Syed
Hi — You just unscrew the retaining ring. It unscrews by turning it counter-clockwise. Then you screw on the lens adapter, and screw a filter or other accessory on to the other end of the adapter.
It’s the outermost plastic ring, attached to the outer part of the lens assembly. It’s the part that the lens cap gets attached to. You may have to just grasp it and twist hard to unscrew it the first time. It’s a narrow ring, and it may be hard to see that it’s a separate part, but, unless it’s missing, it should unscrew with no problem.
My book just arrived yesterday via B&N special order. This book is everything it claims to be. The printout of Canon’s pdf, hole-punched, in a binder on my computer books shelf does not suffice. Canon’s manual is a reference book. White’s book serves as a proper tutorial which I can read at my leisure and also bring along with the camera if I want. For me it is worth the extra money to have the actual book. I keep the pdf of Canon’s manual on my computer for searching fast. White’s book is very readable and clear. And the layout and photos are very pleasing, which is important to me. By perusing the book, in just 24 hours I have learned so much. I did not understand all the differences in SD cards – see pp 19-24. That in itself justified for me getting this book. I already purchased and have been using the eye-fi card from reading a preview of the book. I am looking forward to learning all about the menus and setting up the shortcuts to my favorite menus. I highly recommend this book for anyone who wants to get the most out of the fantastic S95 camera.
I’ve found your book tremendously helpful for photography newbies like me who are learning to master a sophisticated compact camera. In the past month, I’ve frequently referred to your book for instruction since I started exploring my new camera. I must tell you, I’m no longer clueless and I’m very confident in using all the features I’ve tried. Yesterday marked another milestone in my journey of learning: I mastered the MF function and started taking sharp, close-up pictures and accomplished the effects I desired. Thank you!
I’ve just received the Raynox macro lens today and other accessories (the LA6, LWA, LND and LPD) are on their way. I’m looking forward to experimenting with these tools and bringing new effects to my photos.
I have a few questions related to LX5 in the following areas, which I’m not able to find direct answers through my research. I’m hoping that with your expertise, I can solve these puzzles.
1. Built-in flash
a. I understand the technicalities of ‘front (1st) ‘ and ‘rear (2nd) ‘ curtain sync, but what’s the difference between ‘2nd curtain sync’ and ‘slow sync’? Do they all fire at the end of exposure?
b. I sometimes have trouble firing the built-in flash when it’s set at ‘slow sync’, but with ‘2nd curtain sync’ it is a sure hit. I couldn’t figure out why.
2. Telephoto lens
Could you recommend a reliable, compatible model for LX5, if I prefer not to use a telescope as suggested in your book?
3. Off-camera flash
a. Sync chord
Is this the only way to maintain TTL metering with an off-camera flash?
I plan to purchase a Metz 58 AF-2 flash. How can I determine which sync chord is compatible? Could you recommend a model? I’ve heard Olympus sync chords work for Panasonic flash as well, but I just don’t know for sure which one to buy.
b. Do you think I can use the Metz 58 AF-2 on a sync chord as a master to trigger a slave? If so, is there any way I can set up the slave flash with TTL metering?
c. Can I use the built-in flash as a master to trigger a slave?
d. Could you describe the steps you go through to determine the right exposure and to manually adjust a flash (pg. 239)?
I thank you in advance for your help. I’d highly recommend your book to every one who wants to make the best use of his/her LX5.
Hello, YY — I’ll give you a few answers, but I can’t claim to be an expert on all aspects of flash and these other topics. I’ll tell you my opinions, and I’ve also referred your questions to a photographer who is more expert on flash topics, and I’ll let you know through another comment here if I get more information from him.
As for Slow Sync and 1st or 2nd Curtain, you can use both settings together. That is, you can use Slow Sync at the same time as either 1st or 2nd Curtain, so the flash will fire at the beginning or end of the exposure depending on which of those settings you’re using.
I don’t know what could cause your problem with the flash firing in Slow Sync mode.
I have never used an add-on telephoto lens, other than the telescope. I have heard that others have used them, but I have no experience in that area.
I have no experience in using a sync cord with the LX5; the camera does not have a terminal for a cord. Maybe there is some sort of adapter that would let you use a cord, but I have never looked into that area.
You can use the LX5’s built-in flash to trigger an optical slave that is attached to a slave flash. When I do that, I just use trial and error to determine the correct exposure. I also usually shoot in the RAW format, so I have a good deal of leeway to adjust the exposure with my software after shooting.
If I get any further information back from the flash expert, I’ll let you know. Thanks for your comments.
Mr. White: i have just purhased your book on the Lumix LX5—need urgent help via email if you can.
I cannot figure out how to attach the lens ring–have no clue how to open it..
and have no idea how to attach the shoulder strap with those two small clips on it.
can you bail me out quickly??
sure hope so.
you make a point of saying how important it is to attach the lens cap but there is no instruction anywhere on how to open that circular clip and run it throught the loops.
many thanks
bill liss
atlanta, georgia wjliss@gmail.com
Hi — I have replied by e-mail. Briefly, the point to remember here is that the lens cap string is not to be opened or separated — it is a continuous loop that is looped through both the lens cap and the camera, and then the cap is threaded back through the open part of the loop, so it is fastened to the camera.
Hi Alex,
Saw your comments on the EVF. Though to write and ask if you know anyone making available a “macro light” that would fit over the LX5’s horse-shoe slot? Seems that a Olympus-accessories provider has such a gizmo ready, so though I ask. My limited understanding is that LX5’s physical horse-shoe slot is of a different dimension/size then Olympus’s. Not only that, the internal circuit pins that provides the power are also different.
Thanks in advance.
Hello, Eddie — No, I haven’t heard anything about a ring flash or ring light made specifically for the LX5 or that would be a particularly good fit. The Metz 15 MS-1 Ringlight is one that might work, though probably only in manual mode. I feel certain there are other options out there that could work, but I have not kept up with all developments in this area.
Hi,
I don’t own a credit card(only maestro card, paypal). Is there a way to buy your book as a pdf version? I would like to get the one about panasonic lx-5
Yes, you should be able to purchase it with PayPal from the ordering page on this site. Here is a link to the PDF ordering page. Let me know if you have any problems. Thanks.
hi,
nope, i still get the window, where paypal is asking me to add a credit card like American express, mastercard, visa. Like i said, i don’t own and I don’t need one. Any ideas how to buy this book:)
Okay, if you would like to purchase a PDF copy of the book, just send me a payment of $9.95 via PayPal to my user ID, which is aswhite@erols.com. If that doesn’t work, you can send a check or money order to White Knight Press, 9704 Old Club Trace, Henrico, VA 23238. Please mention in the message or on the check or money order which book it is for, and that you want the PDF. I can then send you a link to download the book. Thanks.
I bought your D-Lux 4 book when I had a D-Lux 4 and bought your D-Lux 5 when I upgraded my camera to a D-Lux 5 and both books are extremely helpful.
I decided to purchase the pdf copy of your book so I’ll have it on my iPad2. I live in the UK and the Paypal amount includes a 20% additional charge for VAT. What’s going on?? Since White Knight Press doesn’t trade in the UK it is not VAT registered and therefore cannot pay any VAT collected to the UK Inland Revenue. Why is it trying to charge me an additional 20%?!
The PDF versions of the book are sold through a company called FastSpring, which handles all of the download sales transactions, including determining whether the VAT needs to be charged. In other words, the seller is FastSpring, not White Knight press.
It appears that FastSpring has a European office located in the UK so it must be VAT registered. A UK VAT registered company charging me in dollars is quite unusual.
Thanks, Alex. Will consider that — though from initial quick look, seems a bit expensive (+/- USD400 from quick online search). 🙂 If you do spot a less pricy option, please do sound out. Cheers and keep writing great manuals, if you have time perhaps to expand links to matters regarding the LX-3/5/7(?) etc would be great too! 🙂
Hello — The book is available now for download through this site as a PDF and it is available through the various Amazon sites in the U.S. and elsewhere as a paperback book. Just go to an Amazon site and search for “S95” under Books and you will find it. If these options don’t work for you, let me know and I can point out other options for purchasing the book. Thanks.
I bought the Photographer’s Guide to Panasonic Lumix 5 and I read it cover to cover. It has been very useful and I really learned a lot from it. Now I know my camera’s features better and can take better photos. I have used it as a reference book (never went back to the complicated manual) and go back to it from time to time. Thank you for coming out with a book like this. By the way, Amazon shipped it very fast here in Manila. I expected it to arrive within 10 to 14 days, but it took them only 8 days. This is very much appreciated.
Hi — Thanks for letting me know — it’s great to hear that Amazon was able to get the book to you quickly. I’m glad you found the book useful, and I really appreciate your comments!
Hi — Thanks for asking, but I have been concentrating on cameras that are more in the same class as the D-Lux 4 and D-Lux 5. Maybe someday I’ll move up to the likes of the X1 and M9, but for now I’m staying with the more mid-range cameras.
Hi, just ordered your LX5 pdf book through your website, using PayPal. I was a bit put off that I was required to enter so much personal information before I could order. For a pdf download, paid with PayPal, you Do Not Need my phone number and address. With the concerns about internet security and selling of personal information databases, I do not care to put out any more information than necessary when filling out internet forms.
Your manual looks good and I look forward to using it. I hope you will consider the order form information policy on your site. Thank you.
Hi — I understand what you’re saying; I have had a few other customers mention this issue. Here is the situation: The sales of PDF downloads are handled by a company called FastSpring — they provide the ordering system, payment processing, and downloads. Their ordering system uses a process called “risk analysis,” which analyzes all purchases by PayPal or credit cards using data such as physical address of purchaser, location of internet connection, and credit card billing address, which they compare to see if there is a likelihood of fraud, before approving the transaction. I agree that it can seem intrusive, but I certainly am not equipped to process payments myself, so I need to rely on a company like FastSpring. They have done an excellent job so far. But I will continue to evaluate and see if there is a better way to handle payments. Thanks for your comments.
Hi im trying to shoot in RAW on my LX5 and am getting some strange results, compared to the jpg versions of my photos the raw photos look bland and washed out, i use the supplied Silkypix software and also CS5 Camera Raw but cannot get a good result. I tend to shoot using M mode but have experimented alot but the jpgs always look better even though they get shapened up alot, the color is what im missing in my RAW photos
Is there a different software that maybe is a bit easier to use, or does your book cover RAW shooting / settings / software in detail so i can learn more.
P.s im coming from a nikon d80 so i dont know if im expecting too much but the LX5 should match it from what ive read
Hi, Chris — I’m not sure I can be of much help on this question. I use Adobe Photoshop CS5 with Adobe Camera Raw, and the results have always looked okay to me. There are so many adjustments you can make in both ACR and Photoshop, such as Levels, Curves, Saturation, Hue, etc. I am by no means an expert on Photoshop or other software. It might be that Photoshop Elements would be easier to get good results with; some people really like Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, which I have installed on my computer but haven’t used all that much. Maybe someone else who reads this will have comments. Also, this would be a good question to ask at the Panasonic Talk forum on http://www.dpreview.com. I have to say that my book does not go into all that much detail on RAW files and how to process them. There are whole books on using RAW; you might want to look into some of them at Amazon.com or elsewhere.
I have just bought a used (and slightly damaged, but still apparently fully functional) D-Lux 4 and am enjoying the image quality for the most part. It came with firmware version 1.0, so I upgraded to 2.2. With your book, do you have any sort of addendum covering hidden functions of firmware version 2.2?
I am getting fairly short battery life, so will be ordering a couple of new batteries.
Love the macro capability, the colour veracity and the exposure choices in snapshot mode.
Hi — The book on the D-Lux 4 was written before the firmware upgrade was issued, and it does not cover the new functions. However, the book on the Panasonic Lumix LX3 was written later, and it does cover the firmware upgrade for that camera, which is almost identical to the D-Lux 4 in its operations. Also, Leica issued an addendum to its manual that covers the new functions provided by the upgrade. If you need further information, let me know.
I have just bought a used (and slightly damaged, but still apparently fully functional) D-Lux 4 and am enjoying the image quality for the most part. It came with firmware version 1.0, so I upgraded to 2.2. With your book, do you have any sort of addendum covering hidden functions of firmware version 2.2?
I am getting fairly short battery life, so will be ordering a couple of new batteries.
Love the macro capability, the colour veracity and the exposure choices in snapshot mode.
Hi — The book on the D-Lux 4 was written before the firmware upgrade was issued, and it does not cover the new functions. However, the book on the Panasonic Lumix LX3 was written later, and it does cover the firmware upgrade for that camera, which is almost identical to the D-Lux 4 in its operations. Also, Leica issued an addendum to its manual that covers the new functions provided by the upgrade. If you need further information, let me know.
Hi! Alex, your “Photographer’s Guide to the Leica D-Lux 5” is simple and easy to understand for a newcomer in photography like me. An excellent and great manual to have in exploiting all the features of the camera! Just can’t leave home without either – camera and manual!
I am trying to download pictures onto my computer but do not have the disc I need – at least I think thats what their saying . Can I download the format from a canon site. Will this book give me the know how to download the pics without the disc? Thanks for helping.
HI — It’s hard to tell what the problem is without some more information. You should be able to download the pictures okay without any special software, unless they were taken in the RAW format. In that case, you would need either the software that comes with the camera or some other program that can read the RAW files, such as Adobe Photoshop Elements, Apple Aperture, or some other one. My book on the PowerShot S95 camera does not really spend much time on this sort of issue, so it probably would not be much help. If you want to give some details about any error message you are getting, I could try to help. You also might try posting your question in the Canon Talk forum at dpreview.com.
Kudos to White Knight Press – my order for the pdf version of the Canon S95 guide came very quickly, and I was given the opportunity to pay in Swiss francs (with the correct exchange rate). I have loaded the file to my iPad, and at first glance, this seems exactly what I need. My S95 took great photos during my recent vacation in Barcelona in “auto” mode but now I want to learn much more about using the camera.
Alex,
Let me start by thanking you for putting together such a wonderful book for the D-Lux 5 that Leica should seriously consider including in their bundle.
I am shooting RAW with my new little Leica and have purchased it with very specific goals. Underwater photography is my hobby and processing RAW files helps preserve valuable information that helps during post processing. Took the camera on 8 dives last weekend and visited the wreck of the Duane and various patches of Molasses Reef in Key Largo. Camera is housed in a Nauticam LX5 case and it works beautifully. I am doing some tests and am considering this particular configuration as a point and shoot system for students to consider when picking up underwater photography and expanding their scuba specialty training credentials.
I am using Mac and noticed that Lightroom 3.4 and Photoshop CS5 is not able to read Leica D-Lux 5 RAW files. It returns an error deeming files as of an unrecognized format. I have been able to process D-Lux5 RAW files using Aperture 3 which is Apple’s competition with Adobe Lightroom.
Have you or other D-Lux5 users ran into this issue? I would think that Leica would be promoting a software bundle with their product if it’s fully compatible.
I sent Leica an email and got a reply asking if my version of Lightroom was up to date, which it is. Also visited Adobe’s web page and spotted a list of cameras supported by them and unfortunately, D-Lux5 is not yet listed. http://www.adobe.com/products/photoshop/extend.html
Thank you for looking into this and letting me know. It’s likely that time will resolve this as more updates are added to Lightroom and Photoshop RAW repertoires.
Ricardo
Hi, Ricardo — I just went and checked some of my D-Lux 5 .rwl files on my MacBook Pro, and they opened just fine in Adobe Bridge and Photoshop CS5. The version of Adobe Camera Raw that opens up when I open one of the files is Adobe Camera Raw version 6.4.1, and I don’t recall having any problems with these RAW files in the past. I don’t use Lightroom very much, but I just tried it and it also opened my D-Lux 5 RAW files with no problem. I suspect the problem may be with the version of Adobe Camera Raw that you have installed; I suggest checking to see if you have version 6.4.1 and if not, downloading it from the Adobe web site. I believe you can just open your software and choose Help — Check for Updates to get the latest updates. I hope this helps resolve your issue.
Alex,
Thank you for the prompt reply. I had success with Photoshop CS5; however, Lightroom is still not liking the files. Do have Lightroom updated to version 3.4.1 and for CS5, the RAW plug in 6.4.1.145
Will keep on trying to figure this out and will let you know who this goes.
Ricardo
PS : Very nice of you to take the time to get back with a fan!
Much appreciated and acknowledged. Enjoy your day.
Hi, Ricardo — I just checked back on my copy of Lightroom, and it is version 3.4.1, and using the Lightroom menu option, selecting About Lightroom, I see that it is using Adobe Camera Raw version 6.4.1. Is your copy of Lightroom definitely using the latest version of the Adobe Camera Raw plug-in? That sounds like the problem. I hope that fixes it.
Your book on the D Lux 5 is invaluable – thank you! You talk about add-on filters and lenses (p 231) and unscrewing the thin trim ring from the camera’s lens to do this. I have tried, without a lot of force I admit, to unscrew the ring but it seems pretty fixed. Any suggestions?
Thanks again for the great book
Margaret
Hello, Margaret — First of all, I would suggest that you make sure the trim ring is not already off. If it is off, you will see screw threads on the edge of the lens. If you see the smooth edge of the trim ring, then it was probably just screwed on too tightly. Others have had some problems with this process. Just grasp it very firmly and twist it counter-clockwise as you face the camera. Once it gets loose you should have no problem removing it, unless it somehow got stuck by being threaded on improperly. Good luck!
Hi
I just wanted to thank you for your book on the LX5. I’d relegated my camera to the bottom of my camera bag & rarely used it. Too fiddly to navigate ( or so I thought ) Your book is excellent & laid out in the easiest format to understand , & I have now rediscovered what a great little camera it is.
Thanks
AL
Hi — No, it’s available only through online sellers, such as Amazon.com, bn.com, camerabooks.com, and some others. You can get a complete list by searching for the book’s title at bookfinder.com.
Hi — No, it’s available only through online sellers, such as Amazon.com, bn.com, camerabooks.com, and some others. You can get a complete list by searching for the book’s title at bookfinder.com.
I simply wanted to send a small note so as to express gratitude to you for all the splendid pointers you are sharing here. My time-consuming internet lookup has now been compensated with really good tips to share with my close friends. I would tell you that most of us site visitors are undoubtedly lucky to live in a decent community with so many outstanding people with beneficial secrets. I feel very much fortunate to have discovered your entire webpages and look forward to many more awesome minutes reading here. Thanks a lot again for everything.
Yes, I am planning a guide to the S100, which I hope to have ready within the next month or so. I would recommend waiting for that one if you don’t mind waiting a few weeks.
Hi, Enjoyed your LX5 book very much. Now I just purchased a Canon PowerShot S100. I see you have a book on the S95. When can I look forward to a book on the S100. I would be very happy if it is soon!
Hi, Gary — Thanks! I will be trying to find an S100 as soon as they become available in my area, and then I hope to have the book on that camera done within a month or two — I will hope to have it done before the end of the year.
Even though I carefully chose my S95 and normally drive a DSLR, I never think that I know all I need to know about my cameras. When I found the first indications of this book on the Internet, I realised that the extracts showed it went into every conceivable option available. I bought the pdf and have used it as a tutorial to go through every available option in what I believe is still the best pocket camera available. There’s no point in having a Swiss Army Knife to just butter toast. An S95 is not just an ordinary point and shoot. This book will not make you an awesome photographer, but it will let you know the functions of an awesome camera.
I have your book on the DLUX5 and consider it a valuable resource. Please consider the Fuji X10 as well as it looks like a VERY interesting compact P&S. If you do, perhaps you can email me when you release it. I’m seriously considering the camera.
Hi — Thanks for your comment. I actually am considering doing a book on the Fuji X10, though right now I have to finish up the two other books that are under way, so it would be at least a couple of months before I could start.
Great to hear on an upcoming s100 book. Just picked mine up today and you book will be a welcome addition. Hopefully you will again do multi format as I prefer using my tablet for reference manuals. Do you have a mail list or shall we just check your site?
Hi, Tony — Yes, it will be in several formats, though some of the conversions may take a while. I don’ t have a list, so please just check the site, or you could follow the site on Twitter; the ID is cameraguides. Thanks.
Multiple Exposures with Lumix LX5.
Alex,
A few weeks ago I got the Lumix LX5 camera and your book (actually twice, in e-format and printed version!)
I just found out that this camera does “multiple exposures,” a great capability I also have on my Nikon D7000 SLR.
Unfortunatelly, looks like once in “multiple exposures mode,” I can not zoom anymore, like I do with the Nikon. I like to take a picture, zoom a bit on the subject, take the second picture, zoom again and take the 3rd picture.
Am I missing something? Is there anything special I have to do to be able to zoom the lens “between shoots?”
Thank you.
Val Tepordei
Hi, Val – I just checked with my LX5, and I found the same thing you did — evidently Panasonic decided to disable the zoom when you are in the midst of a multiple exposure. Maybe the idea is that you will likely want to line up the second and third shots to overlap with the first one at the same focal length, but I can certainly see the advantage of being able to zoom between shots. I can’t think of any way to get around the problem, other than changing your angle of view by moving the camera closer to the subject. Thanks for pointing this out.
Following retirement I’m planning on travelling a lot for the next year. All my (D)SLR gear etc now gone via E-Bay as I couldn’t contemplate carrying it all! I analysed my travel photos which showed 75% were 28mm / 50mm (35mm equivalent) orientated. After much internet camera research and a couple of weeks bedtime reading of your book I’ve elected to take the DMC LX-5 as my “best compromise” camera, based on potential photo quality, versatility and compact size….not to mention your very informative book as well! First stop Beijing in 3 weeks time. Thank you for all the effort you’ve put into an excellent LX-5 resource, both on the internet and in your book. I’ve spread the word at our photography club!
Hi Alex,
I have a PDF copy of your LX5 guide and have also downloaded the useful appendum about V 2.0 firmware. I would now like to purchase the hard copy of the LX5 guide for reasons of portability and wanted to enquire whether the V 2.0 appendum was now integrated in to the hard copy?
Great guides by the way. I shall be buying my sister the Nikon P500 book for Christmas.
Thanks in advance.
Hello, Mark — Thanks for your message; I’m glad you have found the guides useful. In answer to your question, no, I have not incorporated the additional information about the version 2.0 firmware into the hard copy of the LX5 book. I can understand that it would be helpful to do that, but, at least at the moment, I have to focus on getting new books into production. Once things settle down a bit in a month or two, I might consider revising the LX5 book, but I can’t guarantee that I will, giving the complications involved in revising a printed book.
Hi — Thanks for asking. The G12 is a great camera, but I have already contributed to a book about it as co-author with David Busch, so I can’t do one in my own series. That book is available at Amazon and in bookstores if you’re interested.
Hi,
Now I’m using Fujifilm Finepix HS10…but I don’t really understand how and when to use the Aperture and Shutter speed mode yet.I’m very keen in food photography and I want to get the very best pictures using the Aperture and Shutter speed mode or any other modes that suited the food photography.
Could you please guide me which aperture number or shutter speed to shoot best food photos?Please feel free to visit my blog for your judgement on my recent photos taken by this camera.
Hi — I took a look at your blog, and the photos look quite good already. I can give you my opinion, and maybe someone else will have thoughts. It seems to me that your goal is to have clear, sharp photos of the various dishes. I’m assuming you’re not using a tripod. If that’s true, then you need to use a fairly quick shutter speed, say, 1/30 second or faster, to avoid blur from camera shake. You also need a somewhat narrow aperture, probably f/5.6 or narrower (higher number) to keep the images sharp with adequate depth of field. You may have to boost the ISO setting somewhat to use those settings. You also might want to use any available settings to increase sharpness and possibly color saturation. I’m not familiar with the HS10, but these principles apply in general. If you use a tripod, you can use a slower shutter speed, but you still would need a relatively narrow aperture to keep the images sharp. I hope this helps.
Hi, Richard — The S100 book is in the final editing stage, and I hope to have the PDF version available for sale within a week or two. The iTunes version will take at least a few weeks more, because it has to be converted by an outside company. I’ll be posting updates on this site as the book comes out in various formats.
How would you recommend purchase of the PDF version of the book for someone that refuses to use PayPal (due to trust/reputation issues, including past experiences)?
Hi — When you click on the link to go to the purchasing page for the PDF, you will have the option of using PayPal, a credit card, a check, or a money order. These transactions are handled by a company called FastSpring, which has been very reliable in my experience, and I don’t believe you should have any problems with the transaction. If you do, please let me know and I will look for other options. Thanks.
How would you recommend purchase of the PDF version of the book for someone that refuses to use PayPal (due to trust/reputation issues, including past experiences)?
Hi — When you click on the link to go to the purchasing page for the PDF, you will have the option of using PayPal, a credit card, a check, or a money order. These transactions are handled by a company called FastSpring, which has been very reliable in my experience, and I don’t believe you should have any problems with the transaction. If you do, please let me know and I will look for other options. Thanks.
Another useful tool for the lx3, lx5 and leica dlux series is the ClearViewer which is a diopter attachment which assists shooting in bright sunlight and is effectively equivalent to using a camera with an optical viewfinder. Go to:- http://www.clearviewer.com
The inventor will also make a version to suit a different camera if requested. I have found the ClearViewer viewfinder absolutely invaluable.
Hello, Mr. Decock. The book is now listed as available through Amazon.com. It is not yet listed as “In Stock,” but you can order it there now, and they will ship it soon, probably within about one week. I believe the standard rate for shipping to Belgium is $3.99, but they also have faster shipping available. I’m providing a link to a page with Amazon’s shipping rates to Europe: http://www.amazon.com/gp/help/customer/display.html/ref=hp_navbox_596184_ways?nodeId=596194. Please let me know if you need further information. Thanks. –Alex White
Hi — The paperback version of the book is only available from Amazon. I know that you can order now from Amazon.com and it will be shipped when available, probably about a week. I’m not sure about Amazon.ca.
I’ve had my LX5 for a while and am fairly familiar with it. After reading the bits available at Amazon I may be interested in purchasing your book as a reference but am wondering if you plan on updating the book now that the V.2 firmware is available.
Hi — Yes, I have done an addendum to the LX5 book that discusses the updated firmware. The addendum is not incorporated into the book, but it is available as a separate download, at the Updates and Corrections page on this site. Here is a link to the addendum.
Hi — Nothing definite at this point. That is one camera that is being considered for the next book, but it would not come out until April at the earliest if it does become a reality.
See Fujifilm Talk Forum / dpreview.com and you will understand that there is definately a need & demand for such a book. Fujifilm has abandoned X10 users and even professionals do not agree how this camera works. Thanks for a comment, again. Pekka.
Hi there. I recently got your book…still need to read it, but will very soon. I did however rummage through it because Im looking to buy a tripod for the LX5 on Amazon tonight. I didnt see any references in the book about tripods. Do you have a preference? I’ve read online…because of the light weight of the camera, you have to be carefull buying a light tripod. Any suggestions? I saw that you had a photo of your camera on something with the camera using a telescope lens.
Hi — I haven’t yet discussed particular tripods in any of my books, partly because there are so many options and so many variables to consider, such as whether you will be traveling with it, whether you will be using it with other cameras, using it for macro shooting, video, etc. I have several tripods; my favorites are by Manfrotto, which are somewhat expensive but of excellent quality. Most recently, I purchased a Manfrotto 055XPROB, which I like a great deal; you also need to purchase a head to go with it, and there are various options depending on your preferences. I ended up getting a joystick head, 327rc2, which also is expensive, but has proved to be excellent. But I also have some very inexpensive tripods from Sunpak that work quite well. Reading the customer reviews at Amazon and at B&H Photo-Video can be very helpful. Good luck with your tripod search!
Hi Mr White! I got LX5 from Christmas. And I really wanna learn how to use the other features of the camera instead of just using Ai. So I am curious if your book would tell me how to use (step-by-step) the other features before purchasing it? I’ve been looking for a tutorial online and YouTube but so far I haven’t seen any good tutorial for the camera. Hope you could help me. Thank you!
Yes, the book is intended to give step-by-step directions for using many of the camera’s features. I can’t say that it tells you all of the steps for using every feature, but it does at least discuss them all. I think it will give you the information and guidance you need.
Thank you for taking the time reading my comment! Yes I just bought your book for my iPad and it is loading now! Can’t wait to read it! I will update you. Thanks again!
Eimille,
MD
Hi, Tony — The PDF for the S95 is available through this web site. If you go to the page for the S95 book, towards the bottom of the page there are links for purchasing the PDF through FastSpring, which is the company that handles the PDF sales. There also is a link to information about the ePub version of the book through the iTunes (iBooks) store.
Mr. White,
I recently purchased your book on the Nikon coolpix P500 in preparation of purchasing the camera but now see that the P510 is about to be released. I wonder exactly what changes were made especially on menu changes you thought might need to be improved and on the stabilization while using extreme telephoto?
It might just be too soon for you to give me an answer but I plan on an extended Alaska trip in May and want to buy the 510 on release date in March or April.
Many thanks
Richard Moore
Hello, Mr. Moore — I have read some of the news about the P510, but I don’t have any deep knowledge of the new camera; I do tentatively plan to do a book about it within the next few months, but right now I’m working on a book about another camera. I haven’t seen a P510 yet, so I don’t know what sorts of menu changes may have been made. You may want to check within the next few weeks to see if Nikon will post the user manual on its support web site. Sorry I couldn’t be of more help.
I’m about to purchase this in either PDF or Kindle… I will be reading it primarily on the ipad. Which version would you suggest? Any significant differences?
Hi — I’m not sure which book you are planning to purchase. Most of them, though not all, are available for the iPad, in the ePub format. If you go to the information page for the title you want to purchase, it should have a link to the description of the book in the iTunes store. The PDF version will work quite well on the iPad also, but the ePub version is formatted to be better adapted for the iPad. There are no differences among the various versions other than the formatting.
wondering if you are planning to write guide book on how to use fuji x pro 1 as i am planning to purchase fuji X pro 1 and i am a beginner and if you are planning the guide i would like to purchase , also interested in sony Nex series camera , it is hard to find guide book or training video on those camera , thanks
Hello, Andy — No, at present I am finishing up a book on the Fujifilm X10 camera, but then I will be moving on to work on other brands. I wish I could cover more camera models, but each book takes a lot of time, and I can only do a few of the ones I would like to.
Hi — No, I’m sorry, no plans for any Sony books in the near future. I have to finish up the book on the Fujifilm X10 and then start on another one, but no plans for a Sony camera guide at this time.
I just finished reading your excerpt. Thanks and great job. I hope you release the ePub version soon (I prefer ePub files to take notes and highlight text on the iPad).
I’ll check often your site to know about the release date.
Once again thanks a lot.
Edu
PS: My X10 ys just 3 days old and I am a beginner in photography
Thanks for your comment! I will try to get the ePub version done as soon as possible; I hope it can be done within about 4 weeks. Good luck with your X10! It is a great camera.
Thanks Alex,
I am looking forward to the Book’s release but in the meantime the Pdf version will suffice.
It would make a sound business opportunity by incentive if you had some form of discount for those who first purchase this Pdf version.
When they then purchase the Book version a discount is in place.
Hello, Mike — Yes, that is a good idea, though it could be difficult to implement, because the printed version will be available only through Amazon.com and other online retailers, and I can’t offer a discount when Amazon sells a book directly to a customer with no involvement on my part. But I will give some thought to how I could do something along these lines.
Most welcoming Alex.
I have not purchased the Pdf version as of yet, although fully intend to do so but one ‘possible’ method would be to account all those who purchase the pdf version.
If and when at a later date said person then purchases the Book, if they were to produce a sales receipt or some form of proof of purchase would it then be possible to offer a ‘part-return payment of the pdf purchase?
This is only an idea. Obviously I have no knowledge of how your good self handles sales of the pdf version.
Whatever method you may consider or try it is good enough to hear you are quite open and willing to consider said venture.
Hi, Rob — Yes, it does discuss the update to firmware version 1.03, though it does not discuss every detail of that upgrade. The main point discussed about the upgrade is the change to the functioning of the RAW button.
Excellent comparison series (although the very first image is a bit unsharp…). Assuming the series was taken under identical lighting conditions, ISO settings, shutter speed, etc., it offers a useful way of choosing your favourite settings.
Now, back to the PDF page to buy the X10 guide! Thanks Alex.
Hello, Rob — Thanks for your comments. Yes, all of the settings were constant except for the one setting that was changed for each shot. I hope you enjoy the book!
Just wanted to let you know I´m enjoying your book; I’ve already put some of your advice to good use. Knowing a tool properly increases the joy of using it (and the results will be more enjoyable).
GREAT NEWS!!! Alex White himself contacted me within minutes and rectified a computer glitch. I have recieved the download… and I gotta tell ya… it’s the best ten bucks i;ve spent in a long time! Thank you White Knight press and thank you Alex, you’ve earned a fan… customer service isn’t dead as long as Alex is on the scene. thank you, bill
I am going through agonies here. After a long search for a small portable camera that has seriously considered and designed features to satisfy serious photography, I found the X10, read the excellent review in Black and White Photographer, and read the really enthusiastic comments on the camera by Tim Clinch, a long time experienced professional photographer Now, my dear generous wife has purchased the Fuji X10 for me, as a present for my forhticoming birthday in May. But, I am not allowed the camera until 13th. of that month! and further, I’ve stumbled across your forthcoming excellent book on the X10, but it is not out yet! Is there any possibility that it will be outbefore that date? If not by then, can you give me some idea of whents being might be available?
Hi — Actually, the book is available now through this site in PDF format, and, as of today, it is listed as available for sale through Amazon.com in the US. It’s not “in stock” yet at Amazon, but it’s a print-on-demand book, and the printer will start printing and shipping paperback copies as soon as orders start coming in to Amazon. So, you can order it now and it should ship to you within about a week or possibly a bit longer. Here is a link to the book’s product page at Amazon.com.
Just checked the UK Amazon site Alex, nothing mentioned as of yet.
The X100 is there but not the X10.
I’ll keep checking and let you know if it pops up.
Hi, Jerry — Yes, those will be priced at $9.99 each. They will be sold through the iBookstore, Nook store, and Kindle store, not from my site. I’m still hoping the Kindle and Nook versions will be available by about April 26, or maybe a few days after that. The Apple version won’t be available as soon, because it goes through a longer acceptance process, at least that’s what has happened in the past. I’ll post more information as it becomes available.
After reading about this book, I decided it would really help me get more from my wonderful X10, and that it would be better to get it in paper so that I can study it more. However, I’ve found that it is not listed on Amazon.co.uk (although they do have your X100 book), and if I want to buy it from Amazon.com I have to pay a delivery premium of almost as much as the PDF cost even for the slowest delivery means (up to 35 days).
Is there any chance of pressing your provider to list it on more international Amazon sites (especially the UK)? I don’t want to buy the PDF first and then have to pay again to buy the print…
Hello — I certainly understand your concern. As for the speed of the listings on Amazon.co.uk and other non-US sites, I can’t do anything to speed it up; the book will show up there in the fairly near future, and I probably will list some copies there as a third-party seller, which can help with keeping them in stock. What I can do, though, is refund the cost of the PDF if you purchase it now and then later purchase the paperback once it starts showing up at the various Amazon sites. Just forward to contact@whiteknightpress.com the confirmation e-mail message from Amazon and ask for the refund of the PDF purchase price, and I will issue a refund. Or, if you prefer, you can purchase the hard copy from Amazon first, and then I will send you a code to let you purchase the PDF at no cost. I hope this will help.
Hi — I don’t have a D-Lux 5 anymore, so I can’t demonstrate, but there is really no difference in how it works on that camera. Sometimes the front ring on the lens is on too tight, and it may need a strong twisting action to get it loose, but there is no physical difference between the two cameras in how the lens adapter is installed.
Hi — Actually, that is one of the cameras I’m considering for the next book, but no decision has been made as yet. If I do that one, it would probably be available by June or early July.
Please do write a book on the Nikon P510. This camera is proving to be very popular with wildlife photographers due to its 1000mm equiv. 35mm lens. I am using it despite a couple of shortcomings (coming from an 35mm film/DLSR background). Nikon will sell many of these units!
Purchased printed copy from Barnes & Noble two weeks ago. Do I understand I can also obtain the iPad version at reduced or no cost? Would love it.
I have finished my first full read-thru, and find that my X10 manual NOW makes sense! In fact, since I have the printed manual and the PC version, I find they compliment each other, making available help at almost any location.
There are very few suggestions I can offer for your next edition . . . mostly with improving the Index for better use by non-insiders (as I originally found with the Encyclopaedia Britannica).
Hello, John — Thanks for the comments. Yes, if you have purchased the printed edition I will be happy to send you the electronic version for iPad at no cost. I will send the file to your e-mail address. If you don’t receive it soon, let me know.
Any chance you will be working on Lumix GX1? Enjoyed your guidebook on the LX3, looking forward to more helpful pointers if you happen to work on the GX1
Hi — No, I won’t be working on that model; I wish I had time to do books about more of the great cameras that are out there! I do plan to write about a successor to the LX5, if and when one is announced.
Hi
Your explanations are excellent and give a detailed insite to this complex camera, going way beyond the basic features in the instruction book. It wouldn’t be possible to establish the operation of the various auto settings and built in camera functions from the supplied manual. Having said that I have one problem with the cameras default settings in these auto settings e.g. the EXR and advanced programmes for. The camera seems obsessed in selecting an aperture of either f2.2, and F2.8 even when a landscape scene is being taken and with no programme shift available. I would require an aperture of at least f8/f11 to give me a reasonable depth of field for this type of work so makes these wonderful built in features useless for me. Am I misunderstanding something?
regards Tom Thacker
Hi, Tom — I don’t really have a very good response for your question, partly because it’s hard (for me, anyway) to understand exactly what’s going on with a particular situation without actually seeing the camera in action in that situation. I guess the camera’s programming may believe that a wide aperture is necessary for some reason involving contrast or dynamic range or something of that sort. And, if these are landscape scenes, with focus at infinity, depth of field should not be a big concern, I would think. Of course, if you have subjects in the foreground that need to be in focus at the same time as the background, I can see more of an issue. In my experience, a very good way to get feedback on questions like yours is to post the question at dpreview.com, in the Fujifilm Talk forum. Someone there may be aware of a technical oddity of the camera that can explain what is going on.
Hi Alex
Thanks for your reply obviously you appreciate the problem but like me can’t understand why the Z10 does this. I will try the email address you sent me see if they have any answers.
If I get any constructive response I will post it on this site in case it is useful to anyone else.
Hello Alex – I doubt I’m the first person to notice this but in the .pdf version of the X10 guide, the header on pages 82 & 84 says Guide to the Canon S100. It’s a great book; very helpful.
Hi, Randy — Thanks very much. I did have a problem with some of those headers earlier, and I thought I had fixed them all. I will fix these now! If you still have a valid download link, you should be able to get the corrected version within about an hour or so. If you don’t have that link, let me know and I get the corrected file to you.
Thanks, Alex – I probably have the link somewhere but I just thought I’d point it out. One other thing, that I didn’t see in your book or in the X10 manual; I’m pretty sure that if you want to lock focus (but not exposure) you can do this the old-fashioned way, by just partially depressing the shutter release. In other words, it isn’t necessary to press the AE/AF button.
Hi — I would be glad to try to help, but I would need some more information. Were the pictures lost from a memory card or from the computer? Were they deleted? You could try looking in the Pictures folder, if there is one, or in the Trash or Recycle Bin on the computer. If they were lost from a memory card, you could go to this link to an article about recovering the images.
Hi — No, I’m probably not going to be covering the V-Lux 40 — there are too many good cameras to write about all the ones I would like to! And no, I haven’t written any comparison.
I can try to help, but this question does not provide enough information for me to know what the problem is. If you want to state the problem in another language, I can get it translated through Google.
I got it photos. Some photos are not opend because pandora software are some photos are not open. full fill not downloading sir, any other software is there?
Yes, there are many photo-recovery programs, but I have never had to use any of them. I did a Google search and found a few that were recommended: pcinspector.de, datarescue.com, photo-recovery-software.com. Again, I have no personal experience with these programs, but they may be worth a try. I wish you good luck in recovering your images.
Hi Alex – I’ve just finished reading the book and thank you for being so thorough (even stereo and infrared!) The one thing I’m not 100% clear on–and I wish someone would do a simple table–is which of the X10’s settings affect raw files. For example, even with the X10 set raw-only, multiple DR options are available. Best, Randy
Hi, Randy — That’s a good question that is hard to answer simply, because of the complications from the way the EXR sensor in the X10 works. I am not an expert in this area, so I won’t try to offer a technical explanation. Certainly, there are some settings, such as white balance and exposure, that can be adjusted after the fact in RAW processing software. A setting such as ISO cannot be adjusted after the fact. Other settings, such as Dynamic Range, have effects that are not as easy to describe simply. The discussions on the online forums, such as dpreview.com, go into great detail in discussing the ways that the X10’s RAW files interact with the EXR sensor and with various RAW=processing software, such as Lightroom, Adobe Camera Raw, and SilkyPix. Here are links to some of those discussions: http://forums.dpreview.com/forums/read.asp?forum=1012&message=41014330http://forums.dpreview.com/forums/read.asp?forum=1012&message=40999888http://forums.dpreview.com/forums/readflat.asp?forum=1012&message=40872306&changemode=1. Again, I wish I had a simple answer or chart to offer, but I don’t believe it is possible to produce one, given the way the X10 works.
Hi, Jacob — The X10 book is available now. You can get more information at the information page for the X10 book on this site, or at Amazon.com or other online sellers.
Will you be updating the book on the p500 to include changes in the p510 camera? Or does the book on the p500 cover all of the menu items identically to the p510?
Will you be updating the book on the p500 to include changes in the p510 camera? Or does the book on the p500 cover all of the menu items identically to the p510?
Advice please. Im considering purchasing lx5. In terms of shutter speed. Can it shoot burst of images for action and sports or is it a just a point and shoot camera?
Hi — The LX5 has a Burst mode that lets it shoot limited sequences of rapid shots, and it also has a Sports scene mode, with which it tries to use a fast shutter speed. It certainly will not match a DSLR camera in terms of speed for action shots, but it is quite reasonably capable in this area. It’s really a fine all-around camera for action and other shots.
Hello — Just go to the page on this site for that book, by clicking on the book cover at the main page. Then find the link for purchasing the PDF; it is a button that says FastSpring, which is the company that handles orders for the PDF files. Here is a link to the PDF purchasing page.
Hi Alex.
I took delivery of your book regarding the Fuji X10 yesterday and I have not been able to put it down.Your wonderful steady and descriptive writing style is helping to make the intricacies of the camera so much easier to understand.
Thank you.
Trevor
Hi, Josh — I will be posting information about the release here at whiteknightpress.com. Also, I will make a note to send you a message when the book is available. Anyone else who wants to be notified can leave a message through the Contact form here, and I will send them a message when the book is released. Thanks.
I’m also interested. I bought the P510 recently with little knowledge of photography beyond the auto settings of a typical point-and-shoot. Will the differences in the P510 be substantial enough to warrant waiting rather than buying the P500 book? I’m anxious to get started and other than lens size and CMOS sensor size, wonder what the differences are between the P510 and P500.
Actually, the P510 book is available now in a PDF downloadable version, though it hasn’t been publicized yet. The P510 has a number of differences, including GPS functions, 3D shooting, rearrangements of various controls, and other changes from the P500, including a new Special Effects shooting mode.
Hello there — I too have been working with the slow-motion feature on the S100 but with similarly mixed results. I have tried the reset the camera to factory settings, though I still appear to have an issue with the focus while shooting in slow motion. It is a strange phenomena that when I have the camera in slow motion, before even shooting, a subject can be perfectly in focus, but when I start to record, the subject quickly becomes blurred and goes out of focus. Is this what you are finding as well?
Thanks for any feedback — your book looks like a good investment!
Hello, JT — I do recall having issues like that with the S100, though I have to confess I have not made any further attempts since I posted those samples on the site, and I have since sold my S100, so I can’t do any more experiments. I think the S100 is a great camera, but I suppose it’s difficult for Canon to get all of its many features such as slow-motion video and autofocus to work together in all situations. Best of luck as you continue on with it!
I have just bought the paperback version. I’m sure I read somewhere that a coloured version of the illustrations is available for downloading. Can you give me a reference, please? Many thanks.
Hello — Yes, if you purchase the black-and-white paperback edition of the X10 book, I will be happy to send you a link for downloading the full-color PDF version. I will go ahead and send that to your e-mail address. Thanks.
I am seriously contemplating buying the above camera. Please can you tell me if the printed version of the book is yet available? If not, when will it be available and where can one purchase it?
Hello — The book has gone to the printer, and I expect to receive the proof copy today. If it looks okay, it will be approved today and should start showing up for sale at Amazon.com later this week, probably by Thursday or Friday. I will be posting more information as the book becomes available through various channels.
I recently bought this camera and love it. I have a Nikon D80, but it is very heavy and then you have to lug around the extra lenses. Not so with this camera. Although it doesn’t fit in your pocket, it is lightweight and is an absolute miracle with that 42x lens. I took it to the mountains recently and had a great time with it. I would suggest buying the extra charger and battery because it seemed to discharge faster than my other Nikons, but it is a new camera for me and maybe I was just not doing something right. I did buy the car charger and extra batteries, though. Buy it and have a lot of fun. I think this will be the camera I use on a regular basis.
Hello — I can’t give a really definite answer, because I have never seen an L810 and don’t know about all of its features. I took a look at its description, and I see that it came out at about the same time as the P510 and has a strong zoom lens also, so there probably is a good deal in common between the cameras. There is a good chance that quite a few of the menu options are the same or similar. If you already have the camera, you might want to take a look at the Table of Contents for the P510 book and see if it covers many of the topics you would need for your camera.
I am seriously contemplating buying the above camera. Please can you tell me if the printed version of the book is yet available? If not, when will it be available and where can one purchase it?
Hello — The book has gone to the printer, and I expect to receive the proof copy today. If it looks okay, it will be approved today and should start showing up for sale at Amazon.com later this week, probably by Thursday or Friday. I will be posting more information as the book becomes available through various channels.
I recently bought this camera and love it. I have a Nikon D80, but it is very heavy and then you have to lug around the extra lenses. Not so with this camera. Although it doesn’t fit in your pocket, it is lightweight and is an absolute miracle with that 42x lens. I took it to the mountains recently and had a great time with it. I would suggest buying the extra charger and battery because it seemed to discharge faster than my other Nikons, but it is a new camera for me and maybe I was just not doing something right. I did buy the car charger and extra batteries, though. Buy it and have a lot of fun. I think this will be the camera I use on a regular basis.
Hello — I can’t give a really definite answer, because I have never seen an L810 and don’t know about all of its features. I took a look at its description, and I see that it came out at about the same time as the P510 and has a strong zoom lens also, so there probably is a good deal in common between the cameras. There is a good chance that quite a few of the menu options are the same or similar. If you already have the camera, you might want to take a look at the Table of Contents for the P510 book and see if it covers many of the topics you would need for your camera.
Hi, Sharon — I certainly agree! The P510 is really a great all-around camera when you want to have just one, lightweight camera with a terrifically versatile lens and set of features. I’m glad you’re enjoying it!
Hi, Sharon — I certainly agree! The P510 is really a great all-around camera when you want to have just one, lightweight camera with a terrifically versatile lens and set of features. I’m glad you’re enjoying it!
Hello,
I just purchased the P510 last month and came with the printed book. It is an amazing camera. I have a Minolta Dimage, a Lumix FZ40 and now the Nikon P510. Each camera is used for many different resons but the Nikon sure is my favorite for now. Buy with confidence.
Hello,
I just purchased the P510 last month and came with the printed book. It is an amazing camera. I have a Minolta Dimage, a Lumix FZ40 and now the Nikon P510. Each camera is used for many different resons but the Nikon sure is my favorite for now. Buy with confidence.
I can’t help but smile each and every time, I read a positive comment on the P510. I researched and researched and read up on different cameras and after several months of comparing I decided to buy the P510. I’m more than amazed with all the functions and yes I do love the telephoto. I do a lot of wildlife, travel and landscape photos and this camera is the best for the above photographic needs.
Okay — Thanks for the information. I guess when they first start selling the book they have to wait to see how long it will take for the printer to supply the book.
Hello, Pedro — No, I plan to do a book about the Panasonic Lumix LX7, which was recently announced. I would like to cover the FZ150, but there are too many cameras and only one of me!
Yes, it takes a bit longer for the book to start showing up at Amazon.co.uk, but it should be available there within the next week or so. I will post an announcement at this site when that happens.
Just a quick note to advise you that the book is now listed for sale at Amazon.co.uk. For the moment, I am selling them there through White Knight Press; within another few days or maybe a week, Amazon.co.uk should start selling copies directly.
I purchased a Nikon p510 and could not understand the Nikon manual description on how to use the gps function, nor where the data is stored, or how to retrieve it. I also wonder if the data is compatible with any gis maping software. Would appreciate your thoughts.
Hello, Bruce — I don’t know all that much about GPS, but, with the P510, you can get the mapping information with the Nikon View NX software that comes with the camera, and I would guess you can use the mapping information with other mapping software, though I have not tried any other programs. You can get the GPS coordinates from the camera by pressing the Fn button in playback mode, for an image that was recorded with the GPS functions turned on.
Hello! I have just received your book on the X-10, ordered through Barnes and Noble. I must say, it looks likes a much better read than the Fuji instruction manual, and I look forward to gaining more insights on this wonderful product.
Do you still have available a pdf of this book for purchasers of the colour paperback? Just wondering, as it would be a great addition on my iPad for travelling.
Thanks very much for your service!
In your interesting X10-book you describe the use of the Eye-fi X2 pro card.
I use this card too since the very beginning and after a lot of damaged pictures and card errors Eye-fi first changed my card into a new one and then started to spread new (inofficial) firmware versions with adapted wifi settings and behavior.
But even if the X2 pro works fine in most cases, it seems to have problems with undervoltage under some circumstances while writing to the card.
So if you really want to do a serious photo job, you should avoid the Eye-Fi-card in a X10.
I got sometimes incomplete pictures which could’nt read by the X10 afterwards and lead to the problem that you can’t view other (older) pictures that are not involved.
There you have to shot a new picture and wether to scroll backwards while using the out zoomed view or to scroll forward form the beginning.
So be careful to use the X2 pro as daily card, even if it is very handy 😉
Hi — That is a very interesting comment, and I hope it will be of use to other readers. I don’t use the Eye-Fi card all that often, so I have not encountered these issues, but it sounds like something to watch out for.
Since firmware V 5.0008 the X10 is officially listed as a compatible camera on http://support.eye.fi/cameras/fujifilm/x10 (before it was listet as not tested, later as incompatible)
Great news Alex !!! Thanks
Any chance you could e-mail me when it’s available for the Rx100?
PS bought your book for my Fuji x10 in both e-book format for my iPad & iPhone as well as the soft cover version. It has been a GREAT help and reference.
Mike Glynn
I have received both your printed and e-book versions of your Guide to the X10. My thanks.
The X10 is my choice to obtain the closest digital camera to those I’ve loved since I got my first at age 13. I’ve used and collected many since then to my current age 83.
Looking for a small totable unit with a fast lens (mine had mostly f2.0 fixed normal lens, direct view/rangefinders, etc.). I bought and discarded the Nikon 7100 (bad viewfinder), and the Lumix G-3 (too bulky, lens too slow, tho viewfinder good), before settling on the X10 . . . which had the worst Manual I ever saw.
Your Guide was 10 times what the Fuji Manual should have been. I have read it cover-to-cover twice, and dip into it any number of times a day. It’s opened new worlds of possibilities to my photography. And I have followed many of your suggestions and sources for accessories.
Thanks again for providing it . . . altho I’ve had to become a student again!
John
PS: I may have suggestions for your next edition, which I will forward as they occur.
Mr. White, great book on the Sony DSC RX100, could not use the camera without iit! Could not find info on places for repair; my camera will fire 3 consecutive shots, but will not change the f stops (bracker) as promised. Any help will be appreciated. Thanks for the book and assistance.
Neil Willey neil.willey@gmail.com
Hello, Mr. Willey. Thanks for your comment about the book. Here is a web site you can go to to find a location for repair: https://eservice.sony.com/webrma/web/index.do. I hope that helps, and I hope you get the camera working again!
Mr. White, Your book on Sony RX 100 was most helpful. One problem I have with it is unexpected low battery warning. Is there an icon showing the battery level? I could not find it. Thanks.
Hello — The battery icon is located in the upper right corner of the display screen in shooting mode. It looks like a battery with several segments that are white to indicate a positive amount of battery life and that turn black as the battery runs down. You can see an example in Figure 2-9 on page 39. You may have to press the Display button one or more times to display the screen that shows this icon.
I noticed that the official Panasonic manual for the LX7 is incomplete for cropping. Page 176 of the PDF introduces cropping, then skips vital steps before moving on to how to complete the cropping. I plan to purchase the White LX7 Manual.
Hello — I’m not sure what versions you are referring to. The book for sale through the whiteknightpress.com web site is different from the official Nikon manual; this is a book that discusses the features of the camera and provides examples, etc. The paperback version of the book is available in only one size, which is probably close to A5 in size. If you purchase the downloadable versions (PDF, ePub, and Kindle), you can view them in larger sizes or, with the PDF, you can print it out on A4 or larger sizes. If this doesn’t answer your question, let me know and I’ll try to help.
I love this camera (just bought it not long ago) and thanks to your user friendly tips, I should be able to use it for more than just a standard picture soon. Very informative and much appreciated!
Hi, Frank — Thanks for your positive comments! The Coolpix P510 is a great camera — very versatile and excellent for many types of photography. I’m glad you’re enjoying it!
Thank you! I have been wIting for this book. I have used the S95 book many times and now my hubby is reading it as he has the 95 now. Thanks also for the downloadable copies too!
Hello, that would be great if I had time, but I already have other books scheduled at this point, so that one unfortunately won’t be possible. Thanks for the suggestion, though!
Alex, question. I have iphone and ipad. When I order the downloadable files, can I put it on both devices? Ipad for reading at home, iphone for travel and field work. I just ordered the S110 book and am anticipating its arrival. Some of the new features I am not so sure about and appreciate your knowledge. I passed the S95 to hubby.
Thank you for all your efforts. I pass on your name to folks buying new cameras as a great reference. Keep playing and keep your shutter finger exercised and in good shape!
…Martha
Thank you so much for including the link to my book and the comment on my ebook gallery. It is much appreciated and I’m glad you were able to benefit from the information in the book. Your work is coming along excellently in this field. It is a great hobby.
Yes, the RX100 flash could trigger the speedlight, but I wouldn’t be able to press the shutter at the right time. I guess with many tries I might be able to capture the image at the right instant, but I imagine it would be a very frustrating experience. Also, it wouldn’t be a great idea for me to be located downrange of the gun, even though it’s just firing a BB. Also, as I think about it, I think there would be too much delay from pressing the shutter and waiting for one flash to trigger the other.
Not bad, but, to what end? What equivalent focal length was achieved? Seems like better results could be obtained with a DSLR and zoom for similar costs – and end up with a more versatile system.
You are exactly right. If you are setting out to capture good shots of wildlife, I would not recommend using the RX100 with a spotting scope. My focus was on this particular model of camera and showing one of various ways in which it can be used. If you have an RX100 and a spotting scope, you can use them together, if you want to. That was all I was trying to show.
Hello Alex. I enjoyed your book on the lovely LX3. Tempted as I am by upgrading to the LX7, I am going to give the RX100 ii a go. Do you have an eta on when the RX100 ii guide will be available for download?
I’m aiming for late September or early October at the latest. It’s in the editing stage now, and I’m making good progress. I’ll be posting further updates in the near future.
Hello — The book on the RX100 II is available now in all formats. If you go to the book’s information page at the site, there are details on how to purchase it in paperback or downloadable versions. If you have specific questions, let me know. Thanks.
Very pleased to know you are doing a DSC-RX100 MK2 version. I thought your Powershot S100 book was really excellent, and I just gave away that camera and bought the new Sony. Consequently, I need your insights to make the most of my new camera!
That is a real pity !
Could you be persuaded or is the volume of sales not sufficient?
Perhaps you could produce a supplement to update the X100 guide where necessary?
I would buy it !
Are most options/controls/shooting strategies same/similar between rx 100 and rx 100 ii? I recently bought rx 100 ii. Would the current version of the book be useful / cover most options for rx 100 ii? Would buying this version of the book qualify for a free upgrade once the rx 100 ii comes out?
Hello, Jen — I will be working on the RX100 II book as soon as my camera arrives, hopefully within a few days. I hope to have the book finished by late September if at all possible. I will be posting updates at this site.
Hello — As of now, I don’t have specific plans to do a book on the X20, though several people have asked about it, and I will look into the possibility after I finish a couple of other books that are planned. I don’t think it’s too likely, but I can’t completely rule it out. Sorry I can’t be more definite right now.
Dear Alex. About a year ago I purchased an X20 and your x10 guide. The x10 guide helped me quite a bit to figure out how to work most aspects of my camera. Hwere’s hoping you do write an x20 guide. I would surely buy it.
Hello, Rafael — Thanks for your comment. At the moment I have a couple of other books planned, but I will keep the X20 under consideration for the future.
I have not had experience with any other NFC-enabled camera, phone, or tablet. I imagine the process would be similar, but I unfortunately don’t have a definitive answer.
Hello, Jake — The basic shooting functions are just about exactly the same, but the RX100 II adds some new options, including Wi-Fi capabilities; the hot shoe that takes external flash, electronic viewfinder, etc.; better low-light performance; tilting LCD; and some more minor changes. The existing book would be helpful for all of the basics, but of course it does not cover the new features. The new book will be out by late September if all goes well. I haven’t set a definite plan for upgrades for buyers of the current book, but I would say that, if someone purchases the electronic versions here through the White Knight Press site in August or later and then contacts me to request the electronic versions of the new book when it’s out, I will provide that download for no cost.
Greetings! I have the Sony RX100 M2 and am anxiously awaiting your guide book. I’m going on vacation in a couple weeks and just received the 3 filters and 49 mm adapter ring. How do I put that on? I don’t want to mess up my camera and want to protect the lens from salt air at the beach. PS-I have your Nikon P500 book and its awesome. Was hoping your M2 book would be ready to take on my beach vacation to read. Thanks for your help! AW in GA
Hello — Thanks for your message. I’m not sure which adapter ring you have — there are at least 3 that I’m aware of — one from Sony, one from lensmateonline.com, and one from carryspeed.com. The only one I have is the Sony one, though it is quite similar to the one from Lensmate. With the Sony adapter ring, you clean off the front of the lens with an alcohol pad, then put the cardboard guide tube over the lens when the camera is turned off, and press the “base ring” — the smaller plastic ring — onto the lens with its adhesive. Then you twist the actual adapter onto the base ring, and screw the filter into the adapter. If you are using the lensmate version, there are instructions on their site. Sony also has instructions for its adapter at their site. I hope that helps.
Hello — No, I will not be doing a book on the RX1R. I am working on a book about the new RX100 II. I have read about the RX1R, but have not seen either it or the RX1. I believe there are some similarities to the RX100, but considerable differences also. I would like to do a book for that camera, but I’m afraid it won’t be possible.
Any chance that a guy could pre-order the DSC-RX100 II book? That way, when I totally space out checking on its availability, it will still be on its way!
Hello, Jim — I don’t have any capability for pre-orders at this point, though I will be looking into it, for the downloadable versions. For now, I am adding you to the list of people to be notified when the book is available.
I’m still hoping to have those versions available within a week or so; it should be well before November with any luck. I’ll be posting updates as I learn more.
No, as of right now I haven’t been able to include a book on the S120 in the schedule. That is subject to change, but there is no projected date as of now.
Hi Alex,
I have a question for you. under Effect > Special Effect, how come “Soft” and “Nostalgic Sepia” is greyed out and I am not able to select those? Other selection is fine. Does it have something to do with the program mode setting?
Without seeing the camera, it’s hard to tell, but this sounds as if it is because of a conflict with the movie settings. The Nikon User’s Manual says, at page 48: When Movie options is set to HS 480/4X, Soft or Nostalgic sepia cannot be
selected.
Hi Alex,
I have a question for you. under Effect > Special Effect, how come “Soft” and “Nostalgic Sepia” is greyed out and I am not able to select those? Other selection is fine. Does it have something to do with the program mode setting?
Without seeing the camera, it’s hard to tell, but this sounds as if it is because of a conflict with the movie settings. The Nikon User’s Manual says, at page 48: When Movie options is set to HS 480/4X, Soft or Nostalgic sepia cannot be
selected.
Hi Alex,
I have a question for you. under Effect > Special Effect, how come “Soft” and “Nostalgic Sepia” is greyed out and I am not able to select those? Other selection is fine. Does it have something to do with the program mode setting?
Without seeing the camera, it’s hard to tell, but this sounds as if it is because of a conflict with the movie settings. The Nikon User’s Manual says, at page 48: When Movie options is set to HS 480/4X, Soft or Nostalgic sepia cannot be
selected.
You just have to get a good, firm grip on the thin ring. You might try using a cloth to help get a grip. It can be difficult to get it started, but grip it firmly and turn it counter-clockwise and it will come off.
I am considering getting your book on the X10 to use with the X20. Someone wrote a review on Amazon that said the camera information in your book was 90% applicable to the X20. Would you agree? I would love to have a manual like the ones you write for the X20. Thanks for your help. Pam Reynolds
I wish I had a good answer, but I’m not able to keep up with all of the cameras that are released. I have read a little bit about the X20, but I have never used one. You might want to consider buying the X10 book from a seller who accepts returns readily, like Amazon.com, and return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you hoped.
I hope for a Sony RX10 guidebook.
I just bought the RX1000II book to get some more insight in the RX10 menus but a dedicated RX10 book would be wonderful.
Thanks for your comment. I do have the RX10 on the list of books I am considering doing, but there is no definite plan yet. If there is more interest in that book, I will work on it in the near future.
I’m glad to see that Alexander is still generating his excellent guide books (I have his guide to the X10). Is it too much to hope for that there will be a Photographer’s Guide to the Fujifilm X20? The camera is enough the same as the X10 to make it a not-too-difficult update, but enough different to make an update extremely worthwhile. Happy New Year.
Thanks for the comment. The X20 book is not on the schedule as of now, though it is one I would like to do and am considering as a possibility if time permits.
I already own the book for the Sony Rx100, and am going to buy the Nikon D7100 book which includes the iPad download. Is there any way I can get the iPad download for the Rx100?
I purchased the Guide to Coolpix P520 from Amazon, Kindle Version. ‘Just what I needed. They didn’t offer a PDF version, which I prefer. How does one get PDF versions of your books?
Hi,
I am about to buy the book on Amazon, but it would be useful to also have a PDF copy on my iPad. I’m wondering if the book comes with a CD with the PDF version on it, or is there a way that someone who has purchased the book can prove it and have the PDF version sent. As you can see, I’m not keen on buying the same thing twice.
Alex, will tbere be a Canon PS S120 book? If not, would you advise me purchasing your S110 book? I’d rather wait for an updated book if you have one in the works for publishing in the near future. Thanks for your advise!
Hello, Enrique — No, I am not going to be able to do a book on the PowerShot S120. I can only work on a very limited number of cameras, and I can’t work that one into my schedule.
Looks very interesting – but I got the camera today and it is too expensive top get a paper copy to Germany. I urgently need a downloadable version, payment via Paypal.
I have both and iPhone and iPad; I would like to install a copy of the book on each – so I can read on one or the other device depending on which I have with me at the time; is this permissible? Thanks
Just purchased and downloaded. I notice that the PDF version is three times the size of the EPUB version. Are there any differences other than the format; e.g. do the images have a higher DPI in the PDF? I will be viewing of an iPad and so can use either.
Yes, the PDF version will have somewhat higher resolution, because the ePub version had to be produced within the limits for file sizes for various devices such as Nook and others. If you want the highest quality images, I recommend using the PDF version,though, of course, the ePub version has the navigation and reflowing features that are designed for use on iPads and other compatible devices.
I did as you suggested and tried both using the native iBooks app. Without the reflowing, the PDF version only really works with the iPad in portrait mode. The images in the PDF version start small but can be zoomed for more detail. In the ePub version the images start larger and look good at this initial size. But if you double-tap to zoom, they do become pixelated. Overall the ePub version is a much better reading experience with the text reflow and annotation features. It would be really great if we could have a “full fat” edition of the ePub with Retina DPI images. I think the file size limit on the iPad is 2GB!
I’m really liking the book by the way, especially the professional look and feel. I purchased a competitors book for my RX100 and whilst the content was good, I felt that the execution was a little home-made.
Thanks very much for your comments; it is very helpful to get feedback like this so I can improve the reading experience on various devices. It can be a challenge to observe the various limits on file sizes and still produce a document with good-quality images. I am going to send you a link to a larger version of the ePub file by e-mail; I hope you will take a look and let me know if it gives you the image quality you’re looking for.
Leigh
Wow! Awesome after sales support. I have tried the larger ePub and it is fantastic. The images now have more definition in the standard page view and when you double-tap to zoom the image it fills the whole of the screen and reveals even more detail than the PDF version. I think purchasers of the book would really appreciate the option to download this “hi-def” version.
Alex, is the Kindle ePub that I just downloaded Monday 4/7 at about 3AM the larger version of the ePub and if not, will Amazon make the larger version available to me?
Hello, Bill — Just to clarify the terminology, the Kindle version is a .mobi file; the ePub version is for the iPad and other devices that read ePubs. The Kindle file that is on Amazon is the only one currently available for the Kindle. I will look into the possibility of producing a larger version of the .mobi file for the Kindle, but as of now there is only one version available.
Mea Culpa. Boy, do I have egg on my face. I know the difference (Apple since 1979) but that portion of the brain must have still been unconscious. I ‘returned’ the Kindle version after I wrote you and will now be requesting the larger file from you. After I finish wiping off the egg.
Just completed first trip with RX10, 28 days;
Now downloading 4K “still” images will probably edit down to ~3200+.
Converting .ARWs to .DNGs so I can caption RAWs in Adobe Bridge 8.3;
Shot using “P” except timed exposures;
P allows me to set ISO range 125-1600;
But I noticed some undesirable P “decisions”,
e.g. 1/15th sec, f2.8, ISO 200 when I would
have preferred something like 1/30th, f2.8, ISO 400;
is there way to set P minimum shutter speed, too,
(e.g., no slower than 1/30th or 1/60th sec)
in advance rather than having to notice before
each exposure that it is below what I prefer for
handheld? It would be great if one could program
shutter speed to be no slower than 1/focal-length!
Any comments, advice appreciated!
FYI, am noticing process button icon already losing paint,
NOT GOOD, SONY!!
No, there is no way to program a minimum shutter speed for P mode. You can, of course, use Program Shift to switch to a faster shutter speed, or you can use Shutter Priority mode, but I guess Sony’s idea is that, with Program mode you are willing to let the camera make the basic exposure decisions.
In response, I would say that a reader would need to have a solid command of English in order to appreciate any of the books sold through this site. Pour utiliser ces livres, il est nécessaire de comprendre très bien l’anglais.
Many thanks for writing the book about Sony RX100. It is a great help and always with me on my Pad. What about the Sony HX-400-V. Just bought one for my wife. As the official Sony guide is not a great help, we got more information out of the RX100 book instead.
Hi, Chris. Thanks for your comment. I would love to be able to do a book about the HX400V, but there just isn’t enough time in a day to cover all the cameras I would like to.
Thank you so much for this most useful handbook of which I now have a pdf (bought from White Knight Press through this site) and a paper copy (I had ordered it from amazon usa).
Quite different from what I had imagined, actually. Not just one of those technical catalogs or lists of features and specifications we’re too often provided with, that is, an abstract (soulless) publication that mostly repeat (with some paraphrasing) the usual poorly written brand documentation and can only be referred back to from time to time when problems have arisen. But a true guide (up to its title), progressively and pedagogically introducing to the use of the camera, clear enough and simple enough and yet complete and full of details. Thicker and yet easier to get into than I would have thought.
I wish all user manuals were both so useful and so usable, and, I must say, pleasant to read through from cover to cover.
Real congrats to you for the job. And again many thanks!
A RX10 user from France
(Yes, the images in the pdf have a higher definition but those in the paper book are illustrative enough and fulfill their purpose.)
Thanks for those wonderful comments! It is great to hear from a happy reader, and I really appreciate your taking the time to comment. The RX10 is a great camera, and I wish you continued success with it.
Bonjour,
Est-ce que ce magnifique livre va sortir en français ?….
Je l’attends avec impatience !….. car je ne trouve rien.
Le mode d’emploi en ligne de Sony n’est pas du tout pratique !!!
Merci
Le livre est écrit dans une langue directe et simple, sans jargon (mais sans imprécision non plus). Il est, me semble-t-il, accessible à des francophones d’origine sans pour autant nécessiter un super niveau d’anglais (une connaissance des termes et notions photographiques de base sera bien entendu indispensable, il ne s’agit pas non plus d’un roman sentimental)
The fujifilm x100 s. is an extraordinary camera it is the biggest thing since sliced bread ,reasons are obvious you cannot get a more perfect street photography camera it’s menus are incredible you can do the 40,s 50’s 60’s 70’s 80’s retro street photography in camera the versatility of this camera is the best if they decide to build the body out of a Leica type strength it will blow the Leica m’s out of the water .well done fujifilm after all fujifilm made lenses for hasslblad ……”Nuff said”! P.s. How do you spell hassleblad? Lol who cares they are over priced anyway just like a certain Leica anniversary special edition rip off $90.000 that’s right you read it 90 big ones ! Are you serious? Bloody oath I am they are living in a fantasy world where millionaires only tread ……..(in the clouds) bye for now and remember it’s not the camera it’s the brain behind it ….You! . Rant by M.T. Foto Mojo Photography street photography “dare to be different”
Right on Mr. White. I am pre-ordering this camera on the recommendation of a good friend. He recommended your guide highly.
thanks and looking forward to seeing your guide to the Sony DSC RX 100 III this summer.
I was hoping you’d written a book on the GX1, because I found the LX7 book so helpful. Thank-you for all your work! I was disappointed to see that not only did you not write one, but in fact no one else had either. I do hope that you’ll write one for the GX7, maybe some of the info will still apply the the GX1 as well.
In any event, I just wanted to chime in and say how helpful your book on the the Lumix LX7 was to me. In this day and age of PDF this, and PDF that, it’s great that someone still takes the time to write a practical, hard copy book on what a camera can do.
Please publish your guide to Sony RX100 III as soon as possible. Your guides to these Sony cameras are absolutely required for use by serious amateurs. When will the nextnguide appear?
Thanks,
Thanks for your comment. I’m working diligently on the book about the RX100 III, and I’m hoping to have it ready by late summer. I’m still on schedule as of now.
Mr. White: Your guide to the P500 was stunningly helpful in maxing out the Manny benefits of these cameras. One question…when I try to do telephoto shots of dark things like the moon or concerts the camera just will not focus. It whirrs and the image dances around with trigger half pressed. Will not focus. What should I do? Thanks.
Probably the best bet in that situation is to use manual focus. When I photograph the moon, I almost always use manual focus, and for concerts that should be a good approach also.
I just purchased the new RX100m3 and until your new book on the M3 comes out in late summer of 14, is worth it to get your book on the M2? I ask that as I would get a good insight
to the M3 as they are very close, yes, no
The best answer I can give is that the two cameras are close in many ways, but they also have significant differences that would make using the RX100 II book somewhat confusing. For example, the new camera lets you use Auto ISO with Manual exposure mode, and its Function menu works differently than it does on the older model. There are several other differences as well. But the older book certainly would be quite useful as long as you don’t mind ignoring the outdated parts.
I am adding you to the list to be notified. You could get the book on the RX100 II in the meantime, but there are quite a few changes, such as the ability to use Auto ISO with Manual exposure mode for the new camera, and several others, that would make the existing text confusing in some places.
Please notify me when the RX100 III book is published. Meanwhile, I’m learning about my III through the II book. One mystery to me is that there is no Memory Card Tool Menu in the III. Are those functions found somewhere else?
Just purchased RX100111 so will be very interested in your publication on this latest model due end summer 2014 ?
Where will this be available first ?
Have purchased your book on RX10011 for basic reference but there are different features on the latest model and look forward to your valued comments and explanation of these.
Hello, Alan — The book for the RX100 III should be available by late August. It will first be available in paperback through Amazon.com in the US, followed by Amazon sites in other countries. Within a couple of weeks after that, it should be available in e-book versions, through this site and through Amazon for Kindle, Apple for iPads and iPhones, Barnes & Noble online for Nook, and Kobo for other e-readers. It also will be sold in paperback by a variety of other online sellers such as bn.com, powells.com, and others. It will not be sold in stores. If you have further questions, let me know. Thanks.
hai all,
I am also having one for the past two years.
There is one deficiency in the camera (P510). We cannot mount extra flash as there is no hot shoe for it, even no socket for flash triggering.
Friends, any body please guide me for using extra flash. Pl mail me to pasupathilingam@gmail.com
thanks
pasupathilingam
You can use the built-in flash of the Coolpix P510 camera to trigger an external flash with an optical slave. You can use either a separate optical slave device attached to an external flash unit, or an external flash unit with a built-in optical slave capability. The optical slave should have a setting that allows it to ignore the pre-flashes fired by the P510. A couple of excellent units are the Yongnuo YN560 III and the LumoPro LP180, both of which are available through Amazon.com and elsewhere. The camera should be set to Manual exposure mode; you can determine the proper exposure settings with a few test shots.
hai all,
I am also having one for the past two years.
There is one deficiency in the camera (P510). We cannot mount extra flash as there is no hot shoe for it, even no socket for flash triggering.
Friends, any body please guide me for using extra flash. Pl mail me to pasupathilingam@gmail.com
thanks
pasupathilingam
You can use the built-in flash of the Coolpix P510 camera to trigger an external flash with an optical slave. You can use either a separate optical slave device attached to an external flash unit, or an external flash unit with a built-in optical slave capability. The optical slave should have a setting that allows it to ignore the pre-flashes fired by the P510. A couple of excellent units are the Yongnuo YN560 III and the LumoPro LP180, both of which are available through Amazon.com and elsewhere. The camera should be set to Manual exposure mode; you can determine the proper exposure settings with a few test shots.
Just purchased Sony RX100III and reading through your old II book and trying to understand some of the changes on the main menu I am really looking forward to your late August publishing date…put me on your email list. Is there a good forum for the RX100 II/III that you can recommend?
Just bought a Sony rx100 iii and find the downloadable manual most unsatisfying. Should I wait for the release of your iii guide or get the one that is being sold on this page? Are there significant changes forthcoming that might be worth the wait?
I recommend waiting for the new book, because there are substantial changes in the menu options and other features. The new book should be ready within the next 2 weeks or so.
Thanks for the information. I am excited about using the new camera and hope it works for landscape as well as it does for objects/people closer up. I look forward to getting the book.
Yes, as a matter of fact, it has just now become available in all three electronic versions – PDF, ePub (iPad, etc.), and Kindle. You can purchase it through this site for $9.95 and get all three files. The paperback version should be available at Amazon.com and other online sellers within the next several days.
Actually, the book is finished now, and it will take a week or so before copies are available from the printer and before the Kindle and iPad versions are ready for distribution. I hope that all versions will be ready within the next two weeks, though a lot of that process is out of my control. I will be posting updates as various versions become available.
For almost all of the screenshots, I used the output from the camera’s HDMI port, connected through a cable to a video capture device, and then captured into Photoshop. There are some screens that are not fully output through that port, including the Monitor Brightness screen and the zebra stripes. For those, I had to line up another camera and take a picture of the RX100 III’s LCD screen. If you want more details about the video capture process, let me know and I can provide them.
You are wonderful. Thank you so much for your response and offer. Would you please email me the details about the device and process?
I just got a DSC-RX100M3 and my model is a 50i (french) unit. When switched to NTSC, the camera displays “Running on DTSC” every single time the camera is turned ON with no apparent way to disable that. Apparently the same thing happens when a 60i unit is set-up to run on PAL.
So my intent was to capture that screen so I can post it on different forums for help.
To what degree would it be possible to edit the firmware software? I have a (Blackvue DR550GW-2CH) video dash cam I was able to edit the firmware/ configuration file for with the help of others from specialized forums. And so I wonder if it is possible with a camera from a manufacturer such as Sony.
Were you able to edit the firmware or config file? I am in the same situation as you. I have the 50i unit and would like to switch off the “Running on NTSC” message.
Hi, Ray — Yes, the RX100 III book would be beneficial because there are many menu options and other features in common between the two models. You would just have to expect there to be some confusion because there are several added features on the RX100 IV and considerable differences in areas such as the range of shutter speeds, which is considerably greater on the RX100 IV. But if you don’t mind having some such areas of confusion, the RX100 III book should be fairly useful.
Just saw that your book Photographer’s Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 III was already available. I’m ok with the PDF version for now but will also be downloading on the iPad version once it’s available. Your book will make me enjoy using this awesome camera even more! Thank you very much from Thailand 😉
Hello, Henry — Here is the substance of what I told Richard: For video capture with my Mac Pro computer I use a device called the Intensity Pro from Blackmagic Design. They have several similar devices, depending on what interface you use, such as USB or an internal slot in a computer. The device has a regular HDMI input, so I can plug the HDMI cable coming from the camera into the Intensity Pro and capture the signal. The RX100 III is very good at outputting the signal while in shooting mode or in playback mode. Some other cameras will output a signal through the HDMI port only in playback mode. As I noted earlier, there are a few screens, such as zebra and Monitor Brightness adjustments, and also Peaking Level, that are not sent out through this port, so I had to take pictures of the LCD screen with another camera to illustrate those features.
There are other video capture devices available that can capture HDMI input, from companies including Hauppage, AverMedia, and Elgato. The Blackmagic Intensity Pro works well for me because it comes with a configuration that plugs into Photoshop, so you can capture a still image directly into Photoshop.
As for the actual issue with the NTSC/PAL selector, I have the 60i model, and it does not have the NTSC/PAL selector menu option; there is no way to get it to run on PAL, so there is never any message displayed about NTSC or PAL. Maybe some 60i models have that option, but I was not aware of that. As far as I know, only the 50i models display any such message. I don’t think there is any way to disable the message if you run the 50i model using the NTSC system.
As for editing the firmware, maybe a very computer-savvy person could figure out how to do that. For Canon cameras, there is a system called CHDK that allows users to modify the software inside their cameras; details are at http://chdk.wikia.com/wiki/CHDK. I don’t know if something similar could be done with Sony cameras; if so, I have not heard about it. Maybe if you looked into the CHDK information someone there could help you figure out if such modifications are possible for Sony cameras, though my inclination is to doubt it.
Hi Alex, are we still aiming for end of August? I just bought this camera and am preparing for a vacation starting 8/31. Really want to read this on my 14 hour plane ride!
I have recently purchased the Panasonic Lumix zx40. Although it’s distributed with a 300+ page manual, it addresses the mechanics of operation, more than conveying an understanding of why, when, etc. I purchased your book on the LX7 which appeared to be a reasonably similar camera albeit with many differences. I would love to get a book similar to yours on the lx7 but written for the zx40. I don’t see it listed in your upcoming products. Are you aware of anyone who might have or is in the process of producing such a book?
Hello — No, as far as I know, there is no book available or planned for the Panasonic Lumix ZS40 camera. There aren’t that many books available for compact cameras, and it doesn’t look as if that camera has a book specifically written for it.
Hello, Scott — Yes, all three electronic versions will be available as of later today, within the next few hours. I expect the paperback version to start being available within the next few days, though that’s a little less certain. I will be posting updates here.
I appreciate it has only just been announced but do you think you will be creating a book for the D Lux Typ 109? I’m a huge fan of your books and have always ensured I have your book with the latest D-Lux model. Many thanks.
Hello, Jo — Thanks for your comment. Yes, I have just been reading about that new Leica model, and as of now, I do plan to do a book about it, once I can get my hands on one. So, it will be several months in the future, and something could always intervene to change the plan, but that is the plan as of now.
Hi — I assume you’re talking about the first image, of the bird on the fence. That was taken with the Bird-watching setting, with the lens zoomed in to 1440mm, at f/6.5 with a shutter speed of 1/60 second and ISO 450. The Matrix metering mode was used.
Dear Alex, the last motion picture camera I had was 16mm and served me well in an underwater housing. I am not young and have just spent the day trying to get my head around my new RX-100 11 digital ‘monster’. Of course I became completely bogged down in the unfamiliar jargon within the camera’s Menu. Looking up individual digital language acronyms etc on the net I bumped into your seemingly marvellous book of instruction on the subject, ‘The Photographers’ Guide to the Sony RX-100 11′
I live in Mauritius and have a friend in the US who can accept the paperback version on my behalf however I would like the Kindle version for my immediate use.
Question – does the Kindle version include all illustrations/photographs etc? I ask this because I may never see the paperback and will operate exclusively from the Kindle version.
I thank you for taking the trouble to write this book in the absence of anything meaningful from the manufacturer. It seems to be an essential reference for operators such as I and to assist us over the ‘digital hump’.
I notice that you prefer to use the RX in 60p 28M (PS) however the camera advises that this “Cannot record to DVD disc at 60p 28M(PS). Save on a Blue Ray disc”. Do you happen to know if I could copy to my 1 year old Mac in the 60p… format? From there perhaps I could reconfigure the resolution according to the use?
Question – Digital editing is going to be my next hurdle; do you happen to know a good reference to get me pointed the right way on this subject?
Alex, any words of wisdom you have would be very much appreciated.
Can’t wait to get started; I think I can see the light!
Cheers, John Seymour
Hello, John — I’m glad to hear you have an RX100 II – a great camera in so many ways, and I’m happy to hear you found my book. As for the Kindle edition, yes, it contains the complete contents of the printed book, including all of the photographs, which are in color if you use a color-capable Kindle or a Kindle app on a computer. By the way, if you purchase the printed book from amazon.com, you can get the Kindle version at a reduced price. Yes, you can copy the video files to your Mac and edit them there however you want. My book mentions the somewhat obscure way in which the AVCHD files are stored on the memory card; you have to find the .mts files, which can be readily edited in a good video editing program. With respect to editing, there are many options available, depending on how involved you want to get and how much you want to spend. If your Mac has iMovie, you can edit the files using that program. I don’t use iMovie that much myself, but I noticed that there is a Missing Manual book about iMovie for 2014. There also probably are good YouTube video tutorials for the program. Personally, I use Adobe Premiere Pro for editing. It is more expensive and involved, but has a lot of power. There are books from Adobe such the Classroom in a Book volume, and also there are excellent tutorials on YouTube on many aspects of editing with that program. There is a less-expensive option from Adobe called Premiere Elements, which also should do very well with the files from this camera. Another possibility is Final Cut Pro software from Apple. If you want to use a Sony Option, there is Sony Vegas Pro software, and I saw that there is a well-reviewed book called Sony Vegas Pro 11 Beginner’s Guide, which evidently has step-by-step tutorials to get you started; it sounds like a good option.
Alex, thanks for the very prompt reply. I have THE book already in my Kindle, thanks to the power of the ether! Thanks also for the tips re editing which I will digest in the morning along with digesting your wise words on the RX-100 11. Finding that the book was available on Kindle without having to buy the paperback was a bonus for me.
Cheers from a very happy customer, John
Hello again Alex, your book on the RX-100 11 is as good as I thought it would be. Thanks you. It seems however I have bought the NTSC version, being unaware that there are 2 models available, but with the same model number!! Sony, you have to be kidding?!
I really would like the PAL version. I understand that if the Card is formatted in the NTSC format, then that’s what I am stuck with, is that correct? I understand that a NTSC-PAL conversion results in loss of quality?
Does anyone want to buy an unused DSC RX-100 11 camera?
I will go for the 11 model again as the 24mm lens of the 111 model does not suit the underwater housing and available wide angle adaptors i.e., the lens would have to be zoomed to 28mm to avoid vignetting. Plus the electronic viewfinder would be redundant.
With regards, John
Hello, John — I’m sorry to hear you ended up with the wrong version of the camera. Yes, if you have the 60i (NTSC) version, you are stuck with the NTSC standard. The 50i (PAL) version can switch between them, but the NTSC version cannot. I have never tried to convert video footage between these standards, but I did some quick research and it appears that there likely will be a loss of quality to some extent if you do a software conversion. You probably could get better advice from some of the experts who frequent the various forums that discuss this camera and video. For example, the Sony Cyber-shot Talk Forum at dpreview.com probably would be a good place to ask questions in this area.
Managed to change the RX100 11 for the PAL version and have just returned from safari in Africa with quite a few video AVCHD video files. Now to the question of viewing and digital editing. My last editing was done on 16mm with the aid of a negative basket, a cutter, tape and a viewer!
1. To get the images onto a TV I understand that the optional HDMI cable is necessary. Unfortunately I did not purchase the optional HDMI cable with the camera; do you happen to know if this type of cable is readily available, or is it a Sony special? I have no local Sony agent here in Mauritius to check with.
2. What cable is used to download from the camera to my Mac?
I have charged the camera battery from the computer via the camera’s MULTI connector however I’m not sure if this connector/cable has another use?
3. Do I need to have the editing software loaded onto the laptop for viewing the AVCHD whilst travelling?
4. I understand that you personally use Adobe Premier Pro and have checked the Adobe site to establish cost etc. I am aware that this software can be complicated however that term can apparently be applied to the purchase of this item! The Adobe website lists a daunting array of packages;
” …premiere Pro, After Effects, the Production Premium Suite, the Master Suite and Creative Cloud”. Premiere Pro and After Effects are the two applications that are of most interest to video editors. With the suites, the Production Premium Suite is the smallest of the to offer both Premiere Pro and After Effects. The Master Suite, included as its applications are made available with a Creative Cloud”.
Thanks again for your excellent book on the camera; I now have the RX by the short and curlies however the digital editing is a another minefield for the likes of me and once again I must seek the advice of the master, if you don’t mind.
I am aware that it is necessary to source a package that can hopefully handle the AVCHD video files without a glitch however I note that some complain that even Adobe has some shortcomings in this direction?
A quote from the Adobe Premier Pro Help site, “There is a known issue for Adobe Premiere Pro CS6. AVCHD files that are spanned can cause the system to freeze up while scrubbing the software. Also, the audio can sometimes disappear after a set amount of playback.
A spanned file has an extended duration, wherein the camera creates separate video files. These files don’t appear to be separate when imported into Adobe Premiere Pro, only if looking at the video files in Finder or Windows Explorer.
There is an update for CS6 – 6.0.4 that resolves the issue. Update CS6 to the latest version. Alternatively, Adobe Premiere Pro CC does not have this issue.”
Some adopt for proxy editing to assist the editing process even when using Adobe. I would really appreciate your guidance on which Adobe packages I should purchase and whether or not it is wise/easier to go the proxy route? I understand that there may be some color correction to be done on the final AVCHD version if we went for proxy approach.
Perhaps I should mention that my expectations of an editing package are fairly straight forward; cut and splicing/dissolves, wipes etc/color correction/exposure correction etc. It is not clear to me how one identifies particular footage in the absence of time coding or some other number referencing system; perhaps some editing software introduces some reference to assist?
Whilst there will be some stills I intend to shoot mainly video.
I can afford to go the Adobe route, if that’s what it takes, and would really appreciate the benefit of your experience to hopefully minimize the potential of my making a huge mistake which could be very expensive on time and money.
5. FYI my 21″ Mac is about 3 years old with OSX 10.9.5, processor 2.5GHz Intel Core i5, memory 4 GB 1333 MHz DDR3. It does have a Thunderbolt connection which I understand can speed up the camera-computer download. Do I need to get a new Mac or upgrade video card etc. for better performance?
6. I also have a new 11″ Mac Air laptop which I intend to travel with to view the mostly underwater footage we will shoot. Will I need software on the laptop for purposes of viewing the AVCHD files?
Can’t tell you how much we appreciate your advice and trust that this enquiry will not be too hungry on your time. Please excuse our naivety and thanks again for your assistance in jerking us into the 21st digital century.
Hello, John — I’ll give you the best responses I can, though I cannot claim to be an expert on every aspect of each camera I write about; I concentrate on still images, and try to cover video accurately, but I don’t have experience with all that many software packages. At any rate, here is what I can say:
1. You should just look for a generic HDMI cable. You need one with a micro connector at the camera end and a standard HDTV connector at the other end. Here is a listing for one at Amazon.
2. You use the cable that came with the camera to download to a computer, using the USB connection.
3. If you have a Mac, you should have the iMovie software installed. If not, get it from the Mac App Store. It does a good job with AVCHD files.
4. If you find that iMovie doesn’t do everything you need, I suggest you try Adobe Premiere Pro Elements before taking the plunge with Premiere Pro. Elements may be all you need, if iMovie isn’t enough.
5. Your Mac should be fine. At least, I would try using it and see if it is fast enough. It should be. If you can add more memory, that would be a good idea.
6. Try using iMovie on the MacBook Air.
I hope this helps to some extent; best of luck with your video production!
Hi, looks like an excellent guide . I note the recent firmware update to 2.0 allows shooting in XAVCS format.I assume the guide was not able to cover that as it was not an option at the time of camera release but no harm in asking 🙂
You are correct that the book about the RX10 does not include information about the firmware update, but I did do a blog post that discusses it; here is a link to that post.
Hello, Alex,
I purchased the hard copy book from Amazon and like it a lot (I am only up to page 30 or so). So much easier to read, understand and master the camera when compared to the online manual provided by Sony. I have a question: On page 26 of the book, at #7, it tells me to press the flash pop-up switch and then to press the Right button on the Control Wheel and then the vertical menu appears showing Flash Mode on the left side of the screen. However, when I do that with my camera, I receive an error message (“This operation or setting not available as follows:
Shoot Mode (grayed out)
Intelligent Mode (highlighted).”
The only way I get to Flash Mode is by going into the Menu, then #2 button, highlight Flash Mode from among the several choices – which I have already set to Autoflash as per your suggestions on page 25.
Then, #9, when I press the Left button, I do not get into Drive Mode but I get into Auto Obj. Framing. Please tell me why I am having this issue.
Can we make the background in the 1st image of a bird more blur by using Nikon P600? Because the background is not blur enough to divert our attention towards the object(bird). It distracts and irritates eyes. Please suggest.
can you provide camera settings you have used for all the Nikon P600 sample photos? This will help us understanding better about the camera settings and its effect(resultant photo).
Hi, Manish — I took a look at the various bird photos on the sample photos page for the P600 camera, and I think I see what you mean. In the first photo, the background is more distracting than for the other bird photos. I don’t think there would be an easy way to use different settings for that photo to get the background more blurred; the image was taken using a very long focal length, which caused a good deal of blurring of the background. I think the issue with that photo is that the background itself is somewhat distracting, with its bright highlights that contrast with the dark green areas. I think the background would have looked better and less distracting if it were more uniform in color.
Hi, Robert — I don’t have any current plans for a book about that camera, but I appreciate your mentioning it, because that helps me as I try to figure out what other cameras to write about. Thanks.
Hello — No plans at present, because I am backed up with other cameras I need to work on. If time permits down the road I’ll try to work that one in, but it doesn’t look likely right now.
Is the button for getting the bundle at the far right? I am unable to see the entire button, but presume it’s the last button after the one for the Kobo. I see only a large “B,” the rest of the button is not visible.
My daughter just purchased a Nikon P530. I have been unable to find a handbook for this model and the user manual provides less than adequate information on the use of the camera’s functionalities. Would purchasing your book on the P520 be a sensible way forward or do you have any other suggestions? Thanks
Hello — It’s hard to say, because I have not worked directly with the P530, but I think that my book on the P600 might be closer in its contents, because the P600 and P530 were introduced at about the same time.
After having to retire my trusty Panasonic ZS-10 earlier this year, my family got tired of my whining and gifted me a new Nikon P530 this year. Seeing how highly rated all of your books are, I was dismayed to find that you don’t have a guide book for the P530. Based upon your advice to John, I might spring for the P600 guidebook. Much better, would be if you plan to release on specifically for the P530, though. 😉
I am working on a guide for the Panasonic LX100 now; I’m not sure if I will do a separate one for the Typ 109, though that one may be next. I will post more information as plans develop.
Hi — As of now, I don’t have plans for a book about the X100T, though it’s possible that could change. I am working on a book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100 right now, and after that I will evaluate to see what comes next. I would say the likelihood of an X100T guide is not that great, but I’ll post further information as things develop.
Your book is very helpful. Thank you. Quick question: my MacBook Air cannot “see” the RX100 III even when connected with the supplied Sony USB cable. Is this because it’s running OS X 10.10.1 (Yosemite)?
I just connected my RX100 III with the USB cable to my Mac desktop computer, which is running Yosemite, and PlayMemories Home Importer found the camera and its images with no problem. However, I did find that I could not upgrade the camera’s firmware using my Mac, apparently because the firmware upgrade program was not compatible with Yosemite. So, depending on what software you are using, that could be an issue.
Very pleased to know you are about to publish the LX100 book. Without your LX5 and LX7 guides I wouldn’t have been able to fully enjoy them, thanks to a snobbish attitude deriving from 60-odd years of handling fully mechanical cameras that made me shun the iA, SCN and Palette modes in favor of a a**l retentive obsession for control (you can’t blame someone who grew among Leica IIIf’s and 3.5 TLR Rolleiflexes without even a light meter). Thanks to you I came not only to apppreciate but to depend on functions like Handheld Night Scene, HDR and Panorama modes, instant switch to Ilford HP5+ lookalike and the joy of the iZoom extra reach.
Now that Santa rewarded my good behaviour with an LX100, I’m fumbling with it trying to unearth the goodies I’ve become accustomed to during the last three years on my LX5 (sold) and LX7 (headed for the block) but -alas- your book will have to wait a few weeks. Forming on the queue to get my ebook!
Glad to hear that! I discovered your books (and have been purchasing them) since the one on the LX3. I’m cracking my knuckles waiting for the new one. As stated before, while much of the content may be redundant to the manual, the way it’s explained let’s everyone fully understand why a function is on the camera, what can be expected of it and how/when to use it.
I concur, I would never have got the most out of the my beloved d-lux without your assistance via your books. The typ 109 is my fourth iteration of this gem of a camera and undoubtedly it’s a different beast than its predecessors. I recently took it on a long awaited workshop to capture some coastal suns the slow shutter speed shots. Not knowing that the silent mode stops the bulb (though 120-ish seconds is not enough) setting from even bring available. I had to crank the albeit impressive ISO up to get any shots at all as 1s was all it would give me. Pouring over the manual on the journey home only gave me a vague clue as to needing to get off electronic shutter (not knowing how I’d gotten on to that in the first place) but the menu option was greyed out. I resorted to restoring to factory settings and when I reintroduced silent mode I finally realised the correlation. I was convinced I’d have been better equipped with your latest tome. The Leica manuals are adequate (barely) but soulless, I am waiting in eagerness for your typ 109 book or the LX100 version, if you decide to only do one of them. No pressure…
Jo, thanks a bunch for the silent mode+bulb tip. I wouldn’t have discovered it either!
Same feeling about either of the books here, be it the Panasonic or the Leica; only that as owner of four of the real mccoys (Film Leica Ms and fIII) I’ve never been able to justify the 50% price increase for the rebranding. I keep forwarding the savings on each of the pannys towards a digital M and put my glass to good use.
I will try to help with this question, but I will need some more information. Please let me know what camera you are using, what device you are trying to connect it to, and for what purpose, and I will see if I can help.
Thanks for the suggestion. I am just finishing up my book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100, which is very similar to the D-Lux Typ 109, and I will soon decide what book to do next. It’s very helpful to hear from potential readers about what they would like to see.
My question deals with: once I open my file into ibooks or Kindle on one device, is there a way that it can be in the master library on all my other devices to allow syncing?
Currently after I sync said device, I do not see the book available in the libraries on any of the other devices.
Also concerning the Kindle specifically, I only get a generic thumbnail, not the appropriate one associated to the book cover. How can this be fixed?
Thank you for asking about a book about the Fujifilm FinePix HS30EXR. It does help to know which cameras people are interested in having books written for. I don’t have any current plans for a book about that model, but I will make a note of your interest as I’m deciding on future books. I am just finishing a guide for the Panasonic LX100.
Thank you Alexander, this was eagerly anticipated. Apologies for asking this again but are you now planning on writing the D-Lux 109 version too or as these are seemingly more similar than normal, you would redirect us Leica owners to the Lumix version?
PS – I have downloaded the Lumix one anyway, but wanted to ask!
I have to admit I haven’t yet made a final decision. As of right now, I think I will do the D-Lux Typ 109 next, but I always need a little time after each book is done to take care of matters such as getting it distributed through various sites, before plunging ahead to the next book. So, I probably will do the Leica model next, but I can’t guarantee it yet. I’ll post more information as things develop. Thanks for checking!
Your book on the LX7 was very helpful, so I’m eagerly waiting for your guide for the Panasonic LX100. Is there a way of being notified when it’s ready for download?
I have your book for the DSC-RX100, which has been an important part of my learning to use my camera. What are the chances you will update your book for the X100S for the X100T. I will buy it the instant it comes out!
Hi Alex, I bought the Rx100-III guide and it’s been very informative, to say the least. I’m a bit confused, though, with the so-called Setting Effect icon shown in Fig. 4-81 because I understand it to be for the Picture Effect. Could you please clarify? Thanks.
Dear Alexander,
Earnest thanks for hurrying on the book. Answered prayers! Just got the Kindle version and will devour it along the weekend putting the giant killer through the paces. Your books are the best proof that we shouldn’t strive to reinvent black thread. Why would anyone want to meddle with the cryptic manuals when one can read your books?
Best!
Jorge.
Dear Alexander,
There’s an error on Table 3-1. The method to set Aperture Priority states “Set aperture ring to the red A mark and set shutter speed dial to desired value”, it should be the other way around. You might want to update at Amazon before more copies get sold.
Best,
Jorge.
Still proofreading, sorry…
“At higher zoom levels, the widest aperture available changes steadily, until, when the lens is fully zoomed in to the 90mm level, the widest aperture available is f/2.8.”
As you (and most owners) are aware, the camera does not offer a 90mm zoom setting, at least not optically (longest is 75), although it emulates longer settings very well, up to 300mm via the iZoom and Digital Zoom menu settings.
Jorge — Thanks very much for pointing out the mistakes you found. I have posted corrections at the Updates and Corrections page at this site, and I will get them fixed in future versions of the ebooks, as well as in the printed version, which has not come out yet.
Alex, glad to be of help, specially before committing the manuscript to press. Already at 35% of the book but going slowly through it, experimenting with all the minutiae. You’ve done a terriffic job —as usual– of explaining the functions to the mm. I knew I would never get to know the camera fully without your book. Again, sincere thanks and admiration.
Hello — The paperback version of the book is available as of today; for now, it is available only at Amazon.com. Here is a link to the book’s page there. It will become available through other sites in future days and weeks.
About the Panasonic FL220E in the UK… I don’t think there ever was a version that tilted for bounce flash. Here’s an extract from a current live eBay item for sale:
“The Panasonic DMW-FL220E Flashgun is a compact flashgun for Lumix digital cameras. It offers some bounce / swivel capability with lighting angle at 60 degrees up and down as well as 78 degrees left/right.”
That 60 deg up-and-down and 78 deg left/right mentioned there as bounce and swivel capability is merely the spec for the fixed strobe’s angle of coverage.
Such misunderstandings are likely to be the source of the incorrect information about the FL220E’s non-existent tilt.
Best regards, DL
ps: The Windows software for the RX100M3’s firmware update runs on XP SP3 without a hitch.
Thanks for this clarification; it makes a lot of sense, and it looks as if your information clears up some confusion. I will change the discussion on the Updates and Corrections page to include your point.
Hi, Eduardo — I’m glad you’re finding the book useful. There is room for confusion on this topic, because there are several settings with similar names and functions. Figure 4-81 is meant to show you that you will not always see the effects of the Creative Style setting that is in use. In this case, the Sepia setting for Creative Style is in effect, as shown by the SEPI icon. There is no Picture Effect turned on; those effects have names such as Toy Camera, Posterization, Miniature, and others. In Figure 4-81, even though the Sepia setting for Creative Style is turned on, the screen does not appear sepia-colored, because the Setting Effect Off option is in use. If that doesn’t answer your question, let me know.
Hello — For the bundle of 3 ebook versions (PDF, ePub, and Kindle), use the large Buy Ebook button, which is above the table with other options. The button to the right of the Kobo button is for Google Play. If this doesn’t answer your question, let me know. Thanks.
Hello, Ber — The step-by-step instructions in the book were written with the idea that the camera is new and you haven’t changed the basic settings. It appears that what happened is that you, by playing around with the settings, or perhaps someone who used the camera before you, has changed the settings for the Left and Right buttons on the control wheel. The Right button appears to have been set to some function that is not compatible with Intelligent Auto mode, and the Left button has been set to Auto Object Framing. To reset these buttons to their default values, see the discussion of the Custom Key Settings menu option starting at page 324 of the book. You need to reset the Right button to Flash mode and the Left button to Drive mode.
Hi! I find your page was very useful. I wanted to get the ebook on iTunes but it was not made available in Malaysian store sadly. Keep up the good work =)
Hello — Thanks for your comment. You can purchase the bundle of ebook formats directly from this site; that bundle includes the same ePub version that is sold through the iBookstore. Here a link to the page for purchasing the book that way. Let me know if you have any questions.
Alex, I have your LX5 and LX7 books and have found them invaluable. I am an LX “tragic” and have recently received my LX100 and very impressed. However, I have not been able to get the Custom Settings and Function button access to them to work, particularly getting back out to normal operations. I have read your explanation in the LX100 book over and over and just cannot get it to work. I class myself as reasonably computer and camera literate but seem to have a mental block which could just possibly be due to your explanation. I remember the adage that communications begin with the message and then the listener comes next. This item is the only section of your wonderful book which I cannot use and it happens to be the most important area for me to get on top of. I photograph stained glass windows for publication and need to speedily set the camera for that task and just as speedily return it to normal functions but still have C1 sitting there to use next time.
Hello, Robin, I’m sorry to hear this part of the book was not helpful to you. If you can narrow down for me the discussion that is unclear, I can try to clarify it. One point that might not be explained as well as it should be is that you have to make sure that all three memory slots – C1, C2, and C3, have the Function Button Set option set so that your chosen Function button is assigned to call up the Utilize Custom Set feature. So, if you call up C2, and then you want to switch to C3, it has to be the case that C2 has the appropriate Function button assigned to switch to another Custom Set. If this is not the issue, let me know and I will work on issuing a correction on taking whatever other steps are necessary to clarify the discussion. I appreciate your pointing out the issue.
Many thanks for coming back to me Alex. Much appreciated. I am a bit pressed at the moment but hope to get some quiet time over the weekend. I’ll be back. Regards Robin
Hi, bought your book on the Fuji X10(extremely helpful!) and since the X20 was very similar there was no need for a book on that. But now I have the X30 which is very different. Just thought I would put my wishes in for a book on it. Love the camera but between the EVF and all the other many other changes it is very dissimilar to the proceeding models. Plus now they only have a download manual! HELP!
Thanks for suggesting a book about the X30. It really helps me to know which cameras people are interested in having books written for. I don’t have any current plans for that model, but I will make a note of your interest as I’m deciding on future books.
I got the print version via Amazon. My sincere thanks to the author for this excellent work. The Sony materials that come with the camera and via the Sony website are woefully inadequate. This is the manual that should have come with the RX10. In particular, the explanations and illustrative pictures of the various creative style and picture effect modes was most helpful.
I have the Sony HVL-F43M flash unit and the Sony instruction materials for this are equally obscure. Do you have a similar guide to this flash, or know where to get some information?
Thanks for your comments. I don’t have a book or other guide for the flash unit. I found a pretty good introduction to the flash on YouTube, at this link: http://youtu.be/YwKYfm8gBFM.
Also, you might find some good information on Sony flash units in general from the articles, books, and videos available at http://friedmanarchives.com. Gary Friedman is an expert on Sony cameras and flash, and his materials may be quite helpful.
No, I need to update this post. Sony has added a “driver loader”, along with this message: IMPORTANT: For OS X version 10.10, please ensure the Mac OS X 10.10 Driver Loader has been installed before continuing to update your firmware. Look for that message, which can be hard to notice on the firmware download page, and install that extra file first, and then the firmware upgrade should work okay on the Mac with Yosemite.
I found and purchase your book for the newly acquired RX10. Thanks.
It is a good read for me as I am used to always read instruction manuals for my devices.
And for the benefit of everyone also purchased a medium size flash that works well with the camera.
Sony HVL-F32M and has the Multi Interface Shoe.
If other people are interested by off camera flash.
I have purchased and tested the following items.
2 SOFACS1M Off-Camera Shoe for External Flash with Multi-Interf
1 FA-MC1AM Off-Camera Flash Cable
So I can use a flash bracket or close by on a stand. Even if this cable is short, longer ones must exist.
Some people argue that the JPEG processing of the cameras is different, resulting in different “looks” for their images. I didn’t try to investigate that issue; I just wanted to lay out the objective, uncontroversial differences.
I think the P520 book would probably be the most helpful, though the P600 book could be helpful also. You might want to order one of those from a place to which you could return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you hoped. Then you could try the other book.
I think the P520 book would probably be the most helpful, though the P600 book could be helpful also. You might want to order one of those from a place to which you could return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you hoped. Then you could try the other book.
I think the P520 book would probably be the most helpful, though the P600 book could be helpful also. You might want to order one of those from a place to which you could return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you hoped. Then you could try the other book.
I am in hopes that you are going to do a book on the new Nikon Coolpix P900. If so, please let me know when it would be available. In the interim, do you think that your book on the P600 would suffice?
Yes, I am planning to do a book on the P900, though I first have to finish my book on the P610. I would hope to get the P900 book done by sometime in July or August. As far as using the P600 book for the P900 camera is concerned, it’s hard to say, because I haven’t examined the P900 yet to see how different the menu options and other features are. I imagine it would be somewhat useful, though you might want to buy it from a seller to whom you can return it if it doesn’t prove to be all that helpful for you.
I’m also looking for a book covering the P530. A couple of reviews on Amazon suggest enough difference in the P520 book to make it less than ideal. Will you be updating the book for the P530?
No, I was going to do a book for the P530, but Nikon released the P600 at the same time, and I decided to do a book for the P600 instead. Now I’m working on a book for the P610.
I’m also looking for a book covering the P530. A couple of reviews on Amazon suggest enough difference in the P520 book to make it less than ideal. Will you be updating the book for the P530?
No, I was going to do a book for the P530, but Nikon released the P600 at the same time, and I decided to do a book for the P600 instead. Now I’m working on a book for the P610.
I’m also looking for a book covering the P530. A couple of reviews on Amazon suggest enough difference in the P520 book to make it less than ideal. Will you be updating the book for the P530?
No, I was going to do a book for the P530, but Nikon released the P600 at the same time, and I decided to do a book for the P600 instead. Now I’m working on a book for the P610.
My new RX100M3 started up with setup/set date and time displayed. I did that, but when the camera was shut off, the settings were lost. So I read the Kindle version of Alex White’s book, and that solved the problem. If you begin with the menu button, and navigate to setup, it works. However, the book does not tell you how to change from AM to PM. I stumbled onto how to do that, but I recommend that step be added to any revision of the book.
Thanks for the quick response and explanation, Alex. Now I understand the intent of Fig. 4-81. I guess I got confused because the Picture Effect icon is turned also off in the figure and I thought you were referring to that icon in the book. This just also made me realize that the Setting Effect is not shown in the Function Menu (lower line 6) by default. I bumped it off and placed the Setting Effect instead, which I use often, and now the camera feels better in my hand. Thanks again and keep up the great work. Looking forward to either the Sony A7000 or A9 guide this year.
Yes, that’s right. The newest Apple iPhones have NFC, but only for Apple Pay. As of now, the only phones that can connect to cameras using NFC are Android phones.
I see on Amazon that they think you are producing a guide for the X100S/T due out in August. I just bought the Fuji X100T and took it on a trip and I know I have a lot to learn. First off are you working on the guide for the S and T? Second do you think the guide to the S would be helpful or just confuse me more.
I really like the camera but there are a few problems I have with the camera. The biggest problem is that when I grab the camera and put it up to my eye the screen/viewfinder looks as though there is a rose colored filter on the lens. I figured out that somehow I am turing on the white balance adjustment and setting it to this rose color. It is annoying as heck and I have missed several shots because of it. I must be inadvertently hitting one of the many buttons on the back of the camera with a knuckle when I grip the camera. I would love to know how to turn it off quickly and also of course know which button or wheel I am hitting. That said do you think your guide to the X100S would cover that specific problem or should I wait for the guide to the X100T if it is coming. Thanks.
Hello — As of now, I don’t have plans to do a book for the Fuji X100T. I have gotten backed up with other books that I need to do, and I’m afraid I won’t be able to squeeze in the X100T book. It’s hard to say whether the X100S book would be sufficiently helpful. I usually tell people in that situation to purchase the book about the older model, but get it from a place to which you can return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you would like.
As far as the white balance issue is concerned, I’m not sure, but possibly you might have the Quick Menu button assigned to white balance, and are pushing it accidentally. Or, you could be pressing the Down button, which presumably controls white balance on the X100T. If that’s the case, assuming the X100T works like the X100S, you could try pressing the Menu button for a few seconds to lock out the functioning of those buttons (along with other controls), to avoid inadvertent changes of settings.
I was told by nikon support that my coolpix p600 was not compatible with my kindle fire, but after downloading the wireless mobile utility app it works just fine.
Yes, you can use the iPhone 5 to connect to the camera using the app; the lack of NFC just means that you can’t connect the camera to the phone by touching them together. You have to use the regular connection method, instead of the physical-touching method that NFC allows.
Thanx very much but I have to ask you one more question.
You say I can connect the phone via the app to use the remote function from the iphone. But what if theres no wifi out in the wilderness?
What funcions does the app have and where do I get it?
The Wi-Fi network is generated by the camera. The app can be used to transfer images and also to control the camera remotely. Search for the Sony Play Memories Mobile app in the Apple App Store.
Hi — I’m sorry to hear you’re having a problem. Please check out the PDF and Ebook Download Support page at this site for some tips. If you’re downloading the ePub version, which works best for iPad and iPhone, click on the link for that file, and then, if you see an error message, click on the icon that looks like a rectangle with an arrow coming out of the top. You should then see a menu giving you choices to Open In … various applications. Choose Open In iBooks, and the book should appear in the iBooks app. If you’re downloading the PDF, it should be readable with any application that can read PDFs. I would need some more specific information about exactly what is happening to help further. Please send me a message at contact@whiteknightpress.com if you still need help. Thanks.
I’m not sure which pictures you’re asking about. If you’re talking about the images at the Sample Photos page, yes, the two bird photos and the photo of the moon were taken at the 2000mm maximum optical focal length of the P900’s lens.
I’m not sure which pictures you’re asking about. If you’re talking about the images at the Sample Photos page, yes, the two bird photos and the photo of the moon were taken at the 2000mm maximum optical focal length of the P900’s lens.
I’m not sure which pictures you’re asking about. If you’re talking about the images at the Sample Photos page, yes, the two bird photos and the photo of the moon were taken at the 2000mm maximum optical focal length of the P900’s lens.
I can’t find anything in the LX100 book (Kindle edition) that explains this. Maybe I missed it.
In AF mode, while zooming with the zoom lever the phrase “1.6-Infinity” (actually the symbol, not the word) appears above the on-screen focal length scale on the LCD or EVF. At first I thought it might be telling me something about the in-focus distance range. That is, everything from 1.6 ft to infinity will be in focus, based on the focus point, aperture, and focal length. But it says “1.6 – infinity” regardless of where I zoom the focal length, or set the aperture, or what I focused on. It never changes to show any other range. In AF-Macro mode the first number does change slightly as I zoom, but the 2nd number is always infinity.
What is the purpose of this on-screen indicator and how can it be used to advantage? Thanks.
That scale shows the focusing range of the camera according to the setting of the focus switch. In AF mode, the range is always 1.6 foot to infinity, regardless of the zoom range. In AF Macro mode, the minimum focus range changes with the zoom amount. In my opinion, the only value of this scale is to tell you the minimum focusing distance, so you will know the closest distance you can focus on, given the current setting of the focus switch and the amount of zoom that is being used.
have been trying to order this book for a week at barnes and noble, their computer is not working, can I order this book from you or where would you suggest that I can order this?
Hello — The book should be available now from Barnes & Noble’s online site at bn.com. The only other place I’m sure it’s available now is Amazon.com. It will be available from other online sites in coming days and weeks, but not in bookstores. I don’t have any copies on hand to sell.
have been trying to order this book for a week at barnes and noble, their computer is not working, can I order this book from you or where would you suggest that I can order this?
Hello — The book should be available now from Barnes & Noble’s online site at bn.com. The only other place I’m sure it’s available now is Amazon.com. It will be available from other online sites in coming days and weeks, but not in bookstores. I don’t have any copies on hand to sell.
have been trying to order this book for a week at barnes and noble, their computer is not working, can I order this book from you or where would you suggest that I can order this?
Hello — The book should be available now from Barnes & Noble’s online site at bn.com. The only other place I’m sure it’s available now is Amazon.com. It will be available from other online sites in coming days and weeks, but not in bookstores. I don’t have any copies on hand to sell.
I bought Alexander White’s 2014 excellent book “Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 III”. However, I’ve bought the just-released RX100 IV – the model four. There are few differences, but what exactly what are they, and what is the best way to take advantage of them? Any advice and suggestions would be appreciated! thank you, bob
Thank you very much, Alex, for the suggestions about where I might find some additional information. After you’ve had time to understand the model four of the RX100 will that information be available to me in any way other than purchasing another book? Might it be available somewhere online? Thanks again, Bob
Alex
Do you have any plans to put out Photographer’s Guide to the Sony Dsc-Rx100 IV
If so what would be your guestimate for a release date.
Thanks!
Jeff
Having owned the LX100 for a while before giving it as a gift to my father, I can assure you there are tonal changes between that and my Typ 109 particularly and noticeably around orange tones (also affecting skin tones) where I’d suggest the LX100 produces more accurate colours even though I still prefer the tones from the 109 (after dealing with the orange channel in photoshop). The Leica white balance also leans towards the warmer side (although this is not necessarily a ‘colour processing’ issue per se.
You use the zoom lever to set the focal length, according to the distance from your subject and the angle of view you are interested in. If the main subject is far away, you may want to zoom the lens in so the subject will be magnified enough to see it clearly. If you want to have a wide view of a room or a landscape, you will need to zoom the lens back out to its wide-angle position.
Hi Alex, I just received my RX100IV and am aware that your book on the RX100IV won’t available for a few more months. I was wondering whether it would beneficial for me to purchase your RX100 III book since much of features on both models are suppose to be similar? Thanks, Ray
Hi, Bob. I don’t have a formal program for upgrades from one version of the book to another, but if you send me a message after the new book is available, I will work out some sort of discount for you and for anyone else who has purchased the RX100 III book while waiting for the RX100 IV book to come out.
Hello, Bob — I just received my new RX100 IV camera the other day and have not yet a chance to start reviewing its operation in detail. My understanding is that the main differences are in the video features, including 4K video and super slow-motion video. There also is a capability for very fast shutter speeds using an electronic shutter. I will be working with these features over the next several weeks in order to write my new book for this camera, which I hope to publish by September or October. In the meantime, you might want to check the Sony Cyber-shot Talk Forum at dpreview.com for tips and advice about the best use of these and any other new features.
No, I have only been doing books for compact still cameras, although of course they all have video features nowadays. But I don’t plan to do any books for camcorders at this point.
Pleased to learn that the book on the RX100M4 is forthcoming. Just bought the camera and I am eager to learn more about of this complex piece of kit. I own the III book in electronic form which is very helpful, but of course doesn’t cover all the intricacies of the IV.
I like your guides so much that I bought the one for the RX100 III to help me with my IV. Thats helpful and will do until your guide to the IV comes out. But I’m eager to make the switch because, as you say, there is much different about the IV. So, September? I hope.
I’m sure you know what question is coming…… Are you doing a book for the RX100 m4 ?? Because I’m not buying that camera until you do! I love your books!!!!!! Thank you so much for all your help.
Hello — Thanks for your comment! Yes, I am working on that book and I hope to have it done by September, though it could slip into October. I’ll put you on the list to be notified when it’s available.
Alex, I just send a message asking the same thing. (before I saw this post). If I purchased the electronic III version would there be that much difference between the III and the IV – operationally?
Hello, David — There are many areas in which the 2 cameras operate the same way, but there are significant differences also. For example, the RX100 IV has a different range of shutter speeds and it has some differences in how it handles ISO. Also, of course, there are significant differences in the video features. So, the RX100 III book would be quite helpful, but there would be several areas in which the existing book would seem confusing.
Alex, I too am buying the IV (leaving for France and can’t wait for the IV book to come out). Thanks very much for your offer to work something out – I will definitely buy the III book now.
Regards,
Hello
can this same or similar effect be done on the Coolpix L850 ? If so, could I get some information on how to do that? I need to shoot some photos with a blurred background. Thank you so much.
Hello — I couldn’t find any information on the Coolpix L850, so I’ll answer for the L840. I haven’t worked with that model, but I understand that it does not have shooting modes such as Aperture Priority or Manual, which you would use in order to set a wide aperture to blur the background. What you can do, though, is use a fairly long focal length with the zoom lens, such as 400mm or higher, and get as close to the foreground subject as possible, with the background fairly far in the distance beyond the foreground subject. With that arrangement, the background should be blurred to a fairly good extent. To increase the blurring effect, use a longer focal length. Also, if you can control the lighting, try to have fairly dim lighting so the camera will use a wider aperture.
Just ordered it and I am very pleased with the book, which allows me to get a grip on the intricacies of this complex camera. Will give more feedback once I have covered it all!
Thousands of us are waiting for your book on Sony RX10 II. This is a game changer for small business people, Photographer/ Videophiles & hobbyists alike.
I should be starting work on that book in early October, after a brief delay following the RX100 IV book. I’ll post updates as the book progresses. Thanks.
Hello — Yes, the book is available now. If you look at the third-party sellers at amazon.co.uk, you will see that several of them state that they can deliver the book within a few days after the order is placed. It’s also likely that Amazon itself is exaggerating the time for delivery, but you probably will do better if you order it from one of the third-party sellers; just click on the link for “6 New from 17.62” and find a seller with a quick delivery time.
Hi, I bought your Sony RX100iv book and I also bought the RX10 book because I bought the RX10ii book and that’s not out yet. I also have your RX100ii book and I loved that.
Can you answer a question or include this information when you publish the RX10ii book?
I’m using the slow motion 960FPS and there’s a 1:27 delay while the buffer writes to the card. I’m using a 90MBS card. But I tried some of the 40MBS cards and it was the same. I can’t find out if I buy a 280MB/s card if it will make any difference and cut down the 1:27 wait time. Sony has no info and slow mo is why I bought the camera. I works great. Good purchase. Now if Sony will supply info, that will be great.
Also you may or may not know that the smart remote PC app says it doesn’t work with HFR, but it works fine and I called Sony and asked abut the RM-VPR1 remote and they checked with a supervisor and said it won’t work with HFR. And it works perfectly too. Just good info. Love your books.
Hi, Drew — I don’t have a definitive answer to your question, but my guess is that the speed of the card would not make much difference, if any, in the speed of processing of an HFR sequence. I use a very fast card, and it still takes a long time. I don’t know the exact time, but it may well be about 1:27, as it is for you. I’ll see if there’s any more information out there, but I’m not sure there is. Also, thanks for the information about the remote app and the remote device working with HFR.
Hi Alex, I just received the VCT-VPR1 Sony remote tripod and its remote also works perfectly with the RX10ii. I also found a tutorial on extending the cable (soldering 8 wires) and I’m doing that now so I’ll have a 20′ cable. So you know, the start and stop Video recording works perfectly. But you still need to hit the center button first on the camera. But with the remote the camera is much more useful for a single photographer. I’ve been popping water balloons, lighting matches and capturing hummingbirds, seagulls and pigeons. Now I’m off to hammer on watermelons, light bulbs and more. Do let me know if there’s any way to cut down the 1:27 wait between shots. It’s the only problem I have with the camera.
Hi, Drew — Sounds like you’re taking full advantage of the slow-motion feature — that’s great! If I dig up any information about the wait time I’ll let you know, though I still suspect that is just the required processing time.
hi Alex, i see you can take great pics , i always thought if i need to take such pics i have to use DSLR but now i know its possible from point n shoot cameras too, but that also makes me wonder in what respect we can give DSLR more advantage ?
If you can be a bit more specific with your question, I’ll respond if I can. I’m not sure I will have a great answer, because I work mostly with point-and-shoot cameras and am not that familiar with the larger models.
Mr. White, I could not find the answer in your Sony RX 100 IV, so here goes. I printed several photos at public place, and days later when I tried to show someone the same images on the camera, this is what appeared: ? Unable to Display.
Would you know what happened and is it possible to bring those same pictures back to the camera?
Thank you, Laurence
Hello, Laurence – I believe this happens when images from the card have been downloaded to a computer, or possibly, as in your case, printed. You might want to try using the Recover Image DB option on screen 5 of the Setup menu; it might help. Also, I found the following information through a search for “unable to display” online:
“It may be possible to recover deleted pictures or data from your SD card by using the Memory Card File Rescue 3D software. This software is available as a free download online in the Software & Drivers section. [Look for this at esupport.sony.com]
If the Memory Card File Rescue is unable to recover your files, then the SD card may need to be sent to a professional data recovery service company, like Sony Media Services or DriveSavers Data Recovery. For more information and pricing, visit the Sony Media Services Web site at http://www.sonymediaservices.com/, or the DriveSavers Data Recovery Web site at http://www.drivesaversdatarecovery.com.
NOTE: Sony is not responsible for any data loss or any cost incurred from the recovery of data.”
I hope some of this information helps with the issue.
How do you know / set what the ISO settings are and set Matrix metering method when using Birdwatching scene mode? All I see is shutter speed and aperture
The Birdwatching setting is a setting in Scene mode, in which the camera controls most of the settings automatically. You cannot adjust settings like ISO and metering method in Scene mode. You would have to switch to a shooting mode like Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual if you want to control more settings. If you want to know what ISO setting the camera is using, you can take a picture and then check the ISO setting for that image in playback mode.
Thanks for the prompt response Alex. Ah, just taken a photo, switched to playback and pressed the Display button and sure enough it shows the ISO at 800. I thought you were showing the settings you had ‘chosen’ but I guess as you are in a scene mode you are telling us what the camera selected, so I guess you have zoomed and the camera did the rest? Did you ascertain the focal length as it was at maximum zoom and you know this is 1440, as all I see is 800mm until it gets to telephoto marker then nothing? The results I get in this mode at max zoom don’t seem as good as yours but lighting conditions may have been better; mine are hand held but I’m not sure if they would improve as they are consistent
To tell what focal length was used, if the maximum focal length was used I would know that the value was 1440mm. Another way I can tell the focal length is by looking at the metadata in the software I use for managing my images. I generally use Adobe Bridge, though I sometimes use the Nikon software also.
That’s interesting, I didn’t realise this type of information was held in the JPG but I’ve just looked at the properties and sure enough it’s there – brilliant! Many thanks
Thanks for your comment! I appreciate receiving the suggestion. So far I have only written books for compact cameras with fixed lenses, but someday I might try doing books for DSLRs like the Canon T5i. I will keep your suggestion in mind for future plans.
This is an excellent guide. It is a must for gaining control of the Leica D-Lux 109.
The Leica manual accompaning this camera was unuseable …… also their pdf file was equally difficult. Your guide made the difference between keeping the camera or returning it to Leica.
Now I really enjoy using this amazing little camera.
Thank You ….. BC
Hello — I don’t have a book for that model at present and I don’t have a plan for one, but I will consider that suggestion for the future. Thanks for your comment!
for someone who wants video but not huge on video do you feel the rx10ii is worth the extra cost over the mark 1 rx10? The camera will be used for travel disney and alaska. can’t wait to order the book on whichever camera i go with.
Hello — No, I would say the original RX10 is fine for ordinary video use; the RX10 II has refinements that put it into the level of semi-professional or professional video work, which probably would be overkill for general travel video.
Do you feel the photo is that much better in the II? I’m also debating the a6000 but really do not want to carry a bunch of lens around. But if the quality is night and day I may consider it.
No, I think the RX10 I is a great camera. The RX10 II has some good new features, but not ones that everyone needs or would use. I think for everyday use I would go with the RX10 I, assuming the price differential is fairly large.
Hello — I have sent you a couple of email messages over the past few days with a link to the book files. I hope you have received your book by now. If not, let me know and I will try to find another to help. Thanks.
Hello — I have sent you a couple of email messages over the past few days with a link to the book files. I hope you have received your book by now. If not, let me know and I will try to find another to help. Thanks.
I note your comment about cameras with fixed lenses. If you do branch into system cameras, is there any chance of a guide to the Olympus EM-10 (mark II)?
In your excellent Photographer’s Guide to the Sony DSC RX10 II you say “If you do choose JPEG, I strongly recommend that you choose the Large size and Extra Fine quality ….” Choosing a size is not hard to understand, but choosing a quality value is a mystery. Would you please discuss further how a user can decide between using the Quality values of Standard, Fine, and Extra Fine. I have experienced that an image file may be about 5 MB at the Fine quality setting and about 10 MB at the Extra Fine quality setting. When I view images that were made at these two settings, I cannot tell the difference between the two images. I would like to better understand what I will be gaining by saving Extra Fine quality image files at double the size of Fine quality image files.
It really depends on how you will use the image. If you know that you will only be viewing it online or making a small print, you can choose Fine or even Standard. The difference from the Quality setting is likely to be apparent only when making a larger print or cropping the image and enlarging a portion of it. You will start seeing “compression artifacts” as a compressed image is enlarged to increasing sizes. I recommend using the highest quality, in case you may need to make a larger print or crop the image at some point. But, as I said above, if you are certain you only need small snapshots or images for viewing on a computer or other electronic device, you could use a lower Quality setting to save on file size and storage space.
I recently bought a Sony RX100iv and just discovered that it does hi speed video! Which SD card do you recommend? And does your RX100 iv cover video issues for the beginner ??
I have had good experiences with the SanDisk 256 GB Extreme 80MB/s SDXC card, rated in UHS Speed Class 3. Another good card is the SanDisk Extreme PRO 64 GB card, rated in UHS Speed Class 1, if you don’t need to record with the 100 Mbps setting. Yes, I believe my book has the information a beginner needs for using the camera for video recording, in Chapter 8.
Thanks Alex.
Would be nice if you would do a book or multiple books on the Panasonic MFT camras and lenses. It’s great gear and so much more compact than a FF or APS-C setup.
Had a GF1 and G10 in the beginning when their lens selection was less extenstive but with the lenses they got now I couldn’t resist getting me a GX-8.
I’m still keeping my RX10 II and P900 though, along with your books! 🙂
You can download the Nikon User’s Guide for free, but this book is a different item. It is a guide that explains the various features and controls of the camera, along with hundreds of illustrations. You may do fine with just the official user’s guide, but some people prefer a book with more detailed explanations of how particular menu options and controls are used.
You can download the Nikon User’s Guide for free, but this book is a different item. It is a guide that explains the various features and controls of the camera, along with hundreds of illustrations. You may do fine with just the official user’s guide, but some people prefer a book with more detailed explanations of how particular menu options and controls are used.
You can download the Nikon User’s Guide for free, but this book is a different item. It is a guide that explains the various features and controls of the camera, along with hundreds of illustrations. You may do fine with just the official user’s guide, but some people prefer a book with more detailed explanations of how particular menu options and controls are used.
I bought the paper only edition a while ago. How may I request the full-color PDF version of the book which is supposed to be free of charge when you get the paper edition?
Hi Alex … I purchased your book for the Rx100m3 & it’s really useful … Thank You !!
I’m thinking of purchasing the Rx1r II but have been led to believe it has NO IMAGE STABILIZATION. Could you kindly clarify this ?? … Digital camera’s have had Image Stabilization since close to 15 years now. What exactly were Sony thinking ??
Hello, Prakash — Actually, the RX1R II does have stabilization for video, but not for still images. I don’t know much about Sony’s rationale for that decision, but I guess it is partly because the camera has a fixed, wide-angle lens and performs well at high ISO settings, so stabilization is not as necessary as it would be with longer focal lengths and slower shutter speeds. It’s a great camera, and I don’t think too many people have been upset by the lack of that feature.
Any plans for a book on the RX10 III? I purchased your RX10 I book when I purchased that camera. I skipped the Mark II version, but will be purchasing the Mark III version of the camera.
Yes, I plan to work on a book for the RX10 III as soon as I can get that camera. I have read that production of that model is delayed because of the recent earthquakes in Japan, but as soon as possible I will work on that book.
Mine is shipping today from B&H, and they are showing the camera in stock (today, 5/4/16 is the official release date). I pre-ordered mine last week as I was concerned that once the initial inventory was sold (presumably manufactured before the earthquake) there might be production problems with subsequent production. Then again, it’s possible that this model hasn’t been affected at all by the earthquake. Nikon’s DL series have been delayed, presumably due to the earthquake.
Oh, okay — thanks for pointing that out. I thought I was going to have to wait several months. I am still working on another book right now, so I won’t be starting on the Sony RX10 III for at least a month or so. I will post updates at the site as I make progress.
As I understand it, the M3 version is essentially identical to the M2, with the primary, if not sole difference being the lens. If this is in fact true, then it seems it might make sense to purchase the PDF version of the M2 book. This would for the most part, bring me up to speed with the changes from my M1 camera and book, and for $10, would provide most of the information on changes between the M1 and M3 until the M3 paperback book is published. Thoughts?
I was eagerly awaiting the Nikon DL24-500 biut with the earthquake and production issues, I understand it won’t be available until November, 2016! (To late for my upcoming Safari). The Panasonic FZ1000 has amazing reviews, but not enough reach. So despite the cost and complaints about the obscure menu options, I ordered the brand new Sony RX10-iii. I have read good things about your guide to the RX10-ii- do you know if it will still be useful for the new model? Any plans for an update? I have little time to practice and I am a rank amateur photographer:) Thank you!
I will be doing a book for the RX10 III, but not for a few more months. I don’t have the camera yet, and probably won’t get it until July. In the meantime, I believe the RX10 II book would be fairly helpful, although there would be some areas of difference. I will send you a further reply by email.
Because of your experience, I would be grateful to learn: If price is no object, which of the compacts (“point and shoots”) would you buy in today’s market if you can only have one?
That’s a very hard question to give a good answer to. For one thing, I have only worked directly with a few models. Also, it depends on what type(s) of photography you are most interested in. But, to give an answer, if price is no object and you can manage with a fixed focal length 35mm lens, the Sony RX1R II, with its full-frame sensor, is hard to beat. For a smaller sensor model that is much less expensive, I would recommend the Sony RX100 IV. The Panasonic LX100 is another great small camera.
No, that book was written specifically for the RX1R II. I never used the RX1 model, but I understand there are fairly considerable differences between the models, and the recent book probably would not be as helpful as you would want or need.
I am finishing up another book now, and I hope to start on the Sony RX10 III book fairly soon. I should have it completed by sometime in August or September if all goes well. I will post updates about the progress at this site. Thanks for asking!
Hi Alex, I just received my shiny new RX10M3. Is there any chance I could purchase the RX10M2 pdf and get a reduced price on the forthcoming RX10M3 pdf?
Hi Alex. I have the same questions as several of your other potential book buyers of your upcoming DSC-RX10 lll book. My camera arrived two weeks ago and takes amazing photos, however, as an old photographer with no time to waste i need a detailed written approach to accessing the buried features of the RX10 III. Will you offer an upgrade or discount if we purchase your RX 10 II Kindle E-book?? Thanks in advance, Perry.
I never worked with the RX1R, but my understanding is that the differences between the two cameras are significant enough that the new book would probably not be all that helpful for the older camera. There would be some helpful parts, but overall I think it would be frustrating to try to use this book for the original camera model.
I cut my teeth on your wonderful Sony RX100II book a few years ago. It really helped get me started.
My son just got me a fantastic Fuji X70 and I’m using your Fuji X100S book at present to get by.
Any plans to do a book specifically for the X70?
Thank You.
Hi Alex, It seems like I’m another one that has just purchased the rx10 iii and am desperate to learn how to use this amazing camera. So I’m asking the same question about whether it’s possible to buy the rx10 ii pdf/ ebook and get a discounted upgrade to your new rx10 iii pdf/ ebook.
Cheers, Mick C
Same as others. Just purchased rx10 III, and you Kindle version of rx10 II. Any discount on the upgraded version of your book would be greatly appreciated.
Hi, Ken — Thanks very much for your comment! I have added you to the list to be notified when the book is available. I will post a notice here at this site, also.
Hi: I had purchased the RX10 book you’d written for the original model, and am waiting for the RX10 III camera I just bought from Amazon. I noticed that you had updated the book for the RX10 II. I have two questions. Are you planning to come out with a version for the RX10 III? If not, would you recommend that I buy the RX10 II book? I would do so if the II is fairly different from the original model, but is fairly similar to the III (if that makes sense!)
Yes, I am currently working on a book for the RX10 III camera. I hope to have it published sometime in July. The RX10 II camera is fairly different from the first model and more similar to the third one, so the RX10 II book would be quite helpful for the RX10 III, but there are enough differences that it is probably worth waiting a few weeks for the new book.
Any idea when your guidebook for the new Sony RX10 iii wil be out?
In the meantime, do you think your guidebook on the RX10ii would be helpful? Headed to Scotland in a few weeks and would really like to get more comfortable with the new camera.
Thanks. Will be buying the new book also whenever it comes out.
I am working steadily on the RX10 III book, and am hoping to have it out in the second half of July. I do think the RX10 II book would be fairly helpful for the new camera model. There are of course several differences, such as the lack of an ND filter, the longer lens, and some new options, such as Zoom Assist and Focus Hold, but overall the similarities far outweigh the differences.
Me too! I have the wonderful RX10 lll and am finding your book on the RX10 ll really helpful and look forward, with many others, to your next book on the lll – are you able to let us know immediately it is available please.
Kind regards from the UK – and keep writing!
Ken
Thanks but I didn’t make myself very clear, I have your guide on rx10 but I have updated software to version 2 and wondered if you have an update for the video codec they have included and how best to use it, that is for the original rx10 but with updated software ?
I did have a blog post about the update; here is a link to that post. That is the only update I have posted, apart from publishing new, updated books for the RX10 II and RX10 III cameras themselves.
I’m assuming you are talking about the Live View Display option on screen 3 of the Custom menu. No, for some reason Sony did not include that menu option as one of those that can be assigned to the Function menu or to one of the programmable control buttons.
‘morning Alex
Thanks for your excellent ebook on the RX10Mk3- I go to it frequently while finding my way with the kit.
A point of interest, perhaps! I have a need to use Lock-on AF when photographing aircraft, the instructions state ‘This option is available for selection only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF (ie: C) with the focus switch.’
Well, I attempted to set this up many times over several days without success, I have been switching the camera on then selecting C – eventually I found that the Focus switch needed to be at C BEFORE switching on the camera – doesn’t work if you switch to C AFTER switching on. Or have I got this all wrong?
Best regards
Ken
Hello, Ken — I just tried this with my RX10 III camera, and there was no problem activating Lock-On AF when I moved the focus switch to the C position after turning on the camera. I have never had a problem in that regard. Maybe there was some other setting that conflicted with what you were trying to do, but without more information I can’t think of anything that would cause that problem.
Thanks for your response Alex – I did suspect that there may be a conflicting setting causing my problem – I’ll investigate it further and keep you posted, if you do not mind.
Regards
Ken
Alex – I have worked out where I have been going wrong – I have been confused between ‘Lock-on AF: Center’ and ‘Center Lock-on AF’ and trying to combine them – and then I came to P91: Center Lock-on AF, is a separate menu option. It is not available when the Lock-on AF option has been selected for Focus Area.p91. It’s been interesting trying to resolve the problem – for me, photographing relatively slow WW2 aircraft, it would seem that ‘Lock-on AF: centre’ would work well. Would you agree?
Thank you for your patience.
Best regards
Ken
Hello, Ken — I think that Lock-on AF: Center is probably a good option. I think the answer also may depend on the distance at which you are photographing the planes. If they are sufficiently far away that you can focus at infinity, you could do that, and switch the camera to manual focus to lock focus at that distance. But, if the focus distance is variable or will be changing during the flight, Lock-on AF Center should work well.
Good point Alex – I’ll check it out next weekend when I will be visiting Old Warden airfield where the Shuttleworth Collection of elderly aircraft is based.
Best regards
Ken
Mr WHITE bonjour,
I have a question concerning the setting of the Bracketing on the Sony RX10 III. In your book page 52 Continuous Exposure Bracketing you write “When you highlight this option you will see a horizontal triangle…”
I cannot highlight the bracketing icons of the differentsv options. Please how the bracketing icon must be highlighted ?
Thank you for your help.
Regards
Claude Guillemin
It sounds to me as if you have an inconsistent setting in place. For example, you cannot use exposure bracketing in Intelligent Auto mode, Scene mode, or Sweep Panorama mode, and you cannot use exposure bracketing if Multi Frame Noise Reduction is set for ISO, or if the Auto HDR setting is turned on. Check those settings, and see if that helps.
I have purchased a copy of this book and have found to be very helpful. However I have a problem with changing the date and time. Your book suggest that a setting for this can be found in the setup menu 4. On my RX10 iii the fourth panel of the setup menu does not have the date/time option that is shown in the book. Can this be found somewhere else in the menu system?
On my RX10 III, the version sold for the United States market, Date/Time Setup is on screen 4 of the Setup menu, which is the menu marked by the toolbox icon, as shown here:
If you have a camera that was sold for a different part of the world, it’s possible that the menu items are in different locations, but I would not know exactly where to tell you to find it. It should not be hard to locate this menu option on another panel of the Setup menu.
Thanks for your quick response. One of the options I tried was having the dial on M and I double checked the shutter setting, which was on Auto. I also tried it with the shutter set to Mechanical and Electronic to see if that would change anything. So I must have a different setting that’s causing the Bulb to not appear. I’m only on Chapter 4 so haven’t finished setting the camera up, but wi try your suggestion. Thanks again.
Another possibility is that Drive Mode is set to continuous shooting or another setting other than single shooting. You can press the Left button and then make sure the top option on the Drive Mode menu, for single shooting, is selected.
Problem solved. I called Sony, and it turns out that the bulb setting doesn’t show up when you’re in auto ISO. I usually set my camera at ISO 100 for nature photography, but I had it in auto ISO. Once I put it into ISO 100, the bulb setting showed up. Thanks again for your suggestions has everything helps in my learning how to use this new camera.
Okay, I’m glad you got it figured out. Thanks for letting me know.
Robert Hellie
Thanks. I just didn’t look far enough. I assumed the cog icon was the settings menu. I see now the toolbox icon is the place. Makes sense. I should have read your book more closely. Of course, it was right there.
When the lens is zoomed in to the range of Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom and autofocus is in use, the Focus Area menu option is disabled and the camera uses a broad focus frame, which is represented by a dotted area like that seen in Figure 7-34.
Does that mean that the camere in Clear Image Zoom focusses on the whole scene that is visible? And not for exemple on the center? So that it is impossible to focus on the little bird in the center?
2. Is MF-assist and Focus Magnifier available after choosing Clear Image Zoom?
Thanks for your book. Two questions remain for me:
1. In your book you say: When the lens is zoomed in to the range of Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom and autofocus is in use, the Focus Area menu option is disabled and the camera uses a broad focus frame, which is represented by a dotted area like that seen in Figure 7-34.
Does that mean that it is impossible to focus on the bird in the center because the camera focusses on the whole visible scene?
2. Is MF-assist and/or Focus Magnifier available when using Clear Image Zoom
Hello — Thanks for your comment. I’ll try to answer both questions:
1. Yes, when the lens is actually zoomed into the range beyond optical zoom, the camera will not use the Focus Area setting, but will use the entire frame as outlined within the dotted line, instead. The camera may still focus on a bird in the center of that frame, but you cannot force the camera to focus on the center.
2. Yes, both MF Assist and Focus Magnifier are available when using Clear Image Zoom, as long as other conditions permit their use. For example, naturally, for MF Assist to work, the camera must be set to manual focus using the focus switch.
Yes, that is correct. When either Smart Zoom or Smart Teleconverter is in use, the camera will use the broad focus frame instead of the Focus Area menu setting.
I bought your book to discover the possibillities of the RX10 III. Untill now I use the Canon SX60HS, mainly for birdwatching. The big challenge is to make photo’s of birds that are small or far away or hidden in the trees. Although I am pleased with the Canon I hope to improve image quality a lot with the RX10 III.
From what you explained I guess I could be a good choice to choose DMF as focus mode so that I have the possibility to choose (in situations where I want to make a photo of a bird, small of far away):
1. to use optical zoom with the possibility to choose the focus area (perhaps using MF-assist to see for a moment what I am aiming at)
2. to use Clear Image Zoom with the chance that the camera picks the wrong focus area. In that case MF-assist could help to get the right focus (when bird gives me enough time!) when autofocus fails.
The RX10 III provides so many options for focusing that it’s hard to choose one set of options over another; a lot depends on the specific circumstances of the shooting session. Your suggested procedures sound fine. For number one, you could assign Focus Magnifier to a control button and use the S or C setting for autofocus, and press the assigned button when you wanted to magnify the focus area. Also, instead of using Clear Image Zoom, you might consider just using optical zoom, and crop the image to enlarge the area with the bird. Then you could still use the Focus Area settings.
I will be doing a new book for the RX100 V, which I hope to have published by early next year, January if all goes well. I first have to finish another book, and will get to the RX100 V as soon as possible after that. I will post further information at this site as things develop.
I have bought your book on ZS100. A very good supplement to the Operating Instructions from Panasonic.
I would like to seek for your advice on one technical question. Is it possible to adjust exposure compensation when using Manual Exposure Mode with Auto ISO?
Hello — I no longer have this camera, so I can’t test it, but, based on what is written in my book and in the Panasonic user’s guide, my understanding is that exposure compensation is not available when the camera is set to Manual exposure mode.
Thank you very much. I have arrived at the same conclusion. This missing feature is very useful. I have been using it most of the time when shooting with my D810. Hope that this feature can be included in the next firmware update of ZS100.
No, I don’t have a guide book for either of those models. I don’t currently have plans for one, but I will make a note of your interest as I plan future books. Thanks.
It would be interesting to know if the camera was “IR enabled” by removing the hot mirror in front of the sensor. The s100 is quite hackable with the sensor sitting right below the LCD and the hot mirror held in place only with a soft gasket (no sealant).
My RX100 V battery loses some charge over a period of days – even when not switched on. Also: charge indicator shows 1 bar more charge if switched on for viewing photos in memory than when switched on for shooting. I owned a RX100 II for three years with no such problem. Distressing. Any similar experiences out there?
I haven’t had any problems with mine, but I don’t use it everyday. Maybe someone else will comment here, or you could ask in the Sony Cyber-shot Talk forum at dpreview.com, if you haven’t already tried there.
I need to shoot some video with my RX10 M3 for documentation purposes. I would like to imprint the running date and time into the video file. From your book, I see there is a menu setting to do that for still photos, but not for video. Do you know of a way to do this? I have Lightroom CC and Adobe Premier Elements if either of those could be used to add a date/time stamp to the viewable video file. I also have a Nikon D800E that I could use, if that would make a difference.
Hi, Russ — I am not sure if Premiere Elements can do this; I don’t have that program. I believe Premiere Pro CC can do it, though I have not tried it. You can use the camera’s Time Code options to display the current time while recording, as discussed in Chapter 7, though you would need to take further steps in your editing software to make the time information appear in the finished footage. I did a quick search online and found various discussions of this issue, including mention of some plug-ins and other programs that might be able to do this, but I’m afraid I don’t have experience with the process myself.
Thanks, Alex. I did the same search, and basically had the same results as you. There must be some technical reason it can’t be done in-camera, which is too bad, because it would be the easiest solution for this particular situation.
Im having problems with HFR mode, when im in HFR i can not focus the camera. I tried all focus modes and nothing works. Did not see a solution to this in the book.
You have to adjust focus before starting the recording, as you probably know. You can choose either continuous AF or manual focus. It’s possible that you have some other setting in place that conflicts with what you are trying to do. You won’t see a focus frame, so it may be hard to tell if focus is being adjusted.
Very happy with the e-book on the RX10M3. Excellent explanations. Two suggestions, if I may, Some examples of MR settings for different situations, e.g. birds in the distance, sunsets etc and the best accessory for me was a little line attached (with an adhesive sticker) to the lens cap. Thank you.
Hi, I really love your book on the Fuji X10, and it has helped me A LOT to get the most from that camera – thanks ! I am now considering an upgrade to the X100F. Any plans on a book for that? If not, will your book about the older X100 camera be helpful, or will that be too outdated? I hear that the X100F is quite a different camera from the first X100 model. Thanks for your feedback !
Hello — I don’t have plan for a book for the X100F, though I will consider it for the future if there is time. I would say it is not that likely, but possible. From what I understand, my books for the X100 and X100S are probably too outdated at this point to be all that helpful.
Bonjour Mr White,
I got both the paperback and electronic versions of your wonderful RX10 M3 guide and I have a question concerning playback enlargment. Still, I first want to make sure I can really exchange messages with your site, so, I would be grateful if you could acknowledge reception of the present message.
Tank you in advance and please, excuse my english faults, now and in the future ?.
Claude
Bonjour Alex,
Boy, some rapid customer support response! We are not used to that in France 🙂
Here is my request. In playback mode for still images, using the available enlargement control (lever, button, etc.) generally allows to gradually enlarge the image from its smallest normal display size to its maximum enlargement level. This has always been true since I use digital cameras and it is still true with my Nikon D7100 and my Sony HX90.
Let’s see what happens with my RX10M3, bought two weeks ago, in France.
1/ Standard magnification: after pressing the display mode button, whichever control is used afterwards to enlarge the initial display image (zoom lever or AEL button), one suddenly gets an almost maximum enlargement level of the image. One is therefore forced to fully zoom out with the W position of the zoom lever in order to reach a reasonable image size. I like to check my images after shooting, and having to systematically do what is written above is quite cumbersome.
2/ Previous magnification: this option could have been acceptable if, after enlarging the image to a given level and then quickly returning to the image normal size with the Menu or Centre button, the memorized “previous magnification” active for the next image enlargement was the “normal size”. Unfortunately, the only way to memorize a “previous normal size image” is to fully zoom out with the W position of the zoom lever. And this too is very cumbersome.
Do I have a problem with my camera? Is this a mistake in the programming of all RX10M3s and no one has noticed (I have been reading scores of reviews on the net) or no one really feels concerned with this situation?
I wrote to Sony France = “Unfortunately, we don’t presently have an answer to your request”.
What do you think Alex? Merci.
Claude
Hi, Claude — That’s an interesting question. I had not really thought about that issue before, but I can see that you are correct; there is no very easy way to set the initial magnification level lower, other than to zoom the previous image back down to that low level first. I guess Sony’s engineers felt that, to check focus, you would want to zoom in quite fully. Presumably, they did not take into account that some users, like you, are not satisfied with checking the image at a single zoom level, but want to start out small and then zoom in gradually. So, unless you take the time to zoom the image back out each time before you go to the next image, I cannot think of any way to avoid this issue.
Thank you Alex, glad tout see you understand my problem.
I still think something is wrong with this new and unique enlargement procedure, because the imposed immediate zoom level is so high that you do not even know which part of the image is enlarged, which results in having to zoom a long way out and /or check the tiny monitor thumbnail and its orange insert (do not be impressed by the correction of my vocabulary, I’m just reading your guide 🙂 ).
I can’t believe the Sony’s engineers goal was to make things difficult to their customers !
I will try to write to Sony Japan on this issue and will keep you posted.
Cordialement,
Claude
I have the Sony RX100 iii and was wondering how you fit a reversing ring onto the lens and have it stay in place once the lens retracts? Or do you take off the reversing ring before the 30 minute maximum time limit before the lens retract?
Also, the zoom is from 24mm to 70mm. How did the writer get his lens to zoom to 140mm when his combination should be the 24mm to 70mm on camera lens and the reversed 50mm lens attached to the front of the camera?
I’ll do my best to answer you inquiry about my macro method.
First you already know that the lens on your model Sony (and mine) do not come equipped with threads to accommodate filters. So in order to attach filters you have to buy a filter adapter kit.
That kit consists of a base ring (that is contact cemented around the lens), and a clip on ring with threads that can be attached to the base ring by pressing on its “ears” somewhat like attaching a lens cap. My kit will facilitate the attachment of 49mm. filters although I believe some photo suppliers also have 52mm kits. Once the adapter is in place a variety of 49mm filters can be added to the front of the lens. Because my 50mm 1.8 Canon lens took filters 52mm. in diameter, I bought a 49mm-52mm (double “male”) reversing ring that I attached to the adapter. That allowed me to attach my 50mm. lens in reverse to the front of the Sony lens. The camera lens and its additions can be retracted without having to detach any of the add-ons.
Regarding the zoom choice, i.e., 140mm. vs. 70mm., there are 3 selections available through the camera’s menu. Optical (24mm-70mm), Clear Image Zoom (24mm-140mm)and Digital Zoom.
I chose the Clear Image Zoom option in order to extend the zoom range with a minimum of image loss of resolution. You can enlarge the image size with the Digital zoom but at a cost of some
image softening. It can be argued that the Optical zoom delivers the best sharpness but I can tell you that the Clear Image feature is very good. With the 50mm. attached there is no discernible vignetting of the 50mm iris. I have photographed subjects ranging between 4mm.-10mm and can clearly see the tiny hairs and eye facets of flies tack sharp. As I mentioned in the blog, I use the Photoshop elements 11 photomerge option to achieve insect sharpness from “head to toe”.
I carry the camera in my jacket pocket in the winter and on a belt pouch in the warmer weather. Have you experienced any problems with the base ring being contact cemented to the lens snagging on the inside of a pocket or belt pouch?
I can’t advise you on carrying the camera in your pocket because I always stow mine in one of the small firm belt pouches that come as a recommended accessory, regardless of the weather. Of course our weather here in Riverside CA probably never gets cold enough to warrant using body temp to keep the camera warm. I have never had the base ring hang up in the case. The ring extends only about 2mm. and I doubt whether it would be a problem in even a fuzzy lined pocket. The only caution that I have heard pertains to the the exposed iris lens cap that is vulnerable to damage from a carelessly placed thumb or finger. I have had no issue with that, but I handle the body carefully while extracting or replacing it in the pouch. If this is a worry, you can always attach a UV filter to the base ring and leave it there. The only other caveat is that when replacing the camera in the pouch fitted with a small pocket that accommodates a couple of replacement batteries, I find it wise to face the back of the camera toward the battery pocket so that the slight bulge doesn’t press into the lens.
but that’s more than you wanted to know I believe!
Please write an addendum for the X100T! I just bought your book since there wasn’t another guide and even though I’ve had my camera for almost a year, I still am finding it really helpful. Now that the F model is out, perhaps do an addendum for both cameras? Please? 😉
I appreciate the suggestion; it is very helpful to hear what books would be useful to readers. I don’t expect to do a new book for the X100T, because there are other books I need to work on and I just don’t have the time to get to them all. I can’t just do an addendum; I would have to purchase the camera and any accessories and spend weeks learning about it, so it’s not really practical to do an addendum. I took a quick look at Amazon.com and saw that there now are some guides available for the X100T. I don’t know how good any of them are, but maybe you can find one of them that gives you some insights.
I understand, I was half joking. Unfortunately the other guides did not get good reviews. But perhaps you would consider doing one for the X100F since that has just been released. Apparently it is more similar to the X100T than the X100S, so that could potentially cover both models! Appreciate you responding to my comment.
Here is a link to that book’s information page. That page has buttons you can click on to take you to the sites for purchasing the book in various formats, including paperback and various ebook formats. The paperback is available from amazon.com and other online sellers; the ebooks are available from amazon.com and other sellers also. To purchase the book in all three ebook versions, you can use the BUY EBOOK button on the book’s information page. If you have further questions, please let me know. Thanks.
Hi Alex, I´m writing from Argentina. I own your LX5 book (& camera) and now, I`m reading your LUMIX LX100 new book, planing to buy this great camera. Could you please tell me the differences between LumixLX100 US version and Lumix LX100 Europe version? thanks and best regards,
Hello, Gustavo — I don’t know for certain, because I have not actually used the European version of the LX100 camera. The main difference, I believe, would be that the motion picture recording formats on the European version would use the PAL system, whereby the frames per second would be based on 50, such as 50 fps or 25 fps, while the US version uses the NTSC system, with values such as 30 fps and 60 fps. Of course, units of measure would be in the metric system as opposed to the feet and inches of the US system.
Thanks Alex for your soon answer. I was thinking to buy my first Leica ever (does every photographer must have a Leica once in his life?), but after read your useful comparison I will go (again) for the Lumix. Basically, I thinks that the lack of wifi connecting is something that I can’t forgive. Am I thinking right?
That’s really up to you. If you think you would use the Wi-Fi features of the LX100, you certainly would want to choose that model. The LX100 really makes more sense to me overall, but some people do appreciate the Leica brand name as well as the better warranty and software, if those are still offered as they were when I wrote that comparison.
I just purchased the RX10 III and your book, and have read the first 3 chapters so far (really helpful book). No matter what mode I put the camera in (P, M, A, S) I cannot see a bulb setting past the 30″ setting — the dial won’t go past 30″. I purchased my camera in the U.S. Was that setting possibly in the RX10 II but Sony alleviated it from the III? Thanks for the great resources of your book and this blog.
The BULB setting is available only in Manual exposure mode, with the mode dial set to the M position. Also, it is available only if Shutter Type, on screen 4 of the Custom menu, is set to Auto or Mechanical. It’s possible there are some other settings that could conflict with the BULB setting, so you could try a general reset of the camera’s settings if you can’t get to BULB in M mode with Shutter Type set to Auto or Mechanical. My guess is that Shutter Type has gotten set to Electronic somehow.
I didn’t understand this last statement fully; do you mean the mode dial is at the M position? If you still are not getting the BULB setting, then go to the last screen of the Setup menu and use the Setting Reset option to reset the camera settings. That should get rid of any conflicting setting so you can get to the BULB setting.
Hello Alex,
Greetings from SF. I bought a used RX100 III in ok condition but the screen’s image does not reorient up when I flip the screen to “selfie” mode.
Do you know how the camera “knows” to reorient the image? Is it an accelerometer, or a slip ring on the screen’s frame? Can the user set the orientation in the menu?
You can check the Self-portrait Timer option on screen 3 of the Custom menu, which sets the countdown timer for self-portraits. I don’t think that that setting controls the orientation of the image, though. I have read on the forums that you may need to be sure the LCD screen is pressed completely into the selfie orientation. I’m not sure what physical mechanism the camera uses to sense the orientation of the screen.
Dear Sir,
I understand that you may have/be in the process of publishing a guide to the HX90V and I would love to purchase a paper copy.
I think it is available on digital but much prefer a book you can flip so much faster.
Kind regards,
Tony.
Hello, Tony — Yes, I have recently published a guide to the HX80 and HX90V cameras. I don’t have printed copies to ship myself, but the book is available in a paperback version through Amazon.com and other Amazon sites, as well as barnesandnoble.com and other sellers. Here is a link to the book’s main page at this site. There are buttons on that page that link to several online sellers. If you need further information or have questions, please let me know. Thanks.
I would just like to say I purchased your book last week and have been reading up on the camera. It is a fantastic publication and perfectly laid out and presented. Thanks so much!
Hi Alex,
Great resource for getting up to speed with great camera. Trusty Canon G12 was on last eclipse. Practicing on full moon and saving settings in RX10M3 memory but, if I have dial set on MR and want to change memory setting from 1 to 3 (or some other setting), I have to move the dial to “M” (or something other than MR) and then back to call up the new memory. I’ll use a wireless shutter release to mainly enjoy the visual but also be neat if I could quickly (eclipse lasts 2 min where I’m going) recall a memory setting as quick as possible. Am I missing something? First good photo was pretty lucky setting with G12 during my 4th eclipse. This will be #6. Advise to first timers. Don’t try and photograph it, just enjoy.
Thanks,
Robert
Hello, Robert – That sounds like good advice for first-time eclipse watchers. As for your question, if the mode dial is already at the MR position, you can use the Memory Recall option on screen 9 of the Shooting menu to call up another set of memory settings. You can get to that option fairly quickly if that is the last menu item you used. However, there is another method that is probably quicker: go to the Function Menu Settings option on screen 5 of the Custom menu, and assign the Shoot Mode item to one of the blocks on the Function menu. Then, when the mode dial is at the MR position, you can press the Function button to call up the Function menu, select the Shoot Mode block on that menu, and set it to whatever Memory Recall setting you want.
Thanks Alex,
Neat. Setting shoot mode on Fn button works great and will be best way to change setting from close shots ar 600 mm to wide totality. BTW I find that using the DMF focus setting gives me sharpest focus but surprised that center focus on the single shot AF (S) on focus mode dial, also gives fine sun shots through solar filter.
Robert
Alex,
One item they might add is option to start movie via remote Shooting the eclipse and want to start/make a 4K movie just a second before totality, have a wireless shutter release, BUT I have to physically start and stop the movie with the movie button. Understand Sony didn’t want accidental start of movie, but some do want to have option of remotely starting and stopping movie. Does not look possible with RX10iii of am I missing something?
Thanks,
Robert
Hello, Robert — I don’t have an RX10 III to test at this point, but I checked with my RX100 V, which is fairly similar. I was able to start and stop a 4K video using the Smart Remote app through a Wi-Fi connection. I moved the mode dial to the movie position and had a fast-enough memory card, and the recording worked fine. I don’t know why you couldn’t also do this with a remote connected to the Multi port. I don’t think there is a way to do this with an HFR movie, but with 4K there should not be a problem, as far as I know.
Hi Alex,
Reread chapters on plane to Idaho and did set up this option with my iPhone and tested and it works. I think the wireless shutter release is really only designed to replace the actual shutter on the camera so doesn’t know there is movie button. Remote app does. Thanks. Enjoy the eclipse.
Robert
Hello, Gary — I took a look at Amazon and on the Internet in general to see if I could find anything like what you mentioned, but I’m afraid I came up short. Some people have produced flowcharts for other cameras, I believe, but I could not find anything of that nature for the Coolpix P900. In my book, I try to break things down into manageable discussions, with step-by-step lists for certain operations, but I doubt that it provides the sort of structure you are looking for.
Hello, Gary — I took a look at Amazon and on the Internet in general to see if I could find anything like what you mentioned, but I’m afraid I came up short. Some people have produced flowcharts for other cameras, I believe, but I could not find anything of that nature for the Coolpix P900. In my book, I try to break things down into manageable discussions, with step-by-step lists for certain operations, but I doubt that it provides the sort of structure you are looking for.
Hello, Gary — I took a look at Amazon and on the Internet in general to see if I could find anything like what you mentioned, but I’m afraid I came up short. Some people have produced flowcharts for other cameras, I believe, but I could not find anything of that nature for the Coolpix P900. In my book, I try to break things down into manageable discussions, with step-by-step lists for certain operations, but I doubt that it provides the sort of structure you are looking for.
One set of settings I recommend trying would be to use Shutter Priority mode with the shutter speed set to about 1/60 second, and ISO sensitivity set to 1600, with Quality set to Raw or Raw + Fine. I’m assuming you don’t want to use flash. If you do, that would change things. You could consider using an off-camera external flash triggered through an optical slave. Also, things could change if you use a tripod. If you have the camera firmly anchored on a tripod, you could use a slower shutter speed and a lower ISO setting to improve image quality and reduce noise.
One set of settings I recommend trying would be to use Shutter Priority mode with the shutter speed set to about 1/60 second, and ISO sensitivity set to 1600, with Quality set to Raw or Raw + Fine. I’m assuming you don’t want to use flash. If you do, that would change things. You could consider using an off-camera external flash triggered through an optical slave. Also, things could change if you use a tripod. If you have the camera firmly anchored on a tripod, you could use a slower shutter speed and a lower ISO setting to improve image quality and reduce noise.
I´ve just purchased a book on Sony RX100 IV. I live in Denmark and it would be easier to use a A4 format. Is it possible to get this version of your book ?
Hello, Simon — Yes the book is available in a paperback printed version that is roughly A4 in size. (It is 216 by 280mm.) I do not sell the printed copies directly; they are available from Amazon sites in the US, UK, and several European countries. There may be other online sellers that can obtain the book for you, but I am not familiar with the sellers who would ship to Denmark. If you have further questions, or if this did not answer your question, please let me know. Thanks.
I just received my Sony RX10 IV and I was wondering if your guide on the RX III would help to get me started? The major difference between the two models is AF so would the description of the functions of the model III mostly cover those of model IV?
Thanks you.
I’m surprised to hear that you already received it; I thought it was not going to be available until mid-October. But as for your question, there are a number of differences between the two models, such as new features or options on the RX10 IV, but I think the RX10 III would be helpful with respect to the basic functions of the new model.
The camera is readily available in the Netherlands since last week.
I will go ahead and get a copy of your PDF version of model III, the Sony manual is poorly written.
Hi, Russell — I don’t have a specific release date in mind. I am hoping to have the RX10 IV book out by the end of this year, and I think that is possible if I get my camera on schedule and everything else goes well. I will probably post some updates at this site as things progress.
Thanks, Alex. I’m hoping to have the camera in about three weeks, assuming I ordered early enough to be included in the first shipments from B&H. Since I’ve owned the M1 and M3 versions, and have your books on those, the learning curve on the M4 shouldn’t be too bad for me. But I’m looking forward to reading your guide, all the same. Here’s hoping we both get our cameras soon!
Yes, I will be working on that book as soon as I can get the camera, and I hope to have the book published by the end of this year. I will add you to the list of people to be notified when the book is available.
Seriously impressed with the Sony HX90V (and HX80) printed version. Quality paper, stout and ready to be dog-eared, highlighted and scribbled in the margins. Perfect for becoming a well-thumbed volume as I learn all the hundreds of things this camera can do. And the print quality of your images and illustrations is most excellent!
I very much enjoyed your book on the P900, a great help. I do need a little advice on filter effects page 77. I have taken 4 shots using each of the colour filters y,o,g and r, but to be honest can not see any difference. Each shot was of the same subject in monochrome. Am I doing something wrong?
You probably are doing everything right. It would depend on the subject. With some subjects, the differences among the images taken with the y, o, g, and r filter effect settings will be quite subtle. Try finding a subject that has some quite noticeable shades of the four filter colors and take the four images of that subject. You should then be able to make out some differences among the images, though the differences still may not be as dramatic as you might expect.
I’ve really enjoyed two of your publications (guide to Sony’s RX10 and RX100. I’m purchasing Sony’s RX10 IV. Any chance of a guide coming out for that model?
Yes, I am working on that book now, and I hope to have it finished by the end of the year. I’ll add you to the list of people to be notified when it’s available.
Thanks so much Alex! Your guides have really helped me take advantage of all the design capabilities of the RX10/b and RX100. I credit you with your improving my photography!
Alex – I’m shooting bald eagles with the RX10 IV at the Conowingo Dam and I’m constantly messing up the exposure – usually the eagles are too dark or I blow out the highlights. Could you give me some quick tips for exposure settings for BIF/Bald Eagle shots (and maybe put some BIF tips in the book too)? Is there an automatic way to get the camera to handle this or do I just need to readjust the EV comp dial for every shot (I’d prefer to let the camera handle it as there’s little time to waste when an eagle dives from the sky)? Also, would I want to use the AEL button for this as well? Thank you so much.
I’ll be happy to give you my thoughts on this question, though I don’t have any experience with capturing images of bald eagles in flight with the RX10 IV. One approach would be to use the Raw setting for Quality, so you can gave a good deal of leeway in adjusting the exposure after the fact. Another is to use JPEG settings (Large and Extra Fine), and set DRO to Auto or a fairly high level, such as level 5. Also, you could try the Highlight or Spot setting for Metering Mode, and possibly also use the Exposure Standard Adjustment feature on screen 8 of the Camera Settings1 menu to tweak the exposure compensation to get the results you want consistently. If you can tell from past shots what the optimum exposure settings are likely to be for the image of the eagle, you might want to try using Manual exposure mode with a fixed ISO setting, probably with Raw for Quality to give you some leeway. Finally, if you haven’t already done so, I would suggest posting your question in the Sony Cyber-shot Talk Forum at dpreview.com, where you are likely to get responses from people who actually are doing BIF shots with the RX10 IV. Best of luck with your pursuit of the eagles! — Alex
Thank you for the response – it appears that DRO-Auto works in Raw on the Rx10 IV (but HDR does not work in RAW)…so I don’t see any reason not to leave that on all the time, what do you think?
I don’t think it would hurt to leave it on, but, at least with the Raw-processing software I usually use, the DRO settings have no effect on the Raw files. You may see the effects when viewing the Raw images in your camera, but not on the computer when using some software, such as Adobe Camera Raw. If you are going to use that software, you might not want to leave the setting in place for Raw files. But, if you use Sony’s Image Data Converter software, the settings could be useful. You could always use Raw + JPEG for the Quality setting to make sure you get the benefits of both approaches.
I know I bought your book for the LX7 . I looked through the media I”ve purchased on Amazon but it doesn’t show up. Is there a way for me to figure out if I purchased it off of WhiteKnight? I would have bought it either late Dec. 2012 or early Jan. 2013
Hello, I bought the book Sony RX 10 IV this afternoon. However I did not get a link for download. Please inform how to proceed. Thank you.
Best to you,Annabelle Wallnau agnstudios@aol.com
Just the guide I needed to help me understand the rx10iv. Well written, easy to read and doesn’t assume too much or talk down to you. Levels of detail without being tedious. Would definitely recommend. Thanks Alex White!
I am a new RX10 IV owner and am awaiting delivery of your book (approx. 1 month !). In the meantime can you confirm if it’s possible to set the focus frame to the center in AUTO mode so that it stays there & doesn’t have to be reset every time the camera is switched on? This is for shooting wild butterflies where speed is essential or the shot may be missed.
Best wishes
Ranald Lamb
Hello — No, in Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto modes, the Focus Area option is fixed at Wide, so the camera will focus on the closest subject it finds. You can touch the screen to direct the focus point, but you can’t fix the focus point in the center using the Focus Area option in those shooting modes. You could use a mode such as Program, with Focus Area set to Center or Flexible Spot to accomplish this.
Thanks for your reply. I have been using your book(Focus Area pp 62/63/64) which is readable and clear. However, in Program mode can you suggest how/if I can fix the focus area frame, set to ‘small’ in Flexible Spot, permanently in the centre so that it is always there whenever the camera is switched on. I find that it often moves to bottom left or elsewhere on the screen. Can this be done please, and if so, how?
Thanks
Ranald Lamb
It sounds to me as if you may have the touch screen functions turned on, and that something touches the screen, causing the focus frame to move. You could turn off the touch screen features, and then the Flexible Spot focus frame should stay in the center of the frame unless you use one of the other ways to move the frame purposely.
I recently purchased your book The Photographer’s Guide to Nikon’s P900 and am enjoying it. Is there a good setting(s) on the P900 for waterfalls, that will allow the exposure time to be long enough to make the waterfall or waterstream be slightly blurred? As you can tell by my question, I am a newbie, and am planning to take a trip out to Yellowstone and Oregon very soon.
You could set the mode dial to S for Shutter Priority or M for Manual exposure and select a long shutter speed. Note that there are limitations on available shutter speed settings according to the ISO setting, so you have to use a low ISO setting with a long shutter speed. But you should be able to set a shutter speed of several seconds if necessary, in order to get the smoothed-out flow of water that you are looking for.
I have the Kindle version it is a comprehensive guide to the cameras basic functionality, but does not cover any advance techniques.
Its a better guide than the one panasonic supply when you purchase the FZ2000/2500
Hello — Yes, the book is available in three ebook formats: PDF, ePub, and mobi (Kindle). If you purchase it through my site, you will receive links for all three of those formats. The book also is available in a paperback version. Here is a link to the page with links for purchasing the various versions. If you click on the BUY EBOOK button, you will be able to purchase the bundle of all three versions. If you have further questions, let me know. Thanks.
Hi Alex, I have your printed book on the Sony RX100 MarkII and have found it very useful. I’ve just upgraded to the MarkV (as the screen died on the earlier model).
I’m wondering how much new information there is in your guide to the MarkV as to whether it would be worth ordering that too. Thank you.
Hello, Sonja — Actually, there were considerable changes from the RX100 II to the model V, so I do believe it would be worthwhile to get the newer book. One way to check on this is to use this link to the table of contents for the RX100 V book. That should give you a fairly good idea of the various new options and features that are covered in the more recent book.
Well, I think it is, but that is something for you to judge. My book has hundreds of color illustrations, and explains the use of camera features in ways that the Panasonic manual does not do. It also provides tips and general information that the Panasonic guide doesn’t. You might want to take a look at the table of contents, index, and excerpt that are available to download at the book’s main information page.
Hello Alex
Excellent book!
As previous comment I bought through amazon and would greatly appreciate a pdf download too.
One thing I’m figuring out with this camera is the aperture “sweetspot”. Coming from an SLR past I’d assumed that the higher the aperture setting the better the lens would perform (obviously with greater DOF), however my tests seem to show F4 as giving the finest detail/performance etc. I haven’t read all of your book so perhaps you have this covered, grateful if you have any advice… F16 looks positively rough!
Also with traditional SLRs one could read off the DOF as one adjusted the aperture on the lens, is there any way of telling what the DOF is for certain aperture/zoom settings? I’m aware that focus setup covers this but I have the impression that the multipoint focus blocks using “WIDE” show what is in focus at the same distance from the lens rather than showing all in focus ie full DOF. I may have missed something and this camera is so much more complicated than what went before so grateful for any advice and forgive me if I’m appearing as a complete simpleton!
Thanks and best regards,
Robin
Hi Alex – I would value seeing your reply to Robin, since I am also interested in the same issue of DOF versus Aperture. Would that be possible please?
Ranald
Hello, Ranald — The only information I have on that point is that you can go to the Live View Display option on the Camera Settings2 menu, set it to Setting Effect On, and the camera will then show the effects of the current aperture and shutter speed setting when you press the shutter button down halfway. In this way, you can get an idea of the depth of field at the current aperture setting.
I am a point and shoot person. I do not understand at all anything about f stops, benefits of switching to manual, nothing. I need something that is basically a p900 book for dummies who know nothing. Is this book going to be over my head?
Hello — The book is intended for beginning to intermediate users. It includes a section with a step-by-step introduction to using the camera for basic picture-taking and video recording, in Chapter 2. I believe it covers topics in a way that is clear even if you don’t have much of a background in photography. You might want to take a look at the excerpt that is posted on this site for review.
I am a point and shoot person. I do not understand at all anything about f stops, benefits of switching to manual, nothing. I need something that is basically a p900 book for dummies who know nothing. Is this book going to be over my head?
Hello — The book is intended for beginning to intermediate users. It includes a section with a step-by-step introduction to using the camera for basic picture-taking and video recording, in Chapter 2. I believe it covers topics in a way that is clear even if you don’t have much of a background in photography. You might want to take a look at the excerpt that is posted on this site for review.
I am a point and shoot person. I do not understand at all anything about f stops, benefits of switching to manual, nothing. I need something that is basically a p900 book for dummies who know nothing. Is this book going to be over my head?
Hello — The book is intended for beginning to intermediate users. It includes a section with a step-by-step introduction to using the camera for basic picture-taking and video recording, in Chapter 2. I believe it covers topics in a way that is clear even if you don’t have much of a background in photography. You might want to take a look at the excerpt that is posted on this site for review.
Hi. Like some of the others, I also bought the book through Amazon and would love to have a PDF version. And then discovered this site as I was reading the book. Great book, by the way. It has allowed me to make a fairly easy transition from my Canon SX50.
Thanks
Weldon
Alex, just bought the Kindle version of this book from Amazon and it’s a life saver as the Sony documentation is woeful. I’d appreciate the pdf version too please. Many thanks.
Hello Alex, I bought your book from Amazon and you have done an amazing job.
I switched to RX 10 IV from the a77ii (great camera) so transition was easier than maybe others find if not having Sony before. Just visited Graceland, Elvis’ birth place & National Corvette Museum and took over 2000 pics. No regrets!! Great pics.
Thanks for your book. Regards, Charles Atkinson.
Dear Mr White,
I’m studying your book about my Nikon Coolpix P600 and I’ve successfully connected my large Sunpak G4500 flash gun to the P600 by placing a small strip of double -sided transparent adhesive tape to the front of the built-in flash and then sticking a remote sensor to the front of the flash on the camera.
It works perfectly.
Thanks for the idea.
Leslie Wolf.
Cape Town, South Africa.
I just purchased an RSX100 VA and your book for the RSX100 V. Your book is very helpful but doesn’t address all of the VA features and the updated menu layout. Is there any chance you would publish an update or comparison chart – at least for the menus?
Thanks I have other books by you – your writing style and descriptive abilities are excellent!
Hello — I don’t have any plans for a new or updated book on the RX100 VA at present, but I am working on a book for the RX100 VI. It’s my understanding that the VA has the updated menu system, which should be similar to that on the VI. I should have the new book finished by sometime in September, and at that point you may want to check this website for information about the new book and see if it would be useful for you.
Taking into account that there is no Photographer’s Guide for the Sony DSC-HX400V, would you please confirm me if one of the other Sony guides would be similar to use that camera?
I have sent you a reply at your email address. I believe either the RX10 or the HX80 and HX90V book may be useful, and I suggest that you compare the tables of contents from those books to the menus and features on the HX400V. The tables of contents are available from the information page for each book title.
My LX-7’s shutter often fails to the extent the camera is unreliable. There was no problem for the first three months then the shutter began to fail. Is the problem with me or the camera?
This is not a problem I ever encountered myself, so it’s hard to say what is causing it. It sounds like a problem with the camera. I wish I had a more definite answer to provide, but I just haven’t had experience with this particular issue. I hope you can get it resolved!
I just purchased Sony RX 100 VI and can’t wait to get hold of your new book. Please notify me when the book is available. Sincerely
Anders Thelin
Sweden
Hi Alex! I have ordered your book on Amazon.com INDIA and is likely to be delivered on Tuesday. May I request you to kindly send me a link for the pdf download. They did send me a kindle link but that was for a sample download only. Thanks, regards Sanjay
Many thanks for your book. Great Help!
However I have a question concerning zooming while filming in video mode.
This camera beautiful Zeiss lens does not zoom smoothly all zoom range….
It jumps from time to time!
When transitioning from mechanic to electronic zoom it stops is jumping little bit…and than continue zooming and when zooming back side the same problem at that specific interval point between mechanic and electronic zoom.
I have tried to remove electronic zoom setting and kept only the mechanic zoom. The same problem, it jumps little bit by the end of the mechanic zoom like some sort of parking the lens …and again back and forth it jumps only by the end of the zoom travel.
I have tried camera button many times and the 2 wired Sony remotes. Same problem. You cannot record a smooth continuous zooming video for all the long lens travel.
I had before some other cameras zoom and this was not a problem. I would like to know if other RX10m4 cameras have the same problem.
-My second question is, if possible to have an answer, also.
When filming 4K video: What is best?, to apply S-mode, Shutter speed setting of 60fps or to leave the camera decide everything, and leave it simply in P mode.
There are probably reasons for each solution dividing 2 groups of opinions online on Youtube and dpreviews forums… What do you think? pros and cons for each, may be.
Thank you in advance for your help.
Art
Hello, Art — I just took out my Sony RX10 IV camera and tested it. The optical zoom seems to work smoothly, zooming in and out with the zoom lever while recording video. As you say, if you turn on Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom, the zooming mechanism will pause for a short time in the transition to and from non-optical zoom. You might want to try the Zoom Speed menu option, and make sure that both Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom are turned off.
With respect to your second question, it depends what your needs are in recording your video sequence. If you are recording birds in flight, for example, you may want to have a fast shutter speed so you can extract single frames from the 4K video footage. Or, you may need to use a fast shutter speed in very bright lighting conditions to expose the footage properly. Or, you may want a faster shutter speed for some other purpose. If you don’t have a particular need for a faster shutter speed, I think you are just as well off using the Program Auto setting for Exposure Mode for the video shooting.
Hello — The RX100 VI book would be much more helpful for the RX100 VA, because the camera’s menu system changed dramatically from the V to the VA and VI. The book will of course not be completely applicable to your camera, but it will cover the menu systems much better than the book for the V.
I purchased the book from Amz on 10/1/18. Like others, I seem to be limited by and only to the Kindle app on my tiny phone. I tried to get a refund from Amz so that I can just purchase directly from this site but it does not appear to be working. Can I get a pdf of the book? Thank you.
The Index and Excerpt links are bad (404 responses). I’m curious, how is this book different and/or better than the 244 page manual Nikon provides for the camera? Give me your sales pitch.
Thanks for pointing out the bad links. They are fixed now. The difference between this book and the Nikon manual is that this book is written with the intention of explaining to a user how the controls, menu options, and features work, and how to use them, rather than just providing reference material that would be useful to an engineer but is not really geared to a user who wants a fuller explanation. Also, the book has more than 300 illustrations, so it shows the user what to look for and what to expect from the camera. If you are already quite experienced with this type of camera, you may be fine just using the Nikon manual. The book is more geared for beginners and intermediate users.
The Index and Excerpt links are bad (404 responses). I’m curious, how is this book different and/or better than the 244 page manual Nikon provides for the camera? Give me your sales pitch.
Thanks for pointing out the bad links. They are fixed now. The difference between this book and the Nikon manual is that this book is written with the intention of explaining to a user how the controls, menu options, and features work, and how to use them, rather than just providing reference material that would be useful to an engineer but is not really geared to a user who wants a fuller explanation. Also, the book has more than 300 illustrations, so it shows the user what to look for and what to expect from the camera. If you are already quite experienced with this type of camera, you may be fine just using the Nikon manual. The book is more geared for beginners and intermediate users.
If I order the ebook from white knight press I get the book in multiple formats to allow use on a computer and kindle which I liked.
but how can I load the kindle version onto a kindle?
There are several ways to do this. One way is to download the .mobi file to a computer, then connect the Kindle to the computer with a USB cable, and copy the .mobi file to the documents folder on the Kindle. Another way is to use the Send to Kindle app, which can be downloaded from the Internet and used to send the .mobi file to the Kindle. Another way is to use the email address assigned to your Kindle, and send the .mobi file to the Kindle by email. Information on this last technique can be found at https://www.amazon.com/gp/sendtokindle/email. See also https://www.amazon.com/gp/help/customer/display.html/ref=hp_left_v4_sib?ie=UTF8&nodeId=GEJR8GCVYDVZURJX.
If I order the ebook from white knight press I get the book in multiple formats to allow use on a computer and kindle which I liked.
but how can I load the kindle version onto a kindle?
There are several ways to do this. One way is to download the .mobi file to a computer, then connect the Kindle to the computer with a USB cable, and copy the .mobi file to the documents folder on the Kindle. Another way is to use the Send to Kindle app, which can be downloaded from the Internet and used to send the .mobi file to the Kindle. Another way is to use the email address assigned to your Kindle, and send the .mobi file to the Kindle by email. Information on this last technique can be found at https://www.amazon.com/gp/sendtokindle/email. See also https://www.amazon.com/gp/help/customer/display.html/ref=hp_left_v4_sib?ie=UTF8&nodeId=GEJR8GCVYDVZURJX.
This is a terrible camera. I have the camera and will have to do my best. So, is there a small monitor that I can attach to the camera via a small arm with grip and hood? Thanks…I’ll be getting your book next week. What filters do you suggest for this camera? Int. and exterior shooting…using for actor scenes, as well. Any suggestions for the best way to use the filters during live action shoots. Thanks. The RX 10 III has a 72mm.
There are several small monitors you can use. There is one by Sony, the CLM-FHD5, which is fairly expensive, and there are others like this one: https://www.amazon.com/dp/B077FTPT46/. That one is much less expensive. If you look at the Sony monitor’s listing at Amazon.com, you will see listings for several other of the less expensive ones. I don’t really have any specific ideas about the use of filters with that model of camera; I don’t use filters often enough to have useful suggestions for the applications you mentioned.
Decent background information on this camera but what’s really needed is a task-based, step-by-step instructional guide, one that gives us the ‘how’ first.. This publication is well-researched and written in a friendly, informative way and as such, is a good expansion on Panasonic’s user guide. But as a neophyte photographer using the LX10 as my first ‘real’ camera, I became frustrated with this book’s informational bent rather than what I – and I suspect many other new camera users – really need, tasks that show us how to use the camera. It’s frustrating reading all about a function, say Aperture Priority, when all I want is how to use it, the instructions for which are buried on the second page of this topic; instead of steps, they are provided in paragraph form. When you find yourself referring to Panasonic’s user manual before consulting of this book, I think the author has missed the mark.
Dear Mr. White,
I have a Leica V-Lux 114 and can’t find a decent book to guide me in using it. Would your C-Lux book or the previous D-Lux book cover what I need to know for the V-Lux? Thank you very much!
Cricket
Hello, Cricket — As you saw, I don’t have a book that covers the Leica V-Lux specifically. The book that would come closest to being useful, I believe, is my book on the Panasonic FZ2500. It’s my understanding that the V-Lux is fairly close in features to the Panasonic FZ1000, which in turn is somewhat similar to the FZ2500. So, although there would be considerable differences, you probably would do best with the book on the FZ2500. You might want to take a look at the table of contents for that book to see if it looks as if it would be helpful for the menu options and features of your camera.
i have your book which is excellent but cannot figure out the icon with the hand and camera/film strip in the upper left which has a blinking exclamation
The icons with the blinking exclamation point are giving a warning about camera shake, indicating that you are using a slow shutter speed, and may need to use a tripod or take some other measures to avoid a blurry image. Without the exclamation point, the icons mean that the SteadyShot system is turned either on or off. Here is a brief excerpt from Sony’s manual:
I do have your book but I cannot find any information on bon using the Sony RX 10 IV for Astrophotography. I know this is not the camera of choice for shots of the Milky Way, but I was wondering if you could tell me what settings may work best.
I did include a brief discussion of photographing the moon in Chapter 10, at page 242. I haven’t been very involved with astrophotography with the RX10 IV, so I don’t have a particular set of settings to suggest. I looked around at some other sites, and found this article, which seems to have some good tips on general settings, which should give you a starting point with the RX10 IV: https://astrobackyard.com/7-astrophotography-tips/. There probably are many other sites and other resources with similar tips. Based on my own experience, all I can recommend is to get a very solid tripod, use manual focus, get a wired remote control like the Sony RM-SPR1, and start with long exposures for star trails, etc.
Fhdksmfjxjdndjczkalskxjfkskf FB xkejcjfjsjrhxjwk ex free ldkjifuskkdskzidhevsxifiridiichhrhxjdjdhxhxudhdxbdhdjxhdhfhdkskwjehdvfvvxjdj
Jdjdjxj
Dndjxie
Jxdjrndfjjxffdjxkckflrlkcbf fbdnxncf
Are I understand if you’re interested thanks for all the work you t is the one who was it you jaan y y I understand if it’s good I’m of ok I’m at my phone if I don’t answer right no nice you ok to pay for one night this hqdkfjsjsshfbrjdkebfbsjskajd
Djddejdjfjddjdjfldlajttbf Xbox is the y me to do it in a bit ok I’ll y you jaan is the only one night this weekend so we are you guys doing you jaan me to pay or do it tomorrow at work in this hqdkfjs the y the work that needs you t me a pic so ok I’m gonna have good night I don’t want her birthday but happy you have good ? is not the first or ok so you t the only reason or do we are you still looking to good use good judgement call when I’m at the gym right ok so I understand you t the y me the link or paisa so if it don’t send you my mother had I good happy new you guys going to be ok and yes you t me ok did the same or better yet the y a few more hours to make sure they know ok thank her for all your support with or morning if you’re interested in the position for a while before so bhi to go get them or if you’re still at work I’m of ok thank I miss it don’t trjrjrkfj I don’t want
I would suggest that you remove the battery, wait a minute or two, then put it back in the camera. Make sure the battery is well charged, then try again. If you get the camera to power on, use the Reset All option on the Setup menu.
I would suggest that you remove the battery, wait a minute or two, then put it back in the camera. Make sure the battery is well charged, then try again. If you get the camera to power on, use the Reset All option on the Setup menu.
Dear sir,
This Christmas I was excited to receive a digital camera of which to me is like a close encounter of the third kind. Fortunately I found your book descriptive of the Lumix sz70 was agreed and informative to a degree that I should ask you for advise. Is there or do you offer work books outlining projects that would bring out all th newonces of this unit. Suggestions of projects with aids on how to set them. I would be most appreciative of any direction you may steer me in this regard. I love the book,this manumission you have produced. Thank you
Terry
Hello — Thanks for your comments. No, I do not have any workbook with projects for this camera. However, if you look in the Index under Step by Step Guides, you will find references to several tutorials that take you through some particular operations one step at a time, to help you become familiar with how the camera operates for certain functions.
Hi Alex. A couple of years ago, when I bought the Nikon P900, I also invested in your excellent guide and found it invaluable. Now, having upgraded to the P1000, I was relieved to discover that you have created the same invaluable guide to this more complex camera and immediately invested in a copy. Of course a lot of the features are relatively intuitive but there is so much more that a good guide to reveal and I would much prefer to learn from an expert than spend hours trying to teach myself when I could be out actually taking pictures.
Hi Alex. A couple of years ago, when I bought the Nikon P900, I also invested in your excellent guide and found it invaluable. Now, having upgraded to the P1000, I was relieved to discover that you have created the same invaluable guide to this more complex camera and immediately invested in a copy. Of course a lot of the features are relatively intuitive but there is so much more that a good guide to reveal and I would much prefer to learn from an expert than spend hours trying to teach myself when I could be out actually taking pictures.
Hi, Desperately need a guide for either Panasonic Lumix LX100 M2 camera or latest Leica D-Lux 7 camera (them being practically identical cameras).
The ‘Photographer’s Guide to the Leica D-Lux (TYP 109)’ Alexander S. White – published by White Knight 2015 needs an update to cover the software functionality and improved features of the new (released 2018) cameras.
These (travel) cameras are currently causing a great deal of interest in the photographic media and YouTube both in the USA and Europe; but there’s literature apart from the manufactures technical sheets.
Looking Forward to a guide – MW.
Hello — Thanks for your comment. It is helpful to know what books readers would like to see published. I am considering doing some sort of update for the LX100 II/D-Lux 7, but I haven’t reached a decision yet. I will post information at this site if I do decide to do that update.
Sometimes I have trouble getting the nikon p1000 to focus…..autofocus or manual focus – on subjects even from 6-10 meters away. This is so frustrating. what did i do wrong??
Does your book cover “how to focus – manual and auto” in-depth and thoroughly?
It’s hard to say what the problem might be, because there are several possibilities. If you have the lens zoomed in to a long telephoto setting, the minimum focus distance is quite high — up to 7 meters. Also, you might need to use a different setting for the AF Area Mode, which tells the camera where to direct its focus. It also can be hard to get a non-blurry image when using a lens with such a long focal length. It is a good idea to use a tripod and the self-timer. I believe my book covers focus issues thoroughly, but you would have to be the judge of whether it covers the topic sufficiently for your needs.
Sometimes I have trouble getting the nikon p1000 to focus…..autofocus or manual focus – on subjects even from 6-10 meters away. This is so frustrating. what did i do wrong??
Does your book cover “how to focus – manual and auto” in-depth and thoroughly?
It’s hard to say what the problem might be, because there are several possibilities. If you have the lens zoomed in to a long telephoto setting, the minimum focus distance is quite high — up to 7 meters. Also, you might need to use a different setting for the AF Area Mode, which tells the camera where to direct its focus. It also can be hard to get a non-blurry image when using a lens with such a long focal length. It is a good idea to use a tripod and the self-timer. I believe my book covers focus issues thoroughly, but you would have to be the judge of whether it covers the topic sufficiently for your needs.
Hi – just purchased your excellent LX100 guide, which was recommended to me because I was driven to distraction by my recently-purchased LX100 II. I would be so grateful for a guide speciically for the new model – is there any way of finding out about this other than to keep checking here? Not a Facebook user. Thanks again.
Hello — Yes, I will add you to the list of people to be notified when the LX100 II book is available. I’m working on it now, and I hope to have it published by early March.
Hello — I don’t have a plan to do a book for the HX99 at the moment, but I will consider it in the future, after I work on other books that are in the pipeline. Thanks for asking; that helps me know what cameras potential readers are interested in.
Hi Alex. I have just upgraded my Sony RX100 mark 3 to a Sony RX100mark 5A and taken delivery of your Mark 5 book from amazon. Will you be doing a supplement about the differences between the mark 5 and the mark5a please?
I have given my Mark 3 and your excellent Mark 3 book to my daughter.
Many thanks in advance.
Hello, June — As of now, I don’t have plans for a book on the RX100 VA. It’s possible that could change, but not very likely in view of other books I have to get to. Some readers have advised me that my book on the RX100 VI was useful with the RX100 VA, because of the similarities between the menu systems of those two models. You might want to consider exchanging the RX100 V book for the RX100 VI book, and see if that one works better for you.
I was really delighted to see that this is now available. Your guide to the LX100 is excellent, and has been very helpful. Now I can really get to grips with the LX100 II. Thank you so much!
I’m glad I’m on your email list as I tend to forget to comment on previous books I’ve purchased from you. I purchased the Lx-100 (1st gen) book and even though I’ve been through it a few times I still use it as an excellent reference on using my camera for things I’m unfamiliar with. Your books are what the user manuals should be.
With that being said, as an owner of the original LX-100 I’m intrigued with the LX100 II & I’d be interested in your opinion of whether the differences are worth the upgrade.
Thanks for your work
Hello, Rik — I really like the LX100 II, as I did the original model, but it is not really a major upgrade, unless you want the added functionality provided by the touch screen features and a few other tweaks to the controls. With the touch screen, the camera now can do Post Focus and Focus Stacking, which are quite useful, and it has Bluetooth capability also. If you don’t care that much about the touch screen and the somewhat higher resolution, you might do just about as well with the original model.
I’m glad I’m on your email list as I tend to forget to comment on previous books I’ve purchased from you. I purchased the Lx-100 (1st gen) book and even though I’ve been through it a few times I still use it as an excellent reference on using my camera for things I’m unfamiliar with. Your books are what the user manuals should be.
With that being said, as an owner of the original LX-100 I’m intrigued with the LX100 II & I’d be interested in your opinion of whether the differences are worth the upgrade.
Thanks for your work
Hello, Rik — I really like the LX100 II, as I did the original model, but it is not really a major upgrade, unless you want the added functionality provided by the touch screen features and a few other tweaks to the controls. With the touch screen, the camera now can do Post Focus and Focus Stacking, which are quite useful, and it has Bluetooth capability also. If you don’t care that much about the touch screen and the somewhat higher resolution, you might do just about as well with the original model.
I’m glad I’m on your email list as I tend to forget to comment on previous books I’ve purchased from you. I purchased the Lx-100 (1st gen) book and even though I’ve been through it a few times I still use it as an excellent reference on using my camera for things I’m unfamiliar with. Your books are what the user manuals should be.
With that being said, as an owner of the original LX-100 I’m intrigued with the LX100 II & I’d be interested in your opinion of whether the differences are worth the upgrade.
Thanks for your work
Hello, Rik — I really like the LX100 II, as I did the original model, but it is not really a major upgrade, unless you want the added functionality provided by the touch screen features and a few other tweaks to the controls. With the touch screen, the camera now can do Post Focus and Focus Stacking, which are quite useful, and it has Bluetooth capability also. If you don’t care that much about the touch screen and the somewhat higher resolution, you might do just about as well with the original model.
Hi
I have bought the paperback guide and it is so helpful in getting to grips with such a sophisticated camera much more quickly.
I would appreciate any help you can give on file numbering beyond what is in the guide.
1 Video are separately numbered in a separate folder on the SD card. Is it possible to get the file numbering integrated so video and stills number consecutively as taken in one folder?
2 It isn’t possible to number stills/video with the data and time (as my phone does) rather than just sequential number ? (I can see from your guide that folders can be date nymbered)
As far as I am aware, you can’t change the behavior of the camera for numbering files beyond what is discussed in the Sony manual and the book. Movies and still images are treated separately, and can’t be integrated more than they are normally. There may be some workaround to change this behavior, but if there is, I have not encountered it.
I just purchased a used RX10m3 and I’ve been working through your book. Is it true that you cannot save button function assignment setting in memory for recall? Only shooting menu items are saved?
That is my understanding, but it’s been quite a while since I worked with that particular model, and I would need to experiment with the camera in order to be certain. Since I don’t have that camera anymore, I wouldn’t be comfortable in making a flat statement that this can’t be done.
I actually have the Leica D-lux 7 but this book is brilliant since it covers basically the same camera. I had slight issue with downloading and the service and help I received was beyond my expectations.
Still working my way through the book but it simplifies the learning process in using a very simple camera but complex when you want to move on
If I have a Leica D-Lux 7, what is the better book to get: this one of the latest Panasonic Lumix (equivalent) or the previous 2015 book on the D-Lux model 109? Thanks a lot and appreciate these more in-depth guides!
The LX100 II camera is a fairly close match for the D-Lux 7, so the LX100 II book is definitely the most useful book for that camera that I have available.
Hi. I have a Nikon field scope 2 I bought back in 1990. I now have an Sony rx100 mk 3. Is it possible to connect them so I can photograph birds in the garden
I’m not familiar with the Nikon scope, but if it uses a standard, removable eyepiece, this should be something you can do. You would need to get a filter adapter that fits this camera, such as the one from Sony, model no. VFA-49A1, or one from lensmateonline.com, or the MagFilter one. Then you need to get a telescope adapter kit, which should be part no. DKSR49T, from telescopeadapters.com. Then attach the filter adapter to the camera, attach the scope’s eyepiece to the telescope adapter, and attach that adapter to the filter adapter. You have to be quite careful, because the assembly is fragile, and the weight of the scope and adapter needs to be supported so it doesn’t damage the camera. Once it’s all assembled, you should be able to get some good shots, though probably with considerable vignetting.
Hi
I have recently purchased the Sony RX 10 Mk 4 , and your book which I find excellent
I also have a Panasonic TZ100 and also your book for that which I must admit I gave up on.
My question is I accept that both cameras are quite complex for those recently retired, but I wondered whether you do , or are considering a shorter guide ( 100 pages ?) just covering items likely to be used by beginners/intermediate camera users . I e separating the woods from the dense forest rather than covering each category of the menus
Hello — No, I won’t be doing shorter versions of those books, because I need to move on to cover other cameras. In each book, I do try to include, in the earlier chapters, basic guides to using the camera for stills and videos, and I include some step-by-tutorials, which can be found in the index.
Alex – is there any chance of a book about the Canon G7X Mark ii? I’ve recently got this camera and am struggling quite a lot – and the manual isn’t of much use! When I had my Canon G16 I had your excellent book – but sadly, when I sold it, I included the book as part of the sale.
John
Hello, John — Thanks for your comment. No, I think it’s very unlikely that I will be doing a book for the Canon model you mentioned. I have been focusing mainly on Sony, Panasonic, and Nikon models lately, and I am actually starting to reduce my output of camera books in general, at least for the present.
Namaste.
I saw, there are 100% 5 stars to this Sony RX 10 mark 4 guide.
Congratulations.
Must be a fine guide. I wish to buy it.
Will you post/send it to India?
What will be the cost and mode of payment ?
Please let me know.
Hello — Thanks for your interest in this book. I am the publisher, and do not sell the printed books directly. Here is a link to the Amazon website for India, where you can find details about purchasing the book. There may be other online sellers that offer the book for shipment to India as well, but I do not have details about them.
Hi when i used the P900 straight out of the box I expected the incredible superzoom capabilities that i had seen on youtube videos.But i was disappointed.I am a beginner.Does your book explain how to achieve these incredibly long distance videos.
The book has a section on using the super-zoom lens in Chapter 9. I’m not sure exactly what videos you are talking about from YouTube, but I believe the discussion in the book would give you some pointers on getting the best results with the lens.
Hi when i used the P900 straight out of the box I expected the incredible superzoom capabilities that i had seen on youtube videos.But i was disappointed.I am a beginner.Does your book explain how to achieve these incredibly long distance videos.
The book has a section on using the super-zoom lens in Chapter 9. I’m not sure exactly what videos you are talking about from YouTube, but I believe the discussion in the book would give you some pointers on getting the best results with the lens.
Hi when i used the P900 straight out of the box I expected the incredible superzoom capabilities that i had seen on youtube videos.But i was disappointed.I am a beginner.Does your book explain how to achieve these incredibly long distance videos.
The book has a section on using the super-zoom lens in Chapter 9. I’m not sure exactly what videos you are talking about from YouTube, but I believe the discussion in the book would give you some pointers on getting the best results with the lens.
Hello,
It is my understanding that by purchasing the paper back guide book from Amazon that access to the downloadable pdf version is provided. I am wondering if I purchase a used paper book of the guide from Amazon whether I can also have access to the downloadable ebook version to have on my phone for reference as needed.
Thanks,
Barbara
Yes, the D-Lux 7 is the Leica version of this camera. There are some differences, such as the appearance of the menu screens and some features, but I would say 90% of the book’s information will be useful to users of the LX100 II camera.
Yes, the D-Lux 7 is the Leica version of this camera. There are some differences, such as the appearance of the menu screens and some features, but I would say 90% of the book’s information will be useful to users of the LX100 II camera.
Yes, the D-Lux 7 is the Leica version of this camera. There are some differences, such as the appearance of the menu screens and some features, but I would say 90% of the book’s information will be useful to users of the LX100 II camera.
I’ve previously purchased the Kindle version of “Photographer’s Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 VI” from Amazon. Is there any possibility of obtaining the iBook and/or PDF version of this book, perhaps at a discounted price?
Hi *,
Just bought the book via the Kobo shop.
I was expecting to find 3 links as described above.
I’l especially interested in the PDF version
But I don’t seem to find the PDF
Could you pls help?
Thank you
I did not do a separate book for the Leica D-Lux 7 camera. The book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100 II is available, and that model is very similar to the D-Lux 7. There are a few differences in features and the menus and controls look somewhat different between the two models, but I believe about 90% of the book should be applicable for users of the D-Lux 7. Here is a link to information about that book.
I did not do a separate book for the Leica D-Lux 7 camera. The book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100 II is available, and that model is very similar to the D-Lux 7. There are a few differences in features and the menus and controls look somewhat different between the two models, but I believe about 90% of the book should be applicable for users of the D-Lux 7. Here is a link to information about that book.
I did not do a separate book for the Leica D-Lux 7 camera. The book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100 II is available, and that model is very similar to the D-Lux 7. There are a few differences in features and the menus and controls look somewhat different between the two models, but I believe about 90% of the book should be applicable for users of the D-Lux 7. Here is a link to information about that book.
Hi Alex-I bought your Kindle guide for the Rx100 VI, and took some really good photos on a recent vacation to the Grand Canyon., thanks to you. I use your book so much I’d like to get a print version, but i fear it does not exist. Am i wrong? I hope so…
Hi, Rick — Yes, there is a print version of the RX100 VI book; it is available through Amazon and other online sellers. Here is a link to the book’s information page:
Have just finished reading the Photographers Guide to the Nikon Coolpix 900. Loved this book. I felt the level was just right for intro to this type of camera. I was wondering if it’s necessary to turn VR off when using a tripod if you select 2 sec Remote control? Does it make a difference or are they just two to reduce shake effects from two different angles?
Hello — Thanks for your comment. I will give you my thoughts, though I can’t say I have an authoritative answer. I believe it is best to turn VR off on this camera when using a tripod, because of the theoretical possibility of confusing the camera’s anti-shake technology. If you leave VR turned on when using a tripod, though, I doubt it will cause any harm in actuality. So, I think it is probably advisable to turn VR off in this situation, but not necessary.
Have just finished reading the Photographers Guide to the Nikon Coolpix 900. Loved this book. I felt the level was just right for intro to this type of camera. I was wondering if it’s necessary to turn VR off when using a tripod if you select 2 sec Remote control? Does it make a difference or are they just two to reduce shake effects from two different angles?
Hello — Thanks for your comment. I will give you my thoughts, though I can’t say I have an authoritative answer. I believe it is best to turn VR off on this camera when using a tripod, because of the theoretical possibility of confusing the camera’s anti-shake technology. If you leave VR turned on when using a tripod, though, I doubt it will cause any harm in actuality. So, I think it is probably advisable to turn VR off in this situation, but not necessary.
Have just finished reading the Photographers Guide to the Nikon Coolpix 900. Loved this book. I felt the level was just right for intro to this type of camera. I was wondering if it’s necessary to turn VR off when using a tripod if you select 2 sec Remote control? Does it make a difference or are they just two to reduce shake effects from two different angles?
Hello — Thanks for your comment. I will give you my thoughts, though I can’t say I have an authoritative answer. I believe it is best to turn VR off on this camera when using a tripod, because of the theoretical possibility of confusing the camera’s anti-shake technology. If you leave VR turned on when using a tripod, though, I doubt it will cause any harm in actuality. So, I think it is probably advisable to turn VR off in this situation, but not necessary.
Thanks for offering the pdf and epub versions of the zs100 book available here for purchase. I just bought. Could have got off Amazon for $5 less because of credits I have, but no good way yo get on a Nook. Thanks again for this direct sale.
Hello Alex: I have purchased a rx100vii. Are there so many differences from the M6 that I’ll be doing myself an injustice by buying your M6 book? I would intend on selling the M6 book as soon as your M7 book is available.
I haven’t received my RX100 VII yet, so it’s a bit hard to say, but based on what I know as of now, I would say the RX100 VI book would cover roughly 75 or 80% of the features for the new model. There are definite changes in the autofocus system and probably a few other menu options, but I believe overall the existing book would be quite helpful.
Just wanted to say as a recent – 1 week – owner of the P1000 camera, how invaluable I have found the Kindle version of your guide – Thank you for writing this with both the novice and maybe more experienced photographer in mind. I found the writing style helped get across the techniques without being overly technically complex. I have already started to improve my photographs as a result of your guide.
Hi, Cliff — Thanks for your comments! I’m glad you have found the book useful, and it’s great that you are using this terrific camera to good advantage!
Just wanted to say as a recent – 1 week – owner of the P1000 camera, how invaluable I have found the Kindle version of your guide – Thank you for writing this with both the novice and maybe more experienced photographer in mind. I found the writing style helped get across the techniques without being overly technically complex. I have already started to improve my photographs as a result of your guide.
Hi, Cliff — Thanks for your comments! I’m glad you have found the book useful, and it’s great that you are using this terrific camera to good advantage!
Hi Alex,
I bought your book on the Sony RX100M3 and loved it. My camera was stolen about a month ago so I upgraded to the new M7 with my insurance money (and a bit of my own!). I see you have a book on the M6. Are you planning to cover the M7 in a future book? If not, any recommendations?
Hello — Thanks for the suggestion. I probably won’t be doing a book for that model, but here is a link to a forthcoming title for that camera from an excellent author, Gary Friedman: https://gumroad.com/l/sVCnl.
Just tried digiscoping with a Swaovsky scope and an RX-100 … what immediately struck me was that it is VERY easy to hand hold and centre the camera on the slightly dished rubber eye-piece outer on the scope and get excellent photographs. I have played with digiscoping for years going from an early Nikon digital camera over ten years ago up to the Sony alpha-7 full-frame mirrorless but pretty much gave up n the game because all those need adapters and stuff to carry and fiddle with. By the time you have it set up the bird has flown but quickly taking the RX-100 from my pocket it’s almost immediate that you can get “on the bird” and grab a picture. That speed is a clincher.
I purchased you book on the Sony RX 10 IV which I still have and have found to be the most fun camera I have ever owned with amazing results.
Thanks again for the RX 10 IV book which has been an invaluable help as a starter when I got it.
I am sure those who purchase the RX 100 VII book
Will not have any regrets!!!
Keep up the useful and good work.
The book is available now in paperback through online sellers. In the Netherlands, you should be able to purchase it through Amazon.de or Amazon.co.uk. You also can order it from the US through camerabooks.com, which is a small company that is experienced with international orders.
I’ve used my DSC RX10 IV and your guide for over a year with no problem. A few days ago I was experimenting with b&w in creative style and picture effect at dusk. From then on the viewfinder and monitor displayed a bright white border similar to crawling ants, but not really crawling. The border of a Joshua Tree in silhouette was crowded with white spikes protruding from the border at all angles. When I see the image on playback, first even slightly overexposed areas are black with a defined border rapidly flashing. I checked zebra and it was working fine. I did a reset to default settings, but no change. It happens in all modes except MR and movie recording. Playback is fine when I put the memory card in my RX100M5. When I put an older memory card in my RX10 IV, playback is still messed up. I’ve never seen this phenomenon before and find no mention of it so far. The defect is too distracting to compose properly, and the monitor doesn’t tell me much about what I shot. I’ll call Sony tomorrow, but it seems like it has a software problem. What do you think?
I haven’t seen anything like what you describe, that I can recall. It sounds as if you have taken good steps to diagnose the problem. If resetting the camera to default settings didn’t fix the situation, it does sound as if there may be some issue with one of the camera’s components. I think calling Sony is a very good idea.
Thanks for info but have you also updated to version1.21 ?
I bought my Fuji X100S used from B&H with 1.1 firmware.
I’ve just updated today to Firmware 1.21.
I’d like to know what this last firmware update is improving compare to the 1.1 ??
I haven’t used this camera model lately, and have not done the upgrade to version 1.21 myself, but here are links to some information on the changes made by the upgrades:
I would echo the question by Robert Hopwood, back in Feb, re a guide book on the DSC-HX99. I’ve just bought this camera, and was surprised that there does not seem to be any published. I appreciate that from a professional point of view this camera is nobbled by the absence of the 1″ sensor, but the features offered for the price does make this a fair choice for a travel camera in sunny climbs.
Thanks for the suggestion. I don’t know if I will end up doing a book for that model, but it is very helpful to know which cameras people are interested in.
I have a question on iHandheld Night Shot (iHNS) on pages 74 and 75 in “Photographer’s Guide to the Panasonic Lumix DC-ZS70/T Z90” (copyright 2017).
I want to enable iHandheld Night Shot but the camera isn’t permitting it. The option is greyed out. I’ve tried in both iA and iA+ modes. Is there perhaps another setting that is incompatible with iHNS? So far, I’ve mostly configured the settings recommend in Chapter 2.
Is there a link to updates to the text of this book, if/when any arise?
Additionally, is there a more appropriate channel to ask such questions?
Hi, Mike — This is a perfectly good place to ask questions. I post updates, if any, at the Updates and Corrections page on this site. As for the iHandheld Night Shot setting, here is an excerpt from the Panasonic manual that lists several settings that are incompatible with it:
??This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.
??This function is not available in the following cases:
••In Self Shot Mode
••When using [Burst]
••When recording 4K photos
••When recording using [Post Focus]
••When recording using [Bracket]
••When [Quality] is set to RAW
••When using [Time Lapse Shot]
••When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
I guess you may have one of those settings in place.
Regarding the Sony RX10 IV Photographer guide (excellent manual!) will there be an update for the recent Version 2.0 update (although the Sony Help PDF explains it quite clearly)
Thanks
Hello — No, I don’t have a plan for an update for the new firmware. I have placed a link to the Sony information on the update at the Updates and Corrections page on this site, but I’m afraid that is all I am going to be able to do
I am a newcomer to the Sony RX10 IV, and to your Photographer’s Guide for it, which is excellent! I’d like to second Dani Shenker’s request for an update that would cover Firmware Version 2.00, because you explain things much more clearly than Sony does!
Rather than updating the entire print version, would you consider posting some kind of addendum, perhaps just a few pages, on your site? Besides the addition of Animal Eye AF in Version 2.00, I’ve noticed discrepancies in your instructions for the options in Face Recognition, so that must have been updated as well. No doubt there are other issues I haven’t run across yet.
Your adoring public will appreciate anything you might be willing to do!
Does your book explain how to set or assign the AEL button as the back focus button? I have seen videos on tube that show it as possible, but when following their steps, once you get to the AEL button assignment my camera (just purchased and latest firmware) does not allow assignment , only toggle on/off.
If your book covers this topic I will buy it.
The book discusses back button focus and discusses how to assign an option to the AEL button, though it doesn’t discuss both topics in the same place. Basically, you would assign the AF-On option to the AEL button, using the Custom Key (Shooting) menu option. Then, when you press the AEL button, the camera will focus. You also can use the AF/MF Control Hold option for the AEL button to get back button focus. You cannot get back button focus if you use the AF/MF Control Toggle option, though. In that case, the camera toggles between manual focus and autofocus modes, but does not focus the image.
Hello — If you’re asking about the availability of a book for the RX10 III camera, information is at this page: https://whiteknightpress.com/white-knight-press-information-about-current-books/photographers-guide-to-the-sony-dsc-rx10-iii/. The paperback version is sold through online sellers such as Amazon in various countries; the downloadable versions are sold through this site, as well as through the Amazon, Apple, Google, Kobo, BN.com, and other sites. If you have further questions, let me know. Thanks.
Hi We have a Panasonic Lumix TZ70 and my wife is very keen to learn more about using it independently.
Will the book be helpful in allowing us to understand more of the cameras’ performance and function or is the book only helpful for the models mentioned in the title?
Many thanks Justin McCarthy
Hello — If you are trying to connect an iPhone to your Sony RX100 VI camera, the only password that would be involved would be either the one generated by the camera itself for its own Wi-Fi network, or the password for a local network you are using to connect both the camera and the iPhone to. In either case, I have no access to these passwords. The password for the camera’s own network should be displayed on the camera’s screen, and the password for the local network should be available by looking at the modem or router, or by asking the system administrator.
Sony’s switch from PlayMemories to Imaging Edge Mobile. As a n owner of the Sony DSC RX10Iv, I find it very confusing to read in both Sony’s documentation and your book on this camera about PlayMemories when it no longer exists. I am particularly interested in getting GPS tags on my image files and to date ha not broken the code for that. Any help or suggestions would be welcomed.
Here is a link to an excerpt from my book on the Sony RX100 VII, which discusses the updated app in connection with the procedure for adding GPS information to images:
So sir, do we have any chance that you will publish a book for the Photographer’s guide to the Sony RX100 MVA? I have recently purchased the camera & i was hoping that i would find your book for the 5A on Amazon.in or Amazon.ae.
I do not have a book for the Sony RX100 VA, and I don’t have a plan to publish one. However, my recollection is that much of the new information for the 100 VA is covered in my book for the Sony RX100 VI. You may want to look at the table of contents for that book, to see if you believe it would serve your purposes.
The November update of version 2 firmware added new capabilities for AF on animal eyes. Do you have a supplement that discusses this? In general do you have a policy on supplements/updates as (if) the camera evolves over time?
No, I don’t have a supplement on the new firmware. I know it would be useful to provide updates as cameras evolve over time, but it’s not practical for me to keep up with all of those changes. I write each book based on the latest firmware that is available at the time the book is published. Once the book is published, I occasionally issue updates and corrections on this website at the Updates and Corrections page, but I don’t include comprehensive discussions of new features as a general rule.
I purchased the kindle version of your Guide to the Sony RX10iv a few weeks ago and would like to download the pdf version. Can you possibly provide me with a link?
I bought a paperback copy of your Sony Rx10 guide back in 2015 (via Amazon). Just getting back into photography ( since I’m now retired), it would be nice to have a digital copy to keep with me on my I-pad. Would it be possible to get a download? This is for the original Rx10 (I see they are now on v4!).
RX10M4
Center Lock-On AF
Your book states that it will not function in focus area lock-on settings. My experience is that it does not work in AF Flexible Spot or AF Expand but only works in Wide or Center.
Also it does not mention how to handle the flow if you use back focus.
It took me a very long time to get it all worked out. I think a revision of that section would be helpful.
I purchased your excellent X10 guide several years ago and I have just discovered that I might be able to download a pdf version to keep on my android phone for quick reference. Can you help me with this please?
I just purchased a Panasonic ZS80 for my wife. She does not like complicated user’s guide, which the ZS80 appears to have. Do you have a separate publication for the Zs80? Or do you recommend that I get the one for the ZS70? That will confuse her a bit, but if you don’t have an updated book, it might be the best.
I look forward to your reply.
Thanks so much!
Todd
P.S. I spent way too long agonizing over the ZS70, ZS80, and the ZS100–loved the ZS100 for the 1″ sensor, but my son convinced me that my wife would probably like the tiltable screen more (for selfies?!) Ah well….
Hello, Todd — I agree that the ZS80 isld be an excellent choice of camera, unless there is a need for making large prints or cropping images heavily. As far as the books are concerned, I do not have a book specifically for the ZS80, but I believe the ZS70 book should be quite helpful. There are not that many differences between the two camera models, so using the ZS70 book along with the Panasonic users manual for the ZS80 should provide most of the information needed.
I am interested in using my RX100 IV for astrophotography in conjunction with a Meade LS6 telescope, and would like to purchase the 52mm Digi-Kit (part number DKSR52T) you recommend in the ‘Astrophotography and Digiscoping’ section of the book.
However, searching for this part number on the telescopeadapters.com website returns 3 alternatives – which one did you use?
When I bought mine, several years ago, there was only one option, as I recall. The three that are there now look all the same to me, but I would think the one that lists Sony Cyber-shot in its group of compatible cameras might be the best choice. To be safe, though, I would suggest sending an email to the site, telling them which telescope and camera you want to use, so they can verify which kit is the best one to use.
Hi, Alex. I have certainly benefited from both the hard copy and Kindle versions of your great Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 III. I’m wondering if there is a download for an Excel spreadsheet of all the menus. I was unable to find in your books a way to save/record all the menu settings I have made. If my RX100 III ever has to be reset I’ll never get it back to all my settings so I thought maybe I could record them in Excel. From the looks of your TOC I’m hoping you used Excel to set up those chapters. If not, maybe you have a suggestion of a way to export the settings.
I don’t use Excel to set up the chapters; I use Adobe InDesign, which generates a table of contents automatically based upon the heading styles, and I’m afraid I’m not much of an Excel user. I also can’t think of a way to export settings to Excel or any other program. The only ways I can think of to save your settings, apart from writing them down manually, would be to take screenshots of each menu screen, either using another camera or using the HDMI output of the camera, using a device from Elgato, BlackMagic Design, or another company to capture the menu screens to a computer. You also could get screenshots of the Memory Recall screens, which would show some of the settings, but not all of them. That’s about all I can think of at the moment.
Alex, thanks for your timely response. Maybe HDMI is a less painful way to go and I’ll look into those devices you mentioned. In fact, I wondered what people used to record that information. Stay safe.
Thanks for your nice comment, which I really appreciate. As of now, I don’t have any plans to do a book for the Leica models you mentioned. I have been winding down my book-writing activities lately. I may get back to them in the future, but no books are planned at present.
I received the paperback version yesterday and glanced through all pages. My first impression: very, very useful. Everything explained nicely. Compared to the Lumix manual, this book will be my primay source of information. Only in doubt I will falmback on the Lumix manual.
One remark though: the print quality (as far as text is concerned) is ok. However, the print quality of the pictures is poor. Nevertheless, I like the book and can recommend it to other Fz2000 newbies.
Thank you for your comments. With respect to the quality of the photographs, it is true that they are not as sharp as you would find in a glossy coffee-table photography book. I could have them printed at higher quality, but the cost of using heavier paper and enhanced print quality would raise the price I would have to charge for the book dramatically. I believe the print quality I am using now represents the best compromise between quality and cost. But it is certainly helpful to hear readers’ reactions, which I will take into account in planning any future editions or future books.
I purchased the electronic version of your book on the SONY RX100 VII. I am very pleased with the book so far. I am half way through the book and It is an easy read and I’ve learned a lot. Thanks!
I have a P1000 Nikon
Didn’t use it much yet so still alot to learn
Right now getting msg that says
IMAGE CANNOT BE SAVED
And so cannot go any further with it
Any suggestions!
Changed card few times but still same msg showing???
It does sound as if there is a problem with the memory card. You could try re-formatting the card. If that doesn’t work, you might want to try the Reset All option on the Setup menu, if you don’t mind starting over with your various settings. That is all I can think of at the moment. You could post a question in the Nikon Coolpix Talk forum at dpreview.com; someone there might have some more ideas. I hope you can get it solved!
I have a P1000 Nikon
Didn’t use it much yet so still alot to learn
Right now getting msg that says
IMAGE CANNOT BE SAVED
And so cannot go any further with it
Any suggestions!
Changed card few times but still same msg showing???
It does sound as if there is a problem with the memory card. You could try re-formatting the card. If that doesn’t work, you might want to try the Reset All option on the Setup menu, if you don’t mind starting over with your various settings. That is all I can think of at the moment. You could post a question in the Nikon Coolpix Talk forum at dpreview.com; someone there might have some more ideas. I hope you can get it solved!
I change my phone number and Google account often as I’ve been hacked in the past so, my question is: I don’t want to have to keep rebuying my PlayStore application and book purchases over and over again.
Is it possible to save your ebooks to my laptop so, when I change my phone account and email I can then reinstall the book onto my new phone ?
Yes, you can download the PDF version to any of your own devices. If you purchase it from this website, you will receive a download link, and you can save the PDF file to any locations you wish and keep the file for permanent reference.
Hallo there I do think that I have paid with my VISAcard 9,95 for download dc lumix 100m2. But I could not find what I want. I hope you can help me.
Best regards
Bo Nilsson
Hallo there I do think that I have paid with my VISAcard 9,95 for download dc lumix 100m2. But I could not find what I want. I hope you can help me.
Best regards
Bo Nilsson
Hallo there I do think that I have paid with my VISAcard 9,95 for download dc lumix 100m2. But I could not find what I want. I hope you can help me.
Best regards
Bo Nilsson
This is not good news for photographer to posponed big photography show. But we are helpless. Now this pandemic we should be more sincere and also maintain social distance. If we come round this pandemic. I think we have big opportunity for future.
I have been succesful in opening in my cellphone your version of dc lx100m2 manual. I do like Scott Kelbys books. He goes strait to the point without takeing the whole bible at the same time. Like Panasonics erverything in the same basket. Now I will try to open in my computer. I think you do in the same direction. And it suits me.
I have been succesful in opening in my cellphone your version of dc lx100m2 manual. I do like Scott Kelbys books. He goes strait to the point without takeing the whole bible at the same time. Like Panasonics erverything in the same basket. Now I will try to open in my computer. I think you do in the same direction. And it suits me.
I have been succesful in opening in my cellphone your version of dc lx100m2 manual. I do like Scott Kelbys books. He goes strait to the point without takeing the whole bible at the same time. Like Panasonics erverything in the same basket. Now I will try to open in my computer. I think you do in the same direction. And it suits me.
Would your book help me to video the planets in manual movie mode. I see that a lot of people do video them, but I have no idea how they manage to find them with the lens. They don’t seem to show up in manual movie mode until I have zoomed a fair amount and then it’s impossible to find them (this is not the case in other modes – it isn’t that I don’t know how to find a planet and zoom in on it!). I see that a lot of people do video planets in manual movie mode (and get some impressive results with Autostakkert and Registax) and I would like to find out how they do it!
I don’t have experience with that particular type of photography myself, and I don’t think my book would be of much help on that question. You can find some excellent information in the dpreview.com “Nikon Coolpix Talk” forum. For example, here is a link to a useful thread: https://www.dpreview.com/forums/post/63522498. You also could try astrophotography forums. Good luck with your efforts!
Thanks very much, Alex. The link is very interesting. I wondered about using a mount but the people I see filming themselves zooming in on the planets aren’t using one. What I think they may be using in some cases is an external monitor. Maybe I should buy a telescope and use the DSLR! I bought the P1000 for birding, so it doesn’t really matter. Just thought it would be fun. Thanks again for your reply.
Would your book help me to video the planets in manual movie mode. I see that a lot of people do video them, but I have no idea how they manage to find them with the lens. They don’t seem to show up in manual movie mode until I have zoomed a fair amount and then it’s impossible to find them (this is not the case in other modes – it isn’t that I don’t know how to find a planet and zoom in on it!). I see that a lot of people do video planets in manual movie mode (and get some impressive results with Autostakkert and Registax) and I would like to find out how they do it!
I don’t have experience with that particular type of photography myself, and I don’t think my book would be of much help on that question. You can find some excellent information in the dpreview.com “Nikon Coolpix Talk” forum. For example, here is a link to a useful thread: https://www.dpreview.com/forums/post/63522498. You also could try astrophotography forums. Good luck with your efforts!
Thanks very much, Alex. The link is very interesting. I wondered about using a mount but the people I see filming themselves zooming in on the planets aren’t using one. What I think they may be using in some cases is an external monitor. Maybe I should buy a telescope and use the DSLR! I bought the P1000 for birding, so it doesn’t really matter. Just thought it would be fun. Thanks again for your reply.
Alex didn’t purchase from your website sorry, bought it straight from my iPad think it was Amazon, but I have to say my head is spinning ! in a good way I might add I can’t sponge it up quick enough lol , first impressions are that its going to be invaluable to me as I learn my way forward , with the Sony rx10iv good job sir.
Dear mr. White,
In the book on page 18 the figure shows the down button with +- minus sign with the camera +++.
This button on my camera Sony DSC RX 100 M 7 is only showing +- sign.
When I press this +- sign button shows the Exposure Comp.
Can you explain the difference?
I read the book via Google books but would be nice if a PDF would be available.
Hi- I just bought your book and looking forward to reading. I went fast forward to the remote control section in the hopes if solving a problem I have encountered. I bought a wired Vello2- I set it for an unlimited number of exposures 15 minutes apart/ it shoots a few shots and then stops. I think because the camera turns off. I have set Function for VF to Not Power Off- any thoughts on my problem?
Hello — My first thought is that the Function for VF Close option controls what the camera does when the viewfinder is pushed down into the camera’s body, so I doubt that that option is involved with this problem. I would suggest instead checking the setting for the Power Save Start Time menu option, which controls how long the camera waits before powering off when no controls are operated. I would think the camera would not power off while the remote control is working, but maybe that setting has some effect in this situation. You also might want to check the Auto Power Off Temperature setting. And, you might want to consider powering the camera with a plug-in power source during the remote control operation, using a dummy battery inserted into the battery compartment. That’s all I can think of at the moment.
I’m not sure just what your price range is or how much zoom you want, but a couple of suggestions are the Sony HX90V and the Panasonic Lumix ZS80. You can search at https://www.dpreview.com/products/search/cameras#!, plugging in your desired options and zoom amount, etc. Good luck with your search!
Hi I have a RX10 M3 and think about full spectrum modification of it. What is your experience with the lens of the M4 – did you see som hot spots in the middle of the picture?
The effect is strongest with small apertures (f=high).
I’ve been doing some IR-photograpy with my DYI-converted G1X (find me on Instagram: ruedi_freuler).
Hello, Ruedi – I took a look back through my images taken with the RX10 IV, and I did not notice any hot spots. I no longer have that camera, so I can’t do any other checks at this point. I don’t have that much experience with infrared photography — only the small amount of experience that I have discussed on my website and in my books, so I may not be the best source of advice on this topic. But, as far as I know, the RX10 IV would work okay in this area.
Hi Alex,
I have purchased the Lumix TZ95 in the United Kingdom.
Do you have a manual for this model or can I use the one you have for the TZ90?
Thanks.
Regards Martin
Hello, Martin — No, I have not done a manual for the TZ95. I took a quick look at the specifications of the TZ95 as compared to the TZ90, and I believe the book for the TZ90 should be quite helpful with the newer model, though there certainly will be some significant differences in features, menus, and the like. You could take a look at the table of contents for the TZ90 book on this site to see if you think it would be sufficiently useful. Here is a link: http://whiteknightpress.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/panasoniczs70toc.pdf.
I was looking for a guide for my new Sony RX10 i, and found it listed on Google.
I clicked the link and found that there was a link to purchase a copy for my Amazon Kindle, so eager as I was, I bought it.
Only now I find that the link that was supposed to go to the RX10 iv actually went to the RX100 iv and I have bought the wrong guide.
I went back and checked what went wrong, and I found that your link goes to the wrong page.
Is it possible to “return” the guide I have bought for a completely different camera (RX100 iv), and replace it with the correct guide for the RX10 iv?
Hi Alex,
I recently purchased a Sony RX10M3, used with several batteries and a wall charger. In your book on this model, you explain in detail everything about utilizing the battery-with one exception. My question is should the battery be left in the camera when not in use, say for 2 to 4 weeks? I find my batteries discharge too rapidly when left in the camera for the above time frame. Is it due to the batteries, which came with my used purchase of the camera having aged, or is this normal ? Stan
Hello, Stan — I have always left my battery in the camera when I’m not using the camera, with no particular problems, though I never really focused on that issue. As far as I know, what you are experiencing is normal behavior.
Dear Alex,
I’m bit puzzled about the stabilizer function for taking 4K videos and I could not get satisfactory answer from the dpreview . com members either
your book says:
“When recording movies, the camera can use its 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizing Function, which electronically corrects image jitter in five directions. It is selected through the E-Stabilization sub-option of the Stabilizer item. As a side-effect of this internal processing, motion picture frames may become cropped to a narrower angle of view than normal. The 5-Axis system does not operate when recording 4K movies, using Variable Frame Rate, or using Digital Zoom”
I’m confused now whether 5-Axis system or any portion of stabilizing will ever work recording 4K videos?
if so under what settings? ( I don’t care if it is cropped. All I want is an internal stabilizer)
Will there be any indication that it is working during recording or we have to check after the event, do you think, please?
Hello, Kimberley — I don’t have this camera anymore, so all I can do is point to the official Panasonic users guide, which says that the stabilizer function is not available “when recording motion pictures with their size set to [4K] or [C4K] in [Rec Quality].”
Mr White,I am certain you will think I am a complete Luddite and should return to my Brownie Box and at times I would agree…
For some reason your manual disappeared from my iPad and you sent me a new link to reinstall it. While procrastinating the iPad met an untimely death and I decided to get a MacBook and learn Photoshop.
So can you please send me a new link for my SONY RX104 which I will attempt to download ASAP.
Thank you so much.
Nancy Zannini
PS have you heard that Sony is bringing out a successor to the RX10 this fall?
I have sent you a new set of links. If you need anything else, just let me know. I had not heard that Sony is bringing out a successor to the RX10 IV; that certainly would be interesting news.
Great books. I have the one for the Nikon P510 and it inspired me to use the camera properly. I now have a Panasonic DMC-TZ80, as a pocket camera, and am wondering if the book for the DC-ZS70/TZ90 will be worth getting? Do you know if the models features are similar?
I believe the features are quite similar, though I don’t have a full recollection of the differences. You might want to check out the table of contents for the ZS70/TZ90 book and see if the topics listed there appear to be useful for your camera.
Hello, Alex White: I wonder if it would be worthwhile to ‘return’ a Photographers Guide to you; as I am getting the newer Model of the Camera?! The book is on the Panasonic ZS100/TZ100, and I am thinking of upgrading to the ZS200. Please advise, and thank you. Edgar
It appears that the Nikon Coolpix P900 has been discontinued by Nikon. At least, it is listed as “Out of Stock” at the Nikon site, and “no longer available” at the B&H Photo Video site. There may still be some new P900 cameras available if you look around, but I would not expect new shipments of new cameras to become available. Your best bet may be to buy a “renewed” camera from Amazon or elsewhere, or to purchase a newer model such as the P950 or the P1000.
It appears that the Nikon Coolpix P900 has been discontinued by Nikon. At least, it is listed as “Out of Stock” at the Nikon site, and “no longer available” at the B&H Photo Video site. There may still be some new P900 cameras available if you look around, but I would not expect new shipments of new cameras to become available. Your best bet may be to buy a “renewed” camera from Amazon or elsewhere, or to purchase a newer model such as the P950 or the P1000.
It appears that the Nikon Coolpix P900 has been discontinued by Nikon. At least, it is listed as “Out of Stock” at the Nikon site, and “no longer available” at the B&H Photo Video site. There may still be some new P900 cameras available if you look around, but I would not expect new shipments of new cameras to become available. Your best bet may be to buy a “renewed” camera from Amazon or elsewhere, or to purchase a newer model such as the P950 or the P1000.
First of all great book. I have the paper copy, that I bought off Amazon. Is there a way to download the pdf Version as part of the paper version I have to make it convenient to use both? I understand I only purchased the hard copy but figured I would ask. I can give you proof of purchase or show photo of book I own. If not it’s fine, just figured I would ask. Like I said this book is a tremendous source of information, and hats off to your work on this. Thx, Sean
I bought your book about Nikon p950. I’m trying to get a better understanding of it. My one big issue is with my sd card. I googled which one would be best for this camera. I bought the SanDisk Extreme Pro 170 mb/s 128 GB. I find the delay after continuous shooting very long… between 10 and 20 seconds depending on how many shots I’ve taken. It’s extremely frustrating for birds shots or wildlife. Is there a better card or is this just the way it is.
There are some faster cards available, as discussed in this article: https://www.digitalcameraworld.com/buying-guides/best-memory-card. However, I’m not sure that the speed of the card would make that much difference, because the camera’s buffer does slow down continuous shooting to some extent, unavoidably. I have not run detailed tests in this area, so I can’t say for sure. If you don’t mind trying a faster card, that might help somewhat.
Hi Alex, I have bought three of your RX100 books (3,4,5) and they have helped me immensely in the use and enjoyment of those cameras. I just got the model 5A, and well, there seem to be some changes in the software menus that are not included in your book on M5. And as you know, the Sony Manual is pretty lame, though in a pinch it may tell me more than nothing.
Is it possible that you have an appendix/VA update that covers things like the MY menu function, or better how to actually and set the memory function? I’m sure you know that unlike the M5, The 5A must record the memory settings differently, and it’s not really too clear on HOW it does that.
If you have an VA update, I’d really appreciate seeing it.
Thanks again
Dave
Hello, I purchased your guide to The Sony RX100 III and have found it very useful. However, it is a big book and difficult to take out on field trips. I have recently upgraded to a Sony RX100 VII and do not really want another large book – do you plan to issue a smaller printed book? Also’. will I get added value if I buy the Version 7 book when I also have the version 3.? On the plus side, if there was a smaller printed edition I would have no problem buying it. I do not have a kindle.
Hello, John — I’m glad to hear you found the RX100 III book useful. I don’t have a plan to publish a smaller print version of the RX100 VII book. If I did, it would be very thick and considerably more expensive to print (and purchase). However, that book is available in three downloadable formats: PDF, Kindle, and ePub. All three of them can be read on smartphones or tablets. For example, you can download the Kindle app and read the Kindle version that way. The ePub version works well with Apple devices, and the PDF version is useful also. As to whether the newer book is worth purchasing, here is a link to view the table of contents for that book: https://whiteknightpress.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/09/sonyrx100viitoc.pdf. I would say there is a considerable amount of new content, with a fair amount of repetition from the older books as well, but I hope you can judge that from looking at the table of contents.
Re: sony rx10 iv camera
Just wanted to thank you for providing such informative detail on this camera. Hopefully i will retain all this info to optimize the camera. Thanks again, Anthony
Alex, I have a print book of your SONY DSC-RX100 VI.
YOUR BOOK DESCRIBES how I can make a time-lapse photo project using the multiport / USB connection to a powered PC on page 186 and 187.
Now, I also have a multiport plug in with an intervalometer. BUT…BUT for a longer sequence, HOW CAN I POWER THE CAMERA AT THE SAME TIME? AS WHEN THE INTERVALOMETER IS PLUGGED IN?
IS THERE A DEVICE THAT ALLOWS YOU TO PLUG IN (2) DEVICES TO THE MULTIPORT
…….A CHARGER AND A INTERVALOMETER……
Yes, you should be able to use a “dummy battery”. With this option, you insert the dummy battery into the camera’s battery compartment in place of the regular battery. You should be able to run the cable from the dummy battery through a small flap that opens in the battery compartment door, and then plug the cable into a USB charger. Here is a model currently available at amazon.com: https://www.amazon.com/gp/product/B078PDCF7D/ref=ask_ql_qh_dp_hza.
I don’t have a camera to test this with at present, but I believe this system will work with the RX100 VI.
Great book…I have had the camera for over a year now and have mastered maybe 2-3%…I return to it and pick up as much as I can hold in my memory each time…have to shoot an art reception tomorrow night so was paging through it and found more about playback, file names, etc. which I will put into practice. Great book, great camera.
Eres no muy claro, pero creo que quieres decir que deseas comprar el libro electrónico sobre la Sony cámara DSC RX 100 VII y leerlo en su teléfono. Vivo el los Países Bajos y compré ese libro ayer. Me costó €11,95 IVA incluido. Podría pagarlo a través mi cuenta bancaria y en 5 minutos podría descargar el libro en mi Android tableta y mi Windows computadora. No tuve experiencia de descargarlo en un teléfono.
Thank you for the conscientiousness and competence you invested. The result is a comprehensive and extremely helpful book of outstanding clarity.
Warm regards: UR.
Hello,
I purchased the hard copy of your excellent RX10v4 book some time ago and I would like to obtain the PDF version for my android phone. Can you assist with this please? Thank you.
you are in reality a just right webmaster.
The site loading speed is amazing. It kind of feels that you are doing any
distinctive trick. Also, The contents are masterpiece.
you’ve performed a fantastic process on this matter!
Today, I bought an ebook of the Sony RX100 iv but I had problems with its download.
How can I do it again and save the copy on my pc?
Sincerely,
Pier Paolo Mariani
Hello Alexander,
I have bought the book for the RX100 VII and find it very valuable.
The only complain I have is that it is a big book, not suited to have it with me all the time… Is there a possibility to have a PDF version of the book so that I can have it on my phone for quick reference when I’m outside?
Have a nice day.
Mr White, awesome book, comprehensive, just what I need for to explore the rx10.
You asked for contact if updates were needed. On page 16 you refer to screen 14 of camera settings1 menu to find the Smile/face detection option. There is no such option on screen 14. On screen 6 there’s a Face/eye AF Set menu.
Mr. White –
I have owned an RX10IV and your book for the better part of a year. The pictures are superb, despite my setup skills being low. I am striving to set up all 7 presets (MR’s) in anticipation of most conditions I will encounter. Through trial and error, I have set up about 4. I need help with the following 2 questions:
1) How can I establish a Zoom Setting with each preset? Need step-by-step guidance.
2) How can I change a Preset? Each one seems locked for eternity.
I read that to insert a SD card the label faces to the back of the camera body. On mine it faces the front. However a very useful guide and very readable.
I just bought a Panasonic Lumix LX100ii and (although a quite experienced amateur photographer) I have been struggling a bit reading the Panasonic on-line “advanced” user guide. But I don’t like using Kindle, and much prefer a hard copy. Your posting seems to suggest that a printed version of this book will soon be available. Can you tell me the current status of that printing?
It appears that you may no longer be responding to comments posted here, but let me try, just in case. I have just purchased the RX10 IV. Has any version of your manual been updated to include information on the new features in Face Detection and Eye AF that are part of Firmware Version 2? And will I be able to get answers here to any questions that arise once I purchase your book? Thanks for any help or clarification you can provide.
I had the Lumix FZ1000 and I absolutely loved it, I had to get rid of it as it was not compatible with my steadycam. I ended up going for the FZ2500.
Panasonic make some amazing cameras!
Do you have any plans to bring out a guide for the Leica D-Lux 7? The new manuals are all online of which I am not a big fan; it’s difficult to find information when needed and with a book, it falls open to pages that have been read multiple times – I prefer a book anytime.
I have used your “Photographer’s Guide to the Leica D-Lux 6” for years and found it to be in invaluable guide to understanding all the capabilities of this camera. I would refer to it on a regular basis and it is MUCH better than the Leica manual; easier to understand, better writing and better organization. Thank you for the wonderful job you did on this book
I had the Leica D-Lux 6 for about 4 year (bought used) and unfortunately, it just died. Leica no longer offers any service or parts for this camera, however, they do offer a trade-in program for a new D-Lux 7 which I will be taking advantage of soon.
Dear Sir,
March 24, 2023 I bought your book “Photographer’s Guide to the Sony RX10M4” via Bol.com on the Dutch website – I have the invoice ready, if you want it.
I only got the e-pub version and it is in a terrible condition. The photos are very small, degraded and pixelated.
I think you also want that your books will be delivered in good quality, unfortunately this is apparently not the case.
I sent Bol.com a complaint about this, but didn’t even get a response.
Now I found your website via a friend.
Is it possible that i can receive somehow a pdf version of this book?
Thank you very much for the attention you want to give to my message.
Kind regards,
Cor Van der Kinderen
Thank you for publishing this very interesting and helpful guide to the Sony DSC-RX10 IV. It gives me much more background explanation than the Sony Online Help Guide, even the Sony help guide available in Dutch. I have purchased the Paperback version of your guide at the 10th of Januari 2022 (€35,95) at the local bookstore. Does the purchase also include a pdf version of this guide?
Over time translating some technical terms/descriptions in this guide correctly lets me down and then it helps me that I can put such a part of a description in my translator to Dutch.
I have one correction for your guide. I think that the caption or title of Figure 8-29 on page 195 of the guide should not be Format Confirmation Screen. I think that this title belongs to firure 8-28.
Fig 8-29 may be “File Number Menu Options Screen”.
Bonjour,
Je viens d’achter le livre et je ne trouve pas ma questions au problème rencontré en prise vidéo avec mon RX10M4:
j’ai pris une vidéo avec mon RX10M4 en position verticale car je filmais une cascade
mais à la lecture vidéo sur mon RX10 la vidéo est lu horizontalement donc je vois l’eau de la cascade tombé de gauche à droite (ou inverse) et non pas de haut en bas !
Un réglage est il possible sur le RX10 pour prise vidéo avec apparei en position verticlae ?
Par avance merci
cdlt
I have just purchased your ebook and I remember when I purchased an earlier one (different camera) you sent me a link so I could download a PDF version. That way I can read it on a plane.
Are you able to send me a link for this book also please. For the Photographer’s guide to the a7C camera.
Very extensive manual for the M7! Had to chew it in a week. Waited years to buy the M7 (moneywise and I expected the M8 but it went to the ZV-1). As I am an old man, this will be my last camera. I gave the M1 and the M3 to two of the sons and they take beautiful pictures with these 1 inch cameras. It could use something for ND filters built in. I don’t like the glueing of a ring on the camera. I became an aperture shooter thanks to youtube film of Mark Galer on this camera. He works miracles with this pocket camera. The camera will be used to some week trips to France and maybe Spain. France is my favorite subject and there are a million little villages where you could spend a whole day taking pictures. As a matter of fact, last month I slept in the bed where Bourvil and Louis de Funès slept while filming la Grande Vadrouille in Vézelay and surroundings, stil, after all those years, the most liked movie in France. Thanks for the hard work!
This article beautifully captures the essence of the subject! The content is not only informative but also engaging. I appreciate the writer’s ability to convey complex ideas in a clear and concise manner. It’s evident that a considerable amount of research and thought went into this piece. Looking forward to more insightful articles from this source!
Hi,
I have inherited my father’s Fuji x10, along with your book. I was wondering if there was a way to obtain the pdf version so I can read it on my tablet.
Regards
Mark.
I have been going through settings with the book and I find some menus and choices are different. Did the software update change some menus and choices?
Thanks
please excuse my lousy English. I just purchased the photagrapher’s guide to the Panasonic Lumix ZS70/TZ90.
All had worked well and I have received the files.
Thank you for this excellent description of the camera. This is the style that a manual should have. As a former vocational teacher, i know how much work it takes to achieve such a precise description with these well fitting images.
Best wishes from Germany
Uwe Kell
Hello,
I have a black and white kindle that I use for regular reading. My question is whether there is a possibility to buy a pdf copy that I can take on my tablet into the field, along with my bird guides, and even make notes.
Your work is fantastic and helps a lot in the handling of this fantastic camera.
Best regards and thank you very much
Octavio from Spain
bast
Sxgydxg
Dfyfcgk
Dhuv
Ruigz
Ggu fine
Ggu
Hhkif and the winter months ago reply
Cydzcjkb fyg
Bbjovxx to the same person in charge of arrangements for ma andi the same as the winter Soldier field and the other one is for ma andi for the same person to whom it may not have a u t t e u t ee yi the winter Soldier trailer of arrangements and a u the winter Soldier of arrangements for big bro I have to whom they the same time I will get every of the same as well as u t ee yi batha hai na to the winter months experience of working
I recently took the plunge and bought a Sony RX100 VII and your companion ebook.
I’m very much a recreational photographer and your book is a tremendous resource!
Next week I hope to catch a night launch over at NASA’s Wallops Island facility and wonder if you might have recommendations on the best settings to capture that?
I don’t think Fireworks looks right nor Night mode but I’m a novice and hope to get at least a decent set of video and photos. I will be using the dual recording feature as you describe.
Very pleased with this book, I struggled with the Sony manual. Well done Alex for explaining everything so clearly, it is a good read. I have however found setting up remote control via wifi or bluetooth complicated, and am still not sure if I can control the camera with the Imaging Edge app via bluetooth, or if I should avoid having bluetooth and wifi running at the same time. But I found it handy to be able to tag my photos with location once I’d got that working. However….
I was on a trip to New York a few days ago (we’re based in the UK) and I did not notice that the tagging had failed. I had carefully matched camera to iPhone time (EDT) but had not realised that there’s a time zone and a Daylight Saving option in the camera as as well as on my phone. However all worked well at first, but I didn’t realise that after a day or so location tagging had failed. It wasn’t until returning home and uploading my pictures to Lightroom that I found only the first ones were location tagged. Then I saw a small circle with a diagonal line on the camera screen next to the map icon, and discovered that the camera time had unknown to me gone back by 1 hour. Possibly to do with daylight saving time? But why it worked at first then went wrong I don’t know, but it did so when visiting somewhere where everything is x-rayed for security and they have their own wifi which I may have hooked up to on my phone but can’t remember.
As you may not have come across this kind of fault before I thought it worth mentioning. As the map icon was still showing I thought it was still OK. It did take me a long time to get the phone and camera reconnected again when home.
What would have been very useful is if there was a quick way of seeing the time, even as an option on the already very full information screen. Sony don’t seem to provide that option but for travel photography that would be very handy.
Fortunately I had the 3rd party app Geotagging running on my iPhone so was able to apply the locations after all, but could not find an easy way to overwrite the incorrect time in the file info on hundreds of photos.
Thanks again for a great book!
Thanks for the helpful books. I have bought one for each camera I have used in the past few years, always the PDF version. This time I bought it through Apple Books, so did not get a PDF version. I realize now how helpful the PDF version is—I can go back and forth between your book and the PDF versions of the Owner’s Manuals, and can read it on any device. Is there a way to get a PDF version along with the Apple Version (besides re-buying the book in that format)? If not, I understand— caveat emptor. Besides, you probably get quite a bit less when sold via a big company’s website. Regardless, thanks again for the great book series!
Hola Whiteknightpress! Te escribo desde el Departamento de Prensa y hemos visto tu negocio como una excelente oportunidad para ser destacado en noticias.
Al ser presentado en más de 60 periódicos digitales de alta autoridad, podemos mejorar la reputación y el posicionamiento de tu empresa.
Además, cuando tus clientes busquen información sobre ti, verán tu relevancia y preferirán elegirte por encima de la competencia.¿Podrías proporcionarme un número de teléfono para ofrecerte dos meses gratuitos?
He visto tu empresa Whiteknightpress y es perfecta para realizar una entrevista y aparecer en periódicos digitales (Tanto puede aparecer el directivo como solo la empresa).
La noticia publicada en los periódicos tendrá un enlace para que el lector pueda ver tu página (No es un anuncio)
Me interesaba explicarte esta propuesta, porque es la forma más efectiva para el posicionamiento seo y para fortalecer tu reputación de marca. Tus clientes te buscarán y verán que Whiteknightpress es relevante y por lo tanto generará confianza.
Podrás compartir las noticias en tus redes sociales y web, dando así la máxima confianza.
Solo tenemos espacio para 10 entrevistas, por lo que si te interesa, necesito que me envíes tu número de móvil para contactar contigo directamente (Es necesario para ver si podemos encajar la noticia)
Hi Alex, saw a mention of your book from leicarumors.com
Why don't you try joining the Leica Dlux4 group on flickr and mentioning your new book?
Can you post some of the sample images in your book?
http://www.flickr.com/groups/798964@N24/
best of luck!
Just to let you know that I found out about your book/blog from the leicarumors.com website. I will get a copy of your book soon, however just wanted to comment and tell you to keep at it and also to wish you the best of luck with it all!
Thanks for your comment — the posting on the leicarumors website was incredible, and has created a good deal of interest. I appreciate your good wishes!
Thanks for the suggestion. I will try to post some sample images when I get some time; things have been hectic lately trying to produce books and fill orders, etc. But that is a good idea, and I will work on it.
This is Brian Hsieh from Los Angeles. While I was searching for reviews and accessories of D-Lux 4, I read one of the articles introducing your book, http://leicarumors.com/2009/11/04/the-first-leica-d-lux-4-book.aspx/ and immediately decided to place an order from the Amazon, which I believe is as powerful (evil:p) a distributor/reseller as Google Ad. If you prefer, I can cancel the order and get it directly from you. This is the least I can do to show you the support of your dedication for such an amazing guidebook.
Hi, Brian — Thanks for your comment! I have mixed feelings about Amazon. They are powerful and can seem overbearing, but at the same time they are giving my book terrific exposure to potential buyers around the world, so I'm happy to sell through Amazon as well as directly. I hope you enjoy the book! — Alex
Not a problem, Alex~ I know $5 dollar difference is not that much to begin with. But I'd rather get all the money to the writer~
I can tell from the Amazon "out of stock" that your book is getting noticeably popular, and I'm happy for you.
Hope you find what you are looking for throughout these PAUSE days…
Hi Alex,
It's a shame about the switch from colour to black and white photos. If possible, a book explaining the use of something ought to exemplify its capacities. To do otherwise is like McDonalds advertising their burgers using pictures that look worse than a Big Mac.
Also, regarding your faulty toner, is it possible you've fallen victim to a counterfeiter? I've just put together a story on the subject, and they're pretty pervasive. Good luck with the refilling anyway!
Yours,
Inks
Hi, Inks — Thanks for the comments. I understand your point about the black and white photos, and I would prefer to stay with color myself, but it's not economically possible unless I can get a bigger publisher interested, who can print the books in large volume. Your point about the toner is interesting; I will look for your story and try to learn more; the experience certainly has been frustrating! –Alex
Hi Alex,
Fantastic news! I thought the colour photographs would pay off. I wish you all the best. : )
A blog like this is really interesting – I mean, as an account of such a specific experience. You might easily turn it into a book in itself, to help others.
By the way – I was wondering if you'd be interested in exchanging links? I've added a link to your site on my page, and it'd be nice if you could do the same. Increased exposure and all!
Inks
Hello, Inks — I couldn't find a way to link to your blog — can you send me a message through whiteknightpress.com — then hopefully I can figure out how to set up the link. Thanks.
Hi Alex,
To link blogs you need to add the page element. It's a gadget on your blog layout. Find it in 'Add A Gadget.'
Inks
I wonder how many publishers are in a position to complain that they're being too successful!
If you'd like to find out how the book's being found, you could always Google yourself? It'll tell you where the news has been picked up etc.
Heh, good luck refilling the cartridges. That's a messy process at the best of times.
It's an obvious bit of advice I suppose, but including a banner or bit of text reassuring people that the book will arrive for Christmas might help.
Merry Christmas, by the way! Walking into work this morning there was almost two feet of snow. Quite the Winter Wonderland.
Well, the problem now is that we have possibly one or more foot of snow coming tonight and tomorrow, so I probably shouldn't make any promises about shipping, unfortunately. It might have been worthwhile otherwise.
I love the Photographer's Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX3 book. I had the LX3 for a while and I liked it so much and your book is incredible. I am now waiting for the LX5 to be delivered (and probably the LX5 will become the Leica D-Lux 5). I am eagerly waiting for the Photographer's Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX5 and/or D-Lux 5. Please keep up the good work.
Thanks
Thanks very much for your comment! I do have an LX5 now, and it's a great camera, too. I hope to have a new book out by the end of October, if I can manage it.
Dear Alexander, I'm just about to by an LX5, should I wait for your new book to come out, or should I start using your book on LX3. I suppose the menus, etc are going to be pretty much the same.
Ragards and thanks for your time,
Ivan
Hello, Ivan — You should wait for the new book. Although the LX5 is very similar to the LX3 in some ways, there are fairly substantial differences in the controls, menus, and features, and the LX3 book would not really provide a satisfactory explanation of the new camera.
Thanks Alex, I might buy the PDF version for the moment which is cheaper, until the LX5 comes out. As everyone knows the original manual is pretty hard to understand.
Regards,
Ivan
Hey Alexander, just bought your pdf for the LX3 and so far loving it. I threw away my paper manual for the LX3 it was so incomprehensible.
The only thing I am missing is I can't see you have said much about the ultra wide-angle lens for the LX3, the DMW-LW46. Its a shame because I use one with my LX3.
Anyway, if I ever did upgrade to the LX5 later, I will buy your LX5 book as soon as it was released since the lX5 manual is just as woeful as the LX3's manual and isn't even printed, just a pdf.
cheers Damian
Hi, Damian — I'm glad you enjoyed the book. I did make a brief mention of a wide-angle lens, but I see that I didn't say much about it. I'll take your comment into account as I work on the new book; thanks for the feedback. I hope you continue to enjoy the camera!
–Alex
Alex,
As a new LX3 user I really enjoyed reading your new book. Would you know of any forums where a neophyte could go to in order to ask specific LX3 operational questions? Even after reading your excellent book, I'm having some difficulty understanding how to do some advanced operations.
Sure — The best place that I know of is the "Panasonic Talk" forum at dpreview.com. There are many very knowledgeable and helpful people there who can probably handle your question quite well. Go to http://forums.dpreview.com/forums/forum.asp?forum=1033.
–Alex
Thanks, Alex. This is just what I was looking for.
John
Alex,
I read that you had hoped to have the LX5 book by this months end. Is it done yet Michelangelo?
Alex, This is good news. With quick glance at the table of contents I see all my Lumix LX5 owner's manual angst vaporize. The process of book publishing that you describe, from PDF files to print is fascinating… and fast!
Yes, the current print-on-demand technology is really amazing, and it has opened up opportunities for authors and small publishers to get their books produced and available to readers much sooner than it would happen using the traditional system. Thanks for your comments! I'll post more updates as things progress.
–Alex
Hi Alex,
Can you elaborate on some of the issues you named with your files at Lightning Source, in particular image resolution and CMYK space.
Very interesting blog.
Thanks.
A shame that you are not making the PDF available immediately (I rarely buy printed books these days). Credit card in hand, I was hoping that I would be able to buy the book in PDF format next week.
I can only assume that you don't need the cash flow – lucky fellow!
Hi, sure I will try to discuss some of those issues in my next blog post, probably later today.
Well, I do have plans to make the PDF version available eventually. You're the first person to ask about it, and I will consider doing it in the near future. But I'm getting some work done on my web site, which needs to be set up for the ordering process. In the past, the print version has come out first, followed by the Kindle, then the PDF. I'll give this some thought and, especially, if other people express interest, I'll see if I can get the PDF version out earlier than usual. By the way, I have plenty of expenses, and I could use the money!
Thanks Alex. I thought you would have issues at too high a resolution (as opposed to low resolution). As to the image, I didn't understand what problem you faced (I took it you had not converted to CMYK in the first place).
Glad you got past these issues.
Hi Alex. The following question crossed my mind:
do you have to seek permission from Panasonic prior to publishing a book about their product? Or any company in general.
And a second related question. I assume your book is either neutral (descriptive) or is generally favorable to the product. What if one were to write rather unfavorably about a product?
Yeah! Make that 11 copies – I have just ordered my own copy & I'm downloading it now.
Just received my pdf of the book and put it on my phone, plenty of reading to be done.
Just read the tips at the end some very good points which should no doubt become obvious naturally over time but glad I've learnt them now rather than "naturally" in a year.
Will be handing out links to your website when I now sell any LX5's I may call a couple of my previous customer's too.
Any recommendations of somewhere I can post my musings about the book? I wouldn't say it will be a review as such but I feel already I can speak very highly about the book as a great asset to any LX5 user.
Great Work
Joe
josephdouglaslawson@gmail.com
p.s. a note to anyone reading here in doubt of purchasing. This book reads extremely well, and is far superior to the supplied manuals which seem to be cross referenced from every page which in contrast is extremely dissatisfying to read compared to this excellent guide.
The option to have the book on my phone is ideal in PDF format but I am even considering buying a paperback copy as well : )
Amazon.de informed me that the delivery time for the book I ordered is 5 to 7 weeks. That is surprisingly long. Esa Peltola, Luxembourg
Glad to see that your work on the D-Lux 5 books is coming along — great pics! — as I am keeping regular watch on your blog for news of its release. My D-Lux 5 has been my new best friend for exactly a month now, and I look forward to getting to know it even better in the near future with your help.
Since you have studied both cameras in depth, maybe you can settle the raging online debate going on between the LX5 & D-Lux 5 – is the output from these cameras the same? Or does the D-Lux 5 have superior output because of the "Leica Firmware"?
Alex, I bought the LX5 book as soon as I saw its availability and have been happy so far. I have a question about the LX5 camera itself. We all know the benefits of a UV, ND, or Polarizing filter. Do you know what Panasonic's thinking was regarding the necessary conversion adapter? If an adapter ring can be skrewed onto the camera…why can't a filter be put on directly? The conversion ring defeats the whole purpose of a compact camera. I just don't get it. Thanks for your thoughts.
Slow and steady (on the Leica D-Lux 5 book, that is) wins the race! I, for one, am patiently waiting and look forward to re-discovering my new camera once I finally have your book in hand, Alex.
On a side note, I am a technical writer/editor with over 18 years of experience, and as an newly-avid D-Lux 5 owner/user it would be my pleasure to help proofread the book (would still lay down my dosh for it, of course).
Hi, K2 — Thanks for offering to proofread the D-Lux 5 book. It's not quite to that stage yet, but if you'll send me an e-mail at contact@whiteknightpress.com, I can let you know the progress and make some arrangements.
–Alex
Any chance of you giving the same treatment to the Panasonic DMC-GF1?
May I wish you a respectful amount of stamina to get the thing done ..
I am very, very, curious indeed, having just bought a D-Lux 5 and a bit stunned about all its possibilities
Very glad to hear that the D-Lux 5 book is done, and now I anxiously await word of the print version (which hopefully I can order and have delivered direct to me in Paris). Enjoy the rest of the holiday season!
Mr. Alex White,
Having just purchased a new Leica D-lux 5 camera, as well as your copy of “The Photographer’s guide to the Leica D-lux 5” to go with it, I was excited to read, in your guide, about the Panasonic adapter (DMW-LA6) for filters, etc. that I could use with the “5”. The Leica “specialist” who took my camera order over the phone had said that it was possible to do with the D-lux 4 but not the D-lux 5. Assuming you are right, that you can, would you please send me a “how-to” via my e-mail address, (roberthaggart@mac.com).
Greatly appreciated,
Bob Haggart
I have replied by e-mail, as you asked. To summarize, there is no problem using this adapter with the D-Lux 5, though Leica may not officially approve it.
thanks
Hi I recently purchased your book on the LX5 to go with my camera. But I’m exchanging the camera for the DLux5 so I was wondering if I can just use the same book since they’re more or less the same camera with the same functions? What’s the difference between that and the DLux 5 book version? Thanks!
Hi — The books are very similar because the cameras are almost identical in operation, but the menus appear different and some features have different names or are otherwise different. I’m sending you an e-mail message with further information.
Hi,
Can you please tell me if your LX5 book has instructions on how to utilize RAW for somebody who has never done so. I would like to make the most out of the image quality by using RAW and I do not know the best way to start learning it. Thank you
Hi, the book discusses RAW files a good deal, but mostly in the context of explaining how the camera operates, such as what functions are or are not available when shooting in the RAW format. The book explains somewhat the advantages of using RAW, but it does not provide any details about how to edit RAW files using post-processing software. There are some good books available for that, such as Camera RAW 101 by Jon Canfield, or any current book about Photoshop or Photoshop Elements. You could go to Amazon.com and use the Search Inside the Book feature to check a few places in the LX5 book for RAW discussions, and see if they are what you are looking for.
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book Listed as Available from BN.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book Listed as Available from BN.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book is Now Available at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book is Now Available at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica Rumors Is Running a D-Lux 5 Book Giveaway Contest | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica Rumors Is Running a D-Lux 5 Book Giveaway Contest | White Knight Press
Pingback: Availability of D-Lux 5 Book in UK and other Countries | White Knight Press
Pingback: Availability of D-Lux 5 Book in UK and other Countries | White Knight Press
Hi. I’m from Malaysia. How can i purchase your paperback book?
Hi — You can purchase it from Amazon.co.uk using this link to the book, or from Amazon.com in the US, using the this link.
You can also purchase it from the web site at http://www.camerabooks.com. Thanks.
How do I use the pdf file on LX5 on ipad?
Hi — Copy the PDF file to the iTunes library on your computer. Then, after you sync the computer with the iPad, the PDF file should show up on the virtual “shelf” in your iBooks library. Look for it in the PDF category, not the Books category.
Will the D-Lux 5 book be available on Kindle soon? Thanks.
Hi — I wish it would be available sooner, but it’s scheduled to be converted in early March. That was the soonest I could get the Kindle conversion company that I use to schedule the conversion. I don’t want to convert it myself, because it can be tricky to get the formatting correct. Of course, you can get the PDF version and read it on a Kindle, though it won’t be quite the same as getting the actual Kindle version.
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book is In Stock and Ready to Ship through Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book is In Stock and Ready to Ship through Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic Lumix LX5 Book is Now Discounted at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Hi,
I am trying to find a local copy of the Photographer’s Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX5 book (without ordering it online). I am about to leave on a trip today (Monday 1/10/11), so if you know of anyone in the Los Angeles area that sells the book, please write me back quick! or call me (818)353-8650. Thanks!
Matt
Hi — As of now the White Knight Press books are available only online. There are some stores that may order one for a customer, but that would take a while, so I’m afraid there are no options for getting a copy quickly from a store.
Pingback: Panasonic Lumix LX5 Book is Now Available for iPad in iBooks Store | White Knight Press
Is it possible to get an extension lead for the external electronic viewfinder? Looks similar to a mini HDMI plug
I have not heard of an extension cable or anything similar for the electronic viewfinder, though maybe someone else knows of one. I’ll try to dig around a little and see if I can find out anything.
Thanks. Great book by the way.
I found a thread at dpreview.com that discussed this issue, though no one apparently knew of a cable; the persons discussing it said the connector is not HDMI. Here is a link to that thread.
Do you plan to write a book on the Panasonic Lumix GF1?
Hi — No, I have been doing books on cameras that don’t already have a book written about them, or at least no book of the same general type. There already is a popular book out about the GF1, so I’m not planning a book on that camera.
Will the Leica d-lux 5 book eventually be available in the iBook store as well? Thank you.
Yes, I have the D-Lux 5 book scheduled to be converted to that format, though it will take a while because the people who do the conversions for me have a backlog. As of now, I’m hoping that book will be available for the iPad sometime in March.
Just received the downloaded PDF for the Leica D-Lux 5, turned off the sound to the football games and focused on the manual all day , only occasionally looking up at the screen for special plays. Must say that your book is vastly superior to the official manual and the accompanying CD. It’s thorough, clearly written, and has excellent illustrations. I really feel ready now to use my camera to it’s fullest capabilities. Thanks for an excellent product.
Thanks for the kind words — I appreciate your taking the time to comment!
In reference to the book Photographer’s Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX5 ¿it will be published in Spanish?
Regards
Hi — No, I’m sorry, I wish I could get it translated, but I don’t have any plans for that at this time.
I am looking at purchasing this book for my new LX5, and have a kindle.Ggiven the black and white format of the kindle would your guide be better in the book form? I have viewed a preview of the guide and most of its contents seem to be text, so I was thinking that the kindle format would be useful.
Hi – Actually, the book has more than 150 photographs, though many of them are photos of the camera and its controls, which don’t really need to be in color. There are enough color photos that I, personally, much prefer the book in color. You can purchase the PDF version in color, which I believe you can load on your Kindle, though of course you could only see the photos in black and white, but you could use the PDF on your computer or any other device that can read PDFs, such as some phones, etc. I haven’t heard any complaints about the Kindle version, though, so people seem to be relatively satisfied with it.
I’ve just purchased a Panasonic DMC-G1K. The manual that came with it is very
confusing. Would your book be of help to me?
sincerely,
chuck greiner.
Hi — I have to confess that I have never used a DMC-G1K, so I can’t be sure, but I don’t think my book would be all that helpful — it might be of use to some extent in describing the menus or some features, but probably not of great use. Looking on amazon.com, I saw some books on cameras like the GF-1 and GH-1 and the G-2, that might possibly be of more use to you.
Pingback: D-Lux 5 Book? - Leica User Forum
Pingback: D-Lux 5 Book? - Leica User Forum
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book Will be Available for Kindle Soon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book Will be Available for Kindle Soon | White Knight Press
I am living in Belgium
where could I buy this promising book?
Hello — If you want a printed copy, the best way to buy the book probably is from Amazon.co.uk. If you want to buy a downloaded version in PDF format, you can purchase that from this web site; please see the main page of this site, and click on the copy of the book’s cover for further information.
I am living in Belgium
where could I buy this promising book?
Hello — If you want a printed copy, the best way to buy the book probably is from Amazon.co.uk. If you want to buy a downloaded version in PDF format, you can purchase that from this web site; please see the main page of this site, and click on the copy of the book’s cover for further information.
One of our bookstores here in the Philippines can order the book directly from your publisher or distributor but I would need the ISBN. Thanks and looking forward to reading your book. I have a new Lumix LX5 and I’m very eager to learn and use all of the camera’s features. The user’s manual that comes with it is quite complicated to understand.
Hello — The ISBN is 978-0-9649875-9-3. I should point out that bookstores ordinarily won’t order the book, because it is mostly aimed at online sales, and is not able to be sold to bookstores at the wholesale discount they expect. It may work out, but if not, the book can be ordered from Amazon.com, or from any of the other Amazon sites around the world; another good source is an online seller called camerabooks.com, which handles a lot of international orders.
I ordered your book thru Amazon.com and looking forward to receiving it by mid-April. Our local bookstore can also source it but it will take them a month and price is higher 🙂
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book is Now Available for Kindle at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 5 Book is Now Available for Kindle at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
I wanted you to know that I just bought your book on the Panasonic LX5 and it’s really well written. I must have read the manual that came with the camera 5 times and still couldn’t figure out some of the settings.
Thanks again for a wonderful, well written, easy to understand book with lots of ideas, plus examples and WHY… you set the settings certain ways. Perfect… I’m so excited that I’m taking AWESOME pictures now with some manual settings.
Thanks again
Thanks very much! It’s great to hear that the book was useful to you.
Hi Alex
I purchased your book for the D-LUX 4 last year and was very glad I did; it thoroughly explained everything in a nice clear way that was easy to understand, and it got me shooting the pictures I wanted in no time, so thank you very much for that.
Now I also have a Lumix GF1, and can you imagine my disappointment when I find you haven’t written a book on that one.
I know there are books out there on it, and I am not benefitting from the one I have, so if I say I think you could really help an amateur out by sharing your wisdom and excellent writing skills would you reconsider and write a book on it? I would gladly pre order it 🙂
Thanks for your time
Gina
Hi, Gina — That’s one of the nicest compliments I can imagine — thanks very much! I would like to write about the GF1, which I understand is a terrific camera, but it takes a lot of work over a period of months to do one of these books, and there’s only one of me, so I have to make some tough choices. Right now I’m just finishing up a book about the Canon PowerShot S95, and then I have to turn my attention to other projects. I’m sorry I couldn’t be more help to you; hopefully in the future I’ll do another book that will be of use to you. Good luck!
–Alex
I think my husband would be happy if you wrote a book somewhere along the lines of stop buying cameras and just shoot already, but thats another story.
I am wondering if perhaps the book on the LX5 may be a help; its not the camera itself that I struggle with – its the menus and submenus and quick menus. I’m thinking that being Panasonic there may be some carry over from camera to camera that may provide some useful insight. Am I even in the ballpark?
Thanks again,
Gina
Hi, Gina — I have to confess that I have never used a GF1, so I can’t be sure. My wife has a different Panasonic model, though, and she has found that my Panasonic books have some useful information about the menus of her camera. You could take a look at the book excerpt on this site, on the info page for the LX5, or you could go to the Amazon.com site and use the “Search Inside the Book” feature to try a few searches and see if the information looks useful. I would hesitate to recommend the book for a different model, because there certainly will be a lot about your camera that is not covered in the LX5 book.
–Alex
I’m glad you found a way to order it; thanks for letting me know. I hope you enjoy it!
–Alex
Hi
Are you going to publish soon a book on the Olympus XZ1?
Hello — That is one of the cameras I have considered for another book, but it won’t be very soon, because I have to catch up on some other projects first. I’ll make a note of your interest, though, as I consider what camera to work on next. Thanks.
–Alex White
I just purchased Alexander White’s “Photographer’s Guide to the Panasonic Lumix LX5”. This is the first time in memory that I have read a camera guide that is written in such plain, straightforward (read: understandable) English. I will keep this book as a constant guide to enhance my use of this wonderful camera. This book greatly exceeds the users manual (on CD) that comes with the camera as a tutorial for the use of the LX5. Gary Falk, Louisville, KY
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S95 Book is at the Printer | White Knight Press
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S95 Book Update – Proof Copy Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Eine Frage an D-Lux Besitzer - Seite 2 - Leica User Forum
Pingback: Eine Frage an D-Lux Besitzer - Seite 2 - Leica User Forum
I ordered and paid for your copy of instruction on operating Lumix DMC-LX5 but up till today did not received it.
Tony Fiala
17-33925 Araki Ct.
Mission,BC, V2V 7R5 Canada
Hi — I’m sorry to hear you had this problem. I have sent you an e-mail message to try to resolve it.
Thanks so much for this fantastic guide. I am glad that I made my decision to buy this book. And many thanks for keeping the price low for the pdf version. It helped me to make my mind setup for the purchase. Thanks again,
Syed
Thanks! I’m glad you found it useful.
How do you put the adaptor ring, or lenses on? For the love of me I cannot find how to remove the protective ring around the lense on the D-LUX 5
Hi — You just unscrew the retaining ring. It unscrews by turning it counter-clockwise. Then you screw on the lens adapter, and screw a filter or other accessory on to the other end of the adapter.
Thanks Alex.
Only thing is, which is the retaining ring?
Love your book by the way
It’s the outermost plastic ring, attached to the outer part of the lens assembly. It’s the part that the lens cap gets attached to. You may have to just grasp it and twist hard to unscrew it the first time. It’s a narrow ring, and it may be hard to see that it’s a separate part, but, unless it’s missing, it should unscrew with no problem.
My book just arrived yesterday via B&N special order. This book is everything it claims to be. The printout of Canon’s pdf, hole-punched, in a binder on my computer books shelf does not suffice. Canon’s manual is a reference book. White’s book serves as a proper tutorial which I can read at my leisure and also bring along with the camera if I want. For me it is worth the extra money to have the actual book. I keep the pdf of Canon’s manual on my computer for searching fast. White’s book is very readable and clear. And the layout and photos are very pleasing, which is important to me. By perusing the book, in just 24 hours I have learned so much. I did not understand all the differences in SD cards – see pp 19-24. That in itself justified for me getting this book. I already purchased and have been using the eye-fi card from reading a preview of the book. I am looking forward to learning all about the menus and setting up the shortcuts to my favorite menus. I highly recommend this book for anyone who wants to get the most out of the fantastic S95 camera.
Dear Mr. White:
I’ve found your book tremendously helpful for photography newbies like me who are learning to master a sophisticated compact camera. In the past month, I’ve frequently referred to your book for instruction since I started exploring my new camera. I must tell you, I’m no longer clueless and I’m very confident in using all the features I’ve tried. Yesterday marked another milestone in my journey of learning: I mastered the MF function and started taking sharp, close-up pictures and accomplished the effects I desired. Thank you!
I’ve just received the Raynox macro lens today and other accessories (the LA6, LWA, LND and LPD) are on their way. I’m looking forward to experimenting with these tools and bringing new effects to my photos.
I have a few questions related to LX5 in the following areas, which I’m not able to find direct answers through my research. I’m hoping that with your expertise, I can solve these puzzles.
1. Built-in flash
a. I understand the technicalities of ‘front (1st) ‘ and ‘rear (2nd) ‘ curtain sync, but what’s the difference between ‘2nd curtain sync’ and ‘slow sync’? Do they all fire at the end of exposure?
b. I sometimes have trouble firing the built-in flash when it’s set at ‘slow sync’, but with ‘2nd curtain sync’ it is a sure hit. I couldn’t figure out why.
2. Telephoto lens
Could you recommend a reliable, compatible model for LX5, if I prefer not to use a telescope as suggested in your book?
3. Off-camera flash
a. Sync chord
Is this the only way to maintain TTL metering with an off-camera flash?
I plan to purchase a Metz 58 AF-2 flash. How can I determine which sync chord is compatible? Could you recommend a model? I’ve heard Olympus sync chords work for Panasonic flash as well, but I just don’t know for sure which one to buy.
b. Do you think I can use the Metz 58 AF-2 on a sync chord as a master to trigger a slave? If so, is there any way I can set up the slave flash with TTL metering?
c. Can I use the built-in flash as a master to trigger a slave?
d. Could you describe the steps you go through to determine the right exposure and to manually adjust a flash (pg. 239)?
I thank you in advance for your help. I’d highly recommend your book to every one who wants to make the best use of his/her LX5.
YY
Hello, YY — I’ll give you a few answers, but I can’t claim to be an expert on all aspects of flash and these other topics. I’ll tell you my opinions, and I’ve also referred your questions to a photographer who is more expert on flash topics, and I’ll let you know through another comment here if I get more information from him.
As for Slow Sync and 1st or 2nd Curtain, you can use both settings together. That is, you can use Slow Sync at the same time as either 1st or 2nd Curtain, so the flash will fire at the beginning or end of the exposure depending on which of those settings you’re using.
I don’t know what could cause your problem with the flash firing in Slow Sync mode.
I have never used an add-on telephoto lens, other than the telescope. I have heard that others have used them, but I have no experience in that area.
I have no experience in using a sync cord with the LX5; the camera does not have a terminal for a cord. Maybe there is some sort of adapter that would let you use a cord, but I have never looked into that area.
You can use the LX5’s built-in flash to trigger an optical slave that is attached to a slave flash. When I do that, I just use trial and error to determine the correct exposure. I also usually shoot in the RAW format, so I have a good deal of leeway to adjust the exposure with my software after shooting.
If I get any further information back from the flash expert, I’ll let you know. Thanks for your comments.
–Alex White
Mr. White:
Thank you very much.
YY
Mr. White: i have just purhased your book on the Lumix LX5—need urgent help via email if you can.
I cannot figure out how to attach the lens ring–have no clue how to open it..
and have no idea how to attach the shoulder strap with those two small clips on it.
can you bail me out quickly??
sure hope so.
you make a point of saying how important it is to attach the lens cap but there is no instruction anywhere on how to open that circular clip and run it throught the loops.
many thanks
bill liss
atlanta, georgia
wjliss@gmail.com
Hi — I have replied by e-mail. Briefly, the point to remember here is that the lens cap string is not to be opened or separated — it is a continuous loop that is looped through both the lens cap and the camera, and then the cap is threaded back through the open part of the loop, so it is fastened to the camera.
Hi Alex,
Saw your comments on the EVF. Though to write and ask if you know anyone making available a “macro light” that would fit over the LX5’s horse-shoe slot? Seems that a Olympus-accessories provider has such a gizmo ready, so though I ask. My limited understanding is that LX5’s physical horse-shoe slot is of a different dimension/size then Olympus’s. Not only that, the internal circuit pins that provides the power are also different.
Thanks in advance.
Hello, Eddie — No, I haven’t heard anything about a ring flash or ring light made specifically for the LX5 or that would be a particularly good fit. The Metz 15 MS-1 Ringlight is one that might work, though probably only in manual mode. I feel certain there are other options out there that could work, but I have not kept up with all developments in this area.
Hi,
I don’t own a credit card(only maestro card, paypal). Is there a way to buy your book as a pdf version? I would like to get the one about panasonic lx-5
Yes, you should be able to purchase it with PayPal from the ordering page on this site. Here is a link to the PDF ordering page. Let me know if you have any problems. Thanks.
hi,
nope, i still get the window, where paypal is asking me to add a credit card like American express, mastercard, visa. Like i said, i don’t own and I don’t need one. Any ideas how to buy this book:)
Okay, if you would like to purchase a PDF copy of the book, just send me a payment of $9.95 via PayPal to my user ID, which is aswhite@erols.com. If that doesn’t work, you can send a check or money order to White Knight Press, 9704 Old Club Trace, Henrico, VA 23238. Please mention in the message or on the check or money order which book it is for, and that you want the PDF. I can then send you a link to download the book. Thanks.
ok, you should have the money by now, i sent it via paypal.
I bought your D-Lux 4 book when I had a D-Lux 4 and bought your D-Lux 5 when I upgraded my camera to a D-Lux 5 and both books are extremely helpful.
I decided to purchase the pdf copy of your book so I’ll have it on my iPad2. I live in the UK and the Paypal amount includes a 20% additional charge for VAT. What’s going on?? Since White Knight Press doesn’t trade in the UK it is not VAT registered and therefore cannot pay any VAT collected to the UK Inland Revenue. Why is it trying to charge me an additional 20%?!
The PDF versions of the book are sold through a company called FastSpring, which handles all of the download sales transactions, including determining whether the VAT needs to be charged. In other words, the seller is FastSpring, not White Knight press.
Okay, thanks, for your quick response, Alexander.
It appears that FastSpring has a European office located in the UK so it must be VAT registered. A UK VAT registered company charging me in dollars is quite unusual.
Thanks, Alex. Will consider that — though from initial quick look, seems a bit expensive (+/- USD400 from quick online search). 🙂 If you do spot a less pricy option, please do sound out. Cheers and keep writing great manuals, if you have time perhaps to expand links to matters regarding the LX-3/5/7(?) etc would be great too! 🙂
Want to purchase this book, please advise when it is available.
RSD
Hello — The book is available now for download through this site as a PDF and it is available through the various Amazon sites in the U.S. and elsewhere as a paperback book. Just go to an Amazon site and search for “S95” under Books and you will find it. If these options don’t work for you, let me know and I can point out other options for purchasing the book. Thanks.
Dear Mr. White,
I bought the Photographer’s Guide to Panasonic Lumix 5 and I read it cover to cover. It has been very useful and I really learned a lot from it. Now I know my camera’s features better and can take better photos. I have used it as a reference book (never went back to the complicated manual) and go back to it from time to time. Thank you for coming out with a book like this. By the way, Amazon shipped it very fast here in Manila. I expected it to arrive within 10 to 14 days, but it took them only 8 days. This is very much appreciated.
Hi — Thanks for letting me know — it’s great to hear that Amazon was able to get the book to you quickly. I’m glad you found the book useful, and I really appreciate your comments!
Are there any chance that you’ll do a guid on the Leica X1 and M9 rangefinder?
I hope so.
Hi — Thanks for asking, but I have been concentrating on cameras that are more in the same class as the D-Lux 4 and D-Lux 5. Maybe someday I’ll move up to the likes of the X1 and M9, but for now I’m staying with the more mid-range cameras.
Hi, just ordered your LX5 pdf book through your website, using PayPal. I was a bit put off that I was required to enter so much personal information before I could order. For a pdf download, paid with PayPal, you Do Not Need my phone number and address. With the concerns about internet security and selling of personal information databases, I do not care to put out any more information than necessary when filling out internet forms.
Your manual looks good and I look forward to using it. I hope you will consider the order form information policy on your site. Thank you.
Hi — I understand what you’re saying; I have had a few other customers mention this issue. Here is the situation: The sales of PDF downloads are handled by a company called FastSpring — they provide the ordering system, payment processing, and downloads. Their ordering system uses a process called “risk analysis,” which analyzes all purchases by PayPal or credit cards using data such as physical address of purchaser, location of internet connection, and credit card billing address, which they compare to see if there is a likelihood of fraud, before approving the transaction. I agree that it can seem intrusive, but I certainly am not equipped to process payments myself, so I need to rely on a company like FastSpring. They have done an excellent job so far. But I will continue to evaluate and see if there is a better way to handle payments. Thanks for your comments.
Hi im trying to shoot in RAW on my LX5 and am getting some strange results, compared to the jpg versions of my photos the raw photos look bland and washed out, i use the supplied Silkypix software and also CS5 Camera Raw but cannot get a good result. I tend to shoot using M mode but have experimented alot but the jpgs always look better even though they get shapened up alot, the color is what im missing in my RAW photos
Is there a different software that maybe is a bit easier to use, or does your book cover RAW shooting / settings / software in detail so i can learn more.
P.s im coming from a nikon d80 so i dont know if im expecting too much but the LX5 should match it from what ive read
Thanks Chris
Hi, Chris — I’m not sure I can be of much help on this question. I use Adobe Photoshop CS5 with Adobe Camera Raw, and the results have always looked okay to me. There are so many adjustments you can make in both ACR and Photoshop, such as Levels, Curves, Saturation, Hue, etc. I am by no means an expert on Photoshop or other software. It might be that Photoshop Elements would be easier to get good results with; some people really like Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, which I have installed on my computer but haven’t used all that much. Maybe someone else who reads this will have comments. Also, this would be a good question to ask at the Panasonic Talk forum on http://www.dpreview.com. I have to say that my book does not go into all that much detail on RAW files and how to process them. There are whole books on using RAW; you might want to look into some of them at Amazon.com or elsewhere.
–Alex
……Thanks Alex – yeah i will take your advice and find a book on RAW photo editing or ACR editing, good idea
I have just bought a used (and slightly damaged, but still apparently fully functional) D-Lux 4 and am enjoying the image quality for the most part. It came with firmware version 1.0, so I upgraded to 2.2. With your book, do you have any sort of addendum covering hidden functions of firmware version 2.2?
I am getting fairly short battery life, so will be ordering a couple of new batteries.
Love the macro capability, the colour veracity and the exposure choices in snapshot mode.
Hi — The book on the D-Lux 4 was written before the firmware upgrade was issued, and it does not cover the new functions. However, the book on the Panasonic Lumix LX3 was written later, and it does cover the firmware upgrade for that camera, which is almost identical to the D-Lux 4 in its operations. Also, Leica issued an addendum to its manual that covers the new functions provided by the upgrade. If you need further information, let me know.
I have just bought a used (and slightly damaged, but still apparently fully functional) D-Lux 4 and am enjoying the image quality for the most part. It came with firmware version 1.0, so I upgraded to 2.2. With your book, do you have any sort of addendum covering hidden functions of firmware version 2.2?
I am getting fairly short battery life, so will be ordering a couple of new batteries.
Love the macro capability, the colour veracity and the exposure choices in snapshot mode.
Hi — The book on the D-Lux 4 was written before the firmware upgrade was issued, and it does not cover the new functions. However, the book on the Panasonic Lumix LX3 was written later, and it does cover the firmware upgrade for that camera, which is almost identical to the D-Lux 4 in its operations. Also, Leica issued an addendum to its manual that covers the new functions provided by the upgrade. If you need further information, let me know.
Pingback: Win a Canon PowerShot S95 book | Photo Rumors
Hi,
will you be writing a book on the Lumix TZ20( ZS10)?
Baruch
Will you be writing a book on the Lumix TZ20(ZS10)
Baruch
Hi — Probably not, though I haven’t figured out what book to do next as of yet. No plans for that one at this time.
Hi! Alex, your “Photographer’s Guide to the Leica D-Lux 5” is simple and easy to understand for a newcomer in photography like me. An excellent and great manual to have in exploiting all the features of the camera! Just can’t leave home without either – camera and manual!
Thanks very much! I agree, the D-Lux 5 is a terrific camera. I’m glad you found the book useful.
–Alex
Pingback: The winner of the Canon PowerShot S95 book is… | Photo Rumors
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S95 Book Now Available in iBookstore | White Knight Press
fantastic S95 camera
I am trying to download pictures onto my computer but do not have the disc I need – at least I think thats what their saying . Can I download the format from a canon site. Will this book give me the know how to download the pics without the disc? Thanks for helping.
HI — It’s hard to tell what the problem is without some more information. You should be able to download the pictures okay without any special software, unless they were taken in the RAW format. In that case, you would need either the software that comes with the camera or some other program that can read the RAW files, such as Adobe Photoshop Elements, Apple Aperture, or some other one. My book on the PowerShot S95 camera does not really spend much time on this sort of issue, so it probably would not be much help. If you want to give some details about any error message you are getting, I could try to help. You also might try posting your question in the Canon Talk forum at dpreview.com.
–Alex
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S95 Book is Now In Stock for Shipping by Amazon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P500 is Now Available in PDF Format | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P500 is Now Available in PDF Format | White Knight Press
Pingback: I like Nikon » Blog Archive » Promotions are essential, Nikon VP says - Keeping tabs on all things Nikon
Pingback: I like Nikon » Blog Archive » Promotions are essential, Nikon VP says - Keeping tabs on all things Nikon
Pingback: Front-Curtain and Rear-Curtain Flash with the Nikon Coolpix P500 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Front-Curtain and Rear-Curtain Flash with the Nikon Coolpix P500 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Update on Status of Nikon Coolpix P500 Book | White Knight Press
Pingback: Update on Status of Nikon Coolpix P500 Book | White Knight Press
Pingback: How do you set RAW on D-Lux 5? - Leica User Forum
Pingback: How do you set RAW on D-Lux 5? - Leica User Forum
Pingback: Henk van Vugt Fotografie » Weekly Nikon news flash #125
Pingback: Henk van Vugt Fotografie » Weekly Nikon news flash #125
Pingback: HDR with the Nikon Coolpix P500 | White Knight Press
Pingback: HDR with the Nikon Coolpix P500 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #125 | | What Is PhotographyWhat Is Photography
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #125 | | What Is PhotographyWhat Is Photography
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P500 Paperback Proof Copy Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P500 Paperback Proof Copy Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Availability of Canon PowerShot S95 Books | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P500 Book Is Now In Stock at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P500 Book Is Now In Stock at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Kudos to White Knight Press – my order for the pdf version of the Canon S95 guide came very quickly, and I was given the opportunity to pay in Swiss francs (with the correct exchange rate). I have loaded the file to my iPad, and at first glance, this seems exactly what I need. My S95 took great photos during my recent vacation in Barcelona in “auto” mode but now I want to learn much more about using the camera.
Thanks very much — I hope the book turns out to be useful to you — the S95 is a great camera, with terrific capabilities.
–Alex White
Alex,
Let me start by thanking you for putting together such a wonderful book for the D-Lux 5 that Leica should seriously consider including in their bundle.
I am shooting RAW with my new little Leica and have purchased it with very specific goals. Underwater photography is my hobby and processing RAW files helps preserve valuable information that helps during post processing. Took the camera on 8 dives last weekend and visited the wreck of the Duane and various patches of Molasses Reef in Key Largo. Camera is housed in a Nauticam LX5 case and it works beautifully. I am doing some tests and am considering this particular configuration as a point and shoot system for students to consider when picking up underwater photography and expanding their scuba specialty training credentials.
I am using Mac and noticed that Lightroom 3.4 and Photoshop CS5 is not able to read Leica D-Lux 5 RAW files. It returns an error deeming files as of an unrecognized format. I have been able to process D-Lux5 RAW files using Aperture 3 which is Apple’s competition with Adobe Lightroom.
Have you or other D-Lux5 users ran into this issue? I would think that Leica would be promoting a software bundle with their product if it’s fully compatible.
I sent Leica an email and got a reply asking if my version of Lightroom was up to date, which it is. Also visited Adobe’s web page and spotted a list of cameras supported by them and unfortunately, D-Lux5 is not yet listed.
http://www.adobe.com/products/photoshop/extend.html
Thank you for looking into this and letting me know. It’s likely that time will resolve this as more updates are added to Lightroom and Photoshop RAW repertoires.
Ricardo
Hi, Ricardo — I just went and checked some of my D-Lux 5 .rwl files on my MacBook Pro, and they opened just fine in Adobe Bridge and Photoshop CS5. The version of Adobe Camera Raw that opens up when I open one of the files is Adobe Camera Raw version 6.4.1, and I don’t recall having any problems with these RAW files in the past. I don’t use Lightroom very much, but I just tried it and it also opened my D-Lux 5 RAW files with no problem. I suspect the problem may be with the version of Adobe Camera Raw that you have installed; I suggest checking to see if you have version 6.4.1 and if not, downloading it from the Adobe web site. I believe you can just open your software and choose Help — Check for Updates to get the latest updates. I hope this helps resolve your issue.
–Alex
Alex,
Thank you for the prompt reply. I had success with Photoshop CS5; however, Lightroom is still not liking the files. Do have Lightroom updated to version 3.4.1 and for CS5, the RAW plug in 6.4.1.145
Will keep on trying to figure this out and will let you know who this goes.
Ricardo
PS : Very nice of you to take the time to get back with a fan!
Much appreciated and acknowledged. Enjoy your day.
Hi, Ricardo — I just checked back on my copy of Lightroom, and it is version 3.4.1, and using the Lightroom menu option, selecting About Lightroom, I see that it is using Adobe Camera Raw version 6.4.1. Is your copy of Lightroom definitely using the latest version of the Adobe Camera Raw plug-in? That sounds like the problem. I hope that fixes it.
–Alex
Hallo,
I m Living in Beijing
Where could I this promising Book ?
Hallo,
I m Living in Beijing
Where could I this promising Book ?
Pingback: First Try at Miniature Effect Movie with Panasonic Lumix LX5 | White Knight Press
Your book on the D Lux 5 is invaluable – thank you! You talk about add-on filters and lenses (p 231) and unscrewing the thin trim ring from the camera’s lens to do this. I have tried, without a lot of force I admit, to unscrew the ring but it seems pretty fixed. Any suggestions?
Thanks again for the great book
Margaret
Hello, Margaret — First of all, I would suggest that you make sure the trim ring is not already off. If it is off, you will see screw threads on the edge of the lens. If you see the smooth edge of the trim ring, then it was probably just screwed on too tightly. Others have had some problems with this process. Just grasp it very firmly and twist it counter-clockwise as you face the camera. Once it gets loose you should have no problem removing it, unless it somehow got stuck by being threaded on improperly. Good luck!
–Alex
Hi
I just wanted to thank you for your book on the LX5. I’d relegated my camera to the bottom of my camera bag & rarely used it. Too fiddly to navigate ( or so I thought ) Your book is excellent & laid out in the easiest format to understand , & I have now rediscovered what a great little camera it is.
Thanks
AL
Hi, Al — Thanks very much! It’s comments like yours that make it rewarding to write books like this. I hope you continue to enjoy your camera!
–Alex
Are there not any retail stores that sell this book or is it only available thru online stores? If available in retail stores, which ones in Michigan?
Hi — No, it’s available only through online sellers, such as Amazon.com, bn.com, camerabooks.com, and some others. You can get a complete list by searching for the book’s title at bookfinder.com.
Are there not any retail stores that sell this book or is it only available thru online stores? If available in retail stores, which ones in Michigan?
Hi — No, it’s available only through online sellers, such as Amazon.com, bn.com, camerabooks.com, and some others. You can get a complete list by searching for the book’s title at bookfinder.com.
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P500 Book is Now Available for Kindle | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P500 Book is Now Available for Kindle | White Knight Press
I simply wanted to send a small note so as to express gratitude to you for all the splendid pointers you are sharing here. My time-consuming internet lookup has now been compensated with really good tips to share with my close friends. I would tell you that most of us site visitors are undoubtedly lucky to live in a decent community with so many outstanding people with beneficial secrets. I feel very much fortunate to have discovered your entire webpages and look forward to many more awesome minutes reading here. Thanks a lot again for everything.
Thanks for your comment! I’m glad you’re finding useful information on the site.
I recently obtained the new Canon S100. Do you plan on a S100 guide, or will the S95 guide suffice?
Yes, I am planning a guide to the S100, which I hope to have ready within the next month or so. I would recommend waiting for that one if you don’t mind waiting a few weeks.
Great news! I’ll look forward to it!
Thanks
Hi, Enjoyed your LX5 book very much. Now I just purchased a Canon PowerShot S100. I see you have a book on the S95. When can I look forward to a book on the S100. I would be very happy if it is soon!
Hi, Gary — Thanks! I will be trying to find an S100 as soon as they become available in my area, and then I hope to have the book on that camera done within a month or two — I will hope to have it done before the end of the year.
–Alex
That is very welcome news. I just bought the S100 after owning an S95 and realize they are very different cameras in terms of options and stuff.
That’s interesting to hear. I haven’t been able to find an S100 yet, but i’m hoping to get one in the near future and start working on the book.
Even though I carefully chose my S95 and normally drive a DSLR, I never think that I know all I need to know about my cameras. When I found the first indications of this book on the Internet, I realised that the extracts showed it went into every conceivable option available. I bought the pdf and have used it as a tutorial to go through every available option in what I believe is still the best pocket camera available. There’s no point in having a Swiss Army Knife to just butter toast. An S95 is not just an ordinary point and shoot. This book will not make you an awesome photographer, but it will let you know the functions of an awesome camera.
Thanks for the comment! I agree that the S95 is a great camera, especially for its small size. I’m glad you’re enjoying this terrific camera.
I have your book on the DLUX5 and consider it a valuable resource. Please consider the Fuji X10 as well as it looks like a VERY interesting compact P&S. If you do, perhaps you can email me when you release it. I’m seriously considering the camera.
Hi — Thanks for your comment. I actually am considering doing a book on the Fuji X10, though right now I have to finish up the two other books that are under way, so it would be at least a couple of months before I could start.
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Fujifilm FinePix X100 is Now Available for PDF Download | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujifilm FinePix X100 Book Has Been Submitted to the Printer | White Knight Press
Great to hear on an upcoming s100 book. Just picked mine up today and you book will be a welcome addition. Hopefully you will again do multi format as I prefer using my tablet for reference manuals. Do you have a mail list or shall we just check your site?
Hi, Tony — Yes, it will be in several formats, though some of the conversions may take a while. I don’ t have a list, so please just check the site, or you could follow the site on Twitter; the ID is cameraguides. Thanks.
— Alex
Pingback: Proof Copy of Fujifilm X100 Book Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sample Photographs by Fujifilm FinePix X100 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujifilm FinePix X100 Book is Now In Stock at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Multiple Exposures with Lumix LX5.
Alex,
A few weeks ago I got the Lumix LX5 camera and your book (actually twice, in e-format and printed version!)
I just found out that this camera does “multiple exposures,” a great capability I also have on my Nikon D7000 SLR.
Unfortunatelly, looks like once in “multiple exposures mode,” I can not zoom anymore, like I do with the Nikon. I like to take a picture, zoom a bit on the subject, take the second picture, zoom again and take the 3rd picture.
Am I missing something? Is there anything special I have to do to be able to zoom the lens “between shoots?”
Thank you.
Val Tepordei
Hi, Val — That’s an interesting question. I don’t have my camera with me right now, but I’ll check into it tonight and let you know what I find out.
–Alex
Hi, Val – I just checked with my LX5, and I found the same thing you did — evidently Panasonic decided to disable the zoom when you are in the midst of a multiple exposure. Maybe the idea is that you will likely want to line up the second and third shots to overlap with the first one at the same focal length, but I can certainly see the advantage of being able to zoom between shots. I can’t think of any way to get around the problem, other than changing your angle of view by moving the camera closer to the subject. Thanks for pointing this out.
–Alex
Pingback: Nueva Fujifilm X100, Compacta con sensor APS-C
Following retirement I’m planning on travelling a lot for the next year. All my (D)SLR gear etc now gone via E-Bay as I couldn’t contemplate carrying it all! I analysed my travel photos which showed 75% were 28mm / 50mm (35mm equivalent) orientated. After much internet camera research and a couple of weeks bedtime reading of your book I’ve elected to take the DMC LX-5 as my “best compromise” camera, based on potential photo quality, versatility and compact size….not to mention your very informative book as well! First stop Beijing in 3 weeks time. Thank you for all the effort you’ve put into an excellent LX-5 resource, both on the internet and in your book. I’ve spread the word at our photography club!
Hello, Graham — Thanks for your comment ! I’m very glad the book was useful to you — best of luck in your travels and your photography!
–Alex
Pingback: Fujifilm FinePix X100 Book is Now Available at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Hi Alex,
I have a PDF copy of your LX5 guide and have also downloaded the useful appendum about V 2.0 firmware. I would now like to purchase the hard copy of the LX5 guide for reasons of portability and wanted to enquire whether the V 2.0 appendum was now integrated in to the hard copy?
Great guides by the way. I shall be buying my sister the Nikon P500 book for Christmas.
Thanks in advance.
Hello, Mark — Thanks for your message; I’m glad you have found the guides useful. In answer to your question, no, I have not incorporated the additional information about the version 2.0 firmware into the hard copy of the LX5 book. I can understand that it would be helpful to do that, but, at least at the moment, I have to focus on getting new books into production. Once things settle down a bit in a month or two, I might consider revising the LX5 book, but I can’t guarantee that I will, giving the complications involved in revising a printed book.
–Alex
Thanks for your response Alex. I quite understand!
Hello, is it likely that, in the near future, you will produce a book for the Canon G12?
Best wishes
Hi — Thanks for asking. The G12 is a great camera, but I have already contributed to a book about it as co-author with David Busch, so I can’t do one in my own series. That book is available at Amazon and in bookstores if you’re interested.
–Alex
Pingback: CF card for D-LUX 5 - Leica User Forum
Pingback: CF card for D-LUX 5 - Leica User Forum
Hi,
Now I’m using Fujifilm Finepix HS10…but I don’t really understand how and when to use the Aperture and Shutter speed mode yet.I’m very keen in food photography and I want to get the very best pictures using the Aperture and Shutter speed mode or any other modes that suited the food photography.
Could you please guide me which aperture number or shutter speed to shoot best food photos?Please feel free to visit my blog for your judgement on my recent photos taken by this camera.
Thank you for your help.
Hi — I took a look at your blog, and the photos look quite good already. I can give you my opinion, and maybe someone else will have thoughts. It seems to me that your goal is to have clear, sharp photos of the various dishes. I’m assuming you’re not using a tripod. If that’s true, then you need to use a fairly quick shutter speed, say, 1/30 second or faster, to avoid blur from camera shake. You also need a somewhat narrow aperture, probably f/5.6 or narrower (higher number) to keep the images sharp with adequate depth of field. You may have to boost the ISO setting somewhat to use those settings. You also might want to use any available settings to increase sharpness and possibly color saturation. I’m not familiar with the HS10, but these principles apply in general. If you use a tripod, you can use a slower shutter speed, but you still would need a relatively narrow aperture to keep the images sharp. I hope this helps.
–Alex
Will the book on S100 be available as an iBook via iTunes, like your excellent S95 text?
How soon available, do you think – roughly. 🙂
Regards,
R
Hi, Richard — The S100 book is in the final editing stage, and I hope to have the PDF version available for sale within a week or two. The iTunes version will take at least a few weeks more, because it has to be converted by an outside company. I’ll be posting updates on this site as the book comes out in various formats.
–Alex
Pingback: Fujifilm FinePix X100 Book is Being Released for Kindle, iBookstore, and Nook | White Knight Press
How would you recommend purchase of the PDF version of the book for someone that refuses to use PayPal (due to trust/reputation issues, including past experiences)?
Hi — When you click on the link to go to the purchasing page for the PDF, you will have the option of using PayPal, a credit card, a check, or a money order. These transactions are handled by a company called FastSpring, which has been very reliable in my experience, and I don’t believe you should have any problems with the transaction. If you do, please let me know and I will look for other options. Thanks.
How would you recommend purchase of the PDF version of the book for someone that refuses to use PayPal (due to trust/reputation issues, including past experiences)?
Hi — When you click on the link to go to the purchasing page for the PDF, you will have the option of using PayPal, a credit card, a check, or a money order. These transactions are handled by a company called FastSpring, which has been very reliable in my experience, and I don’t believe you should have any problems with the transaction. If you do, please let me know and I will look for other options. Thanks.
I have just acquired the Photographer’s Guide to the Panasonic Lumix lx5 and note the observation about a dangling lens cap being a nuisance for some people. There is a brilliant product which addresses this issue but which amazingly no one seems to have thought of before. I have one but also have kept the lens cap string attached to avoid the risk of dropping the cap when removing it from the lens onto the holder. Go to:- http://www.kickstarter.com/projects/293194835/camera-lens-cap-holder AND http://www.cameracapholder.com/ AND http://photojojo.com/store/awesomeness/lens-cap-strap-holder/
Another useful tool for the lx3, lx5 and leica dlux series is the ClearViewer which is a diopter attachment which assists shooting in bright sunlight and is effectively equivalent to using a camera with an optical viewfinder. Go to:- http://www.clearviewer.com
The inventor will also make a version to suit a different camera if requested. I have found the ClearViewer viewfinder absolutely invaluable.
Aha! That worked nicely, thank you.
Aha! That worked nicely, thank you.
Pingback: Fujifilm FinePix X100 Book is Now In Stock at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S100 Book is Now Available for Sale in PDF Version | White Knight Press
Please inform me when the paperback version is available + what transportation costs are to Belgium?
Thank you
Hello — The book should be available in paperback around the first of the year; I will let you know.
Hello, Mr. Decock. The book is now listed as available through Amazon.com. It is not yet listed as “In Stock,” but you can order it there now, and they will ship it soon, probably within about one week. I believe the standard rate for shipping to Belgium is $3.99, but they also have faster shipping available. I’m providing a link to a page with Amazon’s shipping rates to Europe: http://www.amazon.com/gp/help/customer/display.html/ref=hp_navbox_596184_ways?nodeId=596194. Please let me know if you need further information. Thanks. –Alex White
Pingback: S100 Book: A photographer’s guide to the Canon S100
Pingback: Fujifilm X100 Book Has Been Release as Apple iBook | White Knight Press
Pingback: Paperback Edition of Canon PowerShot S100 Book is Coming Soon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujifilm X100 Book is Now Available for Kindle and Nook | White Knight Press
Is the book available for order through you? Amazon.ca seems to be out!
thanks
NJ
Hi — The paperback version of the book is only available from Amazon. I know that you can order now from Amazon.com and it will be shipped when available, probably about a week. I’m not sure about Amazon.ca.
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S100 Book is Now In Stock at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
I’ve had my LX5 for a while and am fairly familiar with it. After reading the bits available at Amazon I may be interested in purchasing your book as a reference but am wondering if you plan on updating the book now that the V.2 firmware is available.
regards
– rik
Hi — Yes, I have done an addendum to the LX5 book that discusses the updated firmware. The addendum is not incorporated into the book, but it is available as a separate download, at the Updates and Corrections page on this site. Here is a link to the addendum.
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color Guidebook to the Canon PowerShot S100 Digital Camera | Digital Camera Updates and Digital Camera Information
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color Guidebook to the Canon PowerShot S100 Digital Camera | PMDA
Any plans for a book on Fujifilm X10?
Thanks for info.
pekka
Hi — Nothing definite at this point. That is one camera that is being considered for the next book, but it would not come out until April at the earliest if it does become a reality.
See Fujifilm Talk Forum / dpreview.com and you will understand that there is definately a need & demand for such a book. Fujifilm has abandoned X10 users and even professionals do not agree how this camera works. Thanks for a comment, again. Pekka.
Pingback: New Firmware Upgrade is Available for the Leica D-Lux 5 Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: New Firmware Upgrade is Available for the Leica D-Lux 5 Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: New Firmware Upgrade is Available for the Leica D-Lux 5 Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S100 Book is Now Available at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S100 Book is Now Available for Kindle and Nook | White Knight Press
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #125 | Nikon Rumors
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #125 | Nikon Rumors
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S100 Book is Listed on eBay with Reduced Shipping Cost | White Knight Press
Pingback: Checking Out White Balance Settings with the Fujifilm FinePix X100 Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujifilm FinePix X100 Motion Blur Examples | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujifilm FinePix X100 Focus Stacking Example Photos | White Knight Press
Pingback: Super Slow Motion Video With Canon PowerShot S100 Camera | White Knight Press
Hi there. I recently got your book…still need to read it, but will very soon. I did however rummage through it because Im looking to buy a tripod for the LX5 on Amazon tonight. I didnt see any references in the book about tripods. Do you have a preference? I’ve read online…because of the light weight of the camera, you have to be carefull buying a light tripod. Any suggestions? I saw that you had a photo of your camera on something with the camera using a telescope lens.
Hi — I haven’t yet discussed particular tripods in any of my books, partly because there are so many options and so many variables to consider, such as whether you will be traveling with it, whether you will be using it with other cameras, using it for macro shooting, video, etc. I have several tripods; my favorites are by Manfrotto, which are somewhat expensive but of excellent quality. Most recently, I purchased a Manfrotto 055XPROB, which I like a great deal; you also need to purchase a head to go with it, and there are various options depending on your preferences. I ended up getting a joystick head, 327rc2, which also is expensive, but has proved to be excellent. But I also have some very inexpensive tripods from Sunpak that work quite well. Reading the customer reviews at Amazon and at B&H Photo-Video can be very helpful. Good luck with your tripod search!
–Alex
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S100 Book is Now Available in the iBookstore | White Knight Press
Hi Mr White! I got LX5 from Christmas. And I really wanna learn how to use the other features of the camera instead of just using Ai. So I am curious if your book would tell me how to use (step-by-step) the other features before purchasing it? I’ve been looking for a tutorial online and YouTube but so far I haven’t seen any good tutorial for the camera. Hope you could help me. Thank you!
Yes, the book is intended to give step-by-step directions for using many of the camera’s features. I can’t say that it tells you all of the steps for using every feature, but it does at least discuss them all. I think it will give you the information and guidance you need.
Thank you for taking the time reading my comment! Yes I just bought your book for my iPad and it is loading now! Can’t wait to read it! I will update you. Thanks again!
Eimille,
MD
Thanks. I hope you find it useful.
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Canon PowerShot S100 is Now In Stock at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
really looking forward to your book!
Thanks! It’s a great little camera, and I’m having a good time working on it.
Pingback: Last call for competition entries!
Pingback: Installing Lens Adapter on Panasonic LX5 and Leica D-Lux 5 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Installing Lens Adapter on Panasonic LX5 and Leica D-Lux 5 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Installing Lens Adapter on Panasonic LX5 and Leica D-Lux 5 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Response to Review of Fujifilm X100 Book at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Camera’s High-Speed Video Modes | White Knight Press
Pingback: Video Demonstration of Some Fujifilm X100 Accessories | White Knight Press
Hi, where can I buy the PDF for the S95? When will it be available on Apple store? Thanks,
Hi, Tony — The PDF for the S95 is available through this web site. If you go to the page for the S95 book, towards the bottom of the page there are links for purchasing the PDF through FastSpring, which is the company that handles the PDF sales. There also is a link to information about the ePub version of the book through the iTunes (iBooks) store.
Mr. White,
I recently purchased your book on the Nikon coolpix P500 in preparation of purchasing the camera but now see that the P510 is about to be released. I wonder exactly what changes were made especially on menu changes you thought might need to be improved and on the stabilization while using extreme telephoto?
It might just be too soon for you to give me an answer but I plan on an extended Alaska trip in May and want to buy the 510 on release date in March or April.
Many thanks
Richard Moore
Hello, Mr. Moore — I have read some of the news about the P510, but I don’t have any deep knowledge of the new camera; I do tentatively plan to do a book about it within the next few months, but right now I’m working on a book about another camera. I haven’t seen a P510 yet, so I don’t know what sorts of menu changes may have been made. You may want to check within the next few weeks to see if Nikon will post the user manual on its support web site. Sorry I couldn’t be of more help.
–Alex White
great!! very helpful
Thanks! Really helped!!
Thanks. Yes. Did it.
I’m about to purchase this in either PDF or Kindle… I will be reading it primarily on the ipad. Which version would you suggest? Any significant differences?
Hi — I’m not sure which book you are planning to purchase. Most of them, though not all, are available for the iPad, in the ePub format. If you go to the information page for the title you want to purchase, it should have a link to the description of the book in the iTunes store. The PDF version will work quite well on the iPad also, but the ePub version is formatted to be better adapted for the iPad. There are no differences among the various versions other than the formatting.
Got it from itunes… thanks!!
wondering if you are planning to write guide book on how to use fuji x pro 1 as i am planning to purchase fuji X pro 1 and i am a beginner and if you are planning the guide i would like to purchase , also interested in sony Nex series camera , it is hard to find guide book or training video on those camera , thanks
Hello, Andy — No, at present I am finishing up a book on the Fujifilm X10 camera, but then I will be moving on to work on other brands. I wish I could cover more camera models, but each book takes a lot of time, and I can only do a few of the ones I would like to.
–Alex
Any Sony NEX C3 Photo Guide is on the way?
Hi — No, I’m sorry, no plans for any Sony books in the near future. I have to finish up the book on the Fujifilm X10 and then start on another one, but no plans for a Sony camera guide at this time.
Thank you – I felt so silly not being able to figure this out. Glad to know I’m not the only one…
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Fujifilm X10 is Now Available in a Downloadable PDF Version | White Knight Press
I just finished reading your excerpt. Thanks and great job. I hope you release the ePub version soon (I prefer ePub files to take notes and highlight text on the iPad).
I’ll check often your site to know about the release date.
Once again thanks a lot.
Edu
PS: My X10 ys just 3 days old and I am a beginner in photography
Thanks for your comment! I will try to get the ePub version done as soon as possible; I hope it can be done within about 4 weeks. Good luck with your X10! It is a great camera.
–Alex
Great, the sooner the better, I need it.
Great–I’ve been looking forward to this!
Pingback: Anonymous
Thanks Alex,
I am looking forward to the Book’s release but in the meantime the Pdf version will suffice.
It would make a sound business opportunity by incentive if you had some form of discount for those who first purchase this Pdf version.
When they then purchase the Book version a discount is in place.
Mike
Hello, Mike — Yes, that is a good idea, though it could be difficult to implement, because the printed version will be available only through Amazon.com and other online retailers, and I can’t offer a discount when Amazon sells a book directly to a customer with no involvement on my part. But I will give some thought to how I could do something along these lines.
–Alex
Most welcoming Alex.
I have not purchased the Pdf version as of yet, although fully intend to do so but one ‘possible’ method would be to account all those who purchase the pdf version.
If and when at a later date said person then purchases the Book, if they were to produce a sales receipt or some form of proof of purchase would it then be possible to offer a ‘part-return payment of the pdf purchase?
This is only an idea. Obviously I have no knowledge of how your good self handles sales of the pdf version.
Whatever method you may consider or try it is good enough to hear you are quite open and willing to consider said venture.
Mike
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Book is at the Printer – Paperback and other e-Books Coming Soon | White Knight Press
Hi Alex,
Does your book about the X10 include coverage functionality included in the firmware updates released by Fujfilm for the X10?
And: thanks for writing this book; very excited about it !
Thanks !
Rob
Hi, Rob — Yes, it does discuss the update to firmware version 1.03, though it does not discuss every detail of that upgrade. The main point discussed about the upgrade is the change to the functioning of the RAW button.
–Alex
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Camera Image Settings - Sample Photos | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fuji X10 Proof Approved - Paperback Version Available Soon | White Knight Press
I so much am looking forward to getting this book Alex.
This is like waiting for Christmas to come.
Thanks, Mike! I’ll post a note here as soon as it shows up on Amazon.
–Alex
Excellent comparison series (although the very first image is a bit unsharp…). Assuming the series was taken under identical lighting conditions, ISO settings, shutter speed, etc., it offers a useful way of choosing your favourite settings.
Now, back to the PDF page to buy the X10 guide! Thanks Alex.
Enjoy your weekend,
Rob
Hello, Rob — Thanks for your comments. Yes, all of the settings were constant except for the one setting that was changed for each shot. I hope you enjoy the book!
–Alex
Just wanted to let you know I´m enjoying your book; I’ve already put some of your advice to good use. Knowing a tool properly increases the joy of using it (and the results will be more enjoyable).
Hi, Rob — Thanks very much! I’m glad you’re finding the book useful. The X10 is a terrific camera.
–Alex
GREAT NEWS!!! Alex White himself contacted me within minutes and rectified a computer glitch. I have recieved the download… and I gotta tell ya… it’s the best ten bucks i;ve spent in a long time! Thank you White Knight press and thank you Alex, you’ve earned a fan… customer service isn’t dead as long as Alex is on the scene. thank you, bill
Thanks, Bill! I’m glad it worked out okay and you got the book. Best of luck with the X10!
–Alex
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Book is Now Listed for Sale at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
I am going through agonies here. After a long search for a small portable camera that has seriously considered and designed features to satisfy serious photography, I found the X10, read the excellent review in Black and White Photographer, and read the really enthusiastic comments on the camera by Tim Clinch, a long time experienced professional photographer Now, my dear generous wife has purchased the Fuji X10 for me, as a present for my forhticoming birthday in May. But, I am not allowed the camera until 13th. of that month! and further, I’ve stumbled across your forthcoming excellent book on the X10, but it is not out yet! Is there any possibility that it will be outbefore that date? If not by then, can you give me some idea of whents being might be available?
Yours sincerely,
John Wells-deamer
Hi — Actually, the book is available now through this site in PDF format, and, as of today, it is listed as available for sale through Amazon.com in the US. It’s not “in stock” yet at Amazon, but it’s a print-on-demand book, and the printer will start printing and shipping paperback copies as soon as orders start coming in to Amazon. So, you can order it now and it should ship to you within about a week or possibly a bit longer. Here is a link to the book’s product page at Amazon.com.
–Alex
Just checked the UK Amazon site Alex, nothing mentioned as of yet.
The X100 is there but not the X10.
I’ll keep checking and let you know if it pops up.
Mike
Hi, Jerry — Yes, those will be priced at $9.99 each. They will be sold through the iBookstore, Nook store, and Kindle store, not from my site. I’m still hoping the Kindle and Nook versions will be available by about April 26, or maybe a few days after that. The Apple version won’t be available as soon, because it goes through a longer acceptance process, at least that’s what has happened in the past. I’ll post more information as it becomes available.
–Alex
Hi, do you have pricing information on the upcoming EPub and Mobi versions yet? Looking forward to them.
Jerry
Hi, Mike — Thanks. The UK site always takes considerably longer to get the book listed. I appreciate your checking it.
–Alex
After reading about this book, I decided it would really help me get more from my wonderful X10, and that it would be better to get it in paper so that I can study it more. However, I’ve found that it is not listed on Amazon.co.uk (although they do have your X100 book), and if I want to buy it from Amazon.com I have to pay a delivery premium of almost as much as the PDF cost even for the slowest delivery means (up to 35 days).
Is there any chance of pressing your provider to list it on more international Amazon sites (especially the UK)? I don’t want to buy the PDF first and then have to pay again to buy the print…
Hello — I certainly understand your concern. As for the speed of the listings on Amazon.co.uk and other non-US sites, I can’t do anything to speed it up; the book will show up there in the fairly near future, and I probably will list some copies there as a third-party seller, which can help with keeping them in stock. What I can do, though, is refund the cost of the PDF if you purchase it now and then later purchase the paperback once it starts showing up at the various Amazon sites. Just forward to contact@whiteknightpress.com the confirmation e-mail message from Amazon and ask for the refund of the PDF purchase price, and I will issue a refund. Or, if you prefer, you can purchase the hard copy from Amazon first, and then I will send you a code to let you purchase the PDF at no cost. I hope this will help.
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Book is Now In Stock at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Face Detection Demonstration in Movie Mode | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color Guidebook to the Fujifilm X10 Digital Camera | #TeamWeChangeLives
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color Guidebook to the Fujifilm X10 Digital Camera | PMDA
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Book is Now Available at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Pingback: Update on Availability of Fuji X10 Book at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: The Problem with White Discs or Orbs with the Fujfilm X10 Appears to be Fixed | White Knight Press
Please HELP installing adaptor tube to leica dlux5. Saw you video but I ca´t figure it out for the DLUX5.
Thank you!!
Hi — I don’t have a D-Lux 5 anymore, so I can’t demonstrate, but there is really no difference in how it works on that camera. Sometimes the front ring on the lens is on too tight, and it may need a strong twisting action to get it loose, but there is no physical difference between the two cameras in how the lens adapter is installed.
Pingback: Fujfilm X10 Book is Now Available for Barnes & Noble Nook | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Book is Available from Barnes & Noble Online | White Knight Press
Pingback: Fujfilm X10 Book is Now Available for Kindle at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Are you going to publish a book for the fujifilm X Pro1
Hi — No, I wish I could do books about more cameras, but my resources are very limited, and I won’t be doing a book about that one.
Will you be publishing a book on the Nikon P510? If so when will it be available. Thanks,
Alan
Hi — Actually, that is one of the cameras I’m considering for the next book, but no decision has been made as yet. If I do that one, it would probably be available by June or early July.
Please do write a book on the Nikon P510. This camera is proving to be very popular with wildlife photographers due to its 1000mm equiv. 35mm lens. I am using it despite a couple of shortcomings (coming from an 35mm film/DLSR background). Nikon will sell many of these units!
Thanks for that suggestion; I am leaning towards doing this book next.
Purchased printed copy from Barnes & Noble two weeks ago. Do I understand I can also obtain the iPad version at reduced or no cost? Would love it.
I have finished my first full read-thru, and find that my X10 manual NOW makes sense! In fact, since I have the printed manual and the PC version, I find they compliment each other, making available help at almost any location.
There are very few suggestions I can offer for your next edition . . . mostly with improving the Index for better use by non-insiders (as I originally found with the Encyclopaedia Britannica).
Keep up the good work.
Hello, John — Thanks for the comments. Yes, if you have purchased the printed edition I will be happy to send you the electronic version for iPad at no cost. I will send the file to your e-mail address. If you don’t receive it soon, let me know.
–Alex
Pingback: Fujifilm X10 Book is Now Available for Purchase in the iBookstore for iPad, iPhone, and iPod Touch | White Knight Press
Any chance you will be working on Lumix GX1? Enjoyed your guidebook on the LX3, looking forward to more helpful pointers if you happen to work on the GX1
Hi — No, I won’t be working on that model; I wish I had time to do books about more of the great cameras that are out there! I do plan to write about a successor to the LX5, if and when one is announced.
–Alex
Thank you so much for this….simplest thing, and I managed to overcomplicate it completely!
Thanks! I’m glad it helped. It confused me too.
Pingback: Black and White Edition of Fujifilm X10 Book is Now Available for $14.95 | White Knight Press
Hi
Your explanations are excellent and give a detailed insite to this complex camera, going way beyond the basic features in the instruction book. It wouldn’t be possible to establish the operation of the various auto settings and built in camera functions from the supplied manual. Having said that I have one problem with the cameras default settings in these auto settings e.g. the EXR and advanced programmes for. The camera seems obsessed in selecting an aperture of either f2.2, and F2.8 even when a landscape scene is being taken and with no programme shift available. I would require an aperture of at least f8/f11 to give me a reasonable depth of field for this type of work so makes these wonderful built in features useless for me. Am I misunderstanding something?
regards Tom Thacker
Hi, Tom — I don’t really have a very good response for your question, partly because it’s hard (for me, anyway) to understand exactly what’s going on with a particular situation without actually seeing the camera in action in that situation. I guess the camera’s programming may believe that a wide aperture is necessary for some reason involving contrast or dynamic range or something of that sort. And, if these are landscape scenes, with focus at infinity, depth of field should not be a big concern, I would think. Of course, if you have subjects in the foreground that need to be in focus at the same time as the background, I can see more of an issue. In my experience, a very good way to get feedback on questions like yours is to post the question at dpreview.com, in the Fujifilm Talk forum. Someone there may be aware of a technical oddity of the camera that can explain what is going on.
Best of luck with your photography!
–Alex
Hi Alex
Thanks for your reply obviously you appreciate the problem but like me can’t understand why the Z10 does this. I will try the email address you sent me see if they have any answers.
If I get any constructive response I will post it on this site in case it is useful to anyone else.
Happy snapping
Tom
I have just purchased the Nikon Coolpix P510. Should I buy your P500 book or will you be updating it for the P510?
Hi — I am working on the P510 book right now, and I hope it will be ready by early July.
Hello Alex – I doubt I’m the first person to notice this but in the .pdf version of the X10 guide, the header on pages 82 & 84 says Guide to the Canon S100. It’s a great book; very helpful.
Hi, Randy — Thanks very much. I did have a problem with some of those headers earlier, and I thought I had fixed them all. I will fix these now! If you still have a valid download link, you should be able to get the corrected version within about an hour or so. If you don’t have that link, let me know and I get the corrected file to you.
–Alex
Thanks, Alex – I probably have the link somewhere but I just thought I’d point it out. One other thing, that I didn’t see in your book or in the X10 manual; I’m pretty sure that if you want to lock focus (but not exposure) you can do this the old-fashioned way, by just partially depressing the shutter release. In other words, it isn’t necessary to press the AE/AF button.
Hi, Randy — Yes, that’s a good point about focus; you can lock focus that way also.
–Alex
I have lost my old pictures ow to review my pictures?
Hi — I would be glad to try to help, but I would need some more information. Were the pictures lost from a memory card or from the computer? Were they deleted? You could try looking in the Pictures folder, if there is one, or in the Trash or Recycle Bin on the computer. If they were lost from a memory card, you could go to this link to an article about recovering the images.
Are you considering a guide to the Leica V-Lux 40? Also, have you published a comparison of the various cameras you have written about?
Hi — No, I’m probably not going to be covering the V-Lux 40 — there are too many good cameras to write about all the ones I would like to! And no, I haven’t written any comparison.
–Alex White
Sir,
A lot of Thank u very much to u some of u photos are not opened. please help me .
Thanks
I can try to help, but this question does not provide enough information for me to know what the problem is. If you want to state the problem in another language, I can get it translated through Google.
Dear Sir,
I got it photos. Some photos are not opend because pandora software are some photos are not open. full fill not downloading sir, any other software is there?
Yes, there are many photo-recovery programs, but I have never had to use any of them. I did a Google search and found a few that were recommended: pcinspector.de, datarescue.com, photo-recovery-software.com. Again, I have no personal experience with these programs, but they may be worth a try. I wish you good luck in recovering your images.
Hi Alex – I’ve just finished reading the book and thank you for being so thorough (even stereo and infrared!) The one thing I’m not 100% clear on–and I wish someone would do a simple table–is which of the X10’s settings affect raw files. For example, even with the X10 set raw-only, multiple DR options are available. Best, Randy
Hi, Randy — That’s a good question that is hard to answer simply, because of the complications from the way the EXR sensor in the X10 works. I am not an expert in this area, so I won’t try to offer a technical explanation. Certainly, there are some settings, such as white balance and exposure, that can be adjusted after the fact in RAW processing software. A setting such as ISO cannot be adjusted after the fact. Other settings, such as Dynamic Range, have effects that are not as easy to describe simply. The discussions on the online forums, such as dpreview.com, go into great detail in discussing the ways that the X10’s RAW files interact with the EXR sensor and with various RAW=processing software, such as Lightroom, Adobe Camera Raw, and SilkyPix. Here are links to some of those discussions: http://forums.dpreview.com/forums/read.asp?forum=1012&message=41014330 http://forums.dpreview.com/forums/read.asp?forum=1012&message=40999888 http://forums.dpreview.com/forums/readflat.asp?forum=1012&message=40872306&changemode=1. Again, I wish I had a simple answer or chart to offer, but I don’t believe it is possible to produce one, given the way the X10 works.
–Alex
Hi Alex
I am the owner of a X10 and I could really use a guide to the camera. How is your work going?
Jacob
Hi, Jacob — The X10 book is available now. You can get more information at the information page for the X10 book on this site, or at Amazon.com or other online sellers.
–Alex
Will you be updating the book on the p500 to include changes in the p510 camera? Or does the book on the p500 cover all of the menu items identically to the p510?
I am working on a new book about the P510. It should be available by early July. There are quite a few differences between the models.
Will you be updating the book on the p500 to include changes in the p510 camera? Or does the book on the p500 cover all of the menu items identically to the p510?
I am working on a new book about the P510. It should be available by early July. There are quite a few differences between the models.
Advice please. Im considering purchasing lx5. In terms of shutter speed. Can it shoot burst of images for action and sports or is it a just a point and shoot camera?
Hi — The LX5 has a Burst mode that lets it shoot limited sequences of rapid shots, and it also has a Sports scene mode, with which it tries to use a fast shutter speed. It certainly will not match a DSLR camera in terms of speed for action shots, but it is quite reasonably capable in this area. It’s really a fine all-around camera for action and other shots.
I would like to purchase the PDF version of the full colour Guide to the Fuji x10. How do I go about this?
Tanks
Hello — Just go to the page on this site for that book, by clicking on the book cover at the main page. Then find the link for purchasing the PDF; it is a button that says FastSpring, which is the company that handles orders for the PDF files. Here is a link to the PDF purchasing page.
I would be interested in the P510 book.
Thanks
Louise
Louise — Thanks; I have sent you a reply by e-mail.
–Alex White
Hi Alex.
I took delivery of your book regarding the Fuji X10 yesterday and I have not been able to put it down.Your wonderful steady and descriptive writing style is helping to make the intricacies of the camera so much easier to understand.
Thank you.
Trevor
Hi,Trevor — I’m glad you’re finding the book useful. I really appreciate your taking the time to post a comment. You just made my day!
–Alex
How you notify everyone that the book for the Nikon Coolpix p510 will be completed and available for purchase?
Thanks
Josh
Hi, Josh — I will be posting information about the release here at whiteknightpress.com. Also, I will make a note to send you a message when the book is available. Anyone else who wants to be notified can leave a message through the Contact form here, and I will send them a message when the book is released. Thanks.
–Alex White
Pingback: super Handbuch zur X10!
I’m also interested. I bought the P510 recently with little knowledge of photography beyond the auto settings of a typical point-and-shoot. Will the differences in the P510 be substantial enough to warrant waiting rather than buying the P500 book? I’m anxious to get started and other than lens size and CMOS sensor size, wonder what the differences are between the P510 and P500.
-Mike
Actually, the P510 book is available now in a PDF downloadable version, though it hasn’t been publicized yet. The P510 has a number of differences, including GPS functions, 3D shooting, rearrangements of various controls, and other changes from the P500, including a new Special Effects shooting mode.
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P510 is Now Available in PDF Version | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P510 is Now Available in PDF Version | White Knight Press
Hello there — I too have been working with the slow-motion feature on the S100 but with similarly mixed results. I have tried the reset the camera to factory settings, though I still appear to have an issue with the focus while shooting in slow motion. It is a strange phenomena that when I have the camera in slow motion, before even shooting, a subject can be perfectly in focus, but when I start to record, the subject quickly becomes blurred and goes out of focus. Is this what you are finding as well?
Thanks for any feedback — your book looks like a good investment!
JT
Hello, JT — I do recall having issues like that with the S100, though I have to confess I have not made any further attempts since I posted those samples on the site, and I have since sold my S100, so I can’t do any more experiments. I think the S100 is a great camera, but I suppose it’s difficult for Canon to get all of its many features such as slow-motion video and autofocus to work together in all situations. Best of luck as you continue on with it!
–Alex White
I have just bought the paperback version. I’m sure I read somewhere that a coloured version of the illustrations is available for downloading. Can you give me a reference, please? Many thanks.
Hello — Yes, if you purchase the black-and-white paperback edition of the X10 book, I will be happy to send you a link for downloading the full-color PDF version. I will go ahead and send that to your e-mail address. Thanks.
Hello Alex,
I received my color copy of the Fujifilm X10 guide book. Great book! I ordered it via Amazon (Order #: 002-7867987-4258617).
If possible, would I be able to download a PDF version?
Thank you,
AM
Hello, Anthony — Yes, I will be happy to provide a link. I have sent it by e-mail. Thanks.
–Alex
Pingback: Sample Telephoto, Monochrome, and Other Images - Nikon P510 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sample Telephoto, Monochrome, and Other Images - Nikon P510 | White Knight Press
I am seriously contemplating buying the above camera. Please can you tell me if the printed version of the book is yet available? If not, when will it be available and where can one purchase it?
Many thanks.
Sally Scott
Hello — The book has gone to the printer, and I expect to receive the proof copy today. If it looks okay, it will be approved today and should start showing up for sale at Amazon.com later this week, probably by Thursday or Friday. I will be posting more information as the book becomes available through various channels.
I recently bought this camera and love it. I have a Nikon D80, but it is very heavy and then you have to lug around the extra lenses. Not so with this camera. Although it doesn’t fit in your pocket, it is lightweight and is an absolute miracle with that 42x lens. I took it to the mountains recently and had a great time with it. I would suggest buying the extra charger and battery because it seemed to discharge faster than my other Nikons, but it is a new camera for me and maybe I was just not doing something right. I did buy the car charger and extra batteries, though. Buy it and have a lot of fun. I think this will be the camera I use on a regular basis.
Hello — I can’t give a really definite answer, because I have never seen an L810 and don’t know about all of its features. I took a look at its description, and I see that it came out at about the same time as the P510 and has a strong zoom lens also, so there probably is a good deal in common between the cameras. There is a good chance that quite a few of the menu options are the same or similar. If you already have the camera, you might want to take a look at the Table of Contents for the P510 book and see if it covers many of the topics you would need for your camera.
I am seriously contemplating buying the above camera. Please can you tell me if the printed version of the book is yet available? If not, when will it be available and where can one purchase it?
Many thanks.
Sally Scott
Hello — The book has gone to the printer, and I expect to receive the proof copy today. If it looks okay, it will be approved today and should start showing up for sale at Amazon.com later this week, probably by Thursday or Friday. I will be posting more information as the book becomes available through various channels.
I recently bought this camera and love it. I have a Nikon D80, but it is very heavy and then you have to lug around the extra lenses. Not so with this camera. Although it doesn’t fit in your pocket, it is lightweight and is an absolute miracle with that 42x lens. I took it to the mountains recently and had a great time with it. I would suggest buying the extra charger and battery because it seemed to discharge faster than my other Nikons, but it is a new camera for me and maybe I was just not doing something right. I did buy the car charger and extra batteries, though. Buy it and have a lot of fun. I think this will be the camera I use on a regular basis.
Hello — I can’t give a really definite answer, because I have never seen an L810 and don’t know about all of its features. I took a look at its description, and I see that it came out at about the same time as the P510 and has a strong zoom lens also, so there probably is a good deal in common between the cameras. There is a good chance that quite a few of the menu options are the same or similar. If you already have the camera, you might want to take a look at the Table of Contents for the P510 book and see if it covers many of the topics you would need for your camera.
Would like to know if this book is useful with a Coolpix L810?
LoveNuska does not recieve mail HaydenRobertR@aol.com does
Hi, Sharon — I certainly agree! The P510 is really a great all-around camera when you want to have just one, lightweight camera with a terrifically versatile lens and set of features. I’m glad you’re enjoying it!
–Alex
i also own this camera i cant tell ya how happy i am the 42 zoom is amazing love love love it
Would like to know if this book is useful with a Coolpix L810?
LoveNuska does not recieve mail HaydenRobertR@aol.com does
Hi, Sharon — I certainly agree! The P510 is really a great all-around camera when you want to have just one, lightweight camera with a terrifically versatile lens and set of features. I’m glad you’re enjoying it!
–Alex
i also own this camera i cant tell ya how happy i am the 42 zoom is amazing love love love it
Hello,
I just purchased the P510 last month and came with the printed book. It is an amazing camera. I have a Minolta Dimage, a Lumix FZ40 and now the Nikon P510. Each camera is used for many different resons but the Nikon sure is my favorite for now. Buy with confidence.
Hello,
I just purchased the P510 last month and came with the printed book. It is an amazing camera. I have a Minolta Dimage, a Lumix FZ40 and now the Nikon P510. Each camera is used for many different resons but the Nikon sure is my favorite for now. Buy with confidence.
I can’t help but smile each and every time, I read a positive comment on the P510. I researched and researched and read up on different cameras and after several months of comparing I decided to buy the P510. I’m more than amazed with all the functions and yes I do love the telephoto. I do a lot of wildlife, travel and landscape photos and this camera is the best for the above photographic needs.
Yes, it is a great camera! Thanks for your comments.
I ordered the book from Amazon today (21 July) but they could not give me a shipping date. They will let me know.
Okay — Thanks for the information. I guess when they first start selling the book they have to wait to see how long it will take for the printer to supply the book.
Pingback: New Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P510 Camera Helps Users Cut Through Complications and Get Great Results with This Multi-Featured Superzoom Compact | PMDA
Pingback: New Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P510 Camera Helps Users Cut Through Complications and Get Great Results with This Multi-Featured Superzoom Compact | PMDA
Your book is awesome!
Thanks!
Hi,
Your books seem very useful and interesting. I wanted to ask if you plan to make a book about the panasonic fz150.
Thanks.
Pedro.
Hello, Pedro — No, I plan to do a book about the Panasonic Lumix LX7, which was recently announced. I would like to cover the FZ150, but there are too many cameras and only one of me!
–Alex
OK, thank you very much for your reply. It’s a shame, but I wish you success in your new project.
This book sounds perfect, do you know if Amazon will be selling it the UK ?
Yes, it takes a bit longer for the book to start showing up at Amazon.co.uk, but it should be available there within the next week or so. I will post an announcement at this site when that happens.
Just a quick note to advise you that the book is now listed for sale at Amazon.co.uk. For the moment, I am selling them there through White Knight Press; within another few days or maybe a week, Amazon.co.uk should start selling copies directly.
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P510 Book is Now Available at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P510 Book is Now Available at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Greetings.
I purchased a Nikon p510 and could not understand the Nikon manual description on how to use the gps function, nor where the data is stored, or how to retrieve it. I also wonder if the data is compatible with any gis maping software. Would appreciate your thoughts.
Bruce
Hello, Bruce — I don’t know all that much about GPS, but, with the P510, you can get the mapping information with the Nikon View NX software that comes with the camera, and I would guess you can use the mapping information with other mapping software, though I have not tried any other programs. You can get the GPS coordinates from the camera by pressing the Fn button in playback mode, for an image that was recorded with the GPS functions turned on.
–Alex
Pingback: New Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P510 Camera Helps Users Cut Through Complications and Get Great Results with This Multi-Featured Superzoom Compact | camerareviewer.co.uk
Pingback: New Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P510 Camera Helps Users Cut Through Complications and Get Great Results with This Multi-Featured Superzoom Compact | camerareviewer.co.uk
Pingback: Note on Availability of Nikon Coolpix P510 Camera Guide Book | White Knight Press
Pingback: Note on Availability of Nikon Coolpix P510 Camera Guide Book | White Knight Press
Hello! I have just received your book on the X-10, ordered through Barnes and Noble. I must say, it looks likes a much better read than the Fuji instruction manual, and I look forward to gaining more insights on this wonderful product.
Do you still have available a pdf of this book for purchasers of the colour paperback? Just wondering, as it would be a great addition on my iPad for travelling.
Thanks very much for your service!
Hi — Thanks very much for your comments. I will send you a private reply by e-mail.
–Alex White
Hi.
I was wondering if this book would be available in Thai language.
Kind regards,
Fred
No, I’m sorry — all of the books here are available only in English.
In your interesting X10-book you describe the use of the Eye-fi X2 pro card.
I use this card too since the very beginning and after a lot of damaged pictures and card errors Eye-fi first changed my card into a new one and then started to spread new (inofficial) firmware versions with adapted wifi settings and behavior.
But even if the X2 pro works fine in most cases, it seems to have problems with undervoltage under some circumstances while writing to the card.
So if you really want to do a serious photo job, you should avoid the Eye-Fi-card in a X10.
I got sometimes incomplete pictures which could’nt read by the X10 afterwards and lead to the problem that you can’t view other (older) pictures that are not involved.
There you have to shot a new picture and wether to scroll backwards while using the out zoomed view or to scroll forward form the beginning.
So be careful to use the X2 pro as daily card, even if it is very handy 😉
Hi — That is a very interesting comment, and I hope it will be of use to other readers. I don’t use the Eye-Fi card all that often, so I have not encountered these issues, but it sounds like something to watch out for.
Since firmware V 5.0008 the X10 is officially listed as a compatible camera on http://support.eye.fi/cameras/fujifilm/x10 (before it was listet as not tested, later as incompatible)
would you please consider doing a book on the SONY RX100.
Thanks
Yes, I actually am working on a book on the RX100, though I don’t know how soon it will be finished; it’s in the early stages right now.
Great news Alex !!! Thanks
Any chance you could e-mail me when it’s available for the Rx100?
PS bought your book for my Fuji x10 in both e-book format for my iPad & iPhone as well as the soft cover version. It has been a GREAT help and reference.
Mike Glynn
Pingback: Kindle Version of Guidebook to Nikon Coolpix P510 Released | White Knight Press
Pingback: Kindle Version of Guidebook to Nikon Coolpix P510 Released | White Knight Press
I have received both your printed and e-book versions of your Guide to the X10. My thanks.
The X10 is my choice to obtain the closest digital camera to those I’ve loved since I got my first at age 13. I’ve used and collected many since then to my current age 83.
Looking for a small totable unit with a fast lens (mine had mostly f2.0 fixed normal lens, direct view/rangefinders, etc.). I bought and discarded the Nikon 7100 (bad viewfinder), and the Lumix G-3 (too bulky, lens too slow, tho viewfinder good), before settling on the X10 . . . which had the worst Manual I ever saw.
Your Guide was 10 times what the Fuji Manual should have been. I have read it cover-to-cover twice, and dip into it any number of times a day. It’s opened new worlds of possibilities to my photography. And I have followed many of your suggestions and sources for accessories.
Thanks again for providing it . . . altho I’ve had to become a student again!
John
PS: I may have suggestions for your next edition, which I will forward as they occur.
Hello, John — Thanks very much for your comments! I look forward to any suggestions you may have for future editions.
–Alex
Pingback: Photographer's Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 Has Been Released | White Knight Press
Pingback: Paperback Version of Sony RX100 Book is Coming Soon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Proof Copy of Sony RX100 Paperback Book Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 Book Is Now Available for Ordering at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Now Has Some Sony RX100 Books in Stock | White Knight Press
Pingback: Update on Availability of Sony RX100 Book | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 Book is Now Available at Amazon.co.uk | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 Book is Now In Stock at Amazon.com for Quick Shipment | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 Book is Now Available for Kindle | White Knight Press
Pingback: Multiple Download Versions of Camera Guide Books are Now Offered for Purchase | White Knight Press
Pingback: Availability of Sony DSC-RX100 Book | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 Book is Available at Discount from Barnes & Noble Online | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 Book is Available Again for Ordering from Amazon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic Lumix LX7 Book is Now Available in PDF Version | White Knight Press
Hi,any guide/book for leica D lux 6?
Yes, I am planning to do a book on the D-Lux 6 in the near future; I hope it will be released sometime in February or possibly March.
Hi,any guide/book for leica D lux 6?
Yes, I am planning to do a book on the D-Lux 6 in the near future; I hope it will be released sometime in February or possibly March.
Pingback: Panasonic Lumix LX7 Book is Coming Soon in Paperback Version | White Knight Press
Pingback: Paperback Version of Panasonic Lumix LX7 Book is Now in Print | White Knight Press
Pingback: Paperback Version of Panasonic Lumix LX7 Book is Now Available for Ordering at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic Lumix LX7 Book is Now in Stock at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic Lumix LX7 Book Now Available for Kindle and iPad | White Knight Press
Pingback: Anonymous
Pingback: New Book on Leica D-Lux 6 Has Been Released in PDF Version | White Knight Press
Pingback: Proof Copy of Guide to Leica D-Lux 6 Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Proof Copy of Guide to Leica D-Lux 6 Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 6 Book Available in Formats for Kindle and iPad | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 6 Book Available in Formats for Kindle and iPad | White Knight Press
Pingback: Note on Availability of Paperback Version of Sony RX100 Book | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 Book is Back in Stock at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 6 Book is Now Available in Paperback Edition | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 6 Book is Now Available in Paperback Edition | White Knight Press
Pingback: The Attention-Arresting Possibilities Of 3D Advertising | PinayMediaPlanner.com
Pingback: Photographer's Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P520 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer's Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P520 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer's Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P520 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | Nikon Rumors
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | Nikon Rumors
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | Nikon Rumors
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | Nikon D7100 Review | Nikon d7100 amazon
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | Nikon D7100 Review | Nikon d7100 amazon
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | Nikon D7100 Review | Nikon d7100 amazon
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | PhotoZ Press
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | PhotoZ Press
Pingback: Weekly Nikon news flash #212 | PhotoZ Press
Pingback: Coolpix P520 Book Available in Versions for Kindle and iPad | White Knight Press
Pingback: Coolpix P520 Book Available in Versions for Kindle and iPad | White Knight Press
Pingback: Coolpix P520 Book Available in Versions for Kindle and iPad | White Knight Press
Pingback: Paperback Edition of Nikon Coolpix P520 is Coming Soon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Paperback Edition of Nikon Coolpix P520 is Coming Soon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Paperback Edition of Nikon Coolpix P520 is Coming Soon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P520 is Now Available in Paperback Edition | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P520 is Now Available in Paperback Edition | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P520 is Now Available in Paperback Edition | White Knight Press
Pingback: Photographer’s Guide to the Nikon Coolpix P520 is Now Available in Paperback Edition | White Knight Press
Pingback: Newly Published Paperback Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P520 from White Knight Press Fills Continuing Demand for Printed Information by Users of Advanced Compact Cameras - mCommerce News
Pingback: Newly Published Paperback Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P520 from White Knight Press Fills Continuing Demand for Printed Information by Users of Advanced Compact Cameras - mCommerce News
Pingback: Newly Published Paperback Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P520 from White Knight Press Fills Continuing Demand for Printed Information by Users of Advanced Compact Cameras - mCommerce News
Pingback: Newly Published Paperback Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P520 from White Knight Press Fills Continuing Demand for Printed Information by Users of Advanced Compact Cameras | PMDA
Pingback: Newly Published Paperback Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P520 from White Knight Press Fills Continuing Demand for Printed Information by Users of Advanced Compact Cameras | PMDA
Pingback: Newly Published Paperback Guide Book to Nikon Coolpix P520 from White Knight Press Fills Continuing Demand for Printed Information by Users of Advanced Compact Cameras | PMDA
Pingback: Digiscoping with the Sony DSC-RX100 Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: New Guide Book to Canon PowerShot S110 is Available as a PDF | White Knight Press
Pingback: New Guide Book to Canon PowerShot S110 is Available as a PDF | White Knight Press
Mr. White, great book on the Sony DSC RX100, could not use the camera without iit! Could not find info on places for repair; my camera will fire 3 consecutive shots, but will not change the f stops (bracker) as promised. Any help will be appreciated. Thanks for the book and assistance.
Neil Willey
neil.willey@gmail.com
Hello, Mr. Willey. Thanks for your comment about the book. Here is a web site you can go to to find a location for repair: https://eservice.sony.com/webrma/web/index.do. I hope that helps, and I hope you get the camera working again!
–Alex White
Mr. White, Your book on Sony RX 100 was most helpful. One problem I have with it is unexpected low battery warning. Is there an icon showing the battery level? I could not find it. Thanks.
Hello — The battery icon is located in the upper right corner of the display screen in shooting mode. It looks like a battery with several segments that are white to indicate a positive amount of battery life and that turn black as the battery runs down. You can see an example in Figure 2-9 on page 39. You may have to press the Display button one or more times to display the screen that shows this icon.
I noticed that the official Panasonic manual for the LX7 is incomplete for cropping. Page 176 of the PDF introduces cropping, then skips vital steps before moving on to how to complete the cropping. I plan to purchase the White LX7 Manual.
Pingback: Paperback Version of Canon PowerShot S110 Book Coming Soon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S110 Book Now Available for Kindle at Amazon | White Knight Press
Pingback: Paperback Proof of Canon PowerShot S110 Book Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Re the NikonP520 Manual – I have this manual in A5 version and it is very difficult to read such small print. Is this Version in A4 size?
Hello — I’m not sure what versions you are referring to. The book for sale through the whiteknightpress.com web site is different from the official Nikon manual; this is a book that discusses the features of the camera and provides examples, etc. The paperback version of the book is available in only one size, which is probably close to A5 in size. If you purchase the downloadable versions (PDF, ePub, and Kindle), you can view them in larger sizes or, with the PDF, you can print it out on A4 or larger sizes. If this doesn’t answer your question, let me know and I’ll try to help.
–Alex White
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S110 Book Available in Paperback at Amazon | White Knight Press
I love this camera (just bought it not long ago) and thanks to your user friendly tips, I should be able to use it for more than just a standard picture soon. Very informative and much appreciated!
Hi, Frank — Thanks for your positive comments! The Coolpix P510 is a great camera — very versatile and excellent for many types of photography. I’m glad you’re enjoying it!
Thank you! I have been wIting for this book. I have used the S95 book many times and now my hubby is reading it as he has the 95 now. Thanks also for the downloadable copies too!
Thanks for your comment. I hope you enjoy the book!
Pingback: Using the Panasonic Lumix LX7 for Water Drop Photography | White Knight Press
Just wondered if you are going to write a book on the sony rx1r?
Hello — No, my next book will be on the Sony RX100 II. The RX1 is a little bit above my range!
Any estimate on when the RX100 II book will be available? Would love to have it soon as many have purchased the Ii.
Hello, that would be great if I had time, but I already have other books scheduled at this point, so that one unfortunately won’t be possible. Thanks for the suggestion, though!
Seeking info.
Hello — Please let me know what information you would like and I will try to help.
–Alex White
White Knight Press
Seeking info.
Hello — Please let me know what information you would like and I will try to help.
–Alex White
White Knight Press
Seeking info.
Hello — Please let me know what information you would like and I will try to help.
–Alex White
White Knight Press
Alex, question. I have iphone and ipad. When I order the downloadable files, can I put it on both devices? Ipad for reading at home, iphone for travel and field work. I just ordered the S110 book and am anticipating its arrival. Some of the new features I am not so sure about and appreciate your knowledge. I passed the S95 to hubby.
Thank you for all your efforts. I pass on your name to folks buying new cameras as a great reference. Keep playing and keep your shutter finger exercised and in good shape!
…Martha
If I purchase a hard copy do I get the pdf for free or must it be purchased separately. I like hard copy books but want the info now. Thank you.
I have sent you a reply by e-mail.
Great camera,love your books!
Thanks very much! I agree that it’s a great camera.
Thank you so much for including the link to my book and the comment on my ebook gallery. It is much appreciated and I’m glad you were able to benefit from the information in the book. Your work is coming along excellently in this field. It is a great hobby.
Thanks — It’s great to hear from you. Your book is an inspiration!
Are there plans to write a Guide to the LUMIX DMC-FZ200? The OWNER’S MANUAL is pathetic.
No, that is one of the cameras I would love to do a book about, but I have not been able to work it into the schedule, unfortunately.
Why was the stop shot apparatus necessary? Since you manually triggered the RX100, coudn’t the RX100 flash trigger the speedlte?
Yes, the RX100 flash could trigger the speedlight, but I wouldn’t be able to press the shutter at the right time. I guess with many tries I might be able to capture the image at the right instant, but I imagine it would be a very frustrating experience. Also, it wouldn’t be a great idea for me to be located downrange of the gun, even though it’s just firing a BB. Also, as I think about it, I think there would be too much delay from pressing the shutter and waiting for one flash to trigger the other.
Oh – you were using video not still shots. I see.
Not bad, but, to what end? What equivalent focal length was achieved? Seems like better results could be obtained with a DSLR and zoom for similar costs – and end up with a more versatile system.
You are exactly right. If you are setting out to capture good shots of wildlife, I would not recommend using the RX100 with a spotting scope. My focus was on this particular model of camera and showing one of various ways in which it can be used. If you have an RX100 and a spotting scope, you can use them together, if you want to. That was all I was trying to show.
Hello Alex. I enjoyed your book on the lovely LX3. Tempted as I am by upgrading to the LX7, I am going to give the RX100 ii a go. Do you have an eta on when the RX100 ii guide will be available for download?
I’m aiming for late September or early October at the latest. It’s in the editing stage now, and I’m making good progress. I’ll be posting further updates in the near future.
–Alex White
Pingback: New Guide Book for Canon PowerShot S110 Provides the Extra Information Boost Needed by Users of This Advanced Compact Camera | Best Digitals Cameras
Hello what about a book on the Leica X Vario?
Hello — The book on the RX100 II is available now in all formats. If you go to the book’s information page at the site, there are details on how to purchase it in paperback or downloadable versions. If you have specific questions, let me know. Thanks.
Very pleased to know you are doing a DSC-RX100 MK2 version. I thought your Powershot S100 book was really excellent, and I just gave away that camera and bought the new Sony. Consequently, I need your insights to make the most of my new camera!
Thanks! The RX100 II is a terrific camera; I just got mine too and I’m enjoying working with it.
And a new update for the Fujifilm x100s???
I wish I could do a new book for the X100S, but it looks now as if I’m not going to be able to work that one into the schedule.
That is a real pity !
Could you be persuaded or is the volume of sales not sufficient?
Perhaps you could produce a supplement to update the X100 guide where necessary?
I would buy it !
Hi Alex,
Are most options/controls/shooting strategies same/similar between rx 100 and rx 100 ii? I recently bought rx 100 ii. Would the current version of the book be useful / cover most options for rx 100 ii? Would buying this version of the book qualify for a free upgrade once the rx 100 ii comes out?
Thanks!
Jake
Hello, Jen — I will be working on the RX100 II book as soon as my camera arrives, hopefully within a few days. I hope to have the book finished by late September if at all possible. I will be posting updates at this site.
–Alex White
White Knight Press
Any further word on the II book? I need it desperately – the manual is hopeless.
Any chance of a guide to the Fuji X20? There is a big gap in the market for a book dedicated to this popular camera.
Hello — As of now, I don’t have specific plans to do a book on the X20, though several people have asked about it, and I will look into the possibility after I finish a couple of other books that are planned. I don’t think it’s too likely, but I can’t completely rule it out. Sorry I can’t be more definite right now.
–Alex White
Dear Alex. About a year ago I purchased an X20 and your x10 guide. The x10 guide helped me quite a bit to figure out how to work most aspects of my camera. Hwere’s hoping you do write an x20 guide. I would surely buy it.
Hello, Rafael — Thanks for your comment. At the moment I have a couple of other books planned, but I will keep the X20 under consideration for the future.
Should we follow the same procedure to connect any NFC-enabled camera to the newly launched Xperia Z Ultra?
I have not had experience with any other NFC-enabled camera, phone, or tablet. I imagine the process would be similar, but I unfortunately don’t have a definitive answer.
Thanks Alex, I think I’ll take you up on that RX100 purchase offer. After a long search, I have just managed to get my hands on a RX100 ii.
Hello, Jake — The basic shooting functions are just about exactly the same, but the RX100 II adds some new options, including Wi-Fi capabilities; the hot shoe that takes external flash, electronic viewfinder, etc.; better low-light performance; tilting LCD; and some more minor changes. The existing book would be helpful for all of the basics, but of course it does not cover the new features. The new book will be out by late September if all goes well. I haven’t set a definite plan for upgrades for buyers of the current book, but I would say that, if someone purchases the electronic versions here through the White Knight Press site in August or later and then contacts me to request the electronic versions of the new book when it’s out, I will provide that download for no cost.
–Alex
Greetings! I have the Sony RX100 M2 and am anxiously awaiting your guide book. I’m going on vacation in a couple weeks and just received the 3 filters and 49 mm adapter ring. How do I put that on? I don’t want to mess up my camera and want to protect the lens from salt air at the beach. PS-I have your Nikon P500 book and its awesome. Was hoping your M2 book would be ready to take on my beach vacation to read. Thanks for your help! AW in GA
Hello — Thanks for your message. I’m not sure which adapter ring you have — there are at least 3 that I’m aware of — one from Sony, one from lensmateonline.com, and one from carryspeed.com. The only one I have is the Sony one, though it is quite similar to the one from Lensmate. With the Sony adapter ring, you clean off the front of the lens with an alcohol pad, then put the cardboard guide tube over the lens when the camera is turned off, and press the “base ring” — the smaller plastic ring — onto the lens with its adhesive. Then you twist the actual adapter onto the base ring, and screw the filter into the adapter. If you are using the lensmate version, there are instructions on their site. Sony also has instructions for its adapter at their site. I hope that helps.
Thank you. I have the Sony adapter ring. I will use the link you provided. Thanks so much! AW in GA.
Hello
Will you be doing a book on the RX1R or are the R100 and the RX1R to much alike?
Sounds good! Best of luck with the new camera.
I’m sorry to hear that. I learned so much from your book on the RX100. I’m sure others feel the same.
Cheers
Hello — No, I will not be doing a book on the RX1R. I am working on a book about the new RX100 II. I have read about the RX1R, but have not seen either it or the RX1. I believe there are some similarities to the RX100, but considerable differences also. I would like to do a book for that camera, but I’m afraid it won’t be possible.
Any chance that a guy could pre-order the DSC-RX100 II book? That way, when I totally space out checking on its availability, it will still be on its way!
Hello, Jim — I don’t have any capability for pre-orders at this point, though I will be looking into it, for the downloadable versions. For now, I am adding you to the list of people to be notified when the book is available.
–Alex White
Hi Alex
I also keep checking to see if the new RX 100 Mk 2 book is out yet. Can you add me to your email list to let me know when it is available please?
Many thanks.
Yes, sure — I have added you to the list.
Eagerly awaiting the Kindle or EPUB version before my next trip in November!
I’m still hoping to have those versions available within a week or so; it should be well before November with any luck. I’ll be posting updates as I learn more.
Pingback: Availability of Sony RX100 II Guide Book at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Is there a date for the guide to the Canon S120?
No, as of right now I haven’t been able to include a book on the S120 in the schedule. That is subject to change, but there is no projected date as of now.
Alex,
Please put me on the list to be contacted regarding a book on the Fujifilm X100s.
Thank you, TR
Hi, TR — Okay, thanks, I have added you to the list.
Hi Alex,
I have a question for you. under Effect > Special Effect, how come “Soft” and “Nostalgic Sepia” is greyed out and I am not able to select those? Other selection is fine. Does it have something to do with the program mode setting?
Without seeing the camera, it’s hard to tell, but this sounds as if it is because of a conflict with the movie settings. The Nikon User’s Manual says, at page 48: When Movie options is set to HS 480/4X, Soft or Nostalgic sepia cannot be
selected.
Hi Alex,
I have a question for you. under Effect > Special Effect, how come “Soft” and “Nostalgic Sepia” is greyed out and I am not able to select those? Other selection is fine. Does it have something to do with the program mode setting?
Without seeing the camera, it’s hard to tell, but this sounds as if it is because of a conflict with the movie settings. The Nikon User’s Manual says, at page 48: When Movie options is set to HS 480/4X, Soft or Nostalgic sepia cannot be
selected.
Hi Alex,
I have a question for you. under Effect > Special Effect, how come “Soft” and “Nostalgic Sepia” is greyed out and I am not able to select those? Other selection is fine. Does it have something to do with the program mode setting?
Without seeing the camera, it’s hard to tell, but this sounds as if it is because of a conflict with the movie settings. The Nikon User’s Manual says, at page 48: When Movie options is set to HS 480/4X, Soft or Nostalgic sepia cannot be
selected.
Pingback: Fujifilm X100S Paperback Book is Now Listed at Amazon Site | White Knight Press
Pingback: Video on Accessories for the Fujifilm X100S Camera | White Knight Press
i can not to unscrew the thin trim ring from the end of the camera’s lens (leica d-lux 6), could be more explicit
You just have to get a good, firm grip on the thin ring. You might try using a cloth to help get a grip. It can be difficult to get it started, but grip it firmly and turn it counter-clockwise and it will come off.
I am considering getting your book on the X10 to use with the X20. Someone wrote a review on Amazon that said the camera information in your book was 90% applicable to the X20. Would you agree? I would love to have a manual like the ones you write for the X20. Thanks for your help. Pam Reynolds
I wish I had a good answer, but I’m not able to keep up with all of the cameras that are released. I have read a little bit about the X20, but I have never used one. You might want to consider buying the X10 book from a seller who accepts returns readily, like Amazon.com, and return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you hoped.
I hope for a Sony RX10 guidebook.
I just bought the RX1000II book to get some more insight in the RX10 menus but a dedicated RX10 book would be wonderful.
Thanks for your comment. I do have the RX10 on the list of books I am considering doing, but there is no definite plan yet. If there is more interest in that book, I will work on it in the near future.
Pingback: Fujifilm X100S Book Now Available in Downloadable Versions | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Publishes Full-Color Guide Book for Fujifilm X100S Camera | Watch List News
please put me on your list for an rx 10 book
Hello — Thanks for the comment. I will add you to the list of people interested in a book on the RX10. If I end up doing that book, I will notify you.
please put me on the list for the RX10 book.
Okay, I have added you to the notification list. Thanks.
Just ordered a copy of the same and looking forward likewise.
Thanks.
Pingback: Installing and Using Fujifilm X100S Firmware Upgrade 1.10 | White Knight Press
Alex, I get many inquiries about an RX10 book. I send them here. Looks like there may be an audience.
Hi, David — Thanks. It looks as if that probably will be my next book, because I have been getting similar inquiries.
–Alex
Alex, I got three more inquiries in the last week, including one this morning.
David
Pingback: White Knight Press Publishes Full-Color Guide Book for Fujifilm X100S Camera | A distinct point of view in art, style, vintage
Would also be very interested in an RX10 book. Please add me to the list.
Thanks. You are on the list.
I’m glad to see that Alexander is still generating his excellent guide books (I have his guide to the X10). Is it too much to hope for that there will be a Photographer’s Guide to the Fujifilm X20? The camera is enough the same as the X10 to make it a not-too-difficult update, but enough different to make an update extremely worthwhile. Happy New Year.
Thanks for the comment. The X20 book is not on the schedule as of now, though it is one I would like to do and am considering as a possibility if time permits.
i too would like a book on the rx10. is sony manual is rather poor.
Okay, thanks, I have added you to the list to be notified when the book is ready.
Please add me to the list for an RX10 Guide. Many thanks.
Thanks — I have added you.
I too would be grateful if you could add me to the list for an RX10 Guide. Many thanks
Thanks. I have added you to the list.
I too would be interested in a Sony RX10 book.
Thanks. I’ve added you to the list to be notified when it’s ready.
I’m also an RX10 owner ready for your guide.
Okay, thanks, I have added you to the list to be notified when the book comes out.
Please add me for the book on the RX-10 as well.
Okay, thanks. You are on the list.
I already own the book for the Sony Rx100, and am going to buy the Nikon D7100 book which includes the iPad download. Is there any way I can get the iPad download for the Rx100?
I have sent you a response by e-mail.
Please add me to your list to notify me for the book on the RX-10. Thank you
Thanks. I have added you to the list.
I am also interested in the guide book for the Sony RX10.
Okay, thanks. I have added you to the list to be notified when the book is available.
I purchased the Guide to Coolpix P520 from Amazon, Kindle Version. ‘Just what I needed. They didn’t offer a PDF version, which I prefer. How does one get PDF versions of your books?
I have sent you a reply by e-mail.
Hi,
I am about to buy the book on Amazon, but it would be useful to also have a PDF copy on my iPad. I’m wondering if the book comes with a CD with the PDF version on it, or is there a way that someone who has purchased the book can prove it and have the PDF version sent. As you can see, I’m not keen on buying the same thing twice.
thanks
Pete
Hello — I have sent you a reply by e-mail.
Pingback: Proof Copy of Sony RX10 Book Has Been Received and Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX10 Guide Book is Now Available from Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX10 Guide Book is Now Available from Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Alex, will tbere be a Canon PS S120 book? If not, would you advise me purchasing your S110 book? I’d rather wait for an updated book if you have one in the works for publishing in the near future. Thanks for your advise!
Hello, Enrique — No, I am not going to be able to do a book on the PowerShot S120. I can only work on a very limited number of cameras, and I can’t work that one into my schedule.
–Alex
Looks very interesting – but I got the camera today and it is too expensive top get a paper copy to Germany. I urgently need a downloadable version, payment via Paypal.
Greetings
Einhart
Hello, Einhart. I have sent you a reply by e-mail.
Can you let me know when this is available for download? I’m in the UK, so Amazon US is a slow option.
Thanks,
Gary
Yes, I will add you to the list to be notified when the downloadable versions are released.
I’d like to be notified when the ePub version is available as wel. 🙂
Okay, thanks, I have added you to the list to be notified.
you you add me to the list too please?
Sure — I have added you to the list. Thanks.
I have both and iPhone and iPad; I would like to install a copy of the book on each – so I can read on one or the other device depending on which I have with me at the time; is this permissible? Thanks
Yes, whenever you purchase downloadable book files from this site, you can install any or all the 3 versions on any devices of yours for your own use.
Pingback: Sony RX10 Book is Now Available in Downloadable Versions | White Knight Press
Just purchased and downloaded. I notice that the PDF version is three times the size of the EPUB version. Are there any differences other than the format; e.g. do the images have a higher DPI in the PDF? I will be viewing of an iPad and so can use either.
Yes, the PDF version will have somewhat higher resolution, because the ePub version had to be produced within the limits for file sizes for various devices such as Nook and others. If you want the highest quality images, I recommend using the PDF version,though, of course, the ePub version has the navigation and reflowing features that are designed for use on iPads and other compatible devices.
Thanks. In that I case I’ll probably go PDF on my iPad and ePub on my iPhone to get the best of both.
That sounds like a good plan, though you can always load both on the iPad if you want, and decide later which works best.
I did as you suggested and tried both using the native iBooks app. Without the reflowing, the PDF version only really works with the iPad in portrait mode. The images in the PDF version start small but can be zoomed for more detail. In the ePub version the images start larger and look good at this initial size. But if you double-tap to zoom, they do become pixelated. Overall the ePub version is a much better reading experience with the text reflow and annotation features. It would be really great if we could have a “full fat” edition of the ePub with Retina DPI images. I think the file size limit on the iPad is 2GB!
I’m really liking the book by the way, especially the professional look and feel. I purchased a competitors book for my RX100 and whilst the content was good, I felt that the execution was a little home-made.
Thanks very much for your comments; it is very helpful to get feedback like this so I can improve the reading experience on various devices. It can be a challenge to observe the various limits on file sizes and still produce a document with good-quality images. I am going to send you a link to a larger version of the ePub file by e-mail; I hope you will take a look and let me know if it gives you the image quality you’re looking for.
Wow! Awesome after sales support. I have tried the larger ePub and it is fantastic. The images now have more definition in the standard page view and when you double-tap to zoom the image it fills the whole of the screen and reveals even more detail than the PDF version. I think purchasers of the book would really appreciate the option to download this “hi-def” version.
I can’t find the book in the iBooks store. Not yet released in the Belgian store?
Alex, is the Kindle ePub that I just downloaded Monday 4/7 at about 3AM the larger version of the ePub and if not, will Amazon make the larger version available to me?
Hello, Bill — Just to clarify the terminology, the Kindle version is a .mobi file; the ePub version is for the iPad and other devices that read ePubs. The Kindle file that is on Amazon is the only one currently available for the Kindle. I will look into the possibility of producing a larger version of the .mobi file for the Kindle, but as of now there is only one version available.
–Alex
Mea Culpa. Boy, do I have egg on my face. I know the difference (Apple since 1979) but that portion of the brain must have still been unconscious. I ‘returned’ the Kindle version after I wrote you and will now be requesting the larger file from you. After I finish wiping off the egg.
Just completed first trip with RX10, 28 days;
Now downloading 4K “still” images will probably edit down to ~3200+.
Converting .ARWs to .DNGs so I can caption RAWs in Adobe Bridge 8.3;
Shot using “P” except timed exposures;
P allows me to set ISO range 125-1600;
But I noticed some undesirable P “decisions”,
e.g. 1/15th sec, f2.8, ISO 200 when I would
have preferred something like 1/30th, f2.8, ISO 400;
is there way to set P minimum shutter speed, too,
(e.g., no slower than 1/30th or 1/60th sec)
in advance rather than having to notice before
each exposure that it is below what I prefer for
handheld? It would be great if one could program
shutter speed to be no slower than 1/focal-length!
Any comments, advice appreciated!
FYI, am noticing process button icon already losing paint,
NOT GOOD, SONY!!
No, there is no way to program a minimum shutter speed for P mode. You can, of course, use Program Shift to switch to a faster shutter speed, or you can use Shutter Priority mode, but I guess Sony’s idea is that, with Program mode you are willing to let the camera make the basic exposure decisions.
Well done this was the most helpfull of all tutorials for firmware upgrade
Thanks!
This email is my correct email .
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Full-Color Guide Book for Sony RX10 Camera | Ultra Accident Videos
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Full-Color Guide Book for Sony RX10 Camera | PMDA
This is a great summary – Thanks!
where to buy accessory hood?
You can buy the filter adapter at Amazon.com: http://www.amazon.com/Sony-VFA49R1-Filter-Adapter-DSC-RX100/dp/B00DQHZZ0O/
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Full-Color Guide Book for Sony RX10 Camera | Windows Tablets
Pingback: Question About Taking Moon Images with Nikon Coolpix P520 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Question About Taking Moon Images with Nikon Coolpix P520 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Question About Taking Moon Images with Nikon Coolpix P520 | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Full-Color Guide Book for Sony RX10 Camera | Joshua Maness Photography
Je serai très intéressé par ce livre, seulement sera-t-il exploitable pour une personne ne maitrisant pas trop l’Anglais.
MERCI pour votre réponse
In response, I would say that a reader would need to have a solid command of English in order to appreciate any of the books sold through this site. Pour utiliser ces livres, il est nécessaire de comprendre très bien l’anglais.
Many thanks for writing the book about Sony RX100. It is a great help and always with me on my Pad. What about the Sony HX-400-V. Just bought one for my wife. As the official Sony guide is not a great help, we got more information out of the RX100 book instead.
Hi, Chris. Thanks for your comment. I would love to be able to do a book about the HX400V, but there just isn’t enough time in a day to cover all the cameras I would like to.
Thank you so much for this most useful handbook of which I now have a pdf (bought from White Knight Press through this site) and a paper copy (I had ordered it from amazon usa).
Quite different from what I had imagined, actually. Not just one of those technical catalogs or lists of features and specifications we’re too often provided with, that is, an abstract (soulless) publication that mostly repeat (with some paraphrasing) the usual poorly written brand documentation and can only be referred back to from time to time when problems have arisen. But a true guide (up to its title), progressively and pedagogically introducing to the use of the camera, clear enough and simple enough and yet complete and full of details. Thicker and yet easier to get into than I would have thought.
I wish all user manuals were both so useful and so usable, and, I must say, pleasant to read through from cover to cover.
Real congrats to you for the job. And again many thanks!
A RX10 user from France
(Yes, the images in the pdf have a higher definition but those in the paper book are illustrative enough and fulfill their purpose.)
Thanks for those wonderful comments! It is great to hear from a happy reader, and I really appreciate your taking the time to comment. The RX10 is a great camera, and I wish you continued success with it.
Pingback: White Knight Press Publishes Full-Color Guide Book for Fujifilm X100S Camera
Pingback: New Guide Book for Canon PowerShot S110 Provides the Extra Information Boost Needed by Users of This Advanced Compact Camera
Bonjour,
Est-ce que ce magnifique livre va sortir en français ?….
Je l’attends avec impatience !….. car je ne trouve rien.
Le mode d’emploi en ligne de Sony n’est pas du tout pratique !!!
Merci
Je regrette, mais les livres de White Knight Press sont disponibles seulement en anglais.
Merci !….. c’est bien dommage !
Le livre est écrit dans une langue directe et simple, sans jargon (mais sans imprécision non plus). Il est, me semble-t-il, accessible à des francophones d’origine sans pour autant nécessiter un super niveau d’anglais (une connaissance des termes et notions photographiques de base sera bien entendu indispensable, il ne s’agit pas non plus d’un roman sentimental)
The fujifilm x100 s. is an extraordinary camera it is the biggest thing since sliced bread ,reasons are obvious you cannot get a more perfect street photography camera it’s menus are incredible you can do the 40,s 50’s 60’s 70’s 80’s retro street photography in camera the versatility of this camera is the best if they decide to build the body out of a Leica type strength it will blow the Leica m’s out of the water .well done fujifilm after all fujifilm made lenses for hasslblad ……”Nuff said”! P.s. How do you spell hassleblad? Lol who cares they are over priced anyway just like a certain Leica anniversary special edition rip off $90.000 that’s right you read it 90 big ones ! Are you serious? Bloody oath I am they are living in a fantasy world where millionaires only tread ……..(in the clouds) bye for now and remember it’s not the camera it’s the brain behind it ….You! . Rant by M.T. Foto Mojo Photography street photography “dare to be different”
Right on Mr. White. I am pre-ordering this camera on the recommendation of a good friend. He recommended your guide highly.
thanks and looking forward to seeing your guide to the Sony DSC RX 100 III this summer.
Thanks! I hope you enjoy your new camera; I expect you will.
Alex, I would certainly buy a Fujifilm X20 guide too, if you write one.
Thanks, Ken — I appreciate the feedback.
— Alex
Lumix GX7 sometime soon?
I don’t have any plans for a book on that model at present, though I’ll note it for a future possibility.
I was hoping you’d written a book on the GX1, because I found the LX7 book so helpful. Thank-you for all your work! I was disappointed to see that not only did you not write one, but in fact no one else had either. I do hope that you’ll write one for the GX7, maybe some of the info will still apply the the GX1 as well.
In any event, I just wanted to chime in and say how helpful your book on the the Lumix LX7 was to me. In this day and age of PDF this, and PDF that, it’s great that someone still takes the time to write a practical, hard copy book on what a camera can do.
Thanks very much for your comment. I will take a look at the GX7, but I’m not sure what I will end up writing about next.
Pingback: Sony RX100 II Book on Sale at White Knight Press eBay Store | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 II Book on Sale at White Knight Press eBay Store | White Knight Press
Any plan to publish on X20 Fuji film camera? Thanks. …. Satish
Hello, Satish — No, as of now there are no plans for an X20 book.
–Alex
Please publish your guide to Sony RX100 III as soon as possible. Your guides to these Sony cameras are absolutely required for use by serious amateurs. When will the nextnguide appear?
Thanks,
Thanks for your comment. I’m working diligently on the book about the RX100 III, and I’m hoping to have it ready by late summer. I’m still on schedule as of now.
Mr. White: Your guide to the P500 was stunningly helpful in maxing out the Manny benefits of these cameras. One question…when I try to do telephoto shots of dark things like the moon or concerts the camera just will not focus. It whirrs and the image dances around with trigger half pressed. Will not focus. What should I do? Thanks.
Probably the best bet in that situation is to use manual focus. When I photograph the moon, I almost always use manual focus, and for concerts that should be a good approach also.
Hi Alex,
I was wondering if you will release a new book for the rx100 m3?
Rgs Jeffrey
Hello, Jeffrey — Yes, I am working steadily on that book now and hope to have it published by late summer.
–Alex
Ok that’s great! Looking forward to it. Thanks for the info and the quick reply! Hope you finish it soon 🙂
I just purchased the new RX100m3 and until your new book on the M3 comes out in late summer of 14, is worth it to get your book on the M2? I ask that as I would get a good insight
to the M3 as they are very close, yes, no
The best answer I can give is that the two cameras are close in many ways, but they also have significant differences that would make using the RX100 II book somewhat confusing. For example, the new camera lets you use Auto ISO with Manual exposure mode, and its Function menu works differently than it does on the older model. There are several other differences as well. But the older book certainly would be quite useful as long as you don’t mind ignoring the outdated parts.
Thanks for your reply. I guess I will just have to cool my heels till you have it out. I might just get
it on my Kindle and use that. again thank you
Wonder will the guide book for M3 be out soon? 🙂
I’m working steadily on the RX100 III book, and I hope to have it out by early September.
Alex please hurry on the RX100m3 guide. Any ballpark idea when it will be ready? I hope not Sept
I am working at it steadily. There is a chance it will be ready in August, but I don’t want to promise a date I can’t meet.
Any plans for a Guide for the RX100M3?
Yes, I am working on that book now and hope to have it published by late August or early September.
If it’s anything like the RX100M2 Guide it should be a great read.
Please notify me when the RX100M3 book ‘s released. Thanks!
I have added you to the list to be notified. Thanks.
Would also like to be notified on Rx100M3. Perhaps I should get the M2 e- while I wait? How much would apply do you think? Thank You!
I am adding you to the list to be notified. You could get the book on the RX100 II in the meantime, but there are quite a few changes, such as the ability to use Auto ISO with Manual exposure mode for the new camera, and several others, that would make the existing text confusing in some places.
Please notify me when the RX100 III book is published. Meanwhile, I’m learning about my III through the II book. One mystery to me is that there is no Memory Card Tool Menu in the III. Are those functions found somewhere else?
I have added you to the list. The Memory Card Tool functions were moved to the Setup menu for some reason.
Please also add me to the list of those to notify when the RX100 M3 book is published. Thanks!
I have added you to the list. Thanks.
Just purchased RX100111 so will be very interested in your publication on this latest model due end summer 2014 ?
Where will this be available first ?
Have purchased your book on RX10011 for basic reference but there are different features on the latest model and look forward to your valued comments and explanation of these.
Kind regards
Alan
Hello, Alan — The book for the RX100 III should be available by late August. It will first be available in paperback through Amazon.com in the US, followed by Amazon sites in other countries. Within a couple of weeks after that, it should be available in e-book versions, through this site and through Amazon for Kindle, Apple for iPads and iPhones, Barnes & Noble online for Nook, and Kobo for other e-readers. It also will be sold in paperback by a variety of other online sellers such as bn.com, powells.com, and others. It will not be sold in stores. If you have further questions, let me know. Thanks.
–Alex
hai all,
I am also having one for the past two years.
There is one deficiency in the camera (P510). We cannot mount extra flash as there is no hot shoe for it, even no socket for flash triggering.
Friends, any body please guide me for using extra flash. Pl mail me to pasupathilingam@gmail.com
thanks
pasupathilingam
You can use the built-in flash of the Coolpix P510 camera to trigger an external flash with an optical slave. You can use either a separate optical slave device attached to an external flash unit, or an external flash unit with a built-in optical slave capability. The optical slave should have a setting that allows it to ignore the pre-flashes fired by the P510. A couple of excellent units are the Yongnuo YN560 III and the LumoPro LP180, both of which are available through Amazon.com and elsewhere. The camera should be set to Manual exposure mode; you can determine the proper exposure settings with a few test shots.
hai all,
I am also having one for the past two years.
There is one deficiency in the camera (P510). We cannot mount extra flash as there is no hot shoe for it, even no socket for flash triggering.
Friends, any body please guide me for using extra flash. Pl mail me to pasupathilingam@gmail.com
thanks
pasupathilingam
You can use the built-in flash of the Coolpix P510 camera to trigger an external flash with an optical slave. You can use either a separate optical slave device attached to an external flash unit, or an external flash unit with a built-in optical slave capability. The optical slave should have a setting that allows it to ignore the pre-flashes fired by the P510. A couple of excellent units are the Yongnuo YN560 III and the LumoPro LP180, both of which are available through Amazon.com and elsewhere. The camera should be set to Manual exposure mode; you can determine the proper exposure settings with a few test shots.
Just purchased Sony RX100III and reading through your old II book and trying to understand some of the changes on the main menu I am really looking forward to your late August publishing date…put me on your email list. Is there a good forum for the RX100 II/III that you can recommend?
I have added you to the notification list. One of the best sources of information about these cameras is the Sony Cyber-shot Talk forum at dpreview.com.
Just bought a Sony rx100 iii and find the downloadable manual most unsatisfying. Should I wait for the release of your iii guide or get the one that is being sold on this page? Are there significant changes forthcoming that might be worth the wait?
I recommend waiting for the new book, because there are substantial changes in the menu options and other features. The new book should be ready within the next 2 weeks or so.
Thanks for the information. I am excited about using the new camera and hope it works for landscape as well as it does for objects/people closer up. I look forward to getting the book.
Anything new on the availability of your new book rx100 iii. Can’t wait any longer!
Yes, as a matter of fact, it has just now become available in all three electronic versions – PDF, ePub (iPad, etc.), and Kindle. You can purchase it through this site for $9.95 and get all three files. The paperback version should be available at Amazon.com and other online sellers within the next several days.
Is there a release date for the RX 100 iii book yet? Hopefully soon! 😉
Actually, the book is finished now, and it will take a week or so before copies are available from the printer and before the Kindle and iPad versions are ready for distribution. I hope that all versions will be ready within the next two weeks, though a lot of that process is out of my control. I will be posting updates as various versions become available.
Great thanks. In the meantime, if you will sell a .pdf version of it for the Kindle price, just let me know, I’m in!
Okay, I will send you an e-mail message about this.
Pingback: Sony RX100 III Book is Now Available in PDF Version Only | White Knight Press
Mr. White, Could you please let me know how you took the screenshots of the camera’s LCD? Or did you just take a picture of it?
For almost all of the screenshots, I used the output from the camera’s HDMI port, connected through a cable to a video capture device, and then captured into Photoshop. There are some screens that are not fully output through that port, including the Monitor Brightness screen and the zebra stripes. For those, I had to line up another camera and take a picture of the RX100 III’s LCD screen. If you want more details about the video capture process, let me know and I can provide them.
You are wonderful. Thank you so much for your response and offer. Would you please email me the details about the device and process?
I just got a DSC-RX100M3 and my model is a 50i (french) unit. When switched to NTSC, the camera displays “Running on DTSC” every single time the camera is turned ON with no apparent way to disable that. Apparently the same thing happens when a 60i unit is set-up to run on PAL.
So my intent was to capture that screen so I can post it on different forums for help.
To what degree would it be possible to edit the firmware software? I have a (Blackvue DR550GW-2CH) video dash cam I was able to edit the firmware/ configuration file for with the help of others from specialized forums. And so I wonder if it is possible with a camera from a manufacturer such as Sony.
Hello, Richard — I have sent you a reply by e-mail.
— Alex
Hi Alex, I am interested as well on how to do this. I have the same issue. Can you let me know what your answer is to Richard’s question? Thanks
Hi Richard,
Were you able to edit the firmware or config file? I am in the same situation as you. I have the 50i unit and would like to switch off the “Running on NTSC” message.
Hi, Ray — Yes, the RX100 III book would be beneficial because there are many menu options and other features in common between the two models. You would just have to expect there to be some confusion because there are several added features on the RX100 IV and considerable differences in areas such as the range of shutter speeds, which is considerably greater on the RX100 IV. But if you don’t mind having some such areas of confusion, the RX100 III book should be fairly useful.
Hi Alex,
Just saw that your book Photographer’s Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 III was already available. I’m ok with the PDF version for now but will also be downloading on the iPad version once it’s available. Your book will make me enjoy using this awesome camera even more! Thank you very much from Thailand 😉
Hello, Henry — Here is the substance of what I told Richard: For video capture with my Mac Pro computer I use a device called the Intensity Pro from Blackmagic Design. They have several similar devices, depending on what interface you use, such as USB or an internal slot in a computer. The device has a regular HDMI input, so I can plug the HDMI cable coming from the camera into the Intensity Pro and capture the signal. The RX100 III is very good at outputting the signal while in shooting mode or in playback mode. Some other cameras will output a signal through the HDMI port only in playback mode. As I noted earlier, there are a few screens, such as zebra and Monitor Brightness adjustments, and also Peaking Level, that are not sent out through this port, so I had to take pictures of the LCD screen with another camera to illustrate those features.
There are other video capture devices available that can capture HDMI input, from companies including Hauppage, AverMedia, and Elgato. The Blackmagic Intensity Pro works well for me because it comes with a configuration that plugs into Photoshop, so you can capture a still image directly into Photoshop.
As for the actual issue with the NTSC/PAL selector, I have the 60i model, and it does not have the NTSC/PAL selector menu option; there is no way to get it to run on PAL, so there is never any message displayed about NTSC or PAL. Maybe some 60i models have that option, but I was not aware of that. As far as I know, only the 50i models display any such message. I don’t think there is any way to disable the message if you run the 50i model using the NTSC system.
As for editing the firmware, maybe a very computer-savvy person could figure out how to do that. For Canon cameras, there is a system called CHDK that allows users to modify the software inside their cameras; details are at http://chdk.wikia.com/wiki/CHDK. I don’t know if something similar could be done with Sony cameras; if so, I have not heard about it. Maybe if you looked into the CHDK information someone there could help you figure out if such modifications are possible for Sony cameras, though my inclination is to doubt it.
is it possible to let me know when the iPad version will be available.
jay
Hi Alex, are we still aiming for end of August? I just bought this camera and am preparing for a vacation starting 8/31. Really want to read this on my 14 hour plane ride!
I have recently purchased the Panasonic Lumix zx40. Although it’s distributed with a 300+ page manual, it addresses the mechanics of operation, more than conveying an understanding of why, when, etc. I purchased your book on the LX7 which appeared to be a reasonably similar camera albeit with many differences. I would love to get a book similar to yours on the lx7 but written for the zx40. I don’t see it listed in your upcoming products. Are you aware of anyone who might have or is in the process of producing such a book?
Hello — No, as far as I know, there is no book available or planned for the Panasonic Lumix ZS40 camera. There aren’t that many books available for compact cameras, and it doesn’t look as if that camera has a book specifically written for it.
Sorry, I meant the ZS40, not the zx40.
Pingback: Sony RX100 III Book Available in PDF, iPad, Kindle Versions | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony Releases Firmware Update 1.10 for DSC-RX100 III Camera | White Knight Press
Hello, Scott — Yes, all three electronic versions will be available as of later today, within the next few hours. I expect the paperback version to start being available within the next few days, though that’s a little less certain. I will be posting updates here.
–Alex
Hello, Jay — Yes, I will add you to the list and will notify you when the other versions are available. Thanks.
— Alex
Hi, Tommy — Thanks — I will let you know as soon as the iPad version is available; I hope it will be ready sometime this week.
— Alex
Pingback: Sony RX100 III Book Now Available in Paperback Version | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color Users Guide for Sony RX100 III Camera | North Fork Vue - North Fork Vue
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Full-Color Guide Book for Sony RX10 Camera – My Blog
I appreciate it has only just been announced but do you think you will be creating a book for the D Lux Typ 109? I’m a huge fan of your books and have always ensured I have your book with the latest D-Lux model. Many thanks.
Hello, Jo — Thanks for your comment. Yes, I have just been reading about that new Leica model, and as of now, I do plan to do a book about it, once I can get my hands on one. So, it will be several months in the future, and something could always intervene to change the plan, but that is the plan as of now.
–Alex
Hi, can you provide camera settings you have used for this shot
Hi — I assume you’re talking about the first image, of the bird on the fence. That was taken with the Bird-watching setting, with the lens zoomed in to 1440mm, at f/6.5 with a shutter speed of 1/60 second and ISO 450. The Matrix metering mode was used.
Thank you so much sir
Hi Alex,
I couldn’t watch both the embedded clip or directly on YouTube. Perhaps YouTube is still processing the file?
Ok YouTube video works fine now 🙂
Dear Alex, the last motion picture camera I had was 16mm and served me well in an underwater housing. I am not young and have just spent the day trying to get my head around my new RX-100 11 digital ‘monster’. Of course I became completely bogged down in the unfamiliar jargon within the camera’s Menu. Looking up individual digital language acronyms etc on the net I bumped into your seemingly marvellous book of instruction on the subject, ‘The Photographers’ Guide to the Sony RX-100 11′
I live in Mauritius and have a friend in the US who can accept the paperback version on my behalf however I would like the Kindle version for my immediate use.
Question – does the Kindle version include all illustrations/photographs etc? I ask this because I may never see the paperback and will operate exclusively from the Kindle version.
I thank you for taking the trouble to write this book in the absence of anything meaningful from the manufacturer. It seems to be an essential reference for operators such as I and to assist us over the ‘digital hump’.
I notice that you prefer to use the RX in 60p 28M (PS) however the camera advises that this “Cannot record to DVD disc at 60p 28M(PS). Save on a Blue Ray disc”. Do you happen to know if I could copy to my 1 year old Mac in the 60p… format? From there perhaps I could reconfigure the resolution according to the use?
Question – Digital editing is going to be my next hurdle; do you happen to know a good reference to get me pointed the right way on this subject?
Alex, any words of wisdom you have would be very much appreciated.
Can’t wait to get started; I think I can see the light!
Cheers, John Seymour
Hello, John — I’m glad to hear you have an RX100 II – a great camera in so many ways, and I’m happy to hear you found my book. As for the Kindle edition, yes, it contains the complete contents of the printed book, including all of the photographs, which are in color if you use a color-capable Kindle or a Kindle app on a computer. By the way, if you purchase the printed book from amazon.com, you can get the Kindle version at a reduced price. Yes, you can copy the video files to your Mac and edit them there however you want. My book mentions the somewhat obscure way in which the AVCHD files are stored on the memory card; you have to find the .mts files, which can be readily edited in a good video editing program. With respect to editing, there are many options available, depending on how involved you want to get and how much you want to spend. If your Mac has iMovie, you can edit the files using that program. I don’t use iMovie that much myself, but I noticed that there is a Missing Manual book about iMovie for 2014. There also probably are good YouTube video tutorials for the program. Personally, I use Adobe Premiere Pro for editing. It is more expensive and involved, but has a lot of power. There are books from Adobe such the Classroom in a Book volume, and also there are excellent tutorials on YouTube on many aspects of editing with that program. There is a less-expensive option from Adobe called Premiere Elements, which also should do very well with the files from this camera. Another possibility is Final Cut Pro software from Apple. If you want to use a Sony Option, there is Sony Vegas Pro software, and I saw that there is a well-reviewed book called Sony Vegas Pro 11 Beginner’s Guide, which evidently has step-by-step tutorials to get you started; it sounds like a good option.
Best of luck with your photo and video shooting!
— Alex
Alex, thanks for the very prompt reply. I have THE book already in my Kindle, thanks to the power of the ether! Thanks also for the tips re editing which I will digest in the morning along with digesting your wise words on the RX-100 11. Finding that the book was available on Kindle without having to buy the paperback was a bonus for me.
Cheers from a very happy customer, John
Hello again Alex, your book on the RX-100 11 is as good as I thought it would be. Thanks you. It seems however I have bought the NTSC version, being unaware that there are 2 models available, but with the same model number!! Sony, you have to be kidding?!
I really would like the PAL version. I understand that if the Card is formatted in the NTSC format, then that’s what I am stuck with, is that correct? I understand that a NTSC-PAL conversion results in loss of quality?
Does anyone want to buy an unused DSC RX-100 11 camera?
I will go for the 11 model again as the 24mm lens of the 111 model does not suit the underwater housing and available wide angle adaptors i.e., the lens would have to be zoomed to 28mm to avoid vignetting. Plus the electronic viewfinder would be redundant.
With regards, John
Hello, John — I’m sorry to hear you ended up with the wrong version of the camera. Yes, if you have the 60i (NTSC) version, you are stuck with the NTSC standard. The 50i (PAL) version can switch between them, but the NTSC version cannot. I have never tried to convert video footage between these standards, but I did some quick research and it appears that there likely will be a loss of quality to some extent if you do a software conversion. You probably could get better advice from some of the experts who frequent the various forums that discuss this camera and video. For example, the Sony Cyber-shot Talk Forum at dpreview.com probably would be a good place to ask questions in this area.
–Alex
Dear Alex White,
Managed to change the RX100 11 for the PAL version and have just returned from safari in Africa with quite a few video AVCHD video files. Now to the question of viewing and digital editing. My last editing was done on 16mm with the aid of a negative basket, a cutter, tape and a viewer!
1. To get the images onto a TV I understand that the optional HDMI cable is necessary. Unfortunately I did not purchase the optional HDMI cable with the camera; do you happen to know if this type of cable is readily available, or is it a Sony special? I have no local Sony agent here in Mauritius to check with.
2. What cable is used to download from the camera to my Mac?
I have charged the camera battery from the computer via the camera’s MULTI connector however I’m not sure if this connector/cable has another use?
3. Do I need to have the editing software loaded onto the laptop for viewing the AVCHD whilst travelling?
4. I understand that you personally use Adobe Premier Pro and have checked the Adobe site to establish cost etc. I am aware that this software can be complicated however that term can apparently be applied to the purchase of this item! The Adobe website lists a daunting array of packages;
” …premiere Pro, After Effects, the Production Premium Suite, the Master Suite and Creative Cloud”. Premiere Pro and After Effects are the two applications that are of most interest to video editors. With the suites, the Production Premium Suite is the smallest of the to offer both Premiere Pro and After Effects. The Master Suite, included as its applications are made available with a Creative Cloud”.
Thanks again for your excellent book on the camera; I now have the RX by the short and curlies however the digital editing is a another minefield for the likes of me and once again I must seek the advice of the master, if you don’t mind.
I am aware that it is necessary to source a package that can hopefully handle the AVCHD video files without a glitch however I note that some complain that even Adobe has some shortcomings in this direction?
A quote from the Adobe Premier Pro Help site, “There is a known issue for Adobe Premiere Pro CS6. AVCHD files that are spanned can cause the system to freeze up while scrubbing the software. Also, the audio can sometimes disappear after a set amount of playback.
A spanned file has an extended duration, wherein the camera creates separate video files. These files don’t appear to be separate when imported into Adobe Premiere Pro, only if looking at the video files in Finder or Windows Explorer.
There is an update for CS6 – 6.0.4 that resolves the issue. Update CS6 to the latest version. Alternatively, Adobe Premiere Pro CC does not have this issue.”
Some adopt for proxy editing to assist the editing process even when using Adobe. I would really appreciate your guidance on which Adobe packages I should purchase and whether or not it is wise/easier to go the proxy route? I understand that there may be some color correction to be done on the final AVCHD version if we went for proxy approach.
Perhaps I should mention that my expectations of an editing package are fairly straight forward; cut and splicing/dissolves, wipes etc/color correction/exposure correction etc. It is not clear to me how one identifies particular footage in the absence of time coding or some other number referencing system; perhaps some editing software introduces some reference to assist?
Whilst there will be some stills I intend to shoot mainly video.
I can afford to go the Adobe route, if that’s what it takes, and would really appreciate the benefit of your experience to hopefully minimize the potential of my making a huge mistake which could be very expensive on time and money.
5. FYI my 21″ Mac is about 3 years old with OSX 10.9.5, processor 2.5GHz Intel Core i5, memory 4 GB 1333 MHz DDR3. It does have a Thunderbolt connection which I understand can speed up the camera-computer download. Do I need to get a new Mac or upgrade video card etc. for better performance?
6. I also have a new 11″ Mac Air laptop which I intend to travel with to view the mostly underwater footage we will shoot. Will I need software on the laptop for purposes of viewing the AVCHD files?
Can’t tell you how much we appreciate your advice and trust that this enquiry will not be too hungry on your time. Please excuse our naivety and thanks again for your assistance in jerking us into the 21st digital century.
With best regards, John
Hello, John — I’ll give you the best responses I can, though I cannot claim to be an expert on every aspect of each camera I write about; I concentrate on still images, and try to cover video accurately, but I don’t have experience with all that many software packages. At any rate, here is what I can say:
1. You should just look for a generic HDMI cable. You need one with a micro connector at the camera end and a standard HDTV connector at the other end. Here is a listing for one at Amazon.
2. You use the cable that came with the camera to download to a computer, using the USB connection.
3. If you have a Mac, you should have the iMovie software installed. If not, get it from the Mac App Store. It does a good job with AVCHD files.
4. If you find that iMovie doesn’t do everything you need, I suggest you try Adobe Premiere Pro Elements before taking the plunge with Premiere Pro. Elements may be all you need, if iMovie isn’t enough.
5. Your Mac should be fine. At least, I would try using it and see if it is fast enough. It should be. If you can add more memory, that would be a good idea.
6. Try using iMovie on the MacBook Air.
I hope this helps to some extent; best of luck with your video production!
–Alex White
Dear Alex,
The prompt and informative response is very much appreciated.
Cheers, John S
Pingback: iPhone 6 Has NFC But Can't Currently Use it with Camera Apps | White Knight Press
Pingback: iPhone 6 Has NFC But Can't Currently Use it with Camera Apps | White Knight Press
Pingback: Using External Flash with the Sony DSC-RX100 III Camera | White Knight Press
Hi, looks like an excellent guide . I note the recent firmware update to 2.0 allows shooting in XAVCS format.I assume the guide was not able to cover that as it was not an option at the time of camera release but no harm in asking 🙂
You are correct that the book about the RX10 does not include information about the firmware update, but I did do a blog post that discusses it; here is a link to that post.
Hello, Alex,
I purchased the hard copy book from Amazon and like it a lot (I am only up to page 30 or so). So much easier to read, understand and master the camera when compared to the online manual provided by Sony. I have a question: On page 26 of the book, at #7, it tells me to press the flash pop-up switch and then to press the Right button on the Control Wheel and then the vertical menu appears showing Flash Mode on the left side of the screen. However, when I do that with my camera, I receive an error message (“This operation or setting not available as follows:
Shoot Mode (grayed out)
Intelligent Mode (highlighted).”
The only way I get to Flash Mode is by going into the Menu, then #2 button, highlight Flash Mode from among the several choices – which I have already set to Autoflash as per your suggestions on page 25.
Then, #9, when I press the Left button, I do not get into Drive Mode but I get into Auto Obj. Framing. Please tell me why I am having this issue.
Best,
Ber
Pingback: White Knight News release Total Full-Color Overview Reserve for Sony RX10 Cam
Thank you for the update!
Gorgeous pictures; color, clarity, closeups and scenes. I’m ordering Alex’s book
Thanks!
HI Alex
Can we make the background in the 1st image of a bird more blur by using Nikon P600? Because the background is not blur enough to divert our attention towards the object(bird). It distracts and irritates eyes. Please suggest.
HI Alex
can you provide camera settings you have used for all the Nikon P600 sample photos? This will help us understanding better about the camera settings and its effect(resultant photo).
Thanks
Manish
Hi, Manish — I took a look at the various bird photos on the sample photos page for the P600 camera, and I think I see what you mean. In the first photo, the background is more distracting than for the other bird photos. I don’t think there would be an easy way to use different settings for that photo to get the background more blurred; the image was taken using a very long focal length, which caused a good deal of blurring of the background. I think the issue with that photo is that the background itself is somewhat distracting, with its bright highlights that contrast with the dark green areas. I think the background would have looked better and less distracting if it were more uniform in color.
–Alex
Hello, Manish — Okay, that’s a good suggestion. I have added the settings to the gallery, so they will show up as you view the photos.
— Alex
Great! Thanks!! You may would like to show the camera settings for other models too.
Hi, any plans for a Guide for the CANON G7X?
Thank you
Robert
Hi, Robert — I don’t have any current plans for a book about that camera, but I appreciate your mentioning it, because that helps me as I try to figure out what other cameras to write about. Thanks.
–Alex White
Pingback: Selling Books To Hybrid Readers: How To Earn Money And Connect With Your Readers | Self-Publishing Review
just got my fuji x100T. Any plans for a guide?
Hello — No plans at present, because I am backed up with other cameras I need to work on. If time permits down the road I’ll try to work that one in, but it doesn’t look likely right now.
Is the button for getting the bundle at the far right? I am unable to see the entire button, but presume it’s the last button after the one for the Kobo. I see only a large “B,” the rest of the button is not visible.
My daughter just purchased a Nikon P530. I have been unable to find a handbook for this model and the user manual provides less than adequate information on the use of the camera’s functionalities. Would purchasing your book on the P520 be a sensible way forward or do you have any other suggestions? Thanks
Hello — It’s hard to say, because I have not worked directly with the P530, but I think that my book on the P600 might be closer in its contents, because the P600 and P530 were introduced at about the same time.
After having to retire my trusty Panasonic ZS-10 earlier this year, my family got tired of my whining and gifted me a new Nikon P530 this year. Seeing how highly rated all of your books are, I was dismayed to find that you don’t have a guide book for the P530. Based upon your advice to John, I might spring for the P600 guidebook. Much better, would be if you plan to release on specifically for the P530, though. 😉
I don’t have immediate plans for a book on the P530, but if anything develops I will post details. Thanks for suggesting it.
Your guide to the Sony RX10 is excellent, Alex. Many thanks, Paul Sinclair
Thanks, Paul!
Looking forward to the D-Lux Typ 109 guide. I had the one for the D-Lux 5 and it was enormously helpful.
I am working on a guide for the Panasonic LX100 now; I’m not sure if I will do a separate one for the Typ 109, though that one may be next. I will post more information as plans develop.
Will there be a Guide Book for Fuji W100T?
Correction. I meant Fuji X100T. Sorry.
Hi — As of now, I don’t have plans for a book about the X100T, though it’s possible that could change. I am working on a book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100 right now, and after that I will evaluate to see what comes next. I would say the likelihood of an X100T guide is not that great, but I’ll post further information as things develop.
Your book is very helpful. Thank you. Quick question: my MacBook Air cannot “see” the RX100 III even when connected with the supplied Sony USB cable. Is this because it’s running OS X 10.10.1 (Yosemite)?
I just connected my RX100 III with the USB cable to my Mac desktop computer, which is running Yosemite, and PlayMemories Home Importer found the camera and its images with no problem. However, I did find that I could not upgrade the camera’s firmware using my Mac, apparently because the firmware upgrade program was not compatible with Yosemite. So, depending on what software you are using, that could be an issue.
Very pleased to know you are about to publish the LX100 book. Without your LX5 and LX7 guides I wouldn’t have been able to fully enjoy them, thanks to a snobbish attitude deriving from 60-odd years of handling fully mechanical cameras that made me shun the iA, SCN and Palette modes in favor of a a**l retentive obsession for control (you can’t blame someone who grew among Leica IIIf’s and 3.5 TLR Rolleiflexes without even a light meter). Thanks to you I came not only to apppreciate but to depend on functions like Handheld Night Scene, HDR and Panorama modes, instant switch to Ilford HP5+ lookalike and the joy of the iZoom extra reach.
Now that Santa rewarded my good behaviour with an LX100, I’m fumbling with it trying to unearth the goodies I’ve become accustomed to during the last three years on my LX5 (sold) and LX7 (headed for the block) but -alas- your book will have to wait a few weeks. Forming on the queue to get my ebook!
Thanks! You’ve given me some added incentive to get down to work finishing the book! I hope to have it available within the next few weeks.
Glad to hear that! I discovered your books (and have been purchasing them) since the one on the LX3. I’m cracking my knuckles waiting for the new one. As stated before, while much of the content may be redundant to the manual, the way it’s explained let’s everyone fully understand why a function is on the camera, what can be expected of it and how/when to use it.
Thanks!
I concur, I would never have got the most out of the my beloved d-lux without your assistance via your books. The typ 109 is my fourth iteration of this gem of a camera and undoubtedly it’s a different beast than its predecessors. I recently took it on a long awaited workshop to capture some coastal suns the slow shutter speed shots. Not knowing that the silent mode stops the bulb (though 120-ish seconds is not enough) setting from even bring available. I had to crank the albeit impressive ISO up to get any shots at all as 1s was all it would give me. Pouring over the manual on the journey home only gave me a vague clue as to needing to get off electronic shutter (not knowing how I’d gotten on to that in the first place) but the menu option was greyed out. I resorted to restoring to factory settings and when I reintroduced silent mode I finally realised the correlation. I was convinced I’d have been better equipped with your latest tome. The Leica manuals are adequate (barely) but soulless, I am waiting in eagerness for your typ 109 book or the LX100 version, if you decide to only do one of them. No pressure…
Jo, thanks a bunch for the silent mode+bulb tip. I wouldn’t have discovered it either!
Same feeling about either of the books here, be it the Panasonic or the Leica; only that as owner of four of the real mccoys (Film Leica Ms and fIII) I’ve never been able to justify the 50% price increase for the rebranding. I keep forwarding the savings on each of the pannys towards a digital M and put my glass to good use.
how to connect my camera to my device?
I will try to help with this question, but I will need some more information. Please let me know what camera you are using, what device you are trying to connect it to, and for what purpose, and I will see if I can help.
A book on the Leica D-Lux Typ 109 would be terrific.
It’s such an awesome camera.
I’m looking forward to learn in-depth tricks about it !
Thanks !
Thanks for the suggestion. I am just finishing up my book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100, which is very similar to the D-Lux Typ 109, and I will soon decide what book to do next. It’s very helpful to hear from potential readers about what they would like to see.
Pingback: Sony Rx100 Manual Pdf | Manual User Guide PDF
My question deals with: once I open my file into ibooks or Kindle on one device, is there a way that it can be in the master library on all my other devices to allow syncing?
Currently after I sync said device, I do not see the book available in the libraries on any of the other devices.
Also concerning the Kindle specifically, I only get a generic thumbnail, not the appropriate one associated to the book cover. How can this be fixed?
I will send you a reply by e-mail.
Can you please add me to the list for the Panasonic LX100 guide?
Sure — I have added you to the list and will advise you as soon as the book is available. Thanks.
Do you have a manual for fujifilm finepix HS30EXR. If so- can i purchase it in Australia.If
not – do you plan to write one?
Thank you for asking about a book about the Fujifilm FinePix HS30EXR. It does help to know which cameras people are interested in having books written for. I don’t have any current plans for a book about that model, but I will make a note of your interest as I’m deciding on future books. I am just finishing a guide for the Panasonic LX100.
Pingback: Panasonic Lumix LX100 Guide Published | White Knight Press
Thank you Alexander, this was eagerly anticipated. Apologies for asking this again but are you now planning on writing the D-Lux 109 version too or as these are seemingly more similar than normal, you would redirect us Leica owners to the Lumix version?
PS – I have downloaded the Lumix one anyway, but wanted to ask!
I have to admit I haven’t yet made a final decision. As of right now, I think I will do the D-Lux Typ 109 next, but I always need a little time after each book is done to take care of matters such as getting it distributed through various sites, before plunging ahead to the next book. So, I probably will do the Leica model next, but I can’t guarantee it yet. I’ll post more information as things develop. Thanks for checking!
–Alex
Your book on the LX7 was very helpful, so I’m eagerly waiting for your guide for the Panasonic LX100. Is there a way of being notified when it’s ready for download?
Yes! As it happens, it’s available now, as of a few hours ago. You can just go the book’s page on this site.
I am looking forward to buy the book too
I have your book for the DSC-RX100, which has been an important part of my learning to use my camera. What are the chances you will update your book for the X100S for the X100T. I will buy it the instant it comes out!
I haven’t decided yet what book will be next, but the X100T is on the list of possibilities. I will post more information as it develops. Thanks.
Hi Alex, I bought the Rx100-III guide and it’s been very informative, to say the least. I’m a bit confused, though, with the so-called Setting Effect icon shown in Fig. 4-81 because I understand it to be for the Picture Effect. Could you please clarify? Thanks.
Dear Alexander,
Earnest thanks for hurrying on the book. Answered prayers! Just got the Kindle version and will devour it along the weekend putting the giant killer through the paces. Your books are the best proof that we shouldn’t strive to reinvent black thread. Why would anyone want to meddle with the cryptic manuals when one can read your books?
Best!
Jorge.
Dear Alexander,
There’s an error on Table 3-1. The method to set Aperture Priority states “Set aperture ring to the red A mark and set shutter speed dial to desired value”, it should be the other way around. You might want to update at Amazon before more copies get sold.
Best,
Jorge.
Still proofreading, sorry…
“At higher zoom levels, the widest aperture available changes steadily, until, when the lens is fully zoomed in to the 90mm level, the widest aperture available is f/2.8.”
As you (and most owners) are aware, the camera does not offer a 90mm zoom setting, at least not optically (longest is 75), although it emulates longer settings very well, up to 300mm via the iZoom and Digital Zoom menu settings.
Jorge — Thanks very much for pointing out the mistakes you found. I have posted corrections at the Updates and Corrections page at this site, and I will get them fixed in future versions of the ebooks, as well as in the printed version, which has not come out yet.
–Alex
Alex, glad to be of help, specially before committing the manuscript to press. Already at 35% of the book but going slowly through it, experimenting with all the minutiae. You’ve done a terriffic job —as usual– of explaining the functions to the mm. I knew I would never get to know the camera fully without your book. Again, sincere thanks and admiration.
Best regards!
Jorge.
The firmware update 1.20 aborts on my Mac with Yosemite OS
That is a known issue. I had to use a Windows PC to do the update.
Pingback: Paperback LX100 Guide Book On Sale Now | White Knight Press
Please put me on the list for the paperback of the Panasonic Lumix DMC-LX100 camera
Hello — The paperback version of the book is available as of today; for now, it is available only at Amazon.com. Here is a link to the book’s page there. It will become available through other sites in future days and weeks.
Thank you so much for doing a book on the Leica Typ 109.
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Detailed Guide Book for Panasonic Lumix LX100 Camera – Press Release Rocket
About the Panasonic FL220E in the UK… I don’t think there ever was a version that tilted for bounce flash. Here’s an extract from a current live eBay item for sale:
“The Panasonic DMW-FL220E Flashgun is a compact flashgun for Lumix digital cameras. It offers some bounce / swivel capability with lighting angle at 60 degrees up and down as well as 78 degrees left/right.”
That 60 deg up-and-down and 78 deg left/right mentioned there as bounce and swivel capability is merely the spec for the fixed strobe’s angle of coverage.
Such misunderstandings are likely to be the source of the incorrect information about the FL220E’s non-existent tilt.
Best regards, DL
ps: The Windows software for the RX100M3’s firmware update runs on XP SP3 without a hitch.
Thanks for this clarification; it makes a lot of sense, and it looks as if your information clears up some confusion. I will change the discussion on the Updates and Corrections page to include your point.
Pingback: Sony Cyber Shot RX100 ??? RX100 II – ?? ??? Firmware… | Gadgetfreak :: Not Just Tech
Pingback: 6 Authors of Mirrorless Camera Manuals Whose Books You’ll Actually Enjoy Reading | MirrorLessons - The Best Mirrorless Camera Reviews
Pingback: 6 Authors of Mirrorless Camera Manuals Whose Books You’ll Actually Enjoy Reading | MirrorLessons - The Best Mirrorless Camera Reviews
Pingback: 6 Authors of Mirrorless Camera Manuals Whose Books You’ll Actually Enjoy Reading | MirrorLessons - The Best Mirrorless Camera Reviews
Pingback: 6 Authors of Mirrorless Camera Manuals Whose Books You’ll Actually Enjoy Reading | MirrorLessons - The Best Mirrorless Camera Reviews
Hi, Eduardo — I’m glad you’re finding the book useful. There is room for confusion on this topic, because there are several settings with similar names and functions. Figure 4-81 is meant to show you that you will not always see the effects of the Creative Style setting that is in use. In this case, the Sepia setting for Creative Style is in effect, as shown by the SEPI icon. There is no Picture Effect turned on; those effects have names such as Toy Camera, Posterization, Miniature, and others. In Figure 4-81, even though the Sepia setting for Creative Style is turned on, the screen does not appear sepia-colored, because the Setting Effect Off option is in use. If that doesn’t answer your question, let me know.
–Alex
Hello — For the bundle of 3 ebook versions (PDF, ePub, and Kindle), use the large Buy Ebook button, which is above the table with other options. The button to the right of the Kobo button is for Google Play. If this doesn’t answer your question, let me know. Thanks.
Hello, Ber — The step-by-step instructions in the book were written with the idea that the camera is new and you haven’t changed the basic settings. It appears that what happened is that you, by playing around with the settings, or perhaps someone who used the camera before you, has changed the settings for the Left and Right buttons on the control wheel. The Right button appears to have been set to some function that is not compatible with Intelligent Auto mode, and the Left button has been set to Auto Object Framing. To reset these buttons to their default values, see the discussion of the Custom Key Settings menu option starting at page 324 of the book. You need to reset the Right button to Flash mode and the Left button to Drive mode.
–Alex White
Hi! I find your page was very useful. I wanted to get the ebook on iTunes but it was not made available in Malaysian store sadly. Keep up the good work =)
Hello — Thanks for your comment. You can purchase the bundle of ebook formats directly from this site; that bundle includes the same ePub version that is sold through the iBookstore. Here a link to the page for purchasing the book that way. Let me know if you have any questions.
Yes, thank you for doing a book on the Leica Typ 109. Could you please add me to the notification list for when it is ready for purchase?
Thank you and have a wonderful weekend!
Okay, I have added you to the list. Thanks.
Alex, I have your LX5 and LX7 books and have found them invaluable. I am an LX “tragic” and have recently received my LX100 and very impressed. However, I have not been able to get the Custom Settings and Function button access to them to work, particularly getting back out to normal operations. I have read your explanation in the LX100 book over and over and just cannot get it to work. I class myself as reasonably computer and camera literate but seem to have a mental block which could just possibly be due to your explanation. I remember the adage that communications begin with the message and then the listener comes next. This item is the only section of your wonderful book which I cannot use and it happens to be the most important area for me to get on top of. I photograph stained glass windows for publication and need to speedily set the camera for that task and just as speedily return it to normal functions but still have C1 sitting there to use next time.
Hello, Robin, I’m sorry to hear this part of the book was not helpful to you. If you can narrow down for me the discussion that is unclear, I can try to clarify it. One point that might not be explained as well as it should be is that you have to make sure that all three memory slots – C1, C2, and C3, have the Function Button Set option set so that your chosen Function button is assigned to call up the Utilize Custom Set feature. So, if you call up C2, and then you want to switch to C3, it has to be the case that C2 has the appropriate Function button assigned to switch to another Custom Set. If this is not the issue, let me know and I will work on issuing a correction on taking whatever other steps are necessary to clarify the discussion. I appreciate your pointing out the issue.
-Alex
Pingback: 8 Steps on Starting a Blog (From Someone Who Has No Idea What He’s Doing) | Another Travel Blog
Many thanks for coming back to me Alex. Much appreciated. I am a bit pressed at the moment but hope to get some quiet time over the weekend. I’ll be back. Regards Robin
Hello, Robin — Okay, thanks. I’ll look forward to hearing further.
–Alex
Pingback: Sony Issues RX100 Firmware Version 1.10 | White Knight Press
Hi, bought your book on the Fuji X10(extremely helpful!) and since the X20 was very similar there was no need for a book on that. But now I have the X30 which is very different. Just thought I would put my wishes in for a book on it. Love the camera but between the EVF and all the other many other changes it is very dissimilar to the proceeding models. Plus now they only have a download manual! HELP!
Thanks for suggesting a book about the X30. It really helps me to know which cameras people are interested in having books written for. I don’t have any current plans for that model, but I will make a note of your interest as I’m deciding on future books.
—Alex White
White Knight Press
I got the print version via Amazon. My sincere thanks to the author for this excellent work. The Sony materials that come with the camera and via the Sony website are woefully inadequate. This is the manual that should have come with the RX10. In particular, the explanations and illustrative pictures of the various creative style and picture effect modes was most helpful.
I have the Sony HVL-F43M flash unit and the Sony instruction materials for this are equally obscure. Do you have a similar guide to this flash, or know where to get some information?
Thanks for your comments. I don’t have a book or other guide for the flash unit. I found a pretty good introduction to the flash on YouTube, at this link: http://youtu.be/YwKYfm8gBFM.
Also, you might find some good information on Sony flash units in general from the articles, books, and videos available at http://friedmanarchives.com. Gary Friedman is an expert on Sony cameras and flash, and his materials may be quite helpful.
Pingback: Leica D-Lux & Panasonic LX100 Compared | White Knight Press
Sooooo, I’m SOL then, with my Mac… :/
No, I need to update this post. Sony has added a “driver loader”, along with this message: IMPORTANT: For OS X version 10.10, please ensure the Mac OS X 10.10 Driver Loader has been installed before continuing to update your firmware. Look for that message, which can be hard to notice on the firmware download page, and install that extra file first, and then the firmware upgrade should work okay on the Mac with Yosemite.
Pingback: Leica D-Lux Typ 109 Book Now Available | White Knight Press
Pingback: Guide to Leica D-Lux Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
I found and purchase your book for the newly acquired RX10. Thanks.
It is a good read for me as I am used to always read instruction manuals for my devices.
And for the benefit of everyone also purchased a medium size flash that works well with the camera.
Sony HVL-F32M and has the Multi Interface Shoe.
Thanks for your comment and for the information about the flash!
If other people are interested by off camera flash.
I have purchased and tested the following items.
2 SOFACS1M Off-Camera Shoe for External Flash with Multi-Interf
1 FA-MC1AM Off-Camera Flash Cable
So I can use a flash bracket or close by on a stand. Even if this cable is short, longer ones must exist.
When will new book for nikon p600 will be release,if possible plz provide aproxx. time of arrival.
I m eager to play with nikon p600.
Hello — The Nikon P600 book is available now; please the book’s information page at this site.
Given that you have written about this camera and the Panasonic, you may be the true expert on whether the two cameras are really the same.
Some people argue that the JPEG processing of the cameras is different, resulting in different “looks” for their images. I didn’t try to investigate that issue; I just wanted to lay out the objective, uncontroversial differences.
I purchased a Nikon Coolpix p530. Should I order the p520 book?
I think the P520 book would probably be the most helpful, though the P600 book could be helpful also. You might want to order one of those from a place to which you could return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you hoped. Then you could try the other book.
I purchased a Nikon Coolpix p530. Should I order the p520 book?
I think the P520 book would probably be the most helpful, though the P600 book could be helpful also. You might want to order one of those from a place to which you could return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you hoped. Then you could try the other book.
I purchased a Nikon Coolpix p530. Should I order the p520 book?
I think the P520 book would probably be the most helpful, though the P600 book could be helpful also. You might want to order one of those from a place to which you could return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you hoped. Then you could try the other book.
I am in hopes that you are going to do a book on the new Nikon Coolpix P900. If so, please let me know when it would be available. In the interim, do you think that your book on the P600 would suffice?
Yes, I am planning to do a book on the P900, though I first have to finish my book on the P610. I would hope to get the P900 book done by sometime in July or August. As far as using the P600 book for the P900 camera is concerned, it’s hard to say, because I haven’t examined the P900 yet to see how different the menu options and other features are. I imagine it would be somewhat useful, though you might want to buy it from a seller to whom you can return it if it doesn’t prove to be all that helpful for you.
Thanks for the feedback. I will be eagerly awaiting the P900 book. Please place me on your notification list. I appreciate it.
Thanks. I’ve added you to the list.
April 9/15 – I tried to purchase your book Guide to Nikon CoolpixP510 and a message came up saying could not ship to Canada – Howcome
Please let me know what seller you were trying to purchase the book from and I will try to find out what the problem is.
I’m also looking for a book covering the P530. A couple of reviews on Amazon suggest enough difference in the P520 book to make it less than ideal. Will you be updating the book for the P530?
No, I was going to do a book for the P530, but Nikon released the P600 at the same time, and I decided to do a book for the P600 instead. Now I’m working on a book for the P610.
I’m also looking for a book covering the P530. A couple of reviews on Amazon suggest enough difference in the P520 book to make it less than ideal. Will you be updating the book for the P530?
No, I was going to do a book for the P530, but Nikon released the P600 at the same time, and I decided to do a book for the P600 instead. Now I’m working on a book for the P610.
I’m also looking for a book covering the P530. A couple of reviews on Amazon suggest enough difference in the P520 book to make it less than ideal. Will you be updating the book for the P530?
No, I was going to do a book for the P530, but Nikon released the P600 at the same time, and I decided to do a book for the P600 instead. Now I’m working on a book for the P610.
My new RX100M3 started up with setup/set date and time displayed. I did that, but when the camera was shut off, the settings were lost. So I read the Kindle version of Alex White’s book, and that solved the problem. If you begin with the menu button, and navigate to setup, it works. However, the book does not tell you how to change from AM to PM. I stumbled onto how to do that, but I recommend that step be added to any revision of the book.
Thanks for the quick response and explanation, Alex. Now I understand the intent of Fig. 4-81. I guess I got confused because the Picture Effect icon is turned also off in the figure and I thought you were referring to that icon in the book. This just also made me realize that the Setting Effect is not shown in the Function Menu (lower line 6) by default. I bumped it off and placed the Setting Effect instead, which I use often, and now the camera feels better in my hand. Thanks again and keep up the great work. Looking forward to either the Sony A7000 or A9 guide this year.
Do the new iphones still cant connect to these cameras thru nfc?
Yes, that’s right. The newest Apple iPhones have NFC, but only for Apple Pay. As of now, the only phones that can connect to cameras using NFC are Android phones.
I see on Amazon that they think you are producing a guide for the X100S/T due out in August. I just bought the Fuji X100T and took it on a trip and I know I have a lot to learn. First off are you working on the guide for the S and T? Second do you think the guide to the S would be helpful or just confuse me more.
I really like the camera but there are a few problems I have with the camera. The biggest problem is that when I grab the camera and put it up to my eye the screen/viewfinder looks as though there is a rose colored filter on the lens. I figured out that somehow I am turing on the white balance adjustment and setting it to this rose color. It is annoying as heck and I have missed several shots because of it. I must be inadvertently hitting one of the many buttons on the back of the camera with a knuckle when I grip the camera. I would love to know how to turn it off quickly and also of course know which button or wheel I am hitting. That said do you think your guide to the X100S would cover that specific problem or should I wait for the guide to the X100T if it is coming. Thanks.
Hello — As of now, I don’t have plans to do a book for the Fuji X100T. I have gotten backed up with other books that I need to do, and I’m afraid I won’t be able to squeeze in the X100T book. It’s hard to say whether the X100S book would be sufficiently helpful. I usually tell people in that situation to purchase the book about the older model, but get it from a place to which you can return it if it turns out not to be as helpful as you would like.
As far as the white balance issue is concerned, I’m not sure, but possibly you might have the Quick Menu button assigned to white balance, and are pushing it accidentally. Or, you could be pressing the Down button, which presumably controls white balance on the X100T. If that’s the case, assuming the X100T works like the X100S, you could try pressing the Menu button for a few seconds to lock out the functioning of those buttons (along with other controls), to avoid inadvertent changes of settings.
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P610 Guide Book Available | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P610 Guide Book Available | White Knight Press
I was told by nikon support that my coolpix p600 was not compatible with my kindle fire, but after downloading the wireless mobile utility app it works just fine.
Thanks; that is useful information to know.
Pingback: Coolpix P610 Guide Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Coolpix P610 Guide Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Issues Coolpix P610 Firmware 1.1 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Issues Coolpix P610 Firmware 1.1 | White Knight Press
I have iPhone 5. Cant I use the camera out in the wilderness when I´m biking to take Self-Timer pictures controlled from my iPhone?
Yes, you can use the iPhone 5 to connect to the camera using the app; the lack of NFC just means that you can’t connect the camera to the phone by touching them together. You have to use the regular connection method, instead of the physical-touching method that NFC allows.
Thanx very much but I have to ask you one more question.
You say I can connect the phone via the app to use the remote function from the iphone. But what if theres no wifi out in the wilderness?
What funcions does the app have and where do I get it?
The Wi-Fi network is generated by the camera. The app can be used to transfer images and also to control the camera remotely. Search for the Sony Play Memories Mobile app in the Apple App Store.
So muuuuuch thanx 🙂
Hmm. I copy and paste and search but cant find the app; Sony Play Memories Mobile..?
Yes. Found it on iTunes 🙂
I just purchased the e book for the rx100 III and it will not download via safari. Can you help me?
Hi — I’m sorry to hear you’re having a problem. Please check out the PDF and Ebook Download Support page at this site for some tips. If you’re downloading the ePub version, which works best for iPad and iPhone, click on the link for that file, and then, if you see an error message, click on the icon that looks like a rectangle with an arrow coming out of the top. You should then see a menu giving you choices to Open In … various applications. Choose Open In iBooks, and the book should appear in the iBooks app. If you’re downloading the PDF, it should be readable with any application that can read PDFs. I would need some more specific information about exactly what is happening to help further. Please send me a message at contact@whiteknightpress.com if you still need help. Thanks.
Pingback: Proof Copy of Fujifilm X100 Book Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 6 Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Leica D-Lux 6 Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Proof Copy of Nikon Coolpix P500 Book Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Proof Copy of Nikon Coolpix P500 Book Has Been Approved | White Knight Press
Pingback: Black and White Edition of Fujifilm X10 Book is Now Available for $14.95 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S100 Guide Book is Now on Kindle and Nook | White Knight Press
Pingback: Canon PowerShot S100 Book is Now In Stock at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Super Slow Motion Video With Canon PowerShot S100 Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P500 Book is Now Available for Kindle | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P500 Book is Now Available for Kindle | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic Lumix LX5 Book is Now Discounted at Amazon.com | White Knight Press
Pingback: Installing Lens Adapter on Panasonic LX5 and Leica D-Lux 5 | White Knight Press
Pingback: Amazon Link is Now Working for Panasonic Lumix LX5 Book | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P900 Book Cover Problem | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P900 Book Cover Problem | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P900 Book Cover Problem | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX10 and Yongnuo Flash Transmitter | White Knight Press
Were those pictures taken at max zoom ? There is no info on that at all, why not !
I’m not sure which pictures you’re asking about. If you’re talking about the images at the Sample Photos page, yes, the two bird photos and the photo of the moon were taken at the 2000mm maximum optical focal length of the P900’s lens.
Were those pictures taken at max zoom ? There is no info on that at all, why not !
I’m not sure which pictures you’re asking about. If you’re talking about the images at the Sample Photos page, yes, the two bird photos and the photo of the moon were taken at the 2000mm maximum optical focal length of the P900’s lens.
Were those pictures taken at max zoom ? There is no info on that at all, why not !
I’m not sure which pictures you’re asking about. If you’re talking about the images at the Sample Photos page, yes, the two bird photos and the photo of the moon were taken at the 2000mm maximum optical focal length of the P900’s lens.
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P900 Book in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P900 Book in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P900 Book in Paperback | White Knight Press
I can’t find anything in the LX100 book (Kindle edition) that explains this. Maybe I missed it.
In AF mode, while zooming with the zoom lever the phrase “1.6-Infinity” (actually the symbol, not the word) appears above the on-screen focal length scale on the LCD or EVF. At first I thought it might be telling me something about the in-focus distance range. That is, everything from 1.6 ft to infinity will be in focus, based on the focus point, aperture, and focal length. But it says “1.6 – infinity” regardless of where I zoom the focal length, or set the aperture, or what I focused on. It never changes to show any other range. In AF-Macro mode the first number does change slightly as I zoom, but the 2nd number is always infinity.
What is the purpose of this on-screen indicator and how can it be used to advantage? Thanks.
That scale shows the focusing range of the camera according to the setting of the focus switch. In AF mode, the range is always 1.6 foot to infinity, regardless of the zoom range. In AF Macro mode, the minimum focus range changes with the zoom amount. In my opinion, the only value of this scale is to tell you the minimum focusing distance, so you will know the closest distance you can focus on, given the current setting of the focus switch and the amount of zoom that is being used.
Thanks Alex.
please advise me when you have written your updates for the Sony RX100 IV
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P900 Superzoom Digital Camera – Press Release Rocket
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P900 Superzoom Digital Camera – Press Release Rocket
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P900 Superzoom Digital Camera – Press Release Rocket
have been trying to order this book for a week at barnes and noble, their computer is not working, can I order this book from you or where would you suggest that I can order this?
Hello — The book should be available now from Barnes & Noble’s online site at bn.com. The only other place I’m sure it’s available now is Amazon.com. It will be available from other online sites in coming days and weeks, but not in bookstores. I don’t have any copies on hand to sell.
nice
have been trying to order this book for a week at barnes and noble, their computer is not working, can I order this book from you or where would you suggest that I can order this?
Hello — The book should be available now from Barnes & Noble’s online site at bn.com. The only other place I’m sure it’s available now is Amazon.com. It will be available from other online sites in coming days and weeks, but not in bookstores. I don’t have any copies on hand to sell.
have been trying to order this book for a week at barnes and noble, their computer is not working, can I order this book from you or where would you suggest that I can order this?
Hello — The book should be available now from Barnes & Noble’s online site at bn.com. The only other place I’m sure it’s available now is Amazon.com. It will be available from other online sites in coming days and weeks, but not in bookstores. I don’t have any copies on hand to sell.
I bought Alexander White’s 2014 excellent book “Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 III”. However, I’ve bought the just-released RX100 IV – the model four. There are few differences, but what exactly what are they, and what is the best way to take advantage of them? Any advice and suggestions would be appreciated! thank you, bob
Thank you very much, Alex, for the suggestions about where I might find some additional information. After you’ve had time to understand the model four of the RX100 will that information be available to me in any way other than purchasing another book? Might it be available somewhere online? Thanks again, Bob
Thanks much, Alex. That’s generous of you and I appreciate it! bob
Alex
Do you have any plans to put out Photographer’s Guide to the Sony Dsc-Rx100 IV
If so what would be your guestimate for a release date.
Thanks!
Jeff
Hi, Jeff — Yes, I have just started working with the RX100 IV. I hope to have the book done by sometime in September or possibly October.
Having owned the LX100 for a while before giving it as a gift to my father, I can assure you there are tonal changes between that and my Typ 109 particularly and noticeably around orange tones (also affecting skin tones) where I’d suggest the LX100 produces more accurate colours even though I still prefer the tones from the 109 (after dealing with the orange channel in photoshop). The Leica white balance also leans towards the warmer side (although this is not necessarily a ‘colour processing’ issue per se.
Thanks. That’s useful information to have.
How do u come to know what is the focal length, i mean where should i set it
You use the zoom lever to set the focal length, according to the distance from your subject and the angle of view you are interested in. If the main subject is far away, you may want to zoom the lens in so the subject will be magnified enough to see it clearly. If you want to have a wide view of a room or a landscape, you will need to zoom the lens back out to its wide-angle position.
Hi Alex, I just received my RX100IV and am aware that your book on the RX100IV won’t available for a few more months. I was wondering whether it would beneficial for me to purchase your RX100 III book since much of features on both models are suppose to be similar? Thanks, Ray
Hi, Bob. I don’t have a formal program for upgrades from one version of the book to another, but if you send me a message after the new book is available, I will work out some sort of discount for you and for anyone else who has purchased the RX100 III book while waiting for the RX100 IV book to come out.
Hello, Bob — I just received my new RX100 IV camera the other day and have not yet a chance to start reviewing its operation in detail. My understanding is that the main differences are in the video features, including 4K video and super slow-motion video. There also is a capability for very fast shutter speeds using an electronic shutter. I will be working with these features over the next several weeks in order to write my new book for this camera, which I hope to publish by September or October. In the meantime, you might want to check the Sony Cyber-shot Talk Forum at dpreview.com for tips and advice about the best use of these and any other new features.
— Alex White
White Knight Press
Okay, I have added you to the list.
Okay — thanks very much for the suggestion!
Alex,
Do you plan to publish a manual for the Sony FDR AX33 4K camcorder?
No, I have only been doing books for compact still cameras, although of course they all have video features nowadays. But I don’t plan to do any books for camcorders at this point.
Pleased to learn that the book on the RX100M4 is forthcoming. Just bought the camera and I am eager to learn more about of this complex piece of kit. I own the III book in electronic form which is very helpful, but of course doesn’t cover all the intricacies of the IV.
Thanks. I am working steadily on the new book — the RX100 IV does need quite a bit of new discussion!
H — Sure, I have added you to the list. I’ll let you know when the book is available.
Could you please notify me once the book is available? Thanks
Sure — I have added you to the list.
I like your guides so much that I bought the one for the RX100 III to help me with my IV. Thats helpful and will do until your guide to the IV comes out. But I’m eager to make the switch because, as you say, there is much different about the IV. So, September? I hope.
Thanks for your efforts on these books.
Dean Jamison
Yes, I’m in the final editing stage for the book now, and I’m still shooting for September. I’ll let you know when it is available.
Hi, can you add me to the list for the Sony RX100 IV please?
Pingback: 6 Authors of Mirrorless Camera Manuals Whose Books You’ll Actually Enjoy Reading - MirrorLessons - The Best Mirrorless Camera Reviews
I’m sure you know what question is coming…… Are you doing a book for the RX100 m4 ?? Because I’m not buying that camera until you do! I love your books!!!!!! Thank you so much for all your help.
Hello — Thanks for your comment! Yes, I am working on that book and I hope to have it done by September, though it could slip into October. I’ll put you on the list to be notified when it’s available.
Please inform me when your RX100 m4 book comes out – Thanks.
I will do that; I have added you to the list to be notified.
Alex, I just send a message asking the same thing. (before I saw this post). If I purchased the electronic III version would there be that much difference between the III and the IV – operationally?
Hello, David — There are many areas in which the 2 cameras operate the same way, but there are significant differences also. For example, the RX100 IV has a different range of shutter speeds and it has some differences in how it handles ISO. Also, of course, there are significant differences in the video features. So, the RX100 III book would be quite helpful, but there would be several areas in which the existing book would seem confusing.
Hi Alex, unfortunately the table is broken I can’t see the list. it would be interesting to have a look at it
Okay, thanks for pointing that out. I think it is fixed now.
Alex, I too am buying the IV (leaving for France and can’t wait for the IV book to come out). Thanks very much for your offer to work something out – I will definitely buy the III book now.
Regards,
Hi, David — Okay, that sounds good. If you will send me a reminder after the RX100 IV book is available, that will help. Thanks.
Definitely will do!
Thanks!
Hello
can this same or similar effect be done on the Coolpix L850 ? If so, could I get some information on how to do that? I need to shoot some photos with a blurred background. Thank you so much.
Hello — I couldn’t find any information on the Coolpix L850, so I’ll answer for the L840. I haven’t worked with that model, but I understand that it does not have shooting modes such as Aperture Priority or Manual, which you would use in order to set a wide aperture to blur the background. What you can do, though, is use a fairly long focal length with the zoom lens, such as 400mm or higher, and get as close to the foreground subject as possible, with the background fairly far in the distance beyond the foreground subject. With that arrangement, the background should be blurred to a fairly good extent. To increase the blurring effect, use a longer focal length. Also, if you can control the lighting, try to have fairly dim lighting so the camera will use a wider aperture.
Pingback: Guide to Sony RX100 IV Available Now | White Knight Press
Just ordered it and I am very pleased with the book, which allows me to get a grip on the intricacies of this complex camera. Will give more feedback once I have covered it all!
Pingback: Problem in Ordering Sony RX100 IV Book | White Knight Press
Thousands of us are waiting for your book on Sony RX10 II. This is a game changer for small business people, Photographer/ Videophiles & hobbyists alike.
I should be starting work on that book in early October, after a brief delay following the RX100 IV book. I’ll post updates as the book progresses. Thanks.
Not v important but I noted in your new book on the Sony RX 100 iv – the LCD is not labeled on the Back of Camera photo in Chapter 2.
Thanks for pointing this out. It really helps to get comments like this so I can improve my books.
very helpful. thanks!
Pingback: Sony RX100 IV Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Any chance you will be writing about the X-PRO2 when it finally comes out?
No, I wish I could cover more camera models, but I am already committed to others, and I don’t expect to be able to get to that one.
A long shot I suspect, but are you thinking of writing a book about the Leica Q, perchance?
Hello — I would love to write about the Leica Q, but I’m not going to be able to work that camera into my schedule, unfortunately.
Ah I feared as much. Shame, you helped me navigate around my last four Leica D-Lux’s, I will have to fly solo with my Q!
Is this book out?
Amazon Uk cant get it till mid November??
Hello — Yes, the book is available now. If you look at the third-party sellers at amazon.co.uk, you will see that several of them state that they can deliver the book within a few days after the order is placed. It’s also likely that Amazon itself is exaggerating the time for delivery, but you probably will do better if you order it from one of the third-party sellers; just click on the link for “6 New from 17.62” and find a seller with a quick delivery time.
Hi, I bought your Sony RX100iv book and I also bought the RX10 book because I bought the RX10ii book and that’s not out yet. I also have your RX100ii book and I loved that.
Can you answer a question or include this information when you publish the RX10ii book?
I’m using the slow motion 960FPS and there’s a 1:27 delay while the buffer writes to the card. I’m using a 90MBS card. But I tried some of the 40MBS cards and it was the same. I can’t find out if I buy a 280MB/s card if it will make any difference and cut down the 1:27 wait time. Sony has no info and slow mo is why I bought the camera. I works great. Good purchase. Now if Sony will supply info, that will be great.
Also you may or may not know that the smart remote PC app says it doesn’t work with HFR, but it works fine and I called Sony and asked abut the RM-VPR1 remote and they checked with a supervisor and said it won’t work with HFR. And it works perfectly too. Just good info. Love your books.
Hi, Drew — I don’t have a definitive answer to your question, but my guess is that the speed of the card would not make much difference, if any, in the speed of processing of an HFR sequence. I use a very fast card, and it still takes a long time. I don’t know the exact time, but it may well be about 1:27, as it is for you. I’ll see if there’s any more information out there, but I’m not sure there is. Also, thanks for the information about the remote app and the remote device working with HFR.
— Alex
Hi Alex, I just received the VCT-VPR1 Sony remote tripod and its remote also works perfectly with the RX10ii. I also found a tutorial on extending the cable (soldering 8 wires) and I’m doing that now so I’ll have a 20′ cable. So you know, the start and stop Video recording works perfectly. But you still need to hit the center button first on the camera. But with the remote the camera is much more useful for a single photographer. I’ve been popping water balloons, lighting matches and capturing hummingbirds, seagulls and pigeons. Now I’m off to hammer on watermelons, light bulbs and more. Do let me know if there’s any way to cut down the 1:27 wait between shots. It’s the only problem I have with the camera.
Hi, Drew — Sounds like you’re taking full advantage of the slow-motion feature — that’s great! If I dig up any information about the wait time I’ll let you know, though I still suspect that is just the required processing time.
— Alex
yes true…
apple pay only
J AIMERAI CE LIVRE EN FRANCAIS
MERCI
Je regrette, mais ce livre est disponible seulement en anglais.
hi Alex, i see you can take great pics , i always thought if i need to take such pics i have to use DSLR but now i know its possible from point n shoot cameras too, but that also makes me wonder in what respect we can give DSLR more advantage ?
If you can be a bit more specific with your question, I’ll respond if I can. I’m not sure I will have a great answer, because I work mostly with point-and-shoot cameras and am not that familiar with the larger models.
Mr. White, I could not find the answer in your Sony RX 100 IV, so here goes. I printed several photos at public place, and days later when I tried to show someone the same images on the camera, this is what appeared: ? Unable to Display.
Would you know what happened and is it possible to bring those same pictures back to the camera?
Thank you, Laurence
Hello, Laurence – I believe this happens when images from the card have been downloaded to a computer, or possibly, as in your case, printed. You might want to try using the Recover Image DB option on screen 5 of the Setup menu; it might help. Also, I found the following information through a search for “unable to display” online:
“It may be possible to recover deleted pictures or data from your SD card by using the Memory Card File Rescue 3D software. This software is available as a free download online in the Software & Drivers section. [Look for this at esupport.sony.com]
If the Memory Card File Rescue is unable to recover your files, then the SD card may need to be sent to a professional data recovery service company, like Sony Media Services or DriveSavers Data Recovery. For more information and pricing, visit the Sony Media Services Web site at http://www.sonymediaservices.com/, or the DriveSavers Data Recovery Web site at http://www.drivesaversdatarecovery.com.
NOTE: Sony is not responsible for any data loss or any cost incurred from the recovery of data.”
I hope some of this information helps with the issue.
— Alex White, White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX10 II Book Now in Ebook Versions | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX10 II Book Now in Ebook Versions | White Knight Press
Will the book be available in Apple iBooks Store?
Yes, as a matter of fact it just now became available there. Here is a link: https://itunes.apple.com/us/book/photographers-guide-to-sony/id1061122628?ls=1&mt=11
Thankls Alex! Just bought it. 🙂
Just full love this camera , love back and white and like wild life with it, how get more photos wild quicker
Pingback: Sony RX10 II Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
I have purchased rx100 2 guide from Google play yesterday. Not able to read on offline mode.
I will send you a reply by email.
How do you know / set what the ISO settings are and set Matrix metering method when using Birdwatching scene mode? All I see is shutter speed and aperture
The Birdwatching setting is a setting in Scene mode, in which the camera controls most of the settings automatically. You cannot adjust settings like ISO and metering method in Scene mode. You would have to switch to a shooting mode like Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual if you want to control more settings. If you want to know what ISO setting the camera is using, you can take a picture and then check the ISO setting for that image in playback mode.
Thanks for the prompt response Alex. Ah, just taken a photo, switched to playback and pressed the Display button and sure enough it shows the ISO at 800. I thought you were showing the settings you had ‘chosen’ but I guess as you are in a scene mode you are telling us what the camera selected, so I guess you have zoomed and the camera did the rest? Did you ascertain the focal length as it was at maximum zoom and you know this is 1440, as all I see is 800mm until it gets to telephoto marker then nothing? The results I get in this mode at max zoom don’t seem as good as yours but lighting conditions may have been better; mine are hand held but I’m not sure if they would improve as they are consistent
To tell what focal length was used, if the maximum focal length was used I would know that the value was 1440mm. Another way I can tell the focal length is by looking at the metadata in the software I use for managing my images. I generally use Adobe Bridge, though I sometimes use the Nikon software also.
That’s interesting, I didn’t realise this type of information was held in the JPG but I’ve just looked at the properties and sure enough it’s there – brilliant! Many thanks
Your book on the Nikon P900 is fantastic.
Please do one similar on the Canon T5i/700D as I have seen nothing on the internet that compares.
Thanks for your comment! I appreciate receiving the suggestion. So far I have only written books for compact cameras with fixed lenses, but someday I might try doing books for DSLRs like the Canon T5i. I will keep your suggestion in mind for future plans.
This is an excellent guide. It is a must for gaining control of the Leica D-Lux 109.
The Leica manual accompaning this camera was unuseable …… also their pdf file was equally difficult. Your guide made the difference between keeping the camera or returning it to Leica.
Now I really enjoy using this amazing little camera.
Thank You ….. BC
Thanks for your comment! I’m glad you’re enjoying this terrific camera.
Hi Sir,i already but the guide this night..But where is guide..i check my email still empty
Hello — I will send you a reply by e-mail.
Hi Sir,i already but the guide this night..But where is guide..i check my email still empty
Hello — I will send you a reply by e-mail.
I already make a payment.When i will get the guide??
Please..where is my guide for nikon p610..
I already make a payment.When i will get the guide??
Please..where is my guide for nikon p610..
Need a guide for Panasonic LUMIX DMC-GX7C
Hello — I don’t have a book for that model at present and I don’t have a plan for one, but I will consider that suggestion for the future. Thanks for your comment!
for someone who wants video but not huge on video do you feel the rx10ii is worth the extra cost over the mark 1 rx10? The camera will be used for travel disney and alaska. can’t wait to order the book on whichever camera i go with.
Hello — No, I would say the original RX10 is fine for ordinary video use; the RX10 II has refinements that put it into the level of semi-professional or professional video work, which probably would be overkill for general travel video.
Do you feel the photo is that much better in the II? I’m also debating the a6000 but really do not want to carry a bunch of lens around. But if the quality is night and day I may consider it.
No, I think the RX10 I is a great camera. The RX10 II has some good new features, but not ones that everyone needs or would use. I think for everyday use I would go with the RX10 I, assuming the price differential is fairly large.
I receive nothing so far??How it take to send?
Hello — I have sent you a couple of email messages over the past few days with a link to the book files. I hope you have received your book by now. If not, let me know and I will try to find another to help. Thanks.
I receive nothing so far??How it take to send?
Hello — I have sent you a couple of email messages over the past few days with a link to the book files. I hope you have received your book by now. If not, let me know and I will try to find another to help. Thanks.
I note your comment about cameras with fixed lenses. If you do branch into system cameras, is there any chance of a guide to the Olympus EM-10 (mark II)?
Thanks for asking. I will certainly make a note of that model for future reference, though the chances are not great in the near future.
In your excellent Photographer’s Guide to the Sony DSC RX10 II you say “If you do choose JPEG, I strongly recommend that you choose the Large size and Extra Fine quality ….” Choosing a size is not hard to understand, but choosing a quality value is a mystery. Would you please discuss further how a user can decide between using the Quality values of Standard, Fine, and Extra Fine. I have experienced that an image file may be about 5 MB at the Fine quality setting and about 10 MB at the Extra Fine quality setting. When I view images that were made at these two settings, I cannot tell the difference between the two images. I would like to better understand what I will be gaining by saving Extra Fine quality image files at double the size of Fine quality image files.
It really depends on how you will use the image. If you know that you will only be viewing it online or making a small print, you can choose Fine or even Standard. The difference from the Quality setting is likely to be apparent only when making a larger print or cropping the image and enlarging a portion of it. You will start seeing “compression artifacts” as a compressed image is enlarged to increasing sizes. I recommend using the highest quality, in case you may need to make a larger print or crop the image at some point. But, as I said above, if you are certain you only need small snapshots or images for viewing on a computer or other electronic device, you could use a lower Quality setting to save on file size and storage space.
When will you be coming out with a book for the Panasonic DMC-DX8?
Hi — I don’t have any plans for that model as of now, but I will make a note of your interest for future reference. Thanks.
Do you even sell this book on pdf?! Waiting for replay on mail…
Do you even sell this book on pdf?! Waiting for replay on mail…
Never mind, i bought it on google play. Thanks
Never mind, i bought it on google play. Thanks
I feel very sorry i bought this camera without a user manual. It seems nikon has taken us for mugs
I feel very sorry i bought this camera without a user manual. It seems nikon has taken us for mugs
I feel very sorry i bought this camera without a user manual. It seems nikon has taken us for mugs
I recently bought a Sony RX100iv and just discovered that it does hi speed video! Which SD card do you recommend? And does your RX100 iv cover video issues for the beginner ??
I have had good experiences with the SanDisk 256 GB Extreme 80MB/s SDXC card, rated in UHS Speed Class 3. Another good card is the SanDisk Extreme PRO 64 GB card, rated in UHS Speed Class 1, if you don’t need to record with the 100 Mbps setting. Yes, I believe my book has the information a beginner needs for using the camera for video recording, in Chapter 8.
Hi Alex,
Are there any plans on releasing a book about the Panasonic DMC-GX8?
No plans at present, but I appreciate getting the question, which helps me with planning for possible future titles.
Thanks Alex.
Would be nice if you would do a book or multiple books on the Panasonic MFT camras and lenses. It’s great gear and so much more compact than a FF or APS-C setup.
Had a GF1 and G10 in the beginning when their lens selection was less extenstive but with the lenses they got now I couldn’t resist getting me a GX-8.
I’m still keeping my RX10 II and P900 though, along with your books! 🙂
Pingback: Ebook for Sony RX1R II Camera Available | White Knight Press
Pingback: Ebook for Sony RX1R II Camera Available | White Knight Press
You can download from Nikon Free
You can download the Nikon User’s Guide for free, but this book is a different item. It is a guide that explains the various features and controls of the camera, along with hundreds of illustrations. You may do fine with just the official user’s guide, but some people prefer a book with more detailed explanations of how particular menu options and controls are used.
This is exactly what I have been looking for! The Nikon User Guide is a free download but not very helpful.
Hello — No, I’m sorry, but the books listed at this site are available only in English.
Is there any spanish version of this book?
Im looking for a Spanish version of this book
You can download from Nikon Free
You can download the Nikon User’s Guide for free, but this book is a different item. It is a guide that explains the various features and controls of the camera, along with hundreds of illustrations. You may do fine with just the official user’s guide, but some people prefer a book with more detailed explanations of how particular menu options and controls are used.
This is exactly what I have been looking for! The Nikon User Guide is a free download but not very helpful.
Hello — No, I’m sorry, but the books listed at this site are available only in English.
Is there any spanish version of this book?
Im looking for a Spanish version of this book
You can download from Nikon Free
You can download the Nikon User’s Guide for free, but this book is a different item. It is a guide that explains the various features and controls of the camera, along with hundreds of illustrations. You may do fine with just the official user’s guide, but some people prefer a book with more detailed explanations of how particular menu options and controls are used.
This is exactly what I have been looking for! The Nikon User Guide is a free download but not very helpful.
Hello — No, I’m sorry, but the books listed at this site are available only in English.
Is there any spanish version of this book?
Im looking for a Spanish version of this book
I bought the paper only edition a while ago. How may I request the full-color PDF version of the book which is supposed to be free of charge when you get the paper edition?
Hello — Thanks for purchasing the RX100 II book. I have sent you an email message about getting the PDF version.
Hi Alex … I purchased your book for the Rx100m3 & it’s really useful … Thank You !!
I’m thinking of purchasing the Rx1r II but have been led to believe it has NO IMAGE STABILIZATION. Could you kindly clarify this ?? … Digital camera’s have had Image Stabilization since close to 15 years now. What exactly were Sony thinking ??
Would love to hear your views …
Warm Regards … Prakash.
Hello, Prakash — Actually, the RX1R II does have stabilization for video, but not for still images. I don’t know much about Sony’s rationale for that decision, but I guess it is partly because the camera has a fixed, wide-angle lens and performs well at high ISO settings, so stabilization is not as necessary as it would be with longer focal lengths and slower shutter speeds. It’s a great camera, and I don’t think too many people have been upset by the lack of that feature.
— Alex
Any plans for a book on the RX10 III? I purchased your RX10 I book when I purchased that camera. I skipped the Mark II version, but will be purchasing the Mark III version of the camera.
Yes, I plan to work on a book for the RX10 III as soon as I can get that camera. I have read that production of that model is delayed because of the recent earthquakes in Japan, but as soon as possible I will work on that book.
Mine is shipping today from B&H, and they are showing the camera in stock (today, 5/4/16 is the official release date). I pre-ordered mine last week as I was concerned that once the initial inventory was sold (presumably manufactured before the earthquake) there might be production problems with subsequent production. Then again, it’s possible that this model hasn’t been affected at all by the earthquake. Nikon’s DL series have been delayed, presumably due to the earthquake.
Oh, okay — thanks for pointing that out. I thought I was going to have to wait several months. I am still working on another book right now, so I won’t be starting on the Sony RX10 III for at least a month or so. I will post updates at the site as I make progress.
As I understand it, the M3 version is essentially identical to the M2, with the primary, if not sole difference being the lens. If this is in fact true, then it seems it might make sense to purchase the PDF version of the M2 book. This would for the most part, bring me up to speed with the changes from my M1 camera and book, and for $10, would provide most of the information on changes between the M1 and M3 until the M3 paperback book is published. Thoughts?
I was eagerly awaiting the Nikon DL24-500 biut with the earthquake and production issues, I understand it won’t be available until November, 2016! (To late for my upcoming Safari). The Panasonic FZ1000 has amazing reviews, but not enough reach. So despite the cost and complaints about the obscure menu options, I ordered the brand new Sony RX10-iii. I have read good things about your guide to the RX10-ii- do you know if it will still be useful for the new model? Any plans for an update? I have little time to practice and I am a rank amateur photographer:) Thank you!
I will be doing a book for the RX10 III, but not for a few more months. I don’t have the camera yet, and probably won’t get it until July. In the meantime, I believe the RX10 II book would be fairly helpful, although there would be some areas of difference. I will send you a further reply by email.
Because of your experience, I would be grateful to learn: If price is no object, which of the compacts (“point and shoots”) would you buy in today’s market if you can only have one?
That’s a very hard question to give a good answer to. For one thing, I have only worked directly with a few models. Also, it depends on what type(s) of photography you are most interested in. But, to give an answer, if price is no object and you can manage with a fixed focal length 35mm lens, the Sony RX1R II, with its full-frame sensor, is hard to beat. For a smaller sensor model that is much less expensive, I would recommend the Sony RX100 IV. The Panasonic LX100 is another great small camera.
I have the RX1. Does this book apply tp this camera also?
I have the RX1. Does this book apply tp this camera also?
I have the Sony RX1 which I bought several years ago. Does your manual Manual for the RX1 R 11 also apply to this earlier model.
No, that book was written specifically for the RX1R II. I never used the RX1 model, but I understand there are fairly considerable differences between the models, and the recent book probably would not be as helpful as you would want or need.
I anxiously await your manual for the sony rx10 m3. I have your manual for rx 100 and hope this new one will be available soon. Thank you.
I am finishing up another book now, and I hope to start on the Sony RX10 III book fairly soon. I should have it completed by sometime in August or September if all goes well. I will post updates about the progress at this site. Thanks for asking!
when do you plan to publish the DSC-RX10 lll
I hope to have that book done by the end of July, though it could slip into August.
Hi Alex, I just received my shiny new RX10M3. Is there any chance I could purchase the RX10M2 pdf and get a reduced price on the forthcoming RX10M3 pdf?
I have sent you a reply by email.
Hi Alex. I have the same questions as several of your other potential book buyers of your upcoming DSC-RX10 lll book. My camera arrived two weeks ago and takes amazing photos, however, as an old photographer with no time to waste i need a detailed written approach to accessing the buried features of the RX10 III. Will you offer an upgrade or discount if we purchase your RX 10 II Kindle E-book?? Thanks in advance, Perry.
Hi, Perry — I have sent you a reply by email.
— Alex
Pingback: Panasonic ZS100/TZ100 Book Available | White Knight Press
Will this be helpful for learning about the RX1r?
I never worked with the RX1R, but my understanding is that the differences between the two cameras are significant enough that the new book would probably not be all that helpful for the older camera. There would be some helpful parts, but overall I think it would be frustrating to try to use this book for the original camera model.
I cut my teeth on your wonderful Sony RX100II book a few years ago. It really helped get me started.
My son just got me a fantastic Fuji X70 and I’m using your Fuji X100S book at present to get by.
Any plans to do a book specifically for the X70?
Thank You.
Hello — Not at this time. I need to do books on Sony and Nikon models next, and I probably won’t be able to manage any others in the near future.
Hi Alex, It seems like I’m another one that has just purchased the rx10 iii and am desperate to learn how to use this amazing camera. So I’m asking the same question about whether it’s possible to buy the rx10 ii pdf/ ebook and get a discounted upgrade to your new rx10 iii pdf/ ebook.
Cheers, Mick C
Hi, Mick — I will send you a reply by email.
— Alex
Same as others. Just purchased rx10 III, and you Kindle version of rx10 II. Any discount on the upgraded version of your book would be greatly appreciated.
Thank You Very Much.
Bob Wilber
Hi, Bob — I will reply in an email message.
— Alex
Alex – How do I go about getting a copy, now that it’s out?
Hi, Ken — Thanks very much for your comment! I have added you to the list to be notified when the book is available. I will post a notice here at this site, also.
— Alex
Hi: I had purchased the RX10 book you’d written for the original model, and am waiting for the RX10 III camera I just bought from Amazon. I noticed that you had updated the book for the RX10 II. I have two questions. Are you planning to come out with a version for the RX10 III? If not, would you recommend that I buy the RX10 II book? I would do so if the II is fairly different from the original model, but is fairly similar to the III (if that makes sense!)
Yes, I am currently working on a book for the RX10 III camera. I hope to have it published sometime in July. The RX10 II camera is fairly different from the first model and more similar to the third one, so the RX10 II book would be quite helpful for the RX10 III, but there are enough differences that it is probably worth waiting a few weeks for the new book.
Thanks, Alex. I look forward to adding to my collection of your books. I’ll check back.
Hi, Alex,
Any idea when your guidebook for the new Sony RX10 iii wil be out?
In the meantime, do you think your guidebook on the RX10ii would be helpful? Headed to Scotland in a few weeks and would really like to get more comfortable with the new camera.
Thanks. Will be buying the new book also whenever it comes out.
I am working steadily on the RX10 III book, and am hoping to have it out in the second half of July. I do think the RX10 II book would be fairly helpful for the new camera model. There are of course several differences, such as the lack of an ND filter, the longer lens, and some new options, such as Zoom Assist and Focus Hold, but overall the similarities far outweigh the differences.
Me too! I have the wonderful RX10 lll and am finding your book on the RX10 ll really helpful and look forward, with many others, to your next book on the lll – are you able to let us know immediately it is available please.
Kind regards from the UK – and keep writing!
Ken
Hello, Bob — I have sent you a reply by email. Thanks.
— Alex
Very helpful guide but do you have update for version 2 hardware update?
Mike
Yes — Here is a link to the information page for that book. Let me know if you have further questions. Thanks.
Pingback: Sony RX10 III Book Available as Ebook | White Knight Press
Yay!! Looking forward to the paperback, David
Thanks but I didn’t make myself very clear, I have your guide on rx10 but I have updated software to version 2 and wondered if you have an update for the video codec they have included and how best to use it, that is for the original rx10 but with updated software ?
I did have a blog post about the update; here is a link to that post. That is the only update I have posted, apart from publishing new, updated books for the RX10 II and RX10 III cameras themselves.
When will A Photographer’s Guide to the Sony RX10 iii be available in book form (not downloadable).
The paperback version should be available at Amazon.com by July 20 or 21. I will post an announcement at this site when it is published.
Pingback: Sony RX10 III Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Guide Book for Sony DSC-RX10 III Digital Camera - Press Release Rocket
Thanks for your most useful book on the Sony DSC-RX10 III. Is there any way to assign “live view” to one of the Control or other programmable buttons?
I’m assuming you are talking about the Live View Display option on screen 3 of the Custom menu. No, for some reason Sony did not include that menu option as one of those that can be assigned to the Function menu or to one of the programmable control buttons.
‘morning Alex
Thanks for your excellent ebook on the RX10Mk3- I go to it frequently while finding my way with the kit.
A point of interest, perhaps! I have a need to use Lock-on AF when photographing aircraft, the instructions state ‘This option is available for selection only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF (ie: C) with the focus switch.’
Well, I attempted to set this up many times over several days without success, I have been switching the camera on then selecting C – eventually I found that the Focus switch needed to be at C BEFORE switching on the camera – doesn’t work if you switch to C AFTER switching on. Or have I got this all wrong?
Best regards
Ken
Hello, Ken — I just tried this with my RX10 III camera, and there was no problem activating Lock-On AF when I moved the focus switch to the C position after turning on the camera. I have never had a problem in that regard. Maybe there was some other setting that conflicted with what you were trying to do, but without more information I can’t think of anything that would cause that problem.
Thanks for your response Alex – I did suspect that there may be a conflicting setting causing my problem – I’ll investigate it further and keep you posted, if you do not mind.
Regards
Ken
Hi, Ken — Okay, sure, I would be interesting in finding out how it turns out.
— Alex
Alex – I have worked out where I have been going wrong – I have been confused between ‘Lock-on AF: Center’ and ‘Center Lock-on AF’ and trying to combine them – and then I came to P91: Center Lock-on AF, is a separate menu option. It is not available when the Lock-on AF option has been selected for Focus Area.p91. It’s been interesting trying to resolve the problem – for me, photographing relatively slow WW2 aircraft, it would seem that ‘Lock-on AF: centre’ would work well. Would you agree?
Thank you for your patience.
Best regards
Ken
Hello, Ken — I think that Lock-on AF: Center is probably a good option. I think the answer also may depend on the distance at which you are photographing the planes. If they are sufficiently far away that you can focus at infinity, you could do that, and switch the camera to manual focus to lock focus at that distance. But, if the focus distance is variable or will be changing during the flight, Lock-on AF Center should work well.
Good point Alex – I’ll check it out next weekend when I will be visiting Old Warden airfield where the Shuttleworth Collection of elderly aircraft is based.
Best regards
Ken
Very nice tutorial
Thanks!
Mr WHITE bonjour,
I have a question concerning the setting of the Bracketing on the Sony RX10 III. In your book page 52 Continuous Exposure Bracketing you write “When you highlight this option you will see a horizontal triangle…”
I cannot highlight the bracketing icons of the differentsv options. Please how the bracketing icon must be highlighted ?
Thank you for your help.
Regards
Claude Guillemin
It sounds to me as if you have an inconsistent setting in place. For example, you cannot use exposure bracketing in Intelligent Auto mode, Scene mode, or Sweep Panorama mode, and you cannot use exposure bracketing if Multi Frame Noise Reduction is set for ISO, or if the Auto HDR setting is turned on. Check those settings, and see if that helps.
Dslr pic
I have purchased a copy of this book and have found to be very helpful. However I have a problem with changing the date and time. Your book suggest that a setting for this can be found in the setup menu 4. On my RX10 iii the fourth panel of the setup menu does not have the date/time option that is shown in the book. Can this be found somewhere else in the menu system?
On my RX10 III, the version sold for the United States market, Date/Time Setup is on screen 4 of the Setup menu, which is the menu marked by the toolbox icon, as shown here:
If you have a camera that was sold for a different part of the world, it’s possible that the menu items are in different locations, but I would not know exactly where to tell you to find it. It should not be hard to locate this menu option on another panel of the Setup menu.
Thanks for your quick response. One of the options I tried was having the dial on M and I double checked the shutter setting, which was on Auto. I also tried it with the shutter set to Mechanical and Electronic to see if that would change anything. So I must have a different setting that’s causing the Bulb to not appear. I’m only on Chapter 4 so haven’t finished setting the camera up, but wi try your suggestion. Thanks again.
Another possibility is that Drive Mode is set to continuous shooting or another setting other than single shooting. You can press the Left button and then make sure the top option on the Drive Mode menu, for single shooting, is selected.
Problem solved. I called Sony, and it turns out that the bulb setting doesn’t show up when you’re in auto ISO. I usually set my camera at ISO 100 for nature photography, but I had it in auto ISO. Once I put it into ISO 100, the bulb setting showed up. Thanks again for your suggestions has everything helps in my learning how to use this new camera.
Okay, I’m glad you got it figured out. Thanks for letting me know.
Thanks. I just didn’t look far enough. I assumed the cog icon was the settings menu. I see now the toolbox icon is the place. Makes sense. I should have read your book more closely. Of course, it was right there.
Okay, good, I’m glad that cleared it up for you. The Sony menus can be quite confusing!
Mr White,
Thanks for your helpfull book! Two questions:
1. In your book you say:
When the lens is zoomed in to the range of Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom and autofocus is in use, the Focus Area menu option is disabled and the camera uses a broad focus frame, which is represented by a dotted area like that seen in Figure 7-34.
Does that mean that the camere in Clear Image Zoom focusses on the whole scene that is visible? And not for exemple on the center? So that it is impossible to focus on the little bird in the center?
2. Is MF-assist and Focus Magnifier available after choosing Clear Image Zoom?
Regards,
Henk van de Bovenkamp
Mr Whtie,
Thanks for your book. Two questions remain for me:
1. In your book you say: When the lens is zoomed in to the range of Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom and autofocus is in use, the Focus Area menu option is disabled and the camera uses a broad focus frame, which is represented by a dotted area like that seen in Figure 7-34.
Does that mean that it is impossible to focus on the bird in the center because the camera focusses on the whole visible scene?
2. Is MF-assist and/or Focus Magnifier available when using Clear Image Zoom
Hello — Thanks for your comment. I’ll try to answer both questions:
1. Yes, when the lens is actually zoomed into the range beyond optical zoom, the camera will not use the Focus Area setting, but will use the entire frame as outlined within the dotted line, instead. The camera may still focus on a bird in the center of that frame, but you cannot force the camera to focus on the center.
2. Yes, both MF Assist and Focus Magnifier are available when using Clear Image Zoom, as long as other conditions permit their use. For example, naturally, for MF Assist to work, the camera must be set to manual focus using the focus switch.
— Alex White
White Knight Press
Thanks for your reply!
One more afterthought: what about Smart Zoom and Smart Teleconverter (I assume they work the same)? Is choosing the focus area then possible?
Yes, that is correct. When either Smart Zoom or Smart Teleconverter is in use, the camera will use the broad focus frame instead of the Focus Area menu setting.
Thanks for your answers!
I bought your book to discover the possibillities of the RX10 III. Untill now I use the Canon SX60HS, mainly for birdwatching. The big challenge is to make photo’s of birds that are small or far away or hidden in the trees. Although I am pleased with the Canon I hope to improve image quality a lot with the RX10 III.
From what you explained I guess I could be a good choice to choose DMF as focus mode so that I have the possibility to choose (in situations where I want to make a photo of a bird, small of far away):
1. to use optical zoom with the possibility to choose the focus area (perhaps using MF-assist to see for a moment what I am aiming at)
2. to use Clear Image Zoom with the chance that the camera picks the wrong focus area. In that case MF-assist could help to get the right focus (when bird gives me enough time!) when autofocus fails.
What do you think?
The RX10 III provides so many options for focusing that it’s hard to choose one set of options over another; a lot depends on the specific circumstances of the shooting session. Your suggested procedures sound fine. For number one, you could assign Focus Magnifier to a control button and use the S or C setting for autofocus, and press the assigned button when you wanted to magnify the focus area. Also, instead of using Clear Image Zoom, you might consider just using optical zoom, and crop the image to enlarge the area with the bird. Then you could still use the Focus Area settings.
Thanks for your suggestions, I will try them out!
Will there be an update to this book for the RX100 V?
I will be doing a new book for the RX100 V, which I hope to have published by early next year, January if all goes well. I first have to finish another book, and will get to the RX100 V as soon as possible after that. I will post further information at this site as things develop.
Do you have an expected publish date for the new book on the Sony RX100 V?
I hope to have that book published by sometime in January.
I have bought your book on ZS100. A very good supplement to the Operating Instructions from Panasonic.
I would like to seek for your advice on one technical question. Is it possible to adjust exposure compensation when using Manual Exposure Mode with Auto ISO?
Thank you.
Hello — I no longer have this camera, so I can’t test it, but, based on what is written in my book and in the Panasonic user’s guide, my understanding is that exposure compensation is not available when the camera is set to Manual exposure mode.
Please hurry. I just bought the camera (RX-100 MV) and really need your help!
I am working steadily on the book — still hoping to have it ready by sometime in December.
Thank you very much. I have arrived at the same conclusion. This missing feature is very useful. I have been using it most of the time when shooting with my D810. Hope that this feature can be included in the next firmware update of ZS100.
Just received my RX100 V in the mail and very much look forward to your book on the V.
Thanks — I have added you to the list of people to be notified when it comes out.
Can you add me to the list, too?
Yes, sure. You’re on the list. Thanks.
Alex, can you please add me to your list for the Sony DSC RX100 V as well? Thanks!
Sure — I have added you — thanks!
— Alex
Please add me to the list too. Thanks!
I have added you. Thanks.
Pingback: Sony RX100 V Book Now Available | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX100 V Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-color Guide Book for Sony DSC-RX100 V Camera - MONEY® News
Please add me to the notification list for the Nikon B700 guide. Thank you very much!
I have added you to the list. Thanks.
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix B700 Book Available Now | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix B700 Book Available Now | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix B700 Guide in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix B700 Guide in Paperback | White Knight Press
Do you, or will you have a guide for the Sony HX-90 or HX -80 ?
No, I don’t have a guide book for either of those models. I don’t currently have plans for one, but I will make a note of your interest as I plan future books. Thanks.
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Photographer's Guide to the Nikon Coolpix B700 - MONEY® News
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Photographer's Guide to the Nikon Coolpix B700 - MONEY® News
It would be interesting to know if the camera was “IR enabled” by removing the hot mirror in front of the sensor. The s100 is quite hackable with the sensor sitting right below the LCD and the hot mirror held in place only with a soft gasket (no sealant).
My RX100 V battery loses some charge over a period of days – even when not switched on. Also: charge indicator shows 1 bar more charge if switched on for viewing photos in memory than when switched on for shooting. I owned a RX100 II for three years with no such problem. Distressing. Any similar experiences out there?
I haven’t had any problems with mine, but I don’t use it everyday. Maybe someone else will comment here, or you could ask in the Sony Cyber-shot Talk forum at dpreview.com, if you haven’t already tried there.
Hi Alex,
I need to shoot some video with my RX10 M3 for documentation purposes. I would like to imprint the running date and time into the video file. From your book, I see there is a menu setting to do that for still photos, but not for video. Do you know of a way to do this? I have Lightroom CC and Adobe Premier Elements if either of those could be used to add a date/time stamp to the viewable video file. I also have a Nikon D800E that I could use, if that would make a difference.
Russ
Hi, Russ — I am not sure if Premiere Elements can do this; I don’t have that program. I believe Premiere Pro CC can do it, though I have not tried it. You can use the camera’s Time Code options to display the current time while recording, as discussed in Chapter 7, though you would need to take further steps in your editing software to make the time information appear in the finished footage. I did a quick search online and found various discussions of this issue, including mention of some plug-ins and other programs that might be able to do this, but I’m afraid I don’t have experience with the process myself.
Thanks, Alex. I did the same search, and basically had the same results as you. There must be some technical reason it can’t be done in-camera, which is too bad, because it would be the easiest solution for this particular situation.
Alex
I’m having trouble getting from point a to point b…
I could use a flow chart or algorithm
To get from, say, auto setting to ISO
Any suggestions?
TIA. GARY
Thanks — I’m glad you are finding the book to be useful!
Alex
I’m having trouble getting from point a to point b…
I could use a flow chart or algorithm
To get from, say, auto setting to ISO
Any suggestions?
TIA. GARY
Thanks — I’m glad you are finding the book to be useful!
Alex
I’m having trouble getting from point a to point b…
I could use a flow chart or algorithm
To get from, say, auto setting to ISO
Any suggestions?
TIA. GARY
Thanks — I’m glad you are finding the book to be useful!
Pingback: Macro Shots with Sony RX100 III Camera | White Knight Press
Im having problems with HFR mode, when im in HFR i can not focus the camera. I tried all focus modes and nothing works. Did not see a solution to this in the book.
You have to adjust focus before starting the recording, as you probably know. You can choose either continuous AF or manual focus. It’s possible that you have some other setting in place that conflicts with what you are trying to do. You won’t see a focus frame, so it may be hard to tell if focus is being adjusted.
Very happy with the e-book on the RX10M3. Excellent explanations. Two suggestions, if I may, Some examples of MR settings for different situations, e.g. birds in the distance, sunsets etc and the best accessory for me was a little line attached (with an adhesive sticker) to the lens cap. Thank you.
Thanks very much for your comments. I will consider those for future books. I appreciate your taking the time to write.
Hi, I really love your book on the Fuji X10, and it has helped me A LOT to get the most from that camera – thanks ! I am now considering an upgrade to the X100F. Any plans on a book for that? If not, will your book about the older X100 camera be helpful, or will that be too outdated? I hear that the X100F is quite a different camera from the first X100 model. Thanks for your feedback !
Hello — I don’t have plan for a book for the X100F, though I will consider it for the future if there is time. I would say it is not that likely, but possible. From what I understand, my books for the X100 and X100S are probably too outdated at this point to be all that helpful.
Got my new RX10 III and what’s a new camera without an Alex White book? 😉
Enjoy your camera!
Bonjour Mr White,
I got both the paperback and electronic versions of your wonderful RX10 M3 guide and I have a question concerning playback enlargment. Still, I first want to make sure I can really exchange messages with your site, so, I would be grateful if you could acknowledge reception of the present message.
Tank you in advance and please, excuse my english faults, now and in the future ?.
Claude
Hi, Claude — I am looking forward to hearing your question.
— Alex
Bonjour Alex,
Boy, some rapid customer support response! We are not used to that in France 🙂
Here is my request. In playback mode for still images, using the available enlargement control (lever, button, etc.) generally allows to gradually enlarge the image from its smallest normal display size to its maximum enlargement level. This has always been true since I use digital cameras and it is still true with my Nikon D7100 and my Sony HX90.
Let’s see what happens with my RX10M3, bought two weeks ago, in France.
1/ Standard magnification: after pressing the display mode button, whichever control is used afterwards to enlarge the initial display image (zoom lever or AEL button), one suddenly gets an almost maximum enlargement level of the image. One is therefore forced to fully zoom out with the W position of the zoom lever in order to reach a reasonable image size. I like to check my images after shooting, and having to systematically do what is written above is quite cumbersome.
2/ Previous magnification: this option could have been acceptable if, after enlarging the image to a given level and then quickly returning to the image normal size with the Menu or Centre button, the memorized “previous magnification” active for the next image enlargement was the “normal size”. Unfortunately, the only way to memorize a “previous normal size image” is to fully zoom out with the W position of the zoom lever. And this too is very cumbersome.
Do I have a problem with my camera? Is this a mistake in the programming of all RX10M3s and no one has noticed (I have been reading scores of reviews on the net) or no one really feels concerned with this situation?
I wrote to Sony France = “Unfortunately, we don’t presently have an answer to your request”.
What do you think Alex? Merci.
Claude
Hi, Claude — That’s an interesting question. I had not really thought about that issue before, but I can see that you are correct; there is no very easy way to set the initial magnification level lower, other than to zoom the previous image back down to that low level first. I guess Sony’s engineers felt that, to check focus, you would want to zoom in quite fully. Presumably, they did not take into account that some users, like you, are not satisfied with checking the image at a single zoom level, but want to start out small and then zoom in gradually. So, unless you take the time to zoom the image back out each time before you go to the next image, I cannot think of any way to avoid this issue.
— Alex
Thank you Alex, glad tout see you understand my problem.
I still think something is wrong with this new and unique enlargement procedure, because the imposed immediate zoom level is so high that you do not even know which part of the image is enlarged, which results in having to zoom a long way out and /or check the tiny monitor thumbnail and its orange insert (do not be impressed by the correction of my vocabulary, I’m just reading your guide 🙂 ).
I can’t believe the Sony’s engineers goal was to make things difficult to their customers !
I will try to write to Sony Japan on this issue and will keep you posted.
Cordialement,
Claude
Pingback: Sony HX80 and HX90V Book Now Available | White Knight Press
Hello,
I have the Sony RX100 iii and was wondering how you fit a reversing ring onto the lens and have it stay in place once the lens retracts? Or do you take off the reversing ring before the 30 minute maximum time limit before the lens retract?
Also, the zoom is from 24mm to 70mm. How did the writer get his lens to zoom to 140mm when his combination should be the 24mm to 70mm on camera lens and the reversed 50mm lens attached to the front of the camera?
Hopefully the person who sent the original comment will see your questions and respond.
Pingback: Sony HX80 & HX90V Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Hello Will:
I’ll do my best to answer you inquiry about my macro method.
First you already know that the lens on your model Sony (and mine) do not come equipped with threads to accommodate filters. So in order to attach filters you have to buy a filter adapter kit.
That kit consists of a base ring (that is contact cemented around the lens), and a clip on ring with threads that can be attached to the base ring by pressing on its “ears” somewhat like attaching a lens cap. My kit will facilitate the attachment of 49mm. filters although I believe some photo suppliers also have 52mm kits. Once the adapter is in place a variety of 49mm filters can be added to the front of the lens. Because my 50mm 1.8 Canon lens took filters 52mm. in diameter, I bought a 49mm-52mm (double “male”) reversing ring that I attached to the adapter. That allowed me to attach my 50mm. lens in reverse to the front of the Sony lens. The camera lens and its additions can be retracted without having to detach any of the add-ons.
Regarding the zoom choice, i.e., 140mm. vs. 70mm., there are 3 selections available through the camera’s menu. Optical (24mm-70mm), Clear Image Zoom (24mm-140mm)and Digital Zoom.
I chose the Clear Image Zoom option in order to extend the zoom range with a minimum of image loss of resolution. You can enlarge the image size with the Digital zoom but at a cost of some
image softening. It can be argued that the Optical zoom delivers the best sharpness but I can tell you that the Clear Image feature is very good. With the 50mm. attached there is no discernible vignetting of the 50mm iris. I have photographed subjects ranging between 4mm.-10mm and can clearly see the tiny hairs and eye facets of flies tack sharp. As I mentioned in the blog, I use the Photoshop elements 11 photomerge option to achieve insect sharpness from “head to toe”.
Hope this has helped.
sincerely,
ron pidot
riverside ca
Thank you for the clarification.
I carry the camera in my jacket pocket in the winter and on a belt pouch in the warmer weather. Have you experienced any problems with the base ring being contact cemented to the lens snagging on the inside of a pocket or belt pouch?
Thanks again for the clarification.
I can’t advise you on carrying the camera in your pocket because I always stow mine in one of the small firm belt pouches that come as a recommended accessory, regardless of the weather. Of course our weather here in Riverside CA probably never gets cold enough to warrant using body temp to keep the camera warm. I have never had the base ring hang up in the case. The ring extends only about 2mm. and I doubt whether it would be a problem in even a fuzzy lined pocket. The only caution that I have heard pertains to the the exposed iris lens cap that is vulnerable to damage from a carelessly placed thumb or finger. I have had no issue with that, but I handle the body carefully while extracting or replacing it in the pouch. If this is a worry, you can always attach a UV filter to the base ring and leave it there. The only other caveat is that when replacing the camera in the pouch fitted with a small pocket that accommodates a couple of replacement batteries, I find it wise to face the back of the camera toward the battery pocket so that the slight bulge doesn’t press into the lens.
but that’s more than you wanted to know I believe!
Have a good day.
ron
Please write an addendum for the X100T! I just bought your book since there wasn’t another guide and even though I’ve had my camera for almost a year, I still am finding it really helpful. Now that the F model is out, perhaps do an addendum for both cameras? Please? 😉
I appreciate the suggestion; it is very helpful to hear what books would be useful to readers. I don’t expect to do a new book for the X100T, because there are other books I need to work on and I just don’t have the time to get to them all. I can’t just do an addendum; I would have to purchase the camera and any accessories and spend weeks learning about it, so it’s not really practical to do an addendum. I took a quick look at Amazon.com and saw that there now are some guides available for the X100T. I don’t know how good any of them are, but maybe you can find one of them that gives you some insights.
— Alex
I understand, I was half joking. Unfortunately the other guides did not get good reviews. But perhaps you would consider doing one for the X100F since that has just been released. Apparently it is more similar to the X100T than the X100S, so that could potentially cover both models! Appreciate you responding to my comment.
What is warranty period and how much megapixels are using ,in this device.
The Nikon Coolpix B700 camera has a sensor with 20.3 megapixels. The warranty period in the U.S. is one year.
What is warranty period and how much megapixels are using ,in this device.
The Nikon Coolpix B700 camera has a sensor with 20.3 megapixels. The warranty period in the U.S. is one year.
I am trying to find out how to buy Alexander S White’s Guide to the Sony 100 m3 camera
Thank you for instructions on how to achieve this
Here is a link to that book’s information page. That page has buttons you can click on to take you to the sites for purchasing the book in various formats, including paperback and various ebook formats. The paperback is available from amazon.com and other online sellers; the ebooks are available from amazon.com and other sellers also. To purchase the book in all three ebook versions, you can use the BUY EBOOK button on the book’s information page. If you have further questions, please let me know. Thanks.
Hi Alex, I´m writing from Argentina. I own your LX5 book (& camera) and now, I`m reading your LUMIX LX100 new book, planing to buy this great camera. Could you please tell me the differences between LumixLX100 US version and Lumix LX100 Europe version? thanks and best regards,
Hello, Gustavo — I don’t know for certain, because I have not actually used the European version of the LX100 camera. The main difference, I believe, would be that the motion picture recording formats on the European version would use the PAL system, whereby the frames per second would be based on 50, such as 50 fps or 25 fps, while the US version uses the NTSC system, with values such as 30 fps and 60 fps. Of course, units of measure would be in the metric system as opposed to the feet and inches of the US system.
— Alex White
Thanks Alex for your soon answer. I was thinking to buy my first Leica ever (does every photographer must have a Leica once in his life?), but after read your useful comparison I will go (again) for the Lumix. Basically, I thinks that the lack of wifi connecting is something that I can’t forgive. Am I thinking right?
That’s really up to you. If you think you would use the Wi-Fi features of the LX100, you certainly would want to choose that model. The LX100 really makes more sense to me overall, but some people do appreciate the Leica brand name as well as the better warranty and software, if those are still offered as they were when I wrote that comparison.
Hi,
I just purchased the RX10 III and your book, and have read the first 3 chapters so far (really helpful book). No matter what mode I put the camera in (P, M, A, S) I cannot see a bulb setting past the 30″ setting — the dial won’t go past 30″. I purchased my camera in the U.S. Was that setting possibly in the RX10 II but Sony alleviated it from the III? Thanks for the great resources of your book and this blog.
The BULB setting is available only in Manual exposure mode, with the mode dial set to the M position. Also, it is available only if Shutter Type, on screen 4 of the Custom menu, is set to Auto or Mechanical. It’s possible there are some other settings that could conflict with the BULB setting, so you could try a general reset of the camera’s settings if you can’t get to BULB in M mode with Shutter Type set to Auto or Mechanical. My guess is that Shutter Type has gotten set to Electronic somehow.
Thanks. Yes, dial is switcheddar to S and set as Single Shooting in Settings, and sti no Bulb option when in Manual mode.
I didn’t understand this last statement fully; do you mean the mode dial is at the M position? If you still are not getting the BULB setting, then go to the last screen of the Setup menu and use the Setting Reset option to reset the camera settings. That should get rid of any conflicting setting so you can get to the BULB setting.
Hello Alex,
Greetings from SF. I bought a used RX100 III in ok condition but the screen’s image does not reorient up when I flip the screen to “selfie” mode.
Do you know how the camera “knows” to reorient the image? Is it an accelerometer, or a slip ring on the screen’s frame? Can the user set the orientation in the menu?
You can check the Self-portrait Timer option on screen 3 of the Custom menu, which sets the countdown timer for self-portraits. I don’t think that that setting controls the orientation of the image, though. I have read on the forums that you may need to be sure the LCD screen is pressed completely into the selfie orientation. I’m not sure what physical mechanism the camera uses to sense the orientation of the screen.
Pingback: Panasonic LX10 Book Now for Sale | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic LX10 Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Guide Book for Panasonic Lumix DMC-LX10/LX15 Digital Camera - Press Release Rocket
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Guide Book for Panasonic Lumix DMC-LX10/LX15 Digital Camera – MONEY® News
Dear Sir,
I understand that you may have/be in the process of publishing a guide to the HX90V and I would love to purchase a paper copy.
I think it is available on digital but much prefer a book you can flip so much faster.
Kind regards,
Tony.
Hello, Tony — Yes, I have recently published a guide to the HX80 and HX90V cameras. I don’t have printed copies to ship myself, but the book is available in a paperback version through Amazon.com and other Amazon sites, as well as barnesandnoble.com and other sellers. Here is a link to the book’s main page at this site. There are buttons on that page that link to several online sellers. If you need further information or have questions, please let me know. Thanks.
I would just like to say I purchased your book last week and have been reading up on the camera. It is a fantastic publication and perfectly laid out and presented. Thanks so much!
Hi, Neil — I really appreciate your comment. Thanks!
— Alex
Hi Alex,
Great resource for getting up to speed with great camera. Trusty Canon G12 was on last eclipse. Practicing on full moon and saving settings in RX10M3 memory but, if I have dial set on MR and want to change memory setting from 1 to 3 (or some other setting), I have to move the dial to “M” (or something other than MR) and then back to call up the new memory. I’ll use a wireless shutter release to mainly enjoy the visual but also be neat if I could quickly (eclipse lasts 2 min where I’m going) recall a memory setting as quick as possible. Am I missing something? First good photo was pretty lucky setting with G12 during my 4th eclipse. This will be #6. Advise to first timers. Don’t try and photograph it, just enjoy.
Thanks,
Robert
Hello, Robert – That sounds like good advice for first-time eclipse watchers. As for your question, if the mode dial is already at the MR position, you can use the Memory Recall option on screen 9 of the Shooting menu to call up another set of memory settings. You can get to that option fairly quickly if that is the last menu item you used. However, there is another method that is probably quicker: go to the Function Menu Settings option on screen 5 of the Custom menu, and assign the Shoot Mode item to one of the blocks on the Function menu. Then, when the mode dial is at the MR position, you can press the Function button to call up the Function menu, select the Shoot Mode block on that menu, and set it to whatever Memory Recall setting you want.
— Alex
helped me also – thx
Thanks Alex,
Neat. Setting shoot mode on Fn button works great and will be best way to change setting from close shots ar 600 mm to wide totality. BTW I find that using the DMF focus setting gives me sharpest focus but surprised that center focus on the single shot AF (S) on focus mode dial, also gives fine sun shots through solar filter.
Robert
Hi, Robert — Good, I’m glad that system works for you. Sounds like you are ready for the eclipse. Best of luck!
— Alex
Alex,
One item they might add is option to start movie via remote Shooting the eclipse and want to start/make a 4K movie just a second before totality, have a wireless shutter release, BUT I have to physically start and stop the movie with the movie button. Understand Sony didn’t want accidental start of movie, but some do want to have option of remotely starting and stopping movie. Does not look possible with RX10iii of am I missing something?
Thanks,
Robert
Hello, Robert — I don’t have an RX10 III to test at this point, but I checked with my RX100 V, which is fairly similar. I was able to start and stop a 4K video using the Smart Remote app through a Wi-Fi connection. I moved the mode dial to the movie position and had a fast-enough memory card, and the recording worked fine. I don’t know why you couldn’t also do this with a remote connected to the Multi port. I don’t think there is a way to do this with an HFR movie, but with 4K there should not be a problem, as far as I know.
— Alex
Hi Alex,
Reread chapters on plane to Idaho and did set up this option with my iPhone and tested and it works. I think the wireless shutter release is really only designed to replace the actual shutter on the camera so doesn’t know there is movie button. Remote app does. Thanks. Enjoy the eclipse.
Robert
Im looking for a Spanish version of this book
Hello, Gary — I took a look at Amazon and on the Internet in general to see if I could find anything like what you mentioned, but I’m afraid I came up short. Some people have produced flowcharts for other cameras, I believe, but I could not find anything of that nature for the Coolpix P900. In my book, I try to break things down into manageable discussions, with step-by-step lists for certain operations, but I doubt that it provides the sort of structure you are looking for.
— Alex
Im looking for a Spanish version of this book
Hello, Gary — I took a look at Amazon and on the Internet in general to see if I could find anything like what you mentioned, but I’m afraid I came up short. Some people have produced flowcharts for other cameras, I believe, but I could not find anything of that nature for the Coolpix P900. In my book, I try to break things down into manageable discussions, with step-by-step lists for certain operations, but I doubt that it provides the sort of structure you are looking for.
— Alex
Im looking for a Spanish version of this book
Hello, Gary — I took a look at Amazon and on the Internet in general to see if I could find anything like what you mentioned, but I’m afraid I came up short. Some people have produced flowcharts for other cameras, I believe, but I could not find anything of that nature for the Coolpix P900. In my book, I try to break things down into manageable discussions, with step-by-step lists for certain operations, but I doubt that it provides the sort of structure you are looking for.
— Alex
How to shoot in low light out door in b700 Nikon camara
One set of settings I recommend trying would be to use Shutter Priority mode with the shutter speed set to about 1/60 second, and ISO sensitivity set to 1600, with Quality set to Raw or Raw + Fine. I’m assuming you don’t want to use flash. If you do, that would change things. You could consider using an off-camera external flash triggered through an optical slave. Also, things could change if you use a tripod. If you have the camera firmly anchored on a tripod, you could use a slower shutter speed and a lower ISO setting to improve image quality and reduce noise.
How to shoot in low light out door in b700 Nikon camara
One set of settings I recommend trying would be to use Shutter Priority mode with the shutter speed set to about 1/60 second, and ISO sensitivity set to 1600, with Quality set to Raw or Raw + Fine. I’m assuming you don’t want to use flash. If you do, that would change things. You could consider using an off-camera external flash triggered through an optical slave. Also, things could change if you use a tripod. If you have the camera firmly anchored on a tripod, you could use a slower shutter speed and a lower ISO setting to improve image quality and reduce noise.
Pingback: Guide Book for Panasonic ZS70/TZ90 | White Knight Press
I´ve just purchased a book on Sony RX100 IV. I live in Denmark and it would be easier to use a A4 format. Is it possible to get this version of your book ?
regards
Simon
Hello, Simon — Yes the book is available in a paperback printed version that is roughly A4 in size. (It is 216 by 280mm.) I do not sell the printed copies directly; they are available from Amazon sites in the US, UK, and several European countries. There may be other online sellers that can obtain the book for you, but I am not familiar with the sellers who would ship to Denmark. If you have further questions, or if this did not answer your question, please let me know. Thanks.
— Alex White
Thank you for your suggestion. But can I get pdf file formatted in A4 size, or a possibility to reformat it to A4 ?
regards
Simon
Hello, Simon — I will send you a reply by email.
— Alex White
Pingback: Panasonic ZS70/TZ90 Guide in Paperback | White Knight Press
I just received my Sony RX10 IV and I was wondering if your guide on the RX III would help to get me started? The major difference between the two models is AF so would the description of the functions of the model III mostly cover those of model IV?
Thanks you.
I’m surprised to hear that you already received it; I thought it was not going to be available until mid-October. But as for your question, there are a number of differences between the two models, such as new features or options on the RX10 IV, but I think the RX10 III would be helpful with respect to the basic functions of the new model.
The camera is readily available in the Netherlands since last week.
I will go ahead and get a copy of your PDF version of model III, the Sony manual is poorly written.
Hi Alex,
I’ve pre-ordered my RX-10 M4, and I’m looking forward to your book on the new version of this camera. Any thoughts as to a release date on the book?
Hi, Russell — I don’t have a specific release date in mind. I am hoping to have the RX10 IV book out by the end of this year, and I think that is possible if I get my camera on schedule and everything else goes well. I will probably post some updates at this site as things progress.
— Alex
Thanks, Alex. I’m hoping to have the camera in about three weeks, assuming I ordered early enough to be included in the first shipments from B&H. Since I’ve owned the M1 and M3 versions, and have your books on those, the learning curve on the M4 shouldn’t be too bad for me. But I’m looking forward to reading your guide, all the same. Here’s hoping we both get our cameras soon!
Hello! Is there a Rx10 mk IV book in progress ?
Best regards
Yes, I will be working on that book as soon as I can get the camera, and I hope to have the book published by the end of this year. I will add you to the list of people to be notified when the book is available.
Thanks Alex.. Mine should arrive tomorrow…
That sounds great — I am envious, because mine won’t ship until October 17. Enjoy it!
Seriously impressed with the Sony HX90V (and HX80) printed version. Quality paper, stout and ready to be dog-eared, highlighted and scribbled in the margins. Perfect for becoming a well-thumbed volume as I learn all the hundreds of things this camera can do. And the print quality of your images and illustrations is most excellent!
Thanks for the feedback — I’m glad you’re finding it useful, and I appreciate your comments!
I very much enjoyed your book on the P900, a great help. I do need a little advice on filter effects page 77. I have taken 4 shots using each of the colour filters y,o,g and r, but to be honest can not see any difference. Each shot was of the same subject in monochrome. Am I doing something wrong?
You probably are doing everything right. It would depend on the subject. With some subjects, the differences among the images taken with the y, o, g, and r filter effect settings will be quite subtle. Try finding a subject that has some quite noticeable shades of the four filter colors and take the four images of that subject. You should then be able to make out some differences among the images, though the differences still may not be as dramatic as you might expect.
Ok thank Alex. I will give it a try
I’ve really enjoyed two of your publications (guide to Sony’s RX10 and RX100. I’m purchasing Sony’s RX10 IV. Any chance of a guide coming out for that model?
Yes, I am working on that book now, and I hope to have it finished by the end of the year. I’ll add you to the list of people to be notified when it’s available.
Thanks so much Alex! Your guides have really helped me take advantage of all the design capabilities of the RX10/b and RX100. I credit you with your improving my photography!
Would you add me to the list to be notified when the RX 10 iv book is available? Thanks
I have added you to the list and will notify you when the book is ready. Thanks.
Would you add me to your list to be notified when the RX10 iv book is available please? Many thanks
You have been added! Thanks.
Please add me to the RX10 iv list too!
I have added you; thanks.
Please add me to the RX10 iv list too!
I have added you; thanks.
Please notify me as well, thank you.
I have added you to the list. Thanks.
Alex – I’m shooting bald eagles with the RX10 IV at the Conowingo Dam and I’m constantly messing up the exposure – usually the eagles are too dark or I blow out the highlights. Could you give me some quick tips for exposure settings for BIF/Bald Eagle shots (and maybe put some BIF tips in the book too)? Is there an automatic way to get the camera to handle this or do I just need to readjust the EV comp dial for every shot (I’d prefer to let the camera handle it as there’s little time to waste when an eagle dives from the sky)? Also, would I want to use the AEL button for this as well? Thank you so much.
I’ll be happy to give you my thoughts on this question, though I don’t have any experience with capturing images of bald eagles in flight with the RX10 IV. One approach would be to use the Raw setting for Quality, so you can gave a good deal of leeway in adjusting the exposure after the fact. Another is to use JPEG settings (Large and Extra Fine), and set DRO to Auto or a fairly high level, such as level 5. Also, you could try the Highlight or Spot setting for Metering Mode, and possibly also use the Exposure Standard Adjustment feature on screen 8 of the Camera Settings1 menu to tweak the exposure compensation to get the results you want consistently. If you can tell from past shots what the optimum exposure settings are likely to be for the image of the eagle, you might want to try using Manual exposure mode with a fixed ISO setting, probably with Raw for Quality to give you some leeway. Finally, if you haven’t already done so, I would suggest posting your question in the Sony Cyber-shot Talk Forum at dpreview.com, where you are likely to get responses from people who actually are doing BIF shots with the RX10 IV. Best of luck with your pursuit of the eagles! — Alex
Thank you for the response – it appears that DRO-Auto works in Raw on the Rx10 IV (but HDR does not work in RAW)…so I don’t see any reason not to leave that on all the time, what do you think?
I don’t think it would hurt to leave it on, but, at least with the Raw-processing software I usually use, the DRO settings have no effect on the Raw files. You may see the effects when viewing the Raw images in your camera, but not on the computer when using some software, such as Adobe Camera Raw. If you are going to use that software, you might not want to leave the setting in place for Raw files. But, if you use Sony’s Image Data Converter software, the settings could be useful. You could always use Raw + JPEG for the Quality setting to make sure you get the benefits of both approaches.
Please add me to the RX10 iv list too! Thank you!
I have added you to the list. Thanks.
You just answered my question!?Please put me on your mailing list and let me know when the M4 book is route released.
I have added you to the list. Thanks.
Pingback: Sony RX10 IV Book Available to Download | White Knight Press
Pingback: Touch Screen Features of Sony RX10 IV | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX10 IV Book Now Out in Paperback | White Knight Press
I know I bought your book for the LX7 . I looked through the media I”ve purchased on Amazon but it doesn’t show up. Is there a way for me to figure out if I purchased it off of WhiteKnight? I would have bought it either late Dec. 2012 or early Jan. 2013
Hello — I will send you a private email message about this.
— Alex White
Pingback: Video on Accessories for the RX10 IV | White Knight Press
Pingback: Tethered Shooting with the Sony RX10 IV | White Knight Press
Pingback: Sony RX10 IV Minimum Focus Distance | White Knight Press
Hello, I bought yesterday evening the book Sony RX 10 IV. However I did not get a link for download. Please inform how to proceed. Thank you.
I have sent you a private message by email. If you have any further concerns, let me know. Thanks.
Hello, I bought the book Sony RX 10 IV this afternoon. However I did not get a link for download. Please inform how to proceed. Thank you.
Best to you,Annabelle Wallnau agnstudios@aol.com
I have sent you a private email message about this issue.
Just the guide I needed to help me understand the rx10iv. Well written, easy to read and doesn’t assume too much or talk down to you. Levels of detail without being tedious. Would definitely recommend. Thanks Alex White!
Thanks for your comment!
Hi Alex,
I have just bought a Panasonic Lumix DMC-FZ2500 so I’m looking forward to purchasing your guide when it becomes available.
Regards
I am working steadily on that book, and I hope to have it published sometime in April, if all goes well.
I am a new RX10 IV owner and am awaiting delivery of your book (approx. 1 month !). In the meantime can you confirm if it’s possible to set the focus frame to the center in AUTO mode so that it stays there & doesn’t have to be reset every time the camera is switched on? This is for shooting wild butterflies where speed is essential or the shot may be missed.
Best wishes
Ranald Lamb
Hello — No, in Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto modes, the Focus Area option is fixed at Wide, so the camera will focus on the closest subject it finds. You can touch the screen to direct the focus point, but you can’t fix the focus point in the center using the Focus Area option in those shooting modes. You could use a mode such as Program, with Focus Area set to Center or Flexible Spot to accomplish this.
Thanks for your reply. I have been using your book(Focus Area pp 62/63/64) which is readable and clear. However, in Program mode can you suggest how/if I can fix the focus area frame, set to ‘small’ in Flexible Spot, permanently in the centre so that it is always there whenever the camera is switched on. I find that it often moves to bottom left or elsewhere on the screen. Can this be done please, and if so, how?
Thanks
Ranald Lamb
It sounds to me as if you may have the touch screen functions turned on, and that something touches the screen, causing the focus frame to move. You could turn off the touch screen features, and then the Flexible Spot focus frame should stay in the center of the frame unless you use one of the other ways to move the frame purposely.
Thankyou so much – that seems to be the solution, and I’m sorry to be so stupid!
I’m glad you got it figured out.
Pingback: Panasonic FZ2500 Book For Sale as Ebook | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic FZ2500/FZ2000 Book Now Available in Paperback Version | White Knight Press
I recently purchased your book The Photographer’s Guide to Nikon’s P900 and am enjoying it. Is there a good setting(s) on the P900 for waterfalls, that will allow the exposure time to be long enough to make the waterfall or waterstream be slightly blurred? As you can tell by my question, I am a newbie, and am planning to take a trip out to Yellowstone and Oregon very soon.
You could set the mode dial to S for Shutter Priority or M for Manual exposure and select a long shutter speed. Note that there are limitations on available shutter speed settings according to the ISO setting, so you have to use a low ISO setting with a long shutter speed. But you should be able to set a shutter speed of several seconds if necessary, in order to get the smoothed-out flow of water that you are looking for.
I have the Kindle version it is a comprehensive guide to the cameras basic functionality, but does not cover any advance techniques.
Its a better guide than the one panasonic supply when you purchase the FZ2000/2500
I have just purchased this camera and really need a pdf version. How do i go about getting one. Thank you
Hello — You can purchase the PDF version of the RX100 III book from this link: https://sites.fastspring.com/whiteknightpress/product/photographersguidetothesonydscrx100iiipdfandebookversions
If you have further questions, let me know. Thanks.
Do you have ebook version, since I like to print it out and don’t like to read on Kindle. Thanks
Hello — Yes, the book is available in three ebook formats: PDF, ePub, and mobi (Kindle). If you purchase it through my site, you will receive links for all three of those formats. The book also is available in a paperback version. Here is a link to the page with links for purchasing the various versions. If you click on the BUY EBOOK button, you will be able to purchase the bundle of all three versions. If you have further questions, let me know. Thanks.
I just bought the Kindle book, but would like PDF to download. Would you please send me the PDF file of the book? Thanks.
I have sent a private message to your email address.
Hi Alex, I have your printed book on the Sony RX100 MarkII and have found it very useful. I’ve just upgraded to the MarkV (as the screen died on the earlier model).
I’m wondering how much new information there is in your guide to the MarkV as to whether it would be worth ordering that too. Thank you.
Hello, Sonja — Actually, there were considerable changes from the RX100 II to the model V, so I do believe it would be worthwhile to get the newer book. One way to check on this is to use this link to the table of contents for the RX100 V book. That should give you a fairly good idea of the various new options and features that are covered in the more recent book.
— Alex
Pingback: Controlling Exposure Compensation in Manual Modes with the Panasonic Lumix ZS200/TZ200 Camera | White Knight Press
Is it better than the advanced book that you can download free from Panasonic?
Well, I think it is, but that is something for you to judge. My book has hundreds of color illustrations, and explains the use of camera features in ways that the Panasonic manual does not do. It also provides tips and general information that the Panasonic guide doesn’t. You might want to take a look at the table of contents, index, and excerpt that are available to download at the book’s main information page.
Pingback: Panasonic FZ2500 Book For Sale as Ebook | White Knight Press
Hello Alex
Excellent book!
As previous comment I bought through amazon and would greatly appreciate a pdf download too.
One thing I’m figuring out with this camera is the aperture “sweetspot”. Coming from an SLR past I’d assumed that the higher the aperture setting the better the lens would perform (obviously with greater DOF), however my tests seem to show F4 as giving the finest detail/performance etc. I haven’t read all of your book so perhaps you have this covered, grateful if you have any advice… F16 looks positively rough!
Also with traditional SLRs one could read off the DOF as one adjusted the aperture on the lens, is there any way of telling what the DOF is for certain aperture/zoom settings? I’m aware that focus setup covers this but I have the impression that the multipoint focus blocks using “WIDE” show what is in focus at the same distance from the lens rather than showing all in focus ie full DOF. I may have missed something and this camera is so much more complicated than what went before so grateful for any advice and forgive me if I’m appearing as a complete simpleton!
Thanks and best regards,
Robin
Hello, Robin — Thanks for your comments. I am sending you a reply by email.
— Alex
Hi Alex – I would value seeing your reply to Robin, since I am also interested in the same issue of DOF versus Aperture. Would that be possible please?
Ranald
Hello, Ranald — The only information I have on that point is that you can go to the Live View Display option on the Camera Settings2 menu, set it to Setting Effect On, and the camera will then show the effects of the current aperture and shutter speed setting when you press the shutter button down halfway. In this way, you can get an idea of the depth of field at the current aperture setting.
— Alex
Pingback: Panasonic ZS200 Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Complete Guide Book for Panasonic Lumix DC-ZS200 Camera - The Imaging Alliance
I am a point and shoot person. I do not understand at all anything about f stops, benefits of switching to manual, nothing. I need something that is basically a p900 book for dummies who know nothing. Is this book going to be over my head?
Hello — The book is intended for beginning to intermediate users. It includes a section with a step-by-step introduction to using the camera for basic picture-taking and video recording, in Chapter 2. I believe it covers topics in a way that is clear even if you don’t have much of a background in photography. You might want to take a look at the excerpt that is posted on this site for review.
I am a point and shoot person. I do not understand at all anything about f stops, benefits of switching to manual, nothing. I need something that is basically a p900 book for dummies who know nothing. Is this book going to be over my head?
Hello — The book is intended for beginning to intermediate users. It includes a section with a step-by-step introduction to using the camera for basic picture-taking and video recording, in Chapter 2. I believe it covers topics in a way that is clear even if you don’t have much of a background in photography. You might want to take a look at the excerpt that is posted on this site for review.
I am a point and shoot person. I do not understand at all anything about f stops, benefits of switching to manual, nothing. I need something that is basically a p900 book for dummies who know nothing. Is this book going to be over my head?
Hello — The book is intended for beginning to intermediate users. It includes a section with a step-by-step introduction to using the camera for basic picture-taking and video recording, in Chapter 2. I believe it covers topics in a way that is clear even if you don’t have much of a background in photography. You might want to take a look at the excerpt that is posted on this site for review.
reenamauryarm9935@gmail.com
Hi. Like some of the others, I also bought the book through Amazon and would love to have a PDF version. And then discovered this site as I was reading the book. Great book, by the way. It has allowed me to make a fairly easy transition from my Canon SX50.
Thanks
Weldon
Hello, Weldon — I will send you a private message by email.
— Alex White
Alex, just bought the Kindle version of this book from Amazon and it’s a life saver as the Sony documentation is woeful. I’d appreciate the pdf version too please. Many thanks.
Hello, Andy — I will send you a private message.
— Alex White
Hello Alex, I bought your book from Amazon and you have done an amazing job.
I switched to RX 10 IV from the a77ii (great camera) so transition was easier than maybe others find if not having Sony before. Just visited Graceland, Elvis’ birth place & National Corvette Museum and took over 2000 pics. No regrets!! Great pics.
Thanks for your book. Regards, Charles Atkinson.
Hello, Charles — Thanks for your comment! You picked a great camera, and it sounds like you’re putting it to great use!
–Alex
Dear Mr White,
I’m studying your book about my Nikon Coolpix P600 and I’ve successfully connected my large Sunpak G4500 flash gun to the P600 by placing a small strip of double -sided transparent adhesive tape to the front of the built-in flash and then sticking a remote sensor to the front of the flash on the camera.
It works perfectly.
Thanks for the idea.
Leslie Wolf.
Cape Town, South Africa.
Sounds like an excellent solution; thanks for letting me know it worked!
I recently purchased the Sony RX100 VI. Can you put me on your alert list for when your book on this model is available for purchase?
Sure — I have added you to the list!
I just purchased an RSX100 VA and your book for the RSX100 V. Your book is very helpful but doesn’t address all of the VA features and the updated menu layout. Is there any chance you would publish an update or comparison chart – at least for the menus?
Thanks I have other books by you – your writing style and descriptive abilities are excellent!
Hello — I don’t have any plans for a new or updated book on the RX100 VA at present, but I am working on a book for the RX100 VI. It’s my understanding that the VA has the updated menu system, which should be similar to that on the VI. I should have the new book finished by sometime in September, and at that point you may want to check this website for information about the new book and see if it would be useful for you.
— Alex White
Hello:
Taking into account that there is no Photographer’s Guide for the Sony DSC-HX400V, would you please confirm me if one of the other Sony guides would be similar to use that camera?
Thanks in advance for your kind support.
Daniel
I have sent you a reply at your email address. I believe either the RX10 or the HX80 and HX90V book may be useful, and I suggest that you compare the tables of contents from those books to the menus and features on the HX400V. The tables of contents are available from the information page for each book title.
My LX-7’s shutter often fails to the extent the camera is unreliable. There was no problem for the first three months then the shutter began to fail. Is the problem with me or the camera?
Thanks for allowing me to vent.
This is not a problem I ever encountered myself, so it’s hard to say what is causing it. It sounds like a problem with the camera. I wish I had a more definite answer to provide, but I just haven’t had experience with this particular issue. I hope you can get it resolved!
I just purchased Sony RX 100 VI and can’t wait to get hold of your new book. Please notify me when the book is available. Sincerely
Anders Thelin
Sweden
Hello — I have added you to the list to be notified when the book is available. Thanks.
— Alex White
Pingback: Sony RX100 VI Ebook Versions Available | White Knight Press
Hi Alex! I have ordered your book on Amazon.com INDIA and is likely to be delivered on Tuesday. May I request you to kindly send me a link for the pdf download. They did send me a kindle link but that was for a sample download only. Thanks, regards Sanjay
Hello, Sanjay — I will send you a reply by email. Thanks.
— Alex White
Pingback: Sony RX100 VI Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Many thanks for your book. Great Help!
However I have a question concerning zooming while filming in video mode.
This camera beautiful Zeiss lens does not zoom smoothly all zoom range….
It jumps from time to time!
When transitioning from mechanic to electronic zoom it stops is jumping little bit…and than continue zooming and when zooming back side the same problem at that specific interval point between mechanic and electronic zoom.
I have tried to remove electronic zoom setting and kept only the mechanic zoom. The same problem, it jumps little bit by the end of the mechanic zoom like some sort of parking the lens …and again back and forth it jumps only by the end of the zoom travel.
I have tried camera button many times and the 2 wired Sony remotes. Same problem. You cannot record a smooth continuous zooming video for all the long lens travel.
I had before some other cameras zoom and this was not a problem. I would like to know if other RX10m4 cameras have the same problem.
-My second question is, if possible to have an answer, also.
When filming 4K video: What is best?, to apply S-mode, Shutter speed setting of 60fps or to leave the camera decide everything, and leave it simply in P mode.
There are probably reasons for each solution dividing 2 groups of opinions online on Youtube and dpreviews forums… What do you think? pros and cons for each, may be.
Thank you in advance for your help.
Art
Hello, Art — I just took out my Sony RX10 IV camera and tested it. The optical zoom seems to work smoothly, zooming in and out with the zoom lever while recording video. As you say, if you turn on Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom, the zooming mechanism will pause for a short time in the transition to and from non-optical zoom. You might want to try the Zoom Speed menu option, and make sure that both Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom are turned off.
With respect to your second question, it depends what your needs are in recording your video sequence. If you are recording birds in flight, for example, you may want to have a fast shutter speed so you can extract single frames from the 4K video footage. Or, you may need to use a fast shutter speed in very bright lighting conditions to expose the footage properly. Or, you may want a faster shutter speed for some other purpose. If you don’t have a particular need for a faster shutter speed, I think you are just as well off using the Program Auto setting for Exposure Mode for the video shooting.
— Alex White
Hi, which of the RX100 guides would I chose for my RX100 V A (A version)? The V oder the VI?
thanks
Hello — The RX100 VI book would be much more helpful for the RX100 VA, because the camera’s menu system changed dramatically from the V to the VA and VI. The book will of course not be completely applicable to your camera, but it will cover the menu systems much better than the book for the V.
— Alex White
I purchased the book from Amz on 10/1/18. Like others, I seem to be limited by and only to the Kindle app on my tiny phone. I tried to get a refund from Amz so that I can just purchase directly from this site but it does not appear to be working. Can I get a pdf of the book? Thank you.
I will send you a reply by email.
Thank you very much.
I have the iBook version of RX100 VI and the screen shots are of such poor quality as to be useless.
Will there be a repaired version?
Dave
My bad. It was a NOOK version with the unreadable graphics.
Dave
I have sent you an email message about this.
— Alex White
The Index and Excerpt links are bad (404 responses). I’m curious, how is this book different and/or better than the 244 page manual Nikon provides for the camera? Give me your sales pitch.
Thanks for pointing out the bad links. They are fixed now. The difference between this book and the Nikon manual is that this book is written with the intention of explaining to a user how the controls, menu options, and features work, and how to use them, rather than just providing reference material that would be useful to an engineer but is not really geared to a user who wants a fuller explanation. Also, the book has more than 300 illustrations, so it shows the user what to look for and what to expect from the camera. If you are already quite experienced with this type of camera, you may be fine just using the Nikon manual. The book is more geared for beginners and intermediate users.
The Index and Excerpt links are bad (404 responses). I’m curious, how is this book different and/or better than the 244 page manual Nikon provides for the camera? Give me your sales pitch.
Thanks for pointing out the bad links. They are fixed now. The difference between this book and the Nikon manual is that this book is written with the intention of explaining to a user how the controls, menu options, and features work, and how to use them, rather than just providing reference material that would be useful to an engineer but is not really geared to a user who wants a fuller explanation. Also, the book has more than 300 illustrations, so it shows the user what to look for and what to expect from the camera. If you are already quite experienced with this type of camera, you may be fine just using the Nikon manual. The book is more geared for beginners and intermediate users.
Pingback: Nikon P1000 Book Available in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon P1000 Book Available in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P1000 Camera - The Imaging Alliance
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P1000 Camera - The Imaging Alliance
I have your guide to the P900. Are the controls of the P1000 enough different that I would benefit from getting the P1000 guide for my P1000 camera?
I would say yes, not just for the controls, but for the overall features, menus, etc. One way to decide would be to compare the table of contents for the P900 book with the table of contents for the P1000 book.
I have your guide to the P900. Are the controls of the P1000 enough different that I would benefit from getting the P1000 guide for my P1000 camera?
I would say yes, not just for the controls, but for the overall features, menus, etc. One way to decide would be to compare the table of contents for the P900 book with the table of contents for the P1000 book.
If I order the ebook from white knight press I get the book in multiple formats to allow use on a computer and kindle which I liked.
but how can I load the kindle version onto a kindle?
There are several ways to do this. One way is to download the .mobi file to a computer, then connect the Kindle to the computer with a USB cable, and copy the .mobi file to the documents folder on the Kindle. Another way is to use the Send to Kindle app, which can be downloaded from the Internet and used to send the .mobi file to the Kindle. Another way is to use the email address assigned to your Kindle, and send the .mobi file to the Kindle by email. Information on this last technique can be found at https://www.amazon.com/gp/sendtokindle/email. See also https://www.amazon.com/gp/help/customer/display.html/ref=hp_left_v4_sib?ie=UTF8&nodeId=GEJR8GCVYDVZURJX.
If I order the ebook from white knight press I get the book in multiple formats to allow use on a computer and kindle which I liked.
but how can I load the kindle version onto a kindle?
There are several ways to do this. One way is to download the .mobi file to a computer, then connect the Kindle to the computer with a USB cable, and copy the .mobi file to the documents folder on the Kindle. Another way is to use the Send to Kindle app, which can be downloaded from the Internet and used to send the .mobi file to the Kindle. Another way is to use the email address assigned to your Kindle, and send the .mobi file to the Kindle by email. Information on this last technique can be found at https://www.amazon.com/gp/sendtokindle/email. See also https://www.amazon.com/gp/help/customer/display.html/ref=hp_left_v4_sib?ie=UTF8&nodeId=GEJR8GCVYDVZURJX.
This is a terrible camera. I have the camera and will have to do my best. So, is there a small monitor that I can attach to the camera via a small arm with grip and hood? Thanks…I’ll be getting your book next week. What filters do you suggest for this camera? Int. and exterior shooting…using for actor scenes, as well. Any suggestions for the best way to use the filters during live action shoots. Thanks. The RX 10 III has a 72mm.
There are several small monitors you can use. There is one by Sony, the CLM-FHD5, which is fairly expensive, and there are others like this one: https://www.amazon.com/dp/B077FTPT46/. That one is much less expensive. If you look at the Sony monitor’s listing at Amazon.com, you will see listings for several other of the less expensive ones. I don’t really have any specific ideas about the use of filters with that model of camera; I don’t use filters often enough to have useful suggestions for the applications you mentioned.
Decent background information on this camera but what’s really needed is a task-based, step-by-step instructional guide, one that gives us the ‘how’ first.. This publication is well-researched and written in a friendly, informative way and as such, is a good expansion on Panasonic’s user guide. But as a neophyte photographer using the LX10 as my first ‘real’ camera, I became frustrated with this book’s informational bent rather than what I – and I suspect many other new camera users – really need, tasks that show us how to use the camera. It’s frustrating reading all about a function, say Aperture Priority, when all I want is how to use it, the instructions for which are buried on the second page of this topic; instead of steps, they are provided in paragraph form. When you find yourself referring to Panasonic’s user manual before consulting of this book, I think the author has missed the mark.
Thanks for your thoughtful comments. It is very helpful to get readers’ reactions, to help improve future books.
Hi do the ebook versions come with the included photos in colour?
Yes, they do. The ebooks have the same content as the printed versions of the books.
Hello Alex,
I bought your paperback book on the DSC-RX10 M4 on Amazon. Would it be possible to get a pdf version of it as well?
Hello, Ben — I will send you an email message about this.
— Alex White
Pingback: Guide Book for Leica C-Lux Camera | White Knight Press
Dear Mr. White,
I have a Leica V-Lux 114 and can’t find a decent book to guide me in using it. Would your C-Lux book or the previous D-Lux book cover what I need to know for the V-Lux? Thank you very much!
Cricket
Hello, Cricket — As you saw, I don’t have a book that covers the Leica V-Lux specifically. The book that would come closest to being useful, I believe, is my book on the Panasonic FZ2500. It’s my understanding that the V-Lux is fairly close in features to the Panasonic FZ1000, which in turn is somewhat similar to the FZ2500. So, although there would be considerable differences, you probably would do best with the book on the FZ2500. You might want to take a look at the table of contents for that book to see if it looks as if it would be helpful for the menu options and features of your camera.
— Alex White
Thanks so much, Alex. I’ll do that immediately.
Happy holidays…
i have your book which is excellent but cannot figure out the icon with the hand and camera/film strip in the upper left which has a blinking exclamation
The icons with the blinking exclamation point are giving a warning about camera shake, indicating that you are using a slow shutter speed, and may need to use a tripod or take some other measures to avoid a blurry image. Without the exclamation point, the icons mean that the SteadyShot system is turned either on or off. Here is a brief excerpt from Sony’s manual:
I do have your book but I cannot find any information on bon using the Sony RX 10 IV for Astrophotography. I know this is not the camera of choice for shots of the Milky Way, but I was wondering if you could tell me what settings may work best.
I did include a brief discussion of photographing the moon in Chapter 10, at page 242. I haven’t been very involved with astrophotography with the RX10 IV, so I don’t have a particular set of settings to suggest. I looked around at some other sites, and found this article, which seems to have some good tips on general settings, which should give you a starting point with the RX10 IV: https://astrobackyard.com/7-astrophotography-tips/. There probably are many other sites and other resources with similar tips. Based on my own experience, all I can recommend is to get a very solid tripod, use manual focus, get a wired remote control like the Sony RM-SPR1, and start with long exposures for star trails, etc.
Fhdksmfjxjdndjczkalskxjfkskf FB xkejcjfjsjrhxjwk ex free ldkjifuskkdskzidhevsxifiridiichhrhxjdjdhxhxudhdxbdhdjxhdhfhdkskwjehdvfvvxjdj
Jdjdjxj
Dndjxie
Jxdjrndfjjxffdjxkckflrlkcbf fbdnxncf
Are I understand if you’re interested thanks for all the work you t is the one who was it you jaan y y I understand if it’s good I’m of ok I’m at my phone if I don’t answer right no nice you ok to pay for one night this hqdkfjsjsshfbrjdkebfbsjskajd
Djddejdjfjddjdjfldlajttbf Xbox is the y me to do it in a bit ok I’ll y you jaan is the only one night this weekend so we are you guys doing you jaan me to pay or do it tomorrow at work in this hqdkfjs the y the work that needs you t me a pic so ok I’m gonna have good night I don’t want her birthday but happy you have good ? is not the first or ok so you t the only reason or do we are you still looking to good use good judgement call when I’m at the gym right ok so I understand you t the y me the link or paisa so if it don’t send you my mother had I good happy new you guys going to be ok and yes you t me ok did the same or better yet the y a few more hours to make sure they know ok thank her for all your support with or morning if you’re interested in the position for a while before so bhi to go get them or if you’re still at work I’m of ok thank I miss it don’t trjrjrkfj I don’t want
How to factory reset P1000?
My camera has hanged. It does not switch on and off.
I would suggest that you remove the battery, wait a minute or two, then put it back in the camera. Make sure the battery is well charged, then try again. If you get the camera to power on, use the Reset All option on the Setup menu.
How to factory reset P1000?
My camera has hanged. It does not switch on and off.
I would suggest that you remove the battery, wait a minute or two, then put it back in the camera. Make sure the battery is well charged, then try again. If you get the camera to power on, use the Reset All option on the Setup menu.
Pingback: Leica C-Lux Book Available in Paperback | White Knight Press
Dear sir,
This Christmas I was excited to receive a digital camera of which to me is like a close encounter of the third kind. Fortunately I found your book descriptive of the Lumix sz70 was agreed and informative to a degree that I should ask you for advise. Is there or do you offer work books outlining projects that would bring out all th newonces of this unit. Suggestions of projects with aids on how to set them. I would be most appreciative of any direction you may steer me in this regard. I love the book,this manumission you have produced. Thank you
Terry
Hello — Thanks for your comments. No, I do not have any workbook with projects for this camera. However, if you look in the Index under Step by Step Guides, you will find references to several tutorials that take you through some particular operations one step at a time, to help you become familiar with how the camera operates for certain functions.
Hi Alex. A couple of years ago, when I bought the Nikon P900, I also invested in your excellent guide and found it invaluable. Now, having upgraded to the P1000, I was relieved to discover that you have created the same invaluable guide to this more complex camera and immediately invested in a copy. Of course a lot of the features are relatively intuitive but there is so much more that a good guide to reveal and I would much prefer to learn from an expert than spend hours trying to teach myself when I could be out actually taking pictures.
Hi, John — Thanks very much for your comment! I hope you enjoy your new camera!
— Alex
Hi Alex. A couple of years ago, when I bought the Nikon P900, I also invested in your excellent guide and found it invaluable. Now, having upgraded to the P1000, I was relieved to discover that you have created the same invaluable guide to this more complex camera and immediately invested in a copy. Of course a lot of the features are relatively intuitive but there is so much more that a good guide to reveal and I would much prefer to learn from an expert than spend hours trying to teach myself when I could be out actually taking pictures.
Hi, John — Thanks very much for your comment! I hope you enjoy your new camera!
— Alex
Hi, Desperately need a guide for either Panasonic Lumix LX100 M2 camera or latest Leica D-Lux 7 camera (them being practically identical cameras).
The ‘Photographer’s Guide to the Leica D-Lux (TYP 109)’ Alexander S. White – published by White Knight 2015 needs an update to cover the software functionality and improved features of the new (released 2018) cameras.
These (travel) cameras are currently causing a great deal of interest in the photographic media and YouTube both in the USA and Europe; but there’s literature apart from the manufactures technical sheets.
Looking Forward to a guide – MW.
Hello — Thanks for your comment. It is helpful to know what books readers would like to see published. I am considering doing some sort of update for the LX100 II/D-Lux 7, but I haven’t reached a decision yet. I will post information at this site if I do decide to do that update.
— Alex White
Sometimes I have trouble getting the nikon p1000 to focus…..autofocus or manual focus – on subjects even from 6-10 meters away. This is so frustrating. what did i do wrong??
Does your book cover “how to focus – manual and auto” in-depth and thoroughly?
Thanks.
It’s hard to say what the problem might be, because there are several possibilities. If you have the lens zoomed in to a long telephoto setting, the minimum focus distance is quite high — up to 7 meters. Also, you might need to use a different setting for the AF Area Mode, which tells the camera where to direct its focus. It also can be hard to get a non-blurry image when using a lens with such a long focal length. It is a good idea to use a tripod and the self-timer. I believe my book covers focus issues thoroughly, but you would have to be the judge of whether it covers the topic sufficiently for your needs.
Sometimes I have trouble getting the nikon p1000 to focus…..autofocus or manual focus – on subjects even from 6-10 meters away. This is so frustrating. what did i do wrong??
Does your book cover “how to focus – manual and auto” in-depth and thoroughly?
Thanks.
It’s hard to say what the problem might be, because there are several possibilities. If you have the lens zoomed in to a long telephoto setting, the minimum focus distance is quite high — up to 7 meters. Also, you might need to use a different setting for the AF Area Mode, which tells the camera where to direct its focus. It also can be hard to get a non-blurry image when using a lens with such a long focal length. It is a good idea to use a tripod and the self-timer. I believe my book covers focus issues thoroughly, but you would have to be the judge of whether it covers the topic sufficiently for your needs.
Hi – just purchased your excellent LX100 guide, which was recommended to me because I was driven to distraction by my recently-purchased LX100 II. I would be so grateful for a guide speciically for the new model – is there any way of finding out about this other than to keep checking here? Not a Facebook user. Thanks again.
Hello — Yes, I will add you to the list of people to be notified when the LX100 II book is available. I’m working on it now, and I hope to have it published by early March.
Do you intend to publish a guide to the Sony HX99 ?
Thank you
Hello — I don’t have a plan to do a book for the HX99 at the moment, but I will consider it in the future, after I work on other books that are in the pipeline. Thanks for asking; that helps me know what cameras potential readers are interested in.
Hi Alex. I have just upgraded my Sony RX100 mark 3 to a Sony RX100mark 5A and taken delivery of your Mark 5 book from amazon. Will you be doing a supplement about the differences between the mark 5 and the mark5a please?
I have given my Mark 3 and your excellent Mark 3 book to my daughter.
Many thanks in advance.
June
Hello, June — As of now, I don’t have plans for a book on the RX100 VA. It’s possible that could change, but not very likely in view of other books I have to get to. Some readers have advised me that my book on the RX100 VI was useful with the RX100 VA, because of the similarities between the menu systems of those two models. You might want to consider exchanging the RX100 V book for the RX100 VI book, and see if that one works better for you.
Pingback: New Book for Panasonic LX100 II Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: New Book for Panasonic LX100 II Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: New Book for Panasonic LX100 II Camera | White Knight Press
I was really delighted to see that this is now available. Your guide to the LX100 is excellent, and has been very helpful. Now I can really get to grips with the LX100 II. Thank you so much!
Thanks for your comment! I hope you find the book useful.
HI Alex,
I’m glad I’m on your email list as I tend to forget to comment on previous books I’ve purchased from you. I purchased the Lx-100 (1st gen) book and even though I’ve been through it a few times I still use it as an excellent reference on using my camera for things I’m unfamiliar with. Your books are what the user manuals should be.
With that being said, as an owner of the original LX-100 I’m intrigued with the LX100 II & I’d be interested in your opinion of whether the differences are worth the upgrade.
Thanks for your work
Hello, Rik — I really like the LX100 II, as I did the original model, but it is not really a major upgrade, unless you want the added functionality provided by the touch screen features and a few other tweaks to the controls. With the touch screen, the camera now can do Post Focus and Focus Stacking, which are quite useful, and it has Bluetooth capability also. If you don’t care that much about the touch screen and the somewhat higher resolution, you might do just about as well with the original model.
HI Alex,
I’m glad I’m on your email list as I tend to forget to comment on previous books I’ve purchased from you. I purchased the Lx-100 (1st gen) book and even though I’ve been through it a few times I still use it as an excellent reference on using my camera for things I’m unfamiliar with. Your books are what the user manuals should be.
With that being said, as an owner of the original LX-100 I’m intrigued with the LX100 II & I’d be interested in your opinion of whether the differences are worth the upgrade.
Thanks for your work
Hello, Rik — I really like the LX100 II, as I did the original model, but it is not really a major upgrade, unless you want the added functionality provided by the touch screen features and a few other tweaks to the controls. With the touch screen, the camera now can do Post Focus and Focus Stacking, which are quite useful, and it has Bluetooth capability also. If you don’t care that much about the touch screen and the somewhat higher resolution, you might do just about as well with the original model.
HI Alex,
I’m glad I’m on your email list as I tend to forget to comment on previous books I’ve purchased from you. I purchased the Lx-100 (1st gen) book and even though I’ve been through it a few times I still use it as an excellent reference on using my camera for things I’m unfamiliar with. Your books are what the user manuals should be.
With that being said, as an owner of the original LX-100 I’m intrigued with the LX100 II & I’d be interested in your opinion of whether the differences are worth the upgrade.
Thanks for your work
Hello, Rik — I really like the LX100 II, as I did the original model, but it is not really a major upgrade, unless you want the added functionality provided by the touch screen features and a few other tweaks to the controls. With the touch screen, the camera now can do Post Focus and Focus Stacking, which are quite useful, and it has Bluetooth capability also. If you don’t care that much about the touch screen and the somewhat higher resolution, you might do just about as well with the original model.
Hi
I have bought the paperback guide and it is so helpful in getting to grips with such a sophisticated camera much more quickly.
I would appreciate any help you can give on file numbering beyond what is in the guide.
1 Video are separately numbered in a separate folder on the SD card. Is it possible to get the file numbering integrated so video and stills number consecutively as taken in one folder?
2 It isn’t possible to number stills/video with the data and time (as my phone does) rather than just sequential number ? (I can see from your guide that folders can be date nymbered)
As far as I am aware, you can’t change the behavior of the camera for numbering files beyond what is discussed in the Sony manual and the book. Movies and still images are treated separately, and can’t be integrated more than they are normally. There may be some workaround to change this behavior, but if there is, I have not encountered it.
– Alex White
Pingback: Panasonic LX100 II Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic LX100 II Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Panasonic LX100 II Book Now in Paperback | White Knight Press
I just purchased a used RX10m3 and I’ve been working through your book. Is it true that you cannot save button function assignment setting in memory for recall? Only shooting menu items are saved?
That is my understanding, but it’s been quite a while since I worked with that particular model, and I would need to experiment with the camera in order to be certain. Since I don’t have that camera anymore, I wouldn’t be comfortable in making a flat statement that this can’t be done.
I actually have the Leica D-lux 7 but this book is brilliant since it covers basically the same camera. I had slight issue with downloading and the service and help I received was beyond my expectations.
Still working my way through the book but it simplifies the learning process in using a very simple camera but complex when you want to move on
If I have a Leica D-Lux 7, what is the better book to get: this one of the latest Panasonic Lumix (equivalent) or the previous 2015 book on the D-Lux model 109? Thanks a lot and appreciate these more in-depth guides!
The LX100 II camera is a fairly close match for the D-Lux 7, so the LX100 II book is definitely the most useful book for that camera that I have available.
hello i have a problem with the link of books doesnt work
I have sent you a message with new links. If that doesn’t help, let me know. Thanks.
Hi. I have a Nikon field scope 2 I bought back in 1990. I now have an Sony rx100 mk 3. Is it possible to connect them so I can photograph birds in the garden
I’m not familiar with the Nikon scope, but if it uses a standard, removable eyepiece, this should be something you can do. You would need to get a filter adapter that fits this camera, such as the one from Sony, model no. VFA-49A1, or one from lensmateonline.com, or the MagFilter one. Then you need to get a telescope adapter kit, which should be part no. DKSR49T, from telescopeadapters.com. Then attach the filter adapter to the camera, attach the scope’s eyepiece to the telescope adapter, and attach that adapter to the filter adapter. You have to be quite careful, because the assembly is fragile, and the weight of the scope and adapter needs to be supported so it doesn’t damage the camera. Once it’s all assembled, you should be able to get some good shots, though probably with considerable vignetting.
Hi
I have recently purchased the Sony RX 10 Mk 4 , and your book which I find excellent
I also have a Panasonic TZ100 and also your book for that which I must admit I gave up on.
My question is I accept that both cameras are quite complex for those recently retired, but I wondered whether you do , or are considering a shorter guide ( 100 pages ?) just covering items likely to be used by beginners/intermediate camera users . I e separating the woods from the dense forest rather than covering each category of the menus
Hello — No, I won’t be doing shorter versions of those books, because I need to move on to cover other cameras. In each book, I do try to include, in the earlier chapters, basic guides to using the camera for stills and videos, and I include some step-by-tutorials, which can be found in the index.
Alex – is there any chance of a book about the Canon G7X Mark ii? I’ve recently got this camera and am struggling quite a lot – and the manual isn’t of much use! When I had my Canon G16 I had your excellent book – but sadly, when I sold it, I included the book as part of the sale.
John
Hello, John — Thanks for your comment. No, I think it’s very unlikely that I will be doing a book for the Canon model you mentioned. I have been focusing mainly on Sony, Panasonic, and Nikon models lately, and I am actually starting to reduce my output of camera books in general, at least for the present.
– Alex White
Nice!
Namaste.
I saw, there are 100% 5 stars to this Sony RX 10 mark 4 guide.
Congratulations.
Must be a fine guide. I wish to buy it.
Will you post/send it to India?
What will be the cost and mode of payment ?
Please let me know.
Hello — Thanks for your interest in this book. I am the publisher, and do not sell the printed books directly. Here is a link to the Amazon website for India, where you can find details about purchasing the book. There may be other online sellers that offer the book for shipment to India as well, but I do not have details about them.
https://www.amazon.in/Photographers-Guide-Sony-Dsc-Rx10-IV/dp/1937986667/
Alex White
White Knight Press
Hi when i used the P900 straight out of the box I expected the incredible superzoom capabilities that i had seen on youtube videos.But i was disappointed.I am a beginner.Does your book explain how to achieve these incredibly long distance videos.
The book has a section on using the super-zoom lens in Chapter 9. I’m not sure exactly what videos you are talking about from YouTube, but I believe the discussion in the book would give you some pointers on getting the best results with the lens.
Hi when i used the P900 straight out of the box I expected the incredible superzoom capabilities that i had seen on youtube videos.But i was disappointed.I am a beginner.Does your book explain how to achieve these incredibly long distance videos.
The book has a section on using the super-zoom lens in Chapter 9. I’m not sure exactly what videos you are talking about from YouTube, but I believe the discussion in the book would give you some pointers on getting the best results with the lens.
Hi when i used the P900 straight out of the box I expected the incredible superzoom capabilities that i had seen on youtube videos.But i was disappointed.I am a beginner.Does your book explain how to achieve these incredibly long distance videos.
The book has a section on using the super-zoom lens in Chapter 9. I’m not sure exactly what videos you are talking about from YouTube, but I believe the discussion in the book would give you some pointers on getting the best results with the lens.
Hello!!
The photographer use May filter?
If you’re asking whether you can use filters on the D-Lux Typ 109 camera, the answer is yes — the lens is threaded to accept standard 43mm filters.
Thanks Alex!! D Lux 7 dont usé filter?
Bonsoir, je ne parle pas anglais, Je voudrais savoir si le livre sur le sony rx 100 m 3 est disponible en français Merci
Non, je regrette, ces livres sont disponibles seulement en anglais.
Hello,
It is my understanding that by purchasing the paper back guide book from Amazon that access to the downloadable pdf version is provided. I am wondering if I purchase a used paper book of the guide from Amazon whether I can also have access to the downloadable ebook version to have on my phone for reference as needed.
Thanks,
Barbara
I have sent you a response by email.
Will this book be helpful for the Leica D-Lux 7?
Yes, the D-Lux 7 is the Leica version of this camera. There are some differences, such as the appearance of the menu screens and some features, but I would say 90% of the book’s information will be useful to users of the LX100 II camera.
Thank you
Will this book be helpful for the Leica D-Lux 7?
Yes, the D-Lux 7 is the Leica version of this camera. There are some differences, such as the appearance of the menu screens and some features, but I would say 90% of the book’s information will be useful to users of the LX100 II camera.
Thank you
Will this book be helpful for the Leica D-Lux 7?
Yes, the D-Lux 7 is the Leica version of this camera. There are some differences, such as the appearance of the menu screens and some features, but I would say 90% of the book’s information will be useful to users of the LX100 II camera.
Thank you
I’ve previously purchased the Kindle version of “Photographer’s Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 VI” from Amazon. Is there any possibility of obtaining the iBook and/or PDF version of this book, perhaps at a discounted price?
I have sent you a reply by email.
I too have the Kindle version and would like the PDF
I have sent you a reply by email message.
I purchased the Ebook from Amz on 13/06/19
Can I get a pdf of the book?
Thank you.
C. van Kuilenburg
I have replied to you in an email message.
Hi *,
Just bought the book via the Kobo shop.
I was expecting to find 3 links as described above.
I’l especially interested in the PDF version
But I don’t seem to find the PDF
Could you pls help?
Thank you
I have sent you a reply by email message.
Is the Dlux7 user guide printed and available yet??
I did not do a separate book for the Leica D-Lux 7 camera. The book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100 II is available, and that model is very similar to the D-Lux 7. There are a few differences in features and the menus and controls look somewhat different between the two models, but I believe about 90% of the book should be applicable for users of the D-Lux 7. Here is a link to information about that book.
Is the Dlux7 user guide printed and available yet??
I did not do a separate book for the Leica D-Lux 7 camera. The book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100 II is available, and that model is very similar to the D-Lux 7. There are a few differences in features and the menus and controls look somewhat different between the two models, but I believe about 90% of the book should be applicable for users of the D-Lux 7. Here is a link to information about that book.
Is the Dlux7 user guide printed and available yet??
I did not do a separate book for the Leica D-Lux 7 camera. The book for the Panasonic Lumix LX100 II is available, and that model is very similar to the D-Lux 7. There are a few differences in features and the menus and controls look somewhat different between the two models, but I believe about 90% of the book should be applicable for users of the D-Lux 7. Here is a link to information about that book.
Thank you Alex.
I enjoyed your Dlux6 book so much just hoped I would see another for my 7.
Cheers
Rob
Thank you Alex.
I enjoyed your Dlux6 book so much just hoped I would see another for my 7.
Cheers
Rob
Thank you Alex.
I enjoyed your Dlux6 book so much just hoped I would see another for my 7.
Cheers
Rob
Está el libro en español?
No, solamente en ingles.
Está el libro en español?
No, solamente en ingles.
Hi Alex-I bought your Kindle guide for the Rx100 VI, and took some really good photos on a recent vacation to the Grand Canyon., thanks to you. I use your book so much I’d like to get a print version, but i fear it does not exist. Am i wrong? I hope so…
Hi, Rick — Yes, there is a print version of the RX100 VI book; it is available through Amazon and other online sellers. Here is a link to the book’s information page:
https://whiteknightpress.com/photographers-guide-to-the-sony-dsc-rx100-vi/. If you have any difficulty locating it, let me know. Thanks.
– Alex White
Have just finished reading the Photographers Guide to the Nikon Coolpix 900. Loved this book. I felt the level was just right for intro to this type of camera. I was wondering if it’s necessary to turn VR off when using a tripod if you select 2 sec Remote control? Does it make a difference or are they just two to reduce shake effects from two different angles?
Hello — Thanks for your comment. I will give you my thoughts, though I can’t say I have an authoritative answer. I believe it is best to turn VR off on this camera when using a tripod, because of the theoretical possibility of confusing the camera’s anti-shake technology. If you leave VR turned on when using a tripod, though, I doubt it will cause any harm in actuality. So, I think it is probably advisable to turn VR off in this situation, but not necessary.
– Alex White
Have just finished reading the Photographers Guide to the Nikon Coolpix 900. Loved this book. I felt the level was just right for intro to this type of camera. I was wondering if it’s necessary to turn VR off when using a tripod if you select 2 sec Remote control? Does it make a difference or are they just two to reduce shake effects from two different angles?
Hello — Thanks for your comment. I will give you my thoughts, though I can’t say I have an authoritative answer. I believe it is best to turn VR off on this camera when using a tripod, because of the theoretical possibility of confusing the camera’s anti-shake technology. If you leave VR turned on when using a tripod, though, I doubt it will cause any harm in actuality. So, I think it is probably advisable to turn VR off in this situation, but not necessary.
– Alex White
Have just finished reading the Photographers Guide to the Nikon Coolpix 900. Loved this book. I felt the level was just right for intro to this type of camera. I was wondering if it’s necessary to turn VR off when using a tripod if you select 2 sec Remote control? Does it make a difference or are they just two to reduce shake effects from two different angles?
Hello — Thanks for your comment. I will give you my thoughts, though I can’t say I have an authoritative answer. I believe it is best to turn VR off on this camera when using a tripod, because of the theoretical possibility of confusing the camera’s anti-shake technology. If you leave VR turned on when using a tripod, though, I doubt it will cause any harm in actuality. So, I think it is probably advisable to turn VR off in this situation, but not necessary.
– Alex White
Thanks for offering the pdf and epub versions of the zs100 book available here for purchase. I just bought. Could have got off Amazon for $5 less because of credits I have, but no good way yo get on a Nook. Thanks again for this direct sale.
Thanks for your comment; I’m glad you found the direct purchase useful!
Hello Alex: I have purchased a rx100vii. Are there so many differences from the M6 that I’ll be doing myself an injustice by buying your M6 book? I would intend on selling the M6 book as soon as your M7 book is available.
I haven’t received my RX100 VII yet, so it’s a bit hard to say, but based on what I know as of now, I would say the RX100 VI book would cover roughly 75 or 80% of the features for the new model. There are definite changes in the autofocus system and probably a few other menu options, but I believe overall the existing book would be quite helpful.
Just wanted to say as a recent – 1 week – owner of the P1000 camera, how invaluable I have found the Kindle version of your guide – Thank you for writing this with both the novice and maybe more experienced photographer in mind. I found the writing style helped get across the techniques without being overly technically complex. I have already started to improve my photographs as a result of your guide.
Hi, Cliff — Thanks for your comments! I’m glad you have found the book useful, and it’s great that you are using this terrific camera to good advantage!
– Alex
Just wanted to say as a recent – 1 week – owner of the P1000 camera, how invaluable I have found the Kindle version of your guide – Thank you for writing this with both the novice and maybe more experienced photographer in mind. I found the writing style helped get across the techniques without being overly technically complex. I have already started to improve my photographs as a result of your guide.
Hi, Cliff — Thanks for your comments! I’m glad you have found the book useful, and it’s great that you are using this terrific camera to good advantage!
– Alex
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Comprehensive, Full-Color Guide Book for Sony a6400 Mirrorless Camera - The Imaging Alliance
Hi Alex,
I bought your book on the Sony RX100M3 and loved it. My camera was stolen about a month ago so I upgraded to the new M7 with my insurance money (and a bit of my own!). I see you have a book on the M6. Are you planning to cover the M7 in a future book? If not, any recommendations?
thanks
ag
Sorry!
Just found the forthcoming books link and it answered my question about the RX100VII.
I’d like to see a guide for the Sony a7r mark4
Hello — Thanks for the suggestion. I probably won’t be doing a book for that model, but here is a link to a forthcoming title for that camera from an excellent author, Gary Friedman: https://gumroad.com/l/sVCnl.
I am interested at RX100 VII. Can I check when it will be available and how can I get it?
I will post updates here, and I have added your name to the list of people to be notified when the new book is available. Thanks.
Hi, could I trouble you to please add me to the list for the RX100 VII?
Sure — I have added you to the list. Thanks.
Just tried digiscoping with a Swaovsky scope and an RX-100 … what immediately struck me was that it is VERY easy to hand hold and centre the camera on the slightly dished rubber eye-piece outer on the scope and get excellent photographs. I have played with digiscoping for years going from an early Nikon digital camera over ten years ago up to the Sony alpha-7 full-frame mirrorless but pretty much gave up n the game because all those need adapters and stuff to carry and fiddle with. By the time you have it set up the bird has flown but quickly taking the RX-100 from my pocket it’s almost immediate that you can get “on the bird” and grab a picture. That speed is a clincher.
Sounds like a great approach; thanks for posting that information!
I purchased you book on the Sony RX 10 IV which I still have and have found to be the most fun camera I have ever owned with amazing results.
Thanks again for the RX 10 IV book which has been an invaluable help as a starter when I got it.
I am sure those who purchase the RX 100 VII book
Will not have any regrets!!!
Keep up the useful and good work.
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Sony RX100 VII Camera - The Imaging Alliance
When will I be able to buy the paperback version of the book in The Netherlands?
The book is available now in paperback through online sellers. In the Netherlands, you should be able to purchase it through Amazon.de or Amazon.co.uk. You also can order it from the US through camerabooks.com, which is a small company that is experienced with international orders.
Yes, I found the book. However, the price is double the US price.
I’ve used my DSC RX10 IV and your guide for over a year with no problem. A few days ago I was experimenting with b&w in creative style and picture effect at dusk. From then on the viewfinder and monitor displayed a bright white border similar to crawling ants, but not really crawling. The border of a Joshua Tree in silhouette was crowded with white spikes protruding from the border at all angles. When I see the image on playback, first even slightly overexposed areas are black with a defined border rapidly flashing. I checked zebra and it was working fine. I did a reset to default settings, but no change. It happens in all modes except MR and movie recording. Playback is fine when I put the memory card in my RX100M5. When I put an older memory card in my RX10 IV, playback is still messed up. I’ve never seen this phenomenon before and find no mention of it so far. The defect is too distracting to compose properly, and the monitor doesn’t tell me much about what I shot. I’ll call Sony tomorrow, but it seems like it has a software problem. What do you think?
I haven’t seen anything like what you describe, that I can recall. It sounds as if you have taken good steps to diagnose the problem. If resetting the camera to default settings didn’t fix the situation, it does sound as if there may be some issue with one of the camera’s components. I think calling Sony is a very good idea.
Hi!
Thanks for info but have you also updated to version1.21 ?
I bought my Fuji X100S used from B&H with 1.1 firmware.
I’ve just updated today to Firmware 1.21.
I’d like to know what this last firmware update is improving compare to the 1.1 ??
Thanks for your help
I haven’t used this camera model lately, and have not done the upgrade to version 1.21 myself, but here are links to some information on the changes made by the upgrades:
https://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/software/firmware/x/x100s/history.html
https://www.fujifilm.com/support/digital_cameras/software/firmware/x/x100s/
I would echo the question by Robert Hopwood, back in Feb, re a guide book on the DSC-HX99. I’ve just bought this camera, and was surprised that there does not seem to be any published. I appreciate that from a professional point of view this camera is nobbled by the absence of the 1″ sensor, but the features offered for the price does make this a fair choice for a travel camera in sunny climbs.
Thanks for the suggestion. I don’t know if I will end up doing a book for that model, but it is very helpful to know which cameras people are interested in.
Dear Alex,
I have a question on iHandheld Night Shot (iHNS) on pages 74 and 75 in “Photographer’s Guide to the Panasonic Lumix DC-ZS70/T Z90” (copyright 2017).
I want to enable iHandheld Night Shot but the camera isn’t permitting it. The option is greyed out. I’ve tried in both iA and iA+ modes. Is there perhaps another setting that is incompatible with iHNS? So far, I’ve mostly configured the settings recommend in Chapter 2.
Is there a link to updates to the text of this book, if/when any arise?
Additionally, is there a more appropriate channel to ask such questions?
Many thanks!
Hi, Mike — This is a perfectly good place to ask questions. I post updates, if any, at the Updates and Corrections page on this site. As for the iHandheld Night Shot setting, here is an excerpt from the Panasonic manual that lists several settings that are incompatible with it:
??This function will not work for still pictures while motion pictures are being recorded.
??This function is not available in the following cases:
••In Self Shot Mode
••When using [Burst]
••When recording 4K photos
••When recording using [Post Focus]
••When recording using [Bracket]
••When [Quality] is set to RAW
••When using [Time Lapse Shot]
••When [Auto Shooting] of [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON]
I guess you may have one of those settings in place.
I hope that helps.
– Alex White
Regarding the Sony RX10 IV Photographer guide (excellent manual!) will there be an update for the recent Version 2.0 update (although the Sony Help PDF explains it quite clearly)
Thanks
Hello — No, I don’t have a plan for an update for the new firmware. I have placed a link to the Sony information on the update at the Updates and Corrections page on this site, but I’m afraid that is all I am going to be able to do
– Alex White
Hi Alex,
I am a newcomer to the Sony RX10 IV, and to your Photographer’s Guide for it, which is excellent! I’d like to second Dani Shenker’s request for an update that would cover Firmware Version 2.00, because you explain things much more clearly than Sony does!
Rather than updating the entire print version, would you consider posting some kind of addendum, perhaps just a few pages, on your site? Besides the addition of Animal Eye AF in Version 2.00, I’ve noticed discrepancies in your instructions for the options in Face Recognition, so that must have been updated as well. No doubt there are other issues I haven’t run across yet.
Your adoring public will appreciate anything you might be willing to do!
Best regards,
Jeff
Does your book explain how to set or assign the AEL button as the back focus button? I have seen videos on tube that show it as possible, but when following their steps, once you get to the AEL button assignment my camera (just purchased and latest firmware) does not allow assignment , only toggle on/off.
If your book covers this topic I will buy it.
Thanks
The book discusses back button focus and discusses how to assign an option to the AEL button, though it doesn’t discuss both topics in the same place. Basically, you would assign the AF-On option to the AEL button, using the Custom Key (Shooting) menu option. Then, when you press the AEL button, the camera will focus. You also can use the AF/MF Control Hold option for the AEL button to get back button focus. You cannot get back button focus if you use the AF/MF Control Toggle option, though. In that case, the camera toggles between manual focus and autofocus modes, but does not focus the image.
Urgently required
Sony camera Rx10III.
Hello — If you’re asking about the availability of a book for the RX10 III camera, information is at this page: https://whiteknightpress.com/white-knight-press-information-about-current-books/photographers-guide-to-the-sony-dsc-rx10-iii/. The paperback version is sold through online sellers such as Amazon in various countries; the downloadable versions are sold through this site, as well as through the Amazon, Apple, Google, Kobo, BN.com, and other sites. If you have further questions, let me know. Thanks.
– Alex White
Hi We have a Panasonic Lumix TZ70 and my wife is very keen to learn more about using it independently.
Will the book be helpful in allowing us to understand more of the cameras’ performance and function or is the book only helpful for the models mentioned in the title?
Many thanks Justin McCarthy
I think the ZS70/TZ90 book should be generally helpful for the TZ70 camera, though there certainly are differences between the features and controls of the two models. (The ZS70 and TZ90 names are alternative names for the same camera.) You might want to take a look at the table of contents for the book to see if it corresponds fairly well to the topics you would want to read about for the ZS70/TZ90. Here is the link: http://whiteknightpress.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/panasoniczs70toc.pdf. You also might want to look at a comparison of the two cameras, such as the one at this link: https://cameradecision.com/compare/Panasonic-Lumix-DMC-ZS50-vs-Panasonic-Lumix-DMC-ZS70#:~:targetText=Panasonic%20ZS50%20has%20a%2012.0MP%201%2F2.3%22%20(6.17,and%20features%20Venus%20Engine%20processor.&targetText=Below%20you%20can%20see%20the%20ZS50%20and%20ZS70%20sensor%20size%20comparison.
– Alex White
Thank you Alex.
I think we will purchase the book as it sounds as though some of the general advice and principles will be really helpful.
I am unable to connect to iPhone with camera. Incorrect password is cited reason. Please send new password to email.
Hello — If you are trying to connect an iPhone to your Sony RX100 VI camera, the only password that would be involved would be either the one generated by the camera itself for its own Wi-Fi network, or the password for a local network you are using to connect both the camera and the iPhone to. In either case, I have no access to these passwords. The password for the camera’s own network should be displayed on the camera’s screen, and the password for the local network should be available by looking at the modem or router, or by asking the system administrator.
Sony’s switch from PlayMemories to Imaging Edge Mobile. As a n owner of the Sony DSC RX10Iv, I find it very confusing to read in both Sony’s documentation and your book on this camera about PlayMemories when it no longer exists. I am particularly interested in getting GPS tags on my image files and to date ha not broken the code for that. Any help or suggestions would be welcomed.
Here is a link to an excerpt from my book on the Sony RX100 VII, which discusses the updated app in connection with the procedure for adding GPS information to images:
http://whiteknightpress.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/12/Excerpt-from-Sony-RX100-VII-Book-re-Location-Information.pdf
I hope that helps.
The menus in the book do not match the menus in the camera.
I have sent a reply to your email address. It sounds as if your camera is the RX100 VA, which has a menu system different from that of the RX100V.
So sir, do we have any chance that you will publish a book for the Photographer’s guide to the Sony RX100 MVA? I have recently purchased the camera & i was hoping that i would find your book for the 5A on Amazon.in or Amazon.ae.
I do not have a book for the Sony RX100 VA, and I don’t have a plan to publish one. However, my recollection is that much of the new information for the 100 VA is covered in my book for the Sony RX100 VI. You may want to look at the table of contents for that book, to see if you believe it would serve your purposes.
Alex,
The November update of version 2 firmware added new capabilities for AF on animal eyes. Do you have a supplement that discusses this? In general do you have a policy on supplements/updates as (if) the camera evolves over time?
Thanks
No, I don’t have a supplement on the new firmware. I know it would be useful to provide updates as cameras evolve over time, but it’s not practical for me to keep up with all of those changes. I write each book based on the latest firmware that is available at the time the book is published. Once the book is published, I occasionally issue updates and corrections on this website at the Updates and Corrections page, but I don’t include comprehensive discussions of new features as a general rule.
Hi Alex
I purchased the kindle version of your Guide to the Sony RX10iv a few weeks ago and would like to download the pdf version. Can you possibly provide me with a link?
The email address used for the purchase was andrew.j.england@gmail.com
Regards
Andrew England
Hello, Andrew — I have sent you a reply by email.
– Alex White
Dear Mr. White,
I bought a paperback copy of your Sony Rx10 guide back in 2015 (via Amazon). Just getting back into photography ( since I’m now retired), it would be nice to have a digital copy to keep with me on my I-pad. Would it be possible to get a download? This is for the original Rx10 (I see they are now on v4!).
William Djang
wdjang@bellsouth.net
919-810-4679
Asheville NC
I have sent you a reply by email.
Ik heb de update 1.1 uitgevoerd op mijn RX100. Alle trillings- en geluidsproblemen bij het scherpstellen zijn opgelost.
Good — I am glad to hear that. Thanks for posting the information.
RX10M4
Center Lock-On AF
Your book states that it will not function in focus area lock-on settings. My experience is that it does not work in AF Flexible Spot or AF Expand but only works in Wide or Center.
Also it does not mention how to handle the flow if you use back focus.
It took me a very long time to get it all worked out. I think a revision of that section would be helpful.
Thanks very much for your comment.
Pingback: Coronavirus Postpones Photography Show | White Knight Press
Hi
I purchased your excellent X10 guide several years ago and I have just discovered that I might be able to download a pdf version to keep on my android phone for quick reference. Can you help me with this please?
I have sent you a response by email.
How to take a screen shot on Nikon P600?
The only way I know of is to use another camera and aim at the screen.
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P950 Book Now Available | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P950 Book Now Available | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P950 Book Now Available in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: Nikon Coolpix P950 Book Now Available in Paperback | White Knight Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P950 Camera - National Business Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P950 Camera - National Business Press
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P950 Camera – Broward County
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P950 Camera – Broward County
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon… | Virtual-Strategy Magazine
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon… | Virtual-Strategy Magazine
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon… – news.freeptomaineradio.com
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon… – news.freeptomaineradio.com
Hi Alex,
I just purchased a Panasonic ZS80 for my wife. She does not like complicated user’s guide, which the ZS80 appears to have. Do you have a separate publication for the Zs80? Or do you recommend that I get the one for the ZS70? That will confuse her a bit, but if you don’t have an updated book, it might be the best.
I look forward to your reply.
Thanks so much!
Todd
P.S. I spent way too long agonizing over the ZS70, ZS80, and the ZS100–loved the ZS100 for the 1″ sensor, but my son convinced me that my wife would probably like the tiltable screen more (for selfies?!) Ah well….
Hello, Todd — I agree that the ZS80 isld be an excellent choice of camera, unless there is a need for making large prints or cropping images heavily. As far as the books are concerned, I do not have a book specifically for the ZS80, but I believe the ZS70 book should be quite helpful. There are not that many differences between the two camera models, so using the ZS70 book along with the Panasonic users manual for the ZS80 should provide most of the information needed.
– Alex White
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P950 Camera - The Imaging Alliance
Pingback: White Knight Press Releases Full-Color, Detailed Guide Book for Nikon Coolpix P950 Camera - The Imaging Alliance
Great book!
I am interested in using my RX100 IV for astrophotography in conjunction with a Meade LS6 telescope, and would like to purchase the 52mm Digi-Kit (part number DKSR52T) you recommend in the ‘Astrophotography and Digiscoping’ section of the book.
However, searching for this part number on the telescopeadapters.com website returns 3 alternatives – which one did you use?
When I bought mine, several years ago, there was only one option, as I recall. The three that are there now look all the same to me, but I would think the one that lists Sony Cyber-shot in its group of compatible cameras might be the best choice. To be safe, though, I would suggest sending an email to the site, telling them which telescope and camera you want to use, so they can verify which kit is the best one to use.
I contacted Telescope Adapters who advised me to order this (one of the two kits with identical #DRSR52T part number): https://www.telescopeadapters.com/digi-kits-by-thread-size/131-digi-kit-telescope-camera-adapter-set-52mm-thread-size.html
The also said that all of the #DRSR52T kits include the same parts, they may just contain different instructions for particular camera models.
Note that the Sony Cyber-shot models covered by the third kit (slightly different part no. #DRSR52TS) look quite different to the RX100 IV !
Thanks for letting me know. Sounds like you will be all set with that kit.
Pingback: White Knight Press releases guide for Nikon Coolpix P950 camera – The Dead Pixels Society
Pingback: White Knight Press releases guide for Nikon Coolpix P950 camera – The Dead Pixels Society
Purchased ebook early 2019. I can not find my file anymore can it be reloaded? What might the name of the file be. It could be on an old hard drive?
I have sent you a reply by email.
Hi, Alex. I have certainly benefited from both the hard copy and Kindle versions of your great Guide to the Sony DSC-RX100 III. I’m wondering if there is a download for an Excel spreadsheet of all the menus. I was unable to find in your books a way to save/record all the menu settings I have made. If my RX100 III ever has to be reset I’ll never get it back to all my settings so I thought maybe I could record them in Excel. From the looks of your TOC I’m hoping you used Excel to set up those chapters. If not, maybe you have a suggestion of a way to export the settings.
I don’t use Excel to set up the chapters; I use Adobe InDesign, which generates a table of contents automatically based upon the heading styles, and I’m afraid I’m not much of an Excel user. I also can’t think of a way to export settings to Excel or any other program. The only ways I can think of to save your settings, apart from writing them down manually, would be to take screenshots of each menu screen, either using another camera or using the HDMI output of the camera, using a device from Elgato, BlackMagic Design, or another company to capture the menu screens to a computer. You also could get screenshots of the Memory Recall screens, which would show some of the settings, but not all of them. That’s about all I can think of at the moment.
Alex, thanks for your timely response. Maybe HDMI is a less painful way to go and I’ll look into those devices you mentioned. In fact, I wondered what people used to record that information. Stay safe.
I think my copy of your guide to the Leica D-Lux (Type 109) is one of the best books on photography I’ve seen. At least the most useful!
Any chance that you would write a similar guide for the Leica T (or TL2)?
Many thanks.
Thanks for your nice comment, which I really appreciate. As of now, I don’t have any plans to do a book for the Leica models you mentioned. I have been winding down my book-writing activities lately. I may get back to them in the future, but no books are planned at present.
Just bought the book via bol.com (dutch site)
I only got the epub version. is it possible to receive also the pdf version?
I have sent you a reply by email.
thanks for the quick reply, but is it possible that there’s got something wrong? I only got an email that my comment was approved.
I received the paperback version yesterday and glanced through all pages. My first impression: very, very useful. Everything explained nicely. Compared to the Lumix manual, this book will be my primay source of information. Only in doubt I will falmback on the Lumix manual.
One remark though: the print quality (as far as text is concerned) is ok. However, the print quality of the pictures is poor. Nevertheless, I like the book and can recommend it to other Fz2000 newbies.
Thank you for your comments. With respect to the quality of the photographs, it is true that they are not as sharp as you would find in a glossy coffee-table photography book. I could have them printed at higher quality, but the cost of using heavier paper and enhanced print quality would raise the price I would have to charge for the book dramatically. I believe the print quality I am using now represents the best compromise between quality and cost. But it is certainly helpful to hear readers’ reactions, which I will take into account in planning any future editions or future books.
I wonder if the eBook version would overcome this (minor) issue.
Anyhow, I like the book
I guess you may get some orders from facebook group “Lumix FZ2000 – FZ2500″… I hope they like the book as much as I do.
I purchased the electronic version of your book on the SONY RX100 VII. I am very pleased with the book so far. I am half way through the book and It is an easy read and I’ve learned a lot. Thanks!
Thanks for your comment! I’m glad you’re finding the book useful.
I have a P1000 Nikon
Didn’t use it much yet so still alot to learn
Right now getting msg that says
IMAGE CANNOT BE SAVED
And so cannot go any further with it
Any suggestions!
Changed card few times but still same msg showing???
It does sound as if there is a problem with the memory card. You could try re-formatting the card. If that doesn’t work, you might want to try the Reset All option on the Setup menu, if you don’t mind starting over with your various settings. That is all I can think of at the moment. You could post a question in the Nikon Coolpix Talk forum at dpreview.com; someone there might have some more ideas. I hope you can get it solved!
I have a P1000 Nikon
Didn’t use it much yet so still alot to learn
Right now getting msg that says
IMAGE CANNOT BE SAVED
And so cannot go any further with it
Any suggestions!
Changed card few times but still same msg showing???
It does sound as if there is a problem with the memory card. You could try re-formatting the card. If that doesn’t work, you might want to try the Reset All option on the Setup menu, if you don’t mind starting over with your various settings. That is all I can think of at the moment. You could post a question in the Nikon Coolpix Talk forum at dpreview.com; someone there might have some more ideas. I hope you can get it solved!
Thank you very much
I will probably resent as I have not used it much at all yet…. appreciate your help!
Thank you very much
I will probably resent as I have not used it much at all yet…. appreciate your help!
I need a good blogging camera
You could try the Sony ZV-1.
I change my phone number and Google account often as I’ve been hacked in the past so, my question is: I don’t want to have to keep rebuying my PlayStore application and book purchases over and over again.
Is it possible to save your ebooks to my laptop so, when I change my phone account and email I can then reinstall the book onto my new phone ?
Please provide instructions
I want to purchase the RX10 iv and the photography fundamentals book.
Can the PDF Versions be used on a laptop and on smart phone. I like to use a voice reader as I have a hard time reading.
Yes, you can download the PDF version to any of your own devices. If you purchase it from this website, you will receive a download link, and you can save the PDF file to any locations you wish and keep the file for permanent reference.
I need the guide for camcorders Sony- Handycam 60x optical zoom
I losted
Sebt to me the guide -instruction for camcorders Sony handycam 60x optical zoom
I’m not sure exactly which model you are referring to; here is a link to the manual for one such model: http://whiteknightpress.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/Sony-Handycam-60X-Manual.pdf
I bought it, I downloaded it, I can’t find it only my 2017 iPad Pro. Can you help me?
I have sent you an email message with information on how to get access to the book you purchased.
Hallo there I do think that I have paid with my VISAcard 9,95 for download dc lumix 100m2. But I could not find what I want. I hope you can help me.
Best regards
Bo Nilsson
Hello, Mr. Nilsson — I have sent you a response by email. If you need further assistance, please let me know. Thanks.
Alex White
White Knight Press
Hallo there I do think that I have paid with my VISAcard 9,95 for download dc lumix 100m2. But I could not find what I want. I hope you can help me.
Best regards
Bo Nilsson
Hello, Mr. Nilsson — I have sent you a response by email. If you need further assistance, please let me know. Thanks.
Alex White
White Knight Press
Hallo there I do think that I have paid with my VISAcard 9,95 for download dc lumix 100m2. But I could not find what I want. I hope you can help me.
Best regards
Bo Nilsson
Hello, Mr. Nilsson — I have sent you a response by email. If you need further assistance, please let me know. Thanks.
Alex White
White Knight Press
This is not good news for photographer to posponed big photography show. But we are helpless. Now this pandemic we should be more sincere and also maintain social distance. If we come round this pandemic. I think we have big opportunity for future.
I have been succesful in opening in my cellphone your version of dc lx100m2 manual. I do like Scott Kelbys books. He goes strait to the point without takeing the whole bible at the same time. Like Panasonics erverything in the same basket. Now I will try to open in my computer. I think you do in the same direction. And it suits me.
I have been succesful in opening in my cellphone your version of dc lx100m2 manual. I do like Scott Kelbys books. He goes strait to the point without takeing the whole bible at the same time. Like Panasonics erverything in the same basket. Now I will try to open in my computer. I think you do in the same direction. And it suits me.
I have been succesful in opening in my cellphone your version of dc lx100m2 manual. I do like Scott Kelbys books. He goes strait to the point without takeing the whole bible at the same time. Like Panasonics erverything in the same basket. Now I will try to open in my computer. I think you do in the same direction. And it suits me.
Nähä, icke så, kunde inte få fram de filer som jag fick fram i min mobil dropbox. Help.
Hello, Mr. Nilsson — I’m sorry to hear there is a problem with using the files. I have sent you a detailed reply by email.
Alex White
White Knight Press
Nähä, icke så, kunde inte få fram de filer som jag fick fram i min mobil dropbox. Help.
Hello, Mr. Nilsson — I’m sorry to hear there is a problem with using the files. I have sent you a detailed reply by email.
Alex White
White Knight Press
Nähä, icke så, kunde inte få fram de filer som jag fick fram i min mobil dropbox. Help.
Hello, Mr. Nilsson — I’m sorry to hear there is a problem with using the files. I have sent you a detailed reply by email.
Alex White
White Knight Press
Would your book help me to video the planets in manual movie mode. I see that a lot of people do video them, but I have no idea how they manage to find them with the lens. They don’t seem to show up in manual movie mode until I have zoomed a fair amount and then it’s impossible to find them (this is not the case in other modes – it isn’t that I don’t know how to find a planet and zoom in on it!). I see that a lot of people do video planets in manual movie mode (and get some impressive results with Autostakkert and Registax) and I would like to find out how they do it!
I don’t have experience with that particular type of photography myself, and I don’t think my book would be of much help on that question. You can find some excellent information in the dpreview.com “Nikon Coolpix Talk” forum. For example, here is a link to a useful thread: https://www.dpreview.com/forums/post/63522498. You also could try astrophotography forums. Good luck with your efforts!
Thanks very much, Alex. The link is very interesting. I wondered about using a mount but the people I see filming themselves zooming in on the planets aren’t using one. What I think they may be using in some cases is an external monitor. Maybe I should buy a telescope and use the DSLR! I bought the P1000 for birding, so it doesn’t really matter. Just thought it would be fun. Thanks again for your reply.
Would your book help me to video the planets in manual movie mode. I see that a lot of people do video them, but I have no idea how they manage to find them with the lens. They don’t seem to show up in manual movie mode until I have zoomed a fair amount and then it’s impossible to find them (this is not the case in other modes – it isn’t that I don’t know how to find a planet and zoom in on it!). I see that a lot of people do video planets in manual movie mode (and get some impressive results with Autostakkert and Registax) and I would like to find out how they do it!
I don’t have experience with that particular type of photography myself, and I don’t think my book would be of much help on that question. You can find some excellent information in the dpreview.com “Nikon Coolpix Talk” forum. For example, here is a link to a useful thread: https://www.dpreview.com/forums/post/63522498. You also could try astrophotography forums. Good luck with your efforts!
Thanks very much, Alex. The link is very interesting. I wondered about using a mount but the people I see filming themselves zooming in on the planets aren’t using one. What I think they may be using in some cases is an external monitor. Maybe I should buy a telescope and use the DSLR! I bought the P1000 for birding, so it doesn’t really matter. Just thought it would be fun. Thanks again for your reply.
Alex didn’t purchase from your website sorry, bought it straight from my iPad think it was Amazon, but I have to say my head is spinning ! in a good way I might add I can’t sponge it up quick enough lol , first impressions are that its going to be invaluable to me as I learn my way forward , with the Sony rx10iv good job sir.
Hello, Graham – Thanks very much for your comment! I hope you enjoy your camera; you made a great choice!
– Alex
Dear mr. White,
In the book on page 18 the figure shows the down button with +- minus sign with the camera +++.
This button on my camera Sony DSC RX 100 M 7 is only showing +- sign.
When I press this +- sign button shows the Exposure Comp.
Can you explain the difference?
I read the book via Google books but would be nice if a PDF would be available.
Best regards
Gerard
Hello, Gerard — I have sent you a reply by email.
Alex White
Hi- I just bought your book and looking forward to reading. I went fast forward to the remote control section in the hopes if solving a problem I have encountered. I bought a wired Vello2- I set it for an unlimited number of exposures 15 minutes apart/ it shoots a few shots and then stops. I think because the camera turns off. I have set Function for VF to Not Power Off- any thoughts on my problem?
Hello — My first thought is that the Function for VF Close option controls what the camera does when the viewfinder is pushed down into the camera’s body, so I doubt that that option is involved with this problem. I would suggest instead checking the setting for the Power Save Start Time menu option, which controls how long the camera waits before powering off when no controls are operated. I would think the camera would not power off while the remote control is working, but maybe that setting has some effect in this situation. You also might want to check the Auto Power Off Temperature setting. And, you might want to consider powering the camera with a plug-in power source during the remote control operation, using a dummy battery inserted into the battery compartment. That’s all I can think of at the moment.
nice video vHnaneeeraaammnssnnwbBzbzbzbsbrbsbxuwsusevddpseeznxnntntfnnfnfntnt
Kskserer
Thanks Alex – will give what you suggest a try
Hi Alex – I followed your suggestions and got the Vello remote to work – thank you so much!!!!!!
Hi, Marcy – I’m glad you got it working — thanks for letting me know!
Please help! I want a small compact camera with a great zoom, plus viewfinder. Not too expensive.
I’m not sure just what your price range is or how much zoom you want, but a couple of suggestions are the Sony HX90V and the Panasonic Lumix ZS80. You can search at https://www.dpreview.com/products/search/cameras#!, plugging in your desired options and zoom amount, etc. Good luck with your search!
Hi I have a RX10 M3 and think about full spectrum modification of it. What is your experience with the lens of the M4 – did you see som hot spots in the middle of the picture?
The effect is strongest with small apertures (f=high).
I’ve been doing some IR-photograpy with my DYI-converted G1X (find me on Instagram: ruedi_freuler).
Any advise welcome.
Thank you very much,Ruedi
Hello, Ruedi – I took a look back through my images taken with the RX10 IV, and I did not notice any hot spots. I no longer have that camera, so I can’t do any other checks at this point. I don’t have that much experience with infrared photography — only the small amount of experience that I have discussed on my website and in my books, so I may not be the best source of advice on this topic. But, as far as I know, the RX10 IV would work okay in this area.
Alex Whie
Hi Alex,
I have purchased the Lumix TZ95 in the United Kingdom.
Do you have a manual for this model or can I use the one you have for the TZ90?
Thanks.
Regards Martin
Hello, Martin — No, I have not done a manual for the TZ95. I took a quick look at the specifications of the TZ95 as compared to the TZ90, and I believe the book for the TZ90 should be quite helpful with the newer model, though there certainly will be some significant differences in features, menus, and the like. You could take a look at the table of contents for the TZ90 book on this site to see if you think it would be sufficiently useful. Here is a link: http://whiteknightpress.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/panasoniczs70toc.pdf.
I have purchased and use your book on the Sony RX10M4… love it! Does my purchase entitle me to download the e version (pdf) also?
I have sent you a reply by email.
Pingback: Sony a7C Book Now Available in Downloadable Versions | White Knight Press
I was looking for a guide for my new Sony RX10 i, and found it listed on Google.
I clicked the link and found that there was a link to purchase a copy for my Amazon Kindle, so eager as I was, I bought it.
Only now I find that the link that was supposed to go to the RX10 iv actually went to the RX100 iv and I have bought the wrong guide.
I went back and checked what went wrong, and I found that your link goes to the wrong page.
Is it possible to “return” the guide I have bought for a completely different camera (RX100 iv), and replace it with the correct guide for the RX10 iv?
Hello – I have replied by email. Let me know if you need any further assistance. Thanks for pointing out this problem.
Pingback: Sony a7C Book Now Available in Paperback | White Knight Press
Hi Alex,
I recently purchased a Sony RX10M3, used with several batteries and a wall charger. In your book on this model, you explain in detail everything about utilizing the battery-with one exception. My question is should the battery be left in the camera when not in use, say for 2 to 4 weeks? I find my batteries discharge too rapidly when left in the camera for the above time frame. Is it due to the batteries, which came with my used purchase of the camera having aged, or is this normal ? Stan
Hello, Stan — I have always left my battery in the camera when I’m not using the camera, with no particular problems, though I never really focused on that issue. As far as I know, what you are experiencing is normal behavior.
Alex
Pingback: Using a Bluetooth Remote Control with the Sony a7C Camera | White Knight Press
Pingback: Using Multi Flash Firing with the Sony HVL-F28RM Flash and the Sony a7C Camera | White Knight Press
Dear Alex,
I’m bit puzzled about the stabilizer function for taking 4K videos and I could not get satisfactory answer from the dpreview . com members either
your book says:
“When recording movies, the camera can use its 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizing Function, which electronically corrects image jitter in five directions. It is selected through the E-Stabilization sub-option of the Stabilizer item. As a side-effect of this internal processing, motion picture frames may become cropped to a narrower angle of view than normal. The 5-Axis system does not operate when recording 4K movies, using Variable Frame Rate, or using Digital Zoom”
I’m confused now whether 5-Axis system or any portion of stabilizing will ever work recording 4K videos?
if so under what settings? ( I don’t care if it is cropped. All I want is an internal stabilizer)
Will there be any indication that it is working during recording or we have to check after the event, do you think, please?
Kind Regards
Hello, Kimberley — I don’t have this camera anymore, so all I can do is point to the official Panasonic users guide, which says that the stabilizer function is not available “when recording motion pictures with their size set to [4K] or [C4K] in [Rec Quality].”
— Alex
Hello Alex..
Namaste from India. I have bought Sony RX10XM4 Book on Amazon.in. Please provide me with link for update and pdf version of document at
I have sent you a reply by email.
Mr White,I am certain you will think I am a complete Luddite and should return to my Brownie Box and at times I would agree…
For some reason your manual disappeared from my iPad and you sent me a new link to reinstall it. While procrastinating the iPad met an untimely death and I decided to get a MacBook and learn Photoshop.
So can you please send me a new link for my SONY RX104 which I will attempt to download ASAP.
Thank you so much.
Nancy Zannini
PS have you heard that Sony is bringing out a successor to the RX10 this fall?
I have sent you a new set of links. If you need anything else, just let me know. I had not heard that Sony is bringing out a successor to the RX10 IV; that certainly would be interesting news.
Great books. I have the one for the Nikon P510 and it inspired me to use the camera properly. I now have a Panasonic DMC-TZ80, as a pocket camera, and am wondering if the book for the DC-ZS70/TZ90 will be worth getting? Do you know if the models features are similar?
I believe the features are quite similar, though I don’t have a full recollection of the differences. You might want to check out the table of contents for the ZS70/TZ90 book and see if the topics listed there appear to be useful for your camera.
Hello, Alex White: I wonder if it would be worthwhile to ‘return’ a Photographers Guide to you; as I am getting the newer Model of the Camera?! The book is on the Panasonic ZS100/TZ100, and I am thinking of upgrading to the ZS200. Please advise, and thank you. Edgar
I have sent you a reply by email.
When will this camera be available again. I go to the camera stores in Cleveland, Ohio and they don’t have any in stock.
It appears that the Nikon Coolpix P900 has been discontinued by Nikon. At least, it is listed as “Out of Stock” at the Nikon site, and “no longer available” at the B&H Photo Video site. There may still be some new P900 cameras available if you look around, but I would not expect new shipments of new cameras to become available. Your best bet may be to buy a “renewed” camera from Amazon or elsewhere, or to purchase a newer model such as the P950 or the P1000.
When will this camera be available again. I go to the camera stores in Cleveland, Ohio and they don’t have any in stock.
It appears that the Nikon Coolpix P900 has been discontinued by Nikon. At least, it is listed as “Out of Stock” at the Nikon site, and “no longer available” at the B&H Photo Video site. There may still be some new P900 cameras available if you look around, but I would not expect new shipments of new cameras to become available. Your best bet may be to buy a “renewed” camera from Amazon or elsewhere, or to purchase a newer model such as the P950 or the P1000.
When will this camera be available again. I go to the camera stores in Cleveland, Ohio and they don’t have any in stock.
It appears that the Nikon Coolpix P900 has been discontinued by Nikon. At least, it is listed as “Out of Stock” at the Nikon site, and “no longer available” at the B&H Photo Video site. There may still be some new P900 cameras available if you look around, but I would not expect new shipments of new cameras to become available. Your best bet may be to buy a “renewed” camera from Amazon or elsewhere, or to purchase a newer model such as the P950 or the P1000.
First of all great book. I have the paper copy, that I bought off Amazon. Is there a way to download the pdf Version as part of the paper version I have to make it convenient to use both? I understand I only purchased the hard copy but figured I would ask. I can give you proof of purchase or show photo of book I own. If not it’s fine, just figured I would ask. Like I said this book is a tremendous source of information, and hats off to your work on this. Thx, Sean
Hello, Sean — I will send you a reply by email. Thanks.
Alex White
Hi Alexander
I bought your book about Nikon p950. I’m trying to get a better understanding of it. My one big issue is with my sd card. I googled which one would be best for this camera. I bought the SanDisk Extreme Pro 170 mb/s 128 GB. I find the delay after continuous shooting very long… between 10 and 20 seconds depending on how many shots I’ve taken. It’s extremely frustrating for birds shots or wildlife. Is there a better card or is this just the way it is.
There are some faster cards available, as discussed in this article: https://www.digitalcameraworld.com/buying-guides/best-memory-card. However, I’m not sure that the speed of the card would make that much difference, because the camera’s buffer does slow down continuous shooting to some extent, unavoidably. I have not run detailed tests in this area, so I can’t say for sure. If you don’t mind trying a faster card, that might help somewhat.
Hi Alex, I have bought three of your RX100 books (3,4,5) and they have helped me immensely in the use and enjoyment of those cameras. I just got the model 5A, and well, there seem to be some changes in the software menus that are not included in your book on M5. And as you know, the Sony Manual is pretty lame, though in a pinch it may tell me more than nothing.
Is it possible that you have an appendix/VA update that covers things like the MY menu function, or better how to actually and set the memory function? I’m sure you know that unlike the M5, The 5A must record the memory settings differently, and it’s not really too clear on HOW it does that.
If you have an VA update, I’d really appreciate seeing it.
Thanks again
Dave
Hello, Dave — I have sent you a reply by email.
Alex White
Hello, I purchased your guide to The Sony RX100 III and have found it very useful. However, it is a big book and difficult to take out on field trips. I have recently upgraded to a Sony RX100 VII and do not really want another large book – do you plan to issue a smaller printed book? Also’. will I get added value if I buy the Version 7 book when I also have the version 3.? On the plus side, if there was a smaller printed edition I would have no problem buying it. I do not have a kindle.
Regards
John
Hello, John — I’m glad to hear you found the RX100 III book useful. I don’t have a plan to publish a smaller print version of the RX100 VII book. If I did, it would be very thick and considerably more expensive to print (and purchase). However, that book is available in three downloadable formats: PDF, Kindle, and ePub. All three of them can be read on smartphones or tablets. For example, you can download the Kindle app and read the Kindle version that way. The ePub version works well with Apple devices, and the PDF version is useful also. As to whether the newer book is worth purchasing, here is a link to view the table of contents for that book: https://whiteknightpress.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/09/sonyrx100viitoc.pdf. I would say there is a considerable amount of new content, with a fair amount of repetition from the older books as well, but I hope you can judge that from looking at the table of contents.
Alex White
Looking for manual for lumix G7 either on line or print
Tom Jackson
Hello, Tom — I’m sorry, but I don’t know of any guide book for that model.
Alex White
Pingback: Recommended Camera Manual – Five Acres with a View
Re: sony rx10 iv camera
Just wanted to thank you for providing such informative detail on this camera. Hopefully i will retain all this info to optimize the camera. Thanks again, Anthony
Alex, I have a print book of your SONY DSC-RX100 VI.
YOUR BOOK DESCRIBES how I can make a time-lapse photo project using the multiport / USB connection to a powered PC on page 186 and 187.
Now, I also have a multiport plug in with an intervalometer. BUT…BUT for a longer sequence, HOW CAN I POWER THE CAMERA AT THE SAME TIME? AS WHEN THE INTERVALOMETER IS PLUGGED IN?
IS THERE A DEVICE THAT ALLOWS YOU TO PLUG IN (2) DEVICES TO THE MULTIPORT
…….A CHARGER AND A INTERVALOMETER……
Yes, you should be able to use a “dummy battery”. With this option, you insert the dummy battery into the camera’s battery compartment in place of the regular battery. You should be able to run the cable from the dummy battery through a small flap that opens in the battery compartment door, and then plug the cable into a USB charger. Here is a model currently available at amazon.com: https://www.amazon.com/gp/product/B078PDCF7D/ref=ask_ql_qh_dp_hza.
I don’t have a camera to test this with at present, but I believe this system will work with the RX100 VI.
Greetings from Wales!
I’ve recently purchased a copy of your excellent book on the Sony RX10 iv via Amazon in the UK. How can I get a PDF version please?
Thanks
Maldwyn
I have sent you a reply by email.
Jalalpur Nathupur navdhan Ambedkar Nagar
Hello,
Do you intent to publish the RX100 VI guide in French ?
Does you RX100 VI guide provide some of your suggested configurations ?
Thank you.
Hwuwiwi
Nice video
???? ???? ????? ??????? ???? ????? ????
Nice edit
??????
??????
???
Jjgf
Hjk
Ghur
Hjko
Dyhj
Jhdfh
Nmk
Chjjkkkhfdddv
Bngg jhfb njf
Jgffc
Jjbbbnkkkkh hhgff jhhhhhgggv
??????????
Download Top 300 Lightroom XMP Presets In One Click By Deepak Creations
Nice video..
????
****
hello, Great blog post. I loved your article.
Camera God Clothing is composed of content creators all over the world.
Bonjour
Est ce que ce livre Sony rx104 est en français ?
je confirme, il existe en français et vaut la dépense.
Paul
can it help all leading cameras operation like Nikkon and Cannon DSLR and mirror less cameras
Great book…I have had the camera for over a year now and have mastered maybe 2-3%…I return to it and pick up as much as I can hold in my memory each time…have to shoot an art reception tomorrow night so was paging through it and found more about playback, file names, etc. which I will put into practice. Great book, great camera.
God
Quiero está cámara listo
Que tengo que hacer para obtener esta cámara
Cámara
Hola mi nombre es Karen Vanessa quiero tener esta cámara en mi teléfono y nesecito informarme que tengo que hacer para obtenerla por favor
Thank you
Gcane
Gcame
Eres no muy claro, pero creo que quieres decir que deseas comprar el libro electrónico sobre la Sony cámara DSC RX 100 VII y leerlo en su teléfono. Vivo el los Países Bajos y compré ese libro ayer. Me costó €11,95 IVA incluido. Podría pagarlo a través mi cuenta bancaria y en 5 minutos podría descargar el libro en mi Android tableta y mi Windows computadora. No tuve experiencia de descargarlo en un teléfono.
Thank you for the conscientiousness and competence you invested. The result is a comprehensive and extremely helpful book of outstanding clarity.
Warm regards: UR.
Nice CAMERA ?
Love ? this camera ?
Like this camera ?
I want latest feature in my camera
Jodharam
JGT
I liked your article. The way you have described it. Keep sharing.
Dipro
Khaza
Mdshahanabaj2064
Hello,
I purchased the hard copy of your excellent RX10v4 book some time ago and I would like to obtain the PDF version for my android phone. Can you assist with this please? Thank you.
Camera chai
you are in reality a just right webmaster.
The site loading speed is amazing. It kind of feels that you are doing any
distinctive trick. Also, The contents are masterpiece.
you’ve performed a fantastic process on this matter!
Today, I bought an ebook of the Sony RX100 iv but I had problems with its download.
How can I do it again and save the copy on my pc?
Sincerely,
Pier Paolo Mariani
Hello Alexander,
I have bought the book for the RX100 VII and find it very valuable.
The only complain I have is that it is a big book, not suited to have it with me all the time… Is there a possibility to have a PDF version of the book so that I can have it on my phone for quick reference when I’m outside?
Have a nice day.
Photography
01931550261
Jebrvtf ievfgrgh ktgdwgtgg ghhuhsyhde jdwvegfhtkydsgdgfgrbh
R WT allowance
Shiv tvt cc u
1000
Very useful information, thanks
Thanks for the informative post.
Jjjjjjj
Mr White, awesome book, comprehensive, just what I need for to explore the rx10.
You asked for contact if updates were needed. On page 16 you refer to screen 14 of camera settings1 menu to find the Smile/face detection option. There is no such option on screen 14. On screen 6 there’s a Face/eye AF Set menu.
Again, thanks for o good book!
Nice post.
At khutala post midc
Mr. White –
I have owned an RX10IV and your book for the better part of a year. The pictures are superb, despite my setup skills being low. I am striving to set up all 7 presets (MR’s) in anticipation of most conditions I will encounter. Through trial and error, I have set up about 4. I need help with the following 2 questions:
1) How can I establish a Zoom Setting with each preset? Need step-by-step guidance.
2) How can I change a Preset? Each one seems locked for eternity.
I read that to insert a SD card the label faces to the back of the camera body. On mine it faces the front. However a very useful guide and very readable.
Sorry issue addressed.
1) how large is the pdf file for the ZS70 book?
2) do you feel that the ZS70 book will be directly usable with the ZS80?
Mr. White,
I just bought a Panasonic Lumix LX100ii and (although a quite experienced amateur photographer) I have been struggling a bit reading the Panasonic on-line “advanced” user guide. But I don’t like using Kindle, and much prefer a hard copy. Your posting seems to suggest that a printed version of this book will soon be available. Can you tell me the current status of that printing?
Raja khan
??
???? ????? ??? ????? ??? ????? ??? ????? ?????? ?????????
It appears that you may no longer be responding to comments posted here, but let me try, just in case. I have just purchased the RX10 IV. Has any version of your manual been updated to include information on the new features in Face Detection and Eye AF that are part of Firmware Version 2? And will I be able to get answers here to any questions that arise once I purchase your book? Thanks for any help or clarification you can provide.
Leave a Reply
Hy my charger isn’t working and am eagerly on a search….where wil i get the original charger
I love you
Fcbhbbvhd4ndde4hvvv vo
I had the Lumix FZ1000 and I absolutely loved it, I had to get rid of it as it was not compatible with my steadycam. I ended up going for the FZ2500.
Panasonic make some amazing cameras!
I am looking for a compact camera for every day shots as I really don’t think mobile phones take great photos. Might check out the Panasonic!
Jan 30, 2023.
Dear Mr. White,
Do you have any plans to bring out a guide for the Leica D-Lux 7? The new manuals are all online of which I am not a big fan; it’s difficult to find information when needed and with a book, it falls open to pages that have been read multiple times – I prefer a book anytime.
I have used your “Photographer’s Guide to the Leica D-Lux 6” for years and found it to be in invaluable guide to understanding all the capabilities of this camera. I would refer to it on a regular basis and it is MUCH better than the Leica manual; easier to understand, better writing and better organization. Thank you for the wonderful job you did on this book
I had the Leica D-Lux 6 for about 4 year (bought used) and unfortunately, it just died. Leica no longer offers any service or parts for this camera, however, they do offer a trade-in program for a new D-Lux 7 which I will be taking advantage of soon.
Warm regards,
Christopher Muller
Rabeya Sultana
Hi,
I bought the book (in french, on paper), it is fantastic!
I discover again my Sony RX.
Is there any possibility to buy the pdf version at a reduced price?
My point: the book is impressive but heavy when travelling.
Thank you for your work!
Gggh
I guess you may get some orders from facebook group “Lumix FZ2000 – FZ2500?… I hope they like the book as much as I do.
Hmmmm
??????????
6407
Dear Sir,
March 24, 2023 I bought your book “Photographer’s Guide to the Sony RX10M4” via Bol.com on the Dutch website – I have the invoice ready, if you want it.
I only got the e-pub version and it is in a terrible condition. The photos are very small, degraded and pixelated.
I think you also want that your books will be delivered in good quality, unfortunately this is apparently not the case.
I sent Bol.com a complaint about this, but didn’t even get a response.
Now I found your website via a friend.
Is it possible that i can receive somehow a pdf version of this book?
Thank you very much for the attention you want to give to my message.
Kind regards,
Cor Van der Kinderen
Nice
ekon rider
Post &vill ghari ghat gonda
hi white knight..would like to know where you purchase your camera memory cards from besides amazon as they have lost my order 2xs..thanks,denise
Photographer
Dear mr. White,
Thank you for publishing this very interesting and helpful guide to the Sony DSC-RX10 IV. It gives me much more background explanation than the Sony Online Help Guide, even the Sony help guide available in Dutch. I have purchased the Paperback version of your guide at the 10th of Januari 2022 (€35,95) at the local bookstore. Does the purchase also include a pdf version of this guide?
Over time translating some technical terms/descriptions in this guide correctly lets me down and then it helps me that I can put such a part of a description in my translator to Dutch.
I have one correction for your guide. I think that the caption or title of Figure 8-29 on page 195 of the guide should not be Format Confirmation Screen. I think that this title belongs to firure 8-28.
Fig 8-29 may be “File Number Menu Options Screen”.
Mera camera clear kar do ?
Photography
Am looking for Panasonic lumixtz90 tips and settings manual
hehinol227@weizixu.com
VictorRMoler@jourrapide.com
jaget48795@weizixu.com
Good
Bonjour,
Je viens d’achter le livre et je ne trouve pas ma questions au problème rencontré en prise vidéo avec mon RX10M4:
j’ai pris une vidéo avec mon RX10M4 en position verticale car je filmais une cascade
mais à la lecture vidéo sur mon RX10 la vidéo est lu horizontalement donc je vois l’eau de la cascade tombé de gauche à droite (ou inverse) et non pas de haut en bas !
Un réglage est il possible sur le RX10 pour prise vidéo avec apparei en position verticlae ?
Par avance merci
cdlt
Hi,
I have just purchased your ebook and I remember when I purchased an earlier one (different camera) you sent me a link so I could download a PDF version. That way I can read it on a plane.
Are you able to send me a link for this book also please. For the Photographer’s guide to the a7C camera.
Great book, I’ve found it very useful, thank you very much.
Hi,
I would love a book on the Olympus OM-1 if you could write one. Do you have any plans to write any more books?
Thanks,
Stephen.
kenbarry32@gmail.com I am driver and mechanic
I am agree
Very extensive manual for the M7! Had to chew it in a week. Waited years to buy the M7 (moneywise and I expected the M8 but it went to the ZV-1). As I am an old man, this will be my last camera. I gave the M1 and the M3 to two of the sons and they take beautiful pictures with these 1 inch cameras. It could use something for ND filters built in. I don’t like the glueing of a ring on the camera. I became an aperture shooter thanks to youtube film of Mark Galer on this camera. He works miracles with this pocket camera. The camera will be used to some week trips to France and maybe Spain. France is my favorite subject and there are a million little villages where you could spend a whole day taking pictures. As a matter of fact, last month I slept in the bed where Bourvil and Louis de Funès slept while filming la Grande Vadrouille in Vézelay and surroundings, stil, after all those years, the most liked movie in France. Thanks for the hard work!
Ddf
Facebook
Sò nice
Oh yes, 640×480 thumbnail is so useless…
This article beautifully captures the essence of the subject! The content is not only informative but also engaging. I appreciate the writer’s ability to convey complex ideas in a clear and concise manner. It’s evident that a considerable amount of research and thought went into this piece. Looking forward to more insightful articles from this source!
Please give me 1000robux????
Hi,
I have inherited my father’s Fuji x10, along with your book. I was wondering if there was a way to obtain the pdf version so I can read it on my tablet.
Regards
Mark.
Hello, Has an update has been written regarding Eye AF? Is the .pdf version still available?
????????? ??? ????????? ???
Riya islam mim
Birendra Singh
I have been going through settings with the book and I find some menus and choices are different. Did the software update change some menus and choices?
Thanks
7uuuuu
Dear Sirs,
please excuse my lousy English. I just purchased the photagrapher’s guide to the Panasonic Lumix ZS70/TZ90.
All had worked well and I have received the files.
Thank you for this excellent description of the camera. This is the style that a manual should have. As a former vocational teacher, i know how much work it takes to achieve such a precise description with these well fitting images.
Best wishes from Germany
Uwe Kell
Kfuydf
Hello,
I have a black and white kindle that I use for regular reading. My question is whether there is a possibility to buy a pdf copy that I can take on my tablet into the field, along with my bird guides, and even make notes.
Your work is fantastic and helps a lot in the handling of this fantastic camera.
Best regards and thank you very much
Octavio from Spain
bast
Sxgydxg
Dfyfcgk
Dhuv
Ruigz
Ggu fine
Ggu
Hhkif and the winter months ago reply
Cydzcjkb fyg
Bbjovxx to the same person in charge of arrangements for ma andi the same as the winter Soldier field and the other one is for ma andi for the same person to whom it may not have a u t t e u t ee yi the winter Soldier trailer of arrangements and a u the winter Soldier of arrangements for big bro I have to whom they the same time I will get every of the same as well as u t ee yi batha hai na to the winter months experience of working
Hephzibah Jesus loves you
My email ID nanakram410@gmail.com and my district sehore
Hello
I recently took the plunge and bought a Sony RX100 VII and your companion ebook.
I’m very much a recreational photographer and your book is a tremendous resource!
Next week I hope to catch a night launch over at NASA’s Wallops Island facility and wonder if you might have recommendations on the best settings to capture that?
I don’t think Fireworks looks right nor Night mode but I’m a novice and hope to get at least a decent set of video and photos. I will be using the dual recording feature as you describe.
Thanks for both the book and your time
Sajib insan
I like it
No My name is rana i want to download jib file
Trending 3D Title Name art Video Editing in Alight Motion Rcf creation guruji reel143
Very pleased with this book, I struggled with the Sony manual. Well done Alex for explaining everything so clearly, it is a good read. I have however found setting up remote control via wifi or bluetooth complicated, and am still not sure if I can control the camera with the Imaging Edge app via bluetooth, or if I should avoid having bluetooth and wifi running at the same time. But I found it handy to be able to tag my photos with location once I’d got that working. However….
I was on a trip to New York a few days ago (we’re based in the UK) and I did not notice that the tagging had failed. I had carefully matched camera to iPhone time (EDT) but had not realised that there’s a time zone and a Daylight Saving option in the camera as as well as on my phone. However all worked well at first, but I didn’t realise that after a day or so location tagging had failed. It wasn’t until returning home and uploading my pictures to Lightroom that I found only the first ones were location tagged. Then I saw a small circle with a diagonal line on the camera screen next to the map icon, and discovered that the camera time had unknown to me gone back by 1 hour. Possibly to do with daylight saving time? But why it worked at first then went wrong I don’t know, but it did so when visiting somewhere where everything is x-rayed for security and they have their own wifi which I may have hooked up to on my phone but can’t remember.
As you may not have come across this kind of fault before I thought it worth mentioning. As the map icon was still showing I thought it was still OK. It did take me a long time to get the phone and camera reconnected again when home.
What would have been very useful is if there was a quick way of seeing the time, even as an option on the already very full information screen. Sony don’t seem to provide that option but for travel photography that would be very handy.
Fortunately I had the 3rd party app Geotagging running on my iPhone so was able to apply the locations after all, but could not find an easy way to overwrite the incorrect time in the file info on hundreds of photos.
Thanks again for a great book!
Thanks for the helpful books. I have bought one for each camera I have used in the past few years, always the PDF version. This time I bought it through Apple Books, so did not get a PDF version. I realize now how helpful the PDF version is—I can go back and forth between your book and the PDF versions of the Owner’s Manuals, and can read it on any device. Is there a way to get a PDF version along with the Apple Version (besides re-buying the book in that format)? If not, I understand— caveat emptor. Besides, you probably get quite a bit less when sold via a big company’s website. Regardless, thanks again for the great book series!
Vishnu Chauhan
Ho
Shogbwbc jejiche
Pankaj jatav ko
Shyamu
Hola Whiteknightpress! Te escribo desde el Departamento de Prensa y hemos visto tu negocio como una excelente oportunidad para ser destacado en noticias.
Al ser presentado en más de 60 periódicos digitales de alta autoridad, podemos mejorar la reputación y el posicionamiento de tu empresa.
Además, cuando tus clientes busquen información sobre ti, verán tu relevancia y preferirán elegirte por encima de la competencia.¿Podrías proporcionarme un número de teléfono para ofrecerte dos meses gratuitos?
Gracias .
No comments links to fir kya tha launda
Can you send me some trial packs?
20000
Sure sir ji thanks for sharing the details
Very pleased fir detailskelajdjahejpkj
Jitendra Bhai
DILIPkUMAR MARVe
Hello
Hola,
He visto tu empresa Whiteknightpress y es perfecta para realizar una entrevista y aparecer en periódicos digitales (Tanto puede aparecer el directivo como solo la empresa).
La noticia publicada en los periódicos tendrá un enlace para que el lector pueda ver tu página (No es un anuncio)
Me interesaba explicarte esta propuesta, porque es la forma más efectiva para el posicionamiento seo y para fortalecer tu reputación de marca. Tus clientes te buscarán y verán que Whiteknightpress es relevante y por lo tanto generará confianza.
Podrás compartir las noticias en tus redes sociales y web, dando así la máxima confianza.
Solo tenemos espacio para 10 entrevistas, por lo que si te interesa, necesito que me envíes tu número de móvil para contactar contigo directamente (Es necesario para ver si podemos encajar la noticia)
Un saludo
Figgar
Always camera
Hyuhhhhhhhhjjj
Hello
umar74504527@gmail.com